PDF Panasonic KX T336 System Ref Vol 1

Panasonic

KX-T336 SYSTEM

System Reference Manual

Vol. 1

Panasonic Company

Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America

One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Panasonic Company (West) of America,

Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America

6550 Katella Avenue, Cypress, California 90630

Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),

Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.

San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Avenue, KM 9.5, Carolina, P. FL 00630

KX - A220

Printed in Japan ., PQQX6483YA Q069101053M

Contents

Vol. 1 Section

1

---- System Outline

Section 2 ---- Installation

Section 3 ---- System Features and Operation

Section 4 ---- Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 5 ---- Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)

Section 6 ---- Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)

Vol. 2 Section 7 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 8 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 9 ---- System Programming

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 10 ---- System Programming

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 11 ---- System Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 12 ---- Station Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 13 ---- Station Programming

Attendant Console (ATT)

Section 14 ---- Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 15 ---- Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 16 ---- Backup Utility-On-Site

Section 17 ---- Backup Utility-Remote Location

Section 18 ---- Abbreviations

Section 19 ---- Index

NOTIFY THE TELEPHONE COMPANY

Installation must be performed by the te!?phone company or a qualified professional installer.

Notify the Telephone Company

Before connecting this equipment to any talephone, call the telephone company and inform them of the

following:

l

Telephone number to which the system will be connected ..................................................

. Make.. .................................................................................................................. Panasonic

. Model ........................................................................................ ..KX-T336 1 OO/KX-T336200

. FCC Registration No.. ..................... See the Name Plate on the KX-T3361 OO/KX-T336200

In case of enabling the following function(s), please inform your telephone company

of the FCC Registration number “ACJJPN-18958-MF-E.”

1. Ground Start

2. Automatic Route Selection

3. Local Access

.

Ringer Equivalence ...................................................................................................... .0.48

. Service Order Code ...................................................................................................... 9.OF

l

Facility interface Code (Loop Start) ....................................................................... 02LS2

(Ground Start) .................................................................. 02GS2

(DID) .............................................................................. 02RV2-T

(OPX) ................................................................................ OL13C

. Required Network Interface Jack (Loop Start and Ground Start). ............................ RJ21X

(DID and OPX) ....................................................... RJll

Present FCC Regulation prohibit connecting this unit to a party line, or to a win operated telephone.

Please read the section on “Telephone Company and FCC Requirements and Responsibilities.”

4

The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit.

You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a

permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the even of theft.

i MODEL NO.: KX-T3361 OO/KX-T336200 4Q/s, ~~~pr/- cmv?-~~ c

SERIAL NO.:

For your future reference

DATE OF PURCHASE

---.

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER’S ADDRESS

(lOl91,

.:

TELEPHONE COMPANY and

FCC REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of

the FCC Rules and Regulations for connection of

terminal system (this device is classified as

terminal system) to the telephone network and’

for your convenience, the following information is

presented:

1. Notification to the Telephone

Company

Customers connecting terminal equipment to the

telephone network shall, upon request of the

Telephone Company, inform the Telephone

Company of the particular line(s) to which such

connection is made, the FCC registration number

and (See label on bottom of unit.) ringer

equivalence number of the registered terminal

equipment.

The REN is useful to determine the quantity of

devices you may connect to your telephone line

and still have all of those devices ring when your

telephone number is called. In most, but not all

areas, the sum of the REN’s of all devices

connected to one line should not exceed five

(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you

may connect to your line, as determined by the

REN, your should contact your local telephone

company to determine the maximum REN for

your calling area.

2. Direct connection to A Party-

line or Coin-operated

telephone Line is Prohibited

3. Incidence of Harm to The

Telephone Lines

Should Terminal Equipment cause harm to the

Telephone Network, the Telephone Company

shall, where practical, notify the customer that

temporary discontinuance of service may be

required. However, where prior notice is not

practical, the Telephone Company may

temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such

action is reasonable in the circumstances. In

case of such unnotified temporary

discontinuance of service, the Telephone

Company shall:

(4

(b)

(cl

4.

Promptly notify the customer of such

temporary discontinuance of service.

Afford the customer the opportunity to correct

the situation which gave rise to the temporary

discontinuance.

Inform the customer of the right to bring a

complaint to the Commission pursuant to the

procedures set out in Subpart E of Part 68 of

FCC Telephone Equipment Rules.

Compatibility of The

Telephone Network and

Terminal Equipment

(a) Availability of telephone

interface information.

Technical information concerning interface

parameters and specifications not specified in

FCC Rules, including the number of Ringers

which may be connected to a particular

telephone line, which is needed to permit

Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner

compatible with Telephone Company

communications facilities, shall be provided by

the Telephone Company upon customer’s

request.

(b) Changes in Telephone

Company Communications

Facilities, Equipment,

Operations and Procedures.

The Telephone Company may make changes in

its communications facilities, equipment,

operations or procedures, where such action is

reasonably required in the operation of its

business and is not inconsistent with the rules

and regulations in FCC Part 68 of the FCC Rules

and Regulations. If such changes can be

reasonably expected to render any customer

Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone

Company Communications Facilities, or require

modification or alteration of such Terminal

Equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use

or performance, the customer shall be given

adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer

an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

OTHERS

l

Keep the unit away from heating appliances

and electrical noise generating devices such as

fluorescent lamps, motors and television.

These noise sources can interfere with the

performance of the EASA-PHONE.

l

This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture,

high temperature and vibration, and should not

be exposed to direct sunlight.

l

Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into

the vents or other holes of this unit.

l

If there is trouble, disconnect the unit from the

telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into

the telephone line. If the telephone operates

properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line

until the trouble has been repaired by an

authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.

If the telephone does not operate properly,

chances are that the trouble is in the telephone

system, and not in the unit.

l

Do not use benzine, thinner, or similar solvents.

Do not use abrasive powder to clean the

cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a Class A

digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful

interference when the equipment is operated

in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications.

Operation of this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference in

which case the user will be required to correct

the interference at his own expense.

WARNING:

TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO

NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR

MOISTURE.

3

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

When using your telephone equipment,

basic safety precautions should always

be followed to reduce the risk of fire,

electric shock and injury to persons,

including the following:

1 . Read and understand all instructions.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

i.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked

on the product.

Unplug this product from the wall outlet

before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners

or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for

cleaning.

Do not use this product near water, for

example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen

sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or

near a swimming pool.

Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious damage to the product.

Slots and openings in the cabinet and the

back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to

protect it from overheating, these openings

must not be blocked or covered. The

openings should never be blocked by placing

the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other

similar surface. This product should never be

placed near or over a radiator or heat

register. This product should not be placed in

a built-in installation unless proper ventilation

is provided.

This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the

marking label. If you are not sure of the type

of power supply to your home, consult your

dealer or local power company.

8. This product is equipped with a three wire

grounding type plug, a plug having a third

(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a

grounding type power outlet. This is a safety

feature. If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, contact your electrician to

replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat

the safety purpose of the grounding type

plug.

9. Do not allow anything to rest on the power

cord. Do not locate this product where the

cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension

cords as this can result in the risk of fire or

electric shock.

11. Never push objects of any kind into this

product through cabinet slots as they may

touch dangerous voltage points or short out

parts that could result in a risk of fire or

electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind

on the product.

12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not

disassemble this product, but take it to a

qualified serviceman when some service or

repair work is required. Opening or removing

covers may expose you to dangerous

voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly

can cause electric shock when the appliance

is subsequently used.

4

:.-

‘.:,

:I .:

13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and

refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a

cordless type) during an electrical storm.

There may be a remote risk of electric shock

from lightning.

A. When the power supply cord or plug is

damaged or frayed.

B. If liquid has been spilled into the product.

C. If the product has been exposed to rain or

water.

15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak

in the vicinity of the leak.

D. If the product does not operate normally

by following the operating instructions.

SAVE THESE

Adjust only those controls, that are

covered by the operating instructions

because improper adjustment of other

controls may result in damage and will

often require extensive work by a qualified

technician to restore the product to normal

operation.

INSTRUCTIONS

E. If the product has been dropped or the

cabinet has been damaged.

F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance.

Y

SAFETY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

When installing telephone wiring, basic

safety precautions should always be

followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric

shock and injury to persons, including

the following;

1. Never install telephone wiring during a

lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations

unless the jack is specifically designed for

wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or

terminals unless the telephone line has been

disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying

telephone lines.

5

Section 1

System Outline

(Section 1)

System Outline

Contents

A

B

C

D

E

Overview . . . . . . ..__..__...___......_.._.....................__..._.__..........._....._............................

1 .OO The Structure of This Manual ................................................................

2.00 Some Conventions Used in This Manual.. .............................................

3.00 System Description.. ..............................................................................

4.00 Communication Needs ..........................................................................

5.00 Service Cards Description .....................................................................

System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.................._..._..__.................__..._._._.............

1 .OO Components List.. .................................................................................. 1 -B-l

2.00 System Connections.. ............................................................................ 1 -B-2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._.................. 1 -C-l

Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._............................................ 1 -D-l

1 .OO Introduction ............................................................................................ 1 -D-l

2.00 System Interface.. .................................................................................. 1 -D-l

3.00 Programming ......................................................................................... 1 -D-2

4.00 Test ........................................................................................................ 1 -D-2

5.00 Monitor.. ................................................................................................. 1 -D-3

6.00 Backup Utility ......................................................................................... 1 -D-3

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._......................................................... 1 -E-l

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

11.00

12.00

13.00

14.00

15.00

16.00

17.00

Basic Shelf.. ...........................................................................................

Expansion Shelf.. ...................................................................................

Attendant Console .................................................................................

CPU Card ..............................................................................................

TSW Card.. ............................................................................................

Power Unit .............................................................................................

LCOT Card ............................................................................................

GCOT Card.. ..........................................................................................

PLC Card.. .............................................................................................

SLC Card ...............................................................................................

HLC Card.. .............................................................................................

ATLC Card ....................................................................................... :.

....

DISA Card ..............................................................................................

DID Card ................................................................................................

OPX Card ..............................................................................................

DPH Card ..............................................................................................

AGC Card ..............................................................................................

Page

1 -A-l

1 -A-2

1 -A-3

1 -A-5

1 -B-l

1 -E-l

1 -E-2

1 -E-3

1 -E-4

1 -E-5

1 -E-6

1 -E-7

1 -E-8

1 -E-9

1-E-10

\

l-l

Page

18.00 RMTCard.. ............................................................................................ 1-E-10

19.00 T-SW Conference Expansion Card.. ...................................................... 1 -E-l 1

20.00 OHCA Card.. .......................................................................................... 1 -E-l 1

21 .OO T-SW OHCA Expansion Card ................................................................ 1 -E-l1

22.00 OPX Power Unit.. ................................................................................... 1 -E-l1

l-2

A. Overview

1 .OO The Structure of This Manual

introduction

This system reference manual provides general

technical information on Panasonic KX-T336

system.

This includes a description of the system, its

hardware and software, features and service,

environmental requirements.

This manual is intended to serve as an overall

technical reference for the system.

Organization

This manual is comprised of the following 19

sections.

Section 1 System Outline

This section describes the overall information of

the system and the constnxtion of this Service

Reference Manual.

Section 2 installation

This section describes how to install and start up

the system.

Section 3 System Features and Operation

This section describes the basic system features.

Section 4 Station Features and Operation

(PITS)

This section describes the basic features and

operations from the viewpoint of Proprietary

Integrated Telephone System (PITS) users.

The basic features and required operations for

DSS console are

also described.

Section 5 Station Feature and Operation (SLT)

This section describes the basic features and

operations from the viewpoint of Single Line

Telephone (SLT) users.

Section 6 Station Feature and Operation (ATT)

This section describes the basic features and

operations from the viewpoint of the Attendant

Console (ATT) Operator.

Section

7

Preparation for Programming and

Operation (VT220 and Compatibles)

This section describes the basic usage and

available functions of VT220 and Compatibles.

Section 8 Preparation for Programming and

Operation (Dumb)

This section describes the basic usage and

command reference of Dumb terminal.

Section 9 System Programming (VT220 and

Compatibles)

This section provides information for the

programming of the system database using VT220

and Compatibles.

Section 10 System Programming (Dumb)

This section provides information for the

programming of the

system

database

using Dumb

terminal.

Section 11 System Programming (PITS)

This section provides information for a certain

programming of the system database using PITS

telephone.

Section 12 Station Programming (PITS)

This section provides information for the

programming of various features specific to each

PITS telephone and DSS console using PITS

telephone.

Section 13 Station Programming (ATT)

This section provides information for the

programming and the back-up of the attendant

console database using the attendant console.

Section 14 Maintenance (VT220 and

Compatibles)

This section describes the information necessary

for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system

using VT220 and Compatibles.

Section 15 Maintenance (Dumb)

This section describes the information necessary

for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system

using Dumb terminal.

Section 16 Backup Utility-On-Site

This section provides the information for saving

and loading of the system programming data

(including attendant console database) at on-site.

Section 17 Backup Utility-Remote Location

This section provides the information for saving

and loading the system programing data (including

attendant console database) from a remote

location.

Section 18 Abbreviations

This section provides a list of abbreviations used

in this manual.

Section 19 index

1 -A-l

i

2.00 Some Conventions Used in

- This Manual

In this manual “system features” are described in

Section 3 and ‘station (PITS, SLT, AlT) features”

are described in Section 4 to Section 6. In these

sections, information for each feature is

presented under the following four headings:

Description, Programming, Conditions, and

Operation.

Description

Defines the feature, describes what it does for

the user, and how it is used.

Programming

Provides tabular listing of items required for

system programming as follows:

<l>

System Programming

“System-Class of Service”,

Executive Busy Override

Deny

“System-Numbering Plan’:

Busy Override Deny Set

Busy Override Deny Cancel

<2> I

Refl

VT

404.01

9-D-6.04

<3>

ence

Dumb

lo-c-7.00

lo-c-lO.oc

interpret this table as follows:

<l> shows the required programming items for

the described feature.

<2> shows the reference number for

programming (VT 220 user)

For example, interpret “9-D-4.01” as follows.

9-D-4.01

L Title Number

IL Subsection Number

Section Number

4.00

Class of

Service

4.01 Class of Ssrvice (112)

P: System

- Class of Service

_________________--__-_--_________-----

Tile Number

Class of Service 03X) lb.

l ------ -----___- - -------- ----

I Toll Restriction Level (Cmr) ----

I Toll Kestrictica Level #i&t.) ---

I Pax. Dialing Digits -------------

I Call Forvardins / 90 Hot Disturb -

<3> shows the reference number for

programming (Dumb terminal user)

(Note)

In this manual, all reference numbers are

described using Section Number, Subsection

Number, and Title Number.

2.00 System Administration from

a Remote Location

Description

From a remote location, you can perform system

programming, diagnosis

and traffic measurements

using a Dumb terminal.

For details about communication parameters, refer

“Communication Interface.”

Conditions

l

RMT card

(Modem) must be installed in the

system and

assign the telephone number of

Interface

- Communicstion Interface

Title Number 1-------------__________I

c-------------e

Item I SIO e1

I

(Terminal)

I---- -----+ __--__ - ----

I NL-code , gii

I Bmud Rate I 1200 bmud

Conditions

Describes the applications and benefits of the

feature, followed by factors to be considered

when the feature is used.

Operation

Provides instructions for a user of PITS

telephone (Section 4), Single Line Telephone

(Section 5) and Attendant Console (Section 6)

individually.

1 -A-2

3.00 System Description 4.00 Communications Needs

The system can consist of one, two, or three

shelves (Basic and Expansion l(2) and

Attendant Console. Each shelf contains its own

power supply.

Basic shelf is always required and it can be

equipped with up to 96 lines (including

Extensions and CO lines).

Building Block System

Useful to enlarge system’s ability by installing the

optional Expansion Shelf.

Up to two Expansion Shelves can be installed to

the system.

Each expansion shelf can be equipped with up to

120 lines (including Extensions and CO lines).

Flexible Ports

Up to 336 lines (including Extensions and CO

lines) can be connected with this system.

However Extensions (including DSS consoles)

must be 288 lines or less and CO lines must be

144 lines or less.

Up to two Attendant Consoles (option-with CRT

display) can be connected to the system if ATLC

card is equipped with this system.

Attendant Console can be used for call

processing and system programming in

interactive format.

Switched Loop Attendant Console Operation

makes the handling of incoming calls more

efficient than conventional system.

Starting up the System Administration and

Maintenance of this system can be done using

VT220 (VTlOO), Compatibles, Dumb terminal or

Attendant Console.

Not only Panasonic Proprietary Integrated

Telephones (PITS) but Single Line Telephones

(SLT) can be used as Extension Telephones in

this system.

To meet the user’s communications needs, lhis

system provides the following features.

Outgoing Call Features

Toll Restrictions allow the manager to restrict

extension users from making certain types of

calls.

Restriction is administered through outward

restriction, toll restriction, and ARS restriction.

Automatic Route Selection tARSI provides for

the routing of calls over the telecommunication

network based on preferred routes (normally the

least expensive route available at the time the

call is made) with capacity for multiple common

carriers.

. . !

Receiving Features

Q&ct inward Dialina (DID1 allows outside parties

to reach specific inside parties or facilities by

direct dialing without attendant assistance.

Direct Inward Svstem Access (DlSAj allows the

outside parties to dial directly into this system

and access to certain system’s features and

facilities without attendant assistance.

After gaining access to the system, the outside

party can access certain system’s features by

dialing the appropriate feature number.

Uniform Call Distribution t UCDZ allows incoming

calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific

group of extensions. Calls to a UCD group hunt

for an idle extension in a circular way, starting at

the extension following the last one called.

InterceDt Routing-No Answec allows calls that are

not answered within a specified time set period to

be redirected to an individual covering extension

and/or an attendant console.

Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of

incoming calls to pre-assigned extension of a

hunting group in a circular way or one way when

the called party is busy.

l-A-3

Holding Features Conversation Features

w allows an extension user to suspend a call.

This feature allows users to temporarily

disconnect from one conversation and either

make or answer another call. Music on-hold or

message may be provided to the held party if

available.

Conference allows up to 3 parties (maximum two

outside parties), including the originator, to join a

call.

Call Park allows a user to place a call on hold,

then pick up the call at any station in the system.

The user can page another party to pick up the

parked call or may move to another location and

then re-access the call.

Paging Features

&C&Q allows extension users to make

announcement through built-in speaker of

Proprietary Integrated Telephone (PITS) and/or

external Pager Equipments.

Other Features

Transferring Features

Jransfer allows a user to transfer any call to

another party.

This feature supports transfer of calls from the

called party to another party for completion of a

transaction.

IOII Message netall Recordina fa)

generates detailed call information on all CO

calls and sends this information to the printer.

SMDR also generates detailed data on Error Log

Records, System Programming Data and Traffic

Information.

I;all Forwarding allows users who are away from

their phones to receive calls at another phone.

This feature supports roving personnel and

shared off ice space or company staff.

Off Premise Fxtension (OPa allows Single Line

Telephones (SLT) installed off the premises can

be operated via a public or private network in

exactly the same way as extension on the

premise.

No. Item Maximum number

1 Tenant 2

2 Operator 2

3 Speed Dialing-System 200

4 Speed Dialing-StationISLT 10

5 One Touch Dialing-Station/PITS 23

6 Call Park Area 20

7 Programmable Absent Message 10

8 Trunk Group 16

9 Equal Access Group 4

10 OCC Access Group 4

11 Toll Restriction Level 16

12 Paging Group 8

13 ICM Group 8

14 Pickup Group 32

15 UCD Group 32

16 Class of Service 32

17 Primary DN (PDN) 3

18 Message Waiting 500

Account Code Fntrv allows a user to associate

calls with an account code for charge-back

purposes.

3

per system/

station

system

tenant

system

station

system

station

system

1 -A-4

5.00 Service Cards Description

Extension cards CO trunk cards

Proorietarv lntearated 1 ine Circuit (PLCJ Card:

This card interfaces 8 PITS telephones, DSS

consoles and the TDM bus.

It is available to connect 8 PITS telephones, DSS

consoles to the system per PLC card.

rt Central Off ice Trunk (LCOT) Card

This card interfaces 8 central off ice loop start

trunks and the TDM bus.

It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system

per LCOT card.

Sinale Line Teleohone 1 ine Circuit ISLC) &

This card interfaces 8 SLT type telephones and

the TDM bus.

It is available to connect 8 SLT telephones to the

system per SLC card.

. .

nd Ltne Circuit fHt.Q Card;

This card interfaces PITS/SLT type telephones,

DSS consoles and the TDM bus.

It is available to connect 8 PITS/SLT telephones/

DSS consoles to the system per HLC card.

Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card:

This card interfaces 4 off premise extensions

through off premise extension power unit.

. . .

Console I me Crrcutt 1AILC) Card;

This card interfaces 2 Attendant Consoles and

the TOM bus.

It is available to connect 2 attendant consoles to

the system if this card is installed.

l

With loop start, you seize a line by bridging

through a resistance the tip and ring (both wires)

of your telephone line.

This card interfaces 8 central office trunks and the

TDM bus. \

It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system

per GCOT card.

A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which

one side of the two wire trunk (typically the “Ring”

conductor of the Tip and Ring) is momentarily

grounded to get dial tone.

l

There are two types of switched trunks one can

typically lease from a focal phone company-

Loop Start and Ground Start.

You must be careful to order the correct type of

trunk from your local phone company and

correctly install your telephone system at your

end - so that they both match.

-_

-

Direct Inward Dialing Trunk 1 DID) Card;

This card interfaces 4 central office trunks

arranged for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and the

TDM bus.

1 -A-5

Resource cards

D’rect Inward Svste

I

m Access (C)ISA\ Card;

This card interfaces

4 central office trunks

arranged for Direct Inward System Access

(DISA) and the TDM bus.

Other cards

!&orDhone Circuit IDPHJ Ca d;

This card interfaces 4 doorp:ones and the TDM

bus. Up to 4 door-phones can be connected to

the system.

Automatic Gain Control IAGC) Card;

This card is

used to

maintain volume of CO-CO

communication.

An electronic circuit which compares the level of

an incoming signal with a previously defined

standard and automatically amplifies or

attenuates that signal so it arrives at its

destination at the correct level.

te Circuit (RMT) Card;

This card is necessary for accessing the system

from a remote location.

Time Switch Conference Fxoansion Card (T-SW

Conferem

This card provides 64 additional conference

trunks, and is installed on the T-SW card.

Off Hook Call mement (OHCAI Cacd;

This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement

features, and is installed on the HLC card or PLC

card.

Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcem

ston IT-.SW OHCA) Card;

This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement

features, and is installed in the Basic Slot 2.

No. Item Maximum number per system/

stat-on

1 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT 42 cards (336 ports) system

2 DI D+LCOT/GCOT 18 cards (144 ports) system

3 DPH 1 card (4 doorphones) system

4 DISA 4 cards (16 resources) system

5 AGC 4 cards (16 resources) system

6 RMT 1 card (1 resource) system

7 ATLC 1 card (2 ports) system

8 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT 12 cards (96 ports) basic shelf

9 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT 15 cards (120 ports) expansion shelf

10 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX 12 cards (96 ports) shelf

11 DSS console 16 consoles (16 ports) system

12 External Pager 2 system

13 External Music Source 2 system

1 -A-6

B. System Components

1 .OO Components List

Model No. Name

KX-T336100 Basic Shelf

KX-T336101 CPU card

KX-T336102 T-SW card

KX-T336200 Expansion Shelf

KX-T96300 Attendant Console

KX-T96145 Attendant Console Keyboard

KX-T96186 Off Premise Extension Power Unit

KX-T96180 Loop Start Central Office Trunk (LCOT)

Card

KX-T96181 Ground Start Central Office Trunk (GCOT) Card

KX-T96172 Proprietary ITS Line Circuit (PLC) Card

KX-T96174 Single Line Telephone Line Circuit (SLC) Card

KX-T96170 Hybrid Line Circuit (HLC) Card

KX-T96141 Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card

KX-T96191 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Card

KX-T96182 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card

KX-T96185 Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card

KX-T96161 Doorphone Circuit (DPH) Card

KX-T96193 Automatic Gain Control(AGC) Card

KX-T96196 Remote Circuit (RMT) Card

KX-T336104 Time Switch Conference (T-SW Conference) Expansion Card

KX-T96136 Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Card

KX-T336105 Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcement (T-SW OHCA) Card

Model No.

KX-T30820

KX-T30830

KX-T30850

KX-T61620

KX-T61630

Name

Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)

Proprietary Telephone with LCD (3 CO’s, 8 DSS’s)

Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)

Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)

Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 CO’s)

KX-T61650

KX-T123220

KX-T123230

KX-T123230D

KX-T123235

KX-T123250

KX-T7020

KX-T7030

KX-T7050

KX-T7130

KX-T61640

KX-T123240

KX-T7040

KX-T30865

KX-T30890

KX-A26D

Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)

Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)

Proprietary Telephone with LCD

Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)

Proprietary Telephone with LCD

Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)

12 CO’S)

Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)

DSS Console (lG’DSS’s, 16 PF buttons)

DSS Console (32 DSS’s, 16 PF buttons)

Doorphone

Headset

Battery Adapter

1 -B-l

2.00 System Connections

Amplifier

Paging Speaker 1

Amplifier

Paging Speaker 2

Printer

Data Terminal

Radio

12OVAC 60Hz

Automobile type batteries

l

Consisting of two 12VDC (24VDC)

1 -B-2

\

r

- Central

Off

ice Lines

KX-T336 System

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Doorphone 3 I Doorphone 4

Off Premise EGension Power Unit

KX-T96186 I

Attendant Console

KX-T96300

SingleCine

Telephone

Data Terminal

Cordless Phone

Telephone with

Answering

Machine

(two pair)

(two pair) KX-T30830

(two pair) KX-T30820

KX-T-0

KX-T7130

KX-T7030

Answering System

with Facsimile KX-T7050

1 -B-3

KX-T61630

(two pair)

KX-T61620

(two pair)

. . I

KX-T61650

(two pair)

KX-T123250

Wo pW

- @

c

KX-T6i 640

KX-T123240

KX-T7040

Iree pair)

KX-T123235,

KX-T123230D

HO pair)

KX-T123230

Jvo pair)

KX-T7020

KX-T123220

l

Parallel connections of extension is

Refer to Section 3-F-9.00

I

/-

/t

.

E

I

\-

I

co 013 _ :‘c

<L

C.O.

- . .._-....._

S.ng!e LIlx

Te!ephane

LCI?T

7

<X-TS:6C

with Facsm~le

KX-T123220 KX-T30650 KX-T61630

- KX-T7030 KX-T6 1650 KX-Tl23250 KX-T616X KX-T123235.

KX-T123230D

I I I I 1

KX-Tl23230 KX-l7050 KX-T3083U Kx-T7020

OPX PWR

UNlT

KX-T36186

6

STORE HOUSE

A

Telephone Data Terminal Answing System

with Facsimile

r

DPH

AGC

M-T96193

I-

Kx-T96161

POWER ATLC

III

UNIT

KsT96141

Allendant Conrole Anendanl consola

KX-T96300 KX-T96300

TSWOHCA

M-T336105

/ A Paging Speaker1

-23X

4

Paging Speaker 2

1 -B-4

Tabular listings of features by group (System, Stations) are provided in this subsection.

System Features

are programmed at system level and affect the entire operation of the

system.

asic Features Flexible Numbering

Directory Number (DN)

Floating Directory Number (FDN)

Tenant Service

Operator

Class of Service (COS)

Group - Intercom

- Pickup

- UCD

- Paging

- Trunk

Night Service - Directed Night Answer

- Universal Night Answer (UNA)

- Flexible Night Service

- Fixed Night Service - Switching of Day/Night Mode

Mixed Station Capacities

Variable Time-Out

Lockout

Automatic Station Release

Distinctive Dial Tone

Distinctive Busy Tone

Confirmation Tone

Tone and Ringing Patterns

lutgoing Call

eatures Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access

Toll Restriction in ARS System

Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct

Trunk Access

Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access

Operator/International Call Restriction

3/6 Digit Toll Restriction

7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction

Toll Restriction for Speed Dialing

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

I. Tone/Pulse Conversion

Automatic Pause Insertion

receiving Features Dual Console Operation

Attendant Consoles-less Operation

Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) - Day Service

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) -without OGM

- with OGM

Private CO

Single CO

Group CO

Flexible Ringing Assignment - No Ringing

- Delayed Ringing

Discriminating Ringing

Station Hunting - Circular

- Terminal

l-C-1 Continued

/

‘.

i

Continued

Holding Features Music on Hold

Held Call Reminder

Transfer Recall

Other Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Off Premise Extension (OPX)

Walking Station

Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back

Intercept Routing - No Answer

Rerouting

Calling Party Control (CPC) Detection

CO Busy Out

Parallel Connection of Extensions

Voice Mail Integration

DTMF Tone Integration

1 -c-2

(21292)

Station Features are accessible by an extension user or attendant, either through dial

feature number at a Single Line Telephone. or by either feature number or dedicated

feature button access at a Proprietry integrated Telephone (PITS) or Attendant Console

location.

Feaiures PITS SLT Al-T

Outgoing Call Line Selection-Calling

Features Prime Line Preference :

Idle Line Preference

No Line Preference :

Local Trunk Dial Access 0 0 0

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access 0 0 0

Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access 0 0 0

Direct Trunk Access

Inter Office Calling : 0 0

Intercom Calling

Intercom - Voice Calling :

Intercom - Busy Station Signaling

Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 00

0

Automatic Callback Busy - Trunk

- Station 00 :

Executive

Busy Override 0 0 0

Do Not Disturb (DND) Override 0 0 0

Walking COS (Class of Service)

Operator Call 00 00

On-Hook Dialing

Speed Dialing - System : 0 0

Speed Dialing - Station

0

One Touch Dialing

Last Number Redial (LNR) : 0 0

Saved Number Redial (SNR)

Automatic Redial :

Pickup Dialing

0

Serial Call

0

Receiving Features Line Selection - Answering

Direct

Answering :

Ringing Line Preference

Prime tine

Preference :

Call Waiting

Executive Busy Override Deny : :

Do Not Disturb (DND) 0 0

Intercom Answer - Voice Calling Deny

- BSS/OHCA Deny 00

No Line Preference

Dial Call Pickup : 0

Directed Call Pickup

Call Pickup Deny : :

Hands-Free Answerback

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Log Out E 0

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 0 0

- Day Service

1 -c-3

Continued

Holding Features Hold

Exclusive Hold

Consultation Hold

Call Park - System

Transferring

Features

Conversation

Features

Paging Features

-!-

Features

- Station

Call Hold Retrieve - Station

Call Splitting

Unscreened Call Transfer to Station

Screened Call Transfer to Station

Screened Call Transfer to Trunk

Ringing Transfer

Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote

Call Forwarding- All Calls

- Busy/Off-Hook

- No Answer

- Busy/Off-HooWNo Answer

- to Trunk

Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station

Camp-on to Station

Interposition Callmransfer

Call Transfer via Attendant Console

Released Link Operation

Programmable Privacy

Privacy Release

Privacy Attach

Hands-Free Operation

Conference

Unattended Conference

Doorphone

Flash

External Feature Access

Microphone Mute

Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling)

Paging All Extensions

Group Paging

Paging External Pagers

Paging All Extensions and External Pagers

Call Park and Paging

Background Music (BGM) through External

Pager

4

SContinued

i

A

PITS SLT

0

:

0

Continued

1 -c-4

Other Features

Features

Un!versal Night Answer

Night Service - Manual Change

Flexible Night Service

Account Code Entry

Zmed Reminder

Background Music (BGM)

Secret Dialing

Assigned Feature Clear

Electronic Station Lock Out

Remote Station Feature Control

Absent Message Capability

Message Waiting

Data Line Security

DSS Console features

- Automatic Transfer

Dial Tone Transfer

CO Access Control

Search by Name/Department

OGM Recording and Playing Back

Power Failure Operation

Trunk Verify

4

‘ITS

ontibed

Y

SLT

0

E

0

:

0

:

0

:

0

:

1 -c-5 . .

D. Administration

1 .OO Introduction

Starting up the system administration can be

done using one of the following devices.

l

VT220 (VT1 OO)(default setting), Compatibles

l

Dumb Terminal

l

Attendant Console

Only one terminal can perform system

administration at any one time.

Starting up the system administration from a

remote location is available. For details about

Remote Operation, refer to Section 14-B-2.00

“System Administration from a Remote Location.”

System Configurations

A. VT220 and Dumb terminal

Main Unit vT220,

compatibles,

or Dumb

Terminal.

+ c

RC-232C Cable

B. Attendant console

Attendant

C. Remote operation

Main Unit Remote Terminal

RMT

Central

Office

.

2.00 System Interface

The programming and diagnostics features can

be accessed either locally or remotely using the

system RS-232C interface.

The system may be configured for local direct

access from the data terminal, or via a modem

connection that allows the data terminal to be

located at a greater distance from the system

than is allowed for an RS-232C interface.

For remote access, a data terminal and modem

are required at the maintenance location, and

the RMT card (Modem) at the system.

Two RS-232C interfaces are provided by the

system.

These connections provide communication either

locally or remotely between the system and

devices for programming and diagnostics,

external system programming data storage and

Station Message Detailed Recording (SMDR).

SIO ##2 is used for SMDR only. SIO #I is for

programming and diagnostics, and external

system programming data storage functions.

Typical devices would include VT220,

compatibles, personal computers and line

printers.

Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication

Interface” for further information.

l-D-1

3.00 Programming 4.00 Test

Before starting up the basic system data

programming, general feature description must

be read.

For further information about

general feature

description, refer to Section 3 “System Features

and Operation.”

Basic system data programming can be done

using VT220, compatibles, dumb terminal and

attendant console.

(VT220 and Compatibles user)

Refer to Section 7 “Preparation for Programming

and Maintenance (VT220 and Compatibles)” and

Section 9 “System Programming (VT220 and

Compatibles).”

(Dumb terminal user)

Refer to Section 8 “Preparation for Programming

and Maintenance (Dumb)” and Section 10

“System Programming (Dumb).”

System’s built-in maintenance capabilities and

the basic diagnostics in fault diagnosis and

corrective maintenance are described in Section

14 “Maintenance (VT220 and Compatibles)” and

Section 15 “Maintenance (Dumb).”

Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)

System’s built-in on-line diagnostic test program

monitors the troubles generated by hardware or

software

during on-line communication mode.

(VT220 and Compatibles user)

Refer to Section 14-D “Self-Test (System-

Detected Troubles)” for further information.

(Dumb terminal user)

Refer to Section 15-D “Self-Test (System-

Detected Troubles)” for further information.

Functional test by entering commands

Functional test is done by entering specific test

commands when you install the new device and

so on.

(VT220 and Compatibles user)

Refer to Section 14-F “Functional Test by

Entering Commands” for further information.

(Dumb terminal user)

Refer to Section 15-E “Functional Test by

Entering Commands” for further information.

1 -D-2

5.00 Monitor 6.00 Backup Utility

Monitor function provides displaying current

status of “Error Log,” “Device Status” and “Traffic

Information” individually on the screen.

Error Log

When a system maintenance object begins to fail

periodic testing, the system automatically

generates an error record which is stored in the

Error Log.

Consulting the error log should be the first step in

diagnosing system related troubles.

For further information, refer to Section 14-D-2.

02 “Consulting the Error Log.”

Device Status

Provides information about current operation

status of the following items individually on the

screen.

l

System

l

Card

l

Port

l

Conference Trunk

Traffic

Provides current traffic information about

following items individually.

l

Station

l

Trunk Group

l

Attendant Console

l

DISA

l

OGMl

l

OGM2

l

AGC

Making backups of the system programming data

and keeping it is extremely important in the

unlikely event that system programming data are

lost in a system failure.

Backup Utility consists of “save” and “load.”

Save is to transmit a file of data from your system

to backup device.

Load is to send a file of data on your system from

backup device.

Before beginning saving or loading, check

carefully that you are going to the direction you

want.

It’s very easy to erase files if you make a mistake

and confuse saving and loading.

Starting up the backup operation can be done

both at on-site and from a remote location.

Refer to Section 16 “Backup-Utility on-site” and

Section 17 “Backup Utility-Remote Location” for

further information.

Refer to Section 14-G “Monitor” for further

information about monitor.

1 D-3

E. System Configuration

1 .OO Basic Shelf

Basic Shelf is always required. Basic Shelf consists of the followings

Basic Shelf contains its own power supply and 15

mounting spaces called “Slot.” CPU card and T-

SW card are installed at factory.

Basic Slot 2 is provided for installing the optional

T-SW OHCA card.

The remaining 12 slots provide mounting space

for the various cards that can be used. Any

optional service card can be mounted in any of

these 12 slots.

So these slots are called “Free Slot.”

r

-

JO.

-

1

2

3

4

5

Name

POWER-for Power Unit

BSl (Basic Slot 1) - for CPU card

BS2 (Basic Slot 2)

- for optional T-SW OHCA card

BS3 (Basic Slot 3) - for T-SW card

FSl to 12 (Free Slot 1 to 12)

- for optional service card

T

Number

Construction of Basic Shelf

P FFFFFFFFFFFFBBB

0 sssssssssssssss

W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

E

R

Free Slot can be equipped with the following optional

service cards.

a. Loop start central

office trunk (LCOT) Card

b. Ground start central office trunk (GCOT) Card

c. Hybrid line circuit (HLC) Card

d. Proprietary ITS tine circuit (PLC) Card

e. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC) Card

f. Direct inward dialing trunk (DID) Card

g. Off premise extension trunk (OPX) Card

h. Door-phone circuit (DPH) Card

i. Automatic Gain control (AGC) Card

j. Direct inward system access (DISA) Card

k. Remote circuit (RMT) Card

I. Attendant console Line circuit (ATLC) Card

RS232C

Port : 2

1 -E-l

2.00 Expansion Shelf

Expansion ShG is provided optionally. Expansion Shelf consists of the followinq

Up to two Expansion Shelves (1 and 2) can be

installed on the Basic Shelf to enlarge the ability

of the system.

Each Expansion Shelf contains its own power

supply and 15 mounting spaces for any optional

card required for system expansion.

Expansion Shetf is installed on top of the basic

shelf.

Construction of Expansion Shelf (1 and 2).

P FFFFFFFFFF

0 ssssssssss

Y W 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 910

E

R

Free slot can be equipped with the following optional

service cards.

a. Loop start central office trunk (LCOT) Card

a’. Loop start central office trunk (LCOT) Card with

Polarity Reversal Detection

b. Ground start central off ice trunk (GCOT) Card

c. Hybrid line circuit (HLC) Card

d. Proprietary ITS Line circuit (PLC) Card

e. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC) Card

e’. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC) Card with

Message Waiting

f. Direct inward dialing trunk (DID) Card

g. Off premise extension trunk (OPX) Card

h. Doorphone circuit (DPH) Card

i. Automatic Gain control (AGC) Card

j. Direct inward system access (DISA) Card

k. Remote circuit (RMT) Card

1. Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card

1 -E-2

(30393)

3.00 Attendant Console

Functions

Up to two Attendant

Consoles (optional-with CRT

display) can be equipped with the system.

The attendant console allows one or two

attendants to answer, screen, and control

incoming calls using Switched Loop Operation.

With attendant operation, incoming calls

can be

screened and forwarded to the proper party for

resolution, messages taken for absent users, or

forwarded to alternate locations.

The attendant console is not dedicated to call

processing and feature accessing, and can be

used for system data programming and

diagnostics.

Refer to Section 6 “Station Features and

Operation-Attendant Console” for further

information about attendant console call

processing features, and Section 13 “Station

Programming-Attendant Console” for further

information about attendant console local

programming mode.

Operation

Attendant console is operable for the following.

l

Call Processing mode

l

System programming

l

Diagnostics

l

Editing local data

4.00 CPU Card

Functions

(1) Call process and basic shelf main protocol.

(Microprocessor 8OC286).

Tme switch (TSW) control, detection of

system clock alarm, basic shelf power down

and expansion shelf power down alarm,

watch dog.

(2) System switch interface.

There are Operation Switch (MODE) (10

modes, 0 to 9) and System Administration

Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM) (10

modes, 0 to 9) on the CPU rotary switch.

When the system lost the programming data

because of system resetting, set system

operation mode using these switches when

starling up the system again.

(3) Terminal interface.

CPU card has two RS-232C terminal

interfaces.

Operation

(1) Operation Switch (MODE) and System

Administration Device Selection Switch

(SYSTEM) are set by turning with screw

driver.

(2) Reset switch is non-lock push switch.

(3) LED for battery alarm lights when voltage of

Lithium-battery becomes too low (less than

2SV).

(4) LED for watch dog lights when CPU’s

software is running away.

i

(5) Watch dog is detecting CPU’s running away.

l-E-3

5.00 TSW Card

Functions

(1) Time switch.

Capability of switching voice is 512ch x

512ch.

(2) Generation of system clocks.

System clocks are 2,048MHz (PCM clock),

8kHz (PCM frame clock).

(3) Generation of call progress tone.

Call progress tones are 350+440Hz, 620Hz,

480+620Hz and 440+480Hz.

(4) Conference circuit.

T-SW card has 3 party x 8 conference’s

circuits.

For CO-CO speech amp., AGC card can be

inserted to a free slot of basic or expansion

shelf.

(5) Paging interface.

T-SW card has 2 pre-amp. circuits for paging.

In order to adjust volume, each amp circuit is

equipped with a knob.

(6) Music-in interface.

T-SW card has 2 interface circuits for music

on hold or BGM.

Operation

(1) A knob for adjusting volume of external

paging is turned with a screw driver from front

of T-SW card.

6.00 Power Unit

Functions

(1) Power supp!y (+5, f15, GND) for a shelf.

(2) External battery interface. (+24)

Battery power (+24) is input from a battery

interface unit in basic shelf with a 2 wire

cable.

(3) Power failure detection.

A circuit in POW detects power failures of

+5VDC, kl S/DC, 1 OOVAC, and 2 power

alarm signals is sent to CPU card as DC

alarm and AC alarm.

(4) Generation of bell signal. (20H2, 1 OOVop)

(2) LED indicatoi or ihe T-SW card lights when

system reset or T-SW local reset occurs.

1 -E-4

7.00 LCOT Card 8.00 GCOT Card

Functions

LCOT (KX-T96180) -----Loop Start Central Office

Trunk card (8 CO Lines/

card)

(1) Loop start CO interface.

CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.

With loop start, you seize a line by bridging

through a resistance the tip and ring (both

wires) of your telephone line.

(2) Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.

Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO

interface circuit, and directly to LCOT PFT

modular. When power failure occurs, CO

Tip/ring leads are directly connected to SLT

Tip/Ring leads, but LCOT PFT modular and

SLT PFT modular should be connected each

other with connection cord in advance.

(3) Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.

A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of

each port.

During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic

relay in an LCOT of a system is activated.

Operation

LED indicator on the LCOT card lights when the

system reset or LCOT local reset occurs.

Functions

GCOT (KX-T96181) ----Ground Stan Central Office

Trunk card (8 CO Lines/

card)

(1) Ground start CO interface.

CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.

A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which

one side of the two wire trunk (typically the

“Ring” conductor of the Tip and Ring) is

momentarily grounded to get dial tone.

(2) Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.

Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO interface

circuit, and directly to GCOT PFT modular.

When power failure occurs, CO Tip/Ring leads

are directly connected to SLT Tip/Ring leads,

but GCOT PFT modular and SLT PFT modular

should be connected each other with

connection cords in advance.

(3) Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.

A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of each

pod.

During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic relay

in a GCOT of a system is activated.

Operation

LED indicator on the GCOT card lights when the

system reset or GCOT local reset occurs.

l-E-5

..,:.

.

9.00 PLC Card 10.00 SLC Card

Functions Functions

PLC card (KX-T96 172) SLC card (KX-T96174)

(1) PITS and DSS console interface. (8 circuits/

card)

Maximum loop resistance : 40 ohms

Power supply 1 : +24V (supplied through

speech path, and with

current limitation circuit).

Power supply 2 : +15V (supplied through

data line).

(1) Standard SLT interface.

Maximum loop resistance : 600 ohms.

(including SLT)

Power supply : +24V (with current limitation

circuit.)

2 DTMF receivers, dial pulse detector.

(2) PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-T123235, KX-

T7130) interface with OHCA feature.

When a PITS with OHCA feature is connected

to a port, an OHCA piggy back card (KX-

T96136) should be mounted to its interface

circuit.

(2) Power Failure Transfer (PFT) by each port.

When power failure occurs, SLT Tip / Ring are

led by a PFT relay, but SLT PFT modular and

LCOT / GCOT modular should be connected

each other by connection cords in advance.

Operation

LED indicator on the PLC card lights when the

system reset or PLC local reset occurs.

(3) Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.

Diagnostic relay is placed in Tip / Ring of each

port-

During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic

relay in the SLT of a system is activated.

Operation

LED indicator on the SLC card lights when

system reset or SLC local reset occurs.

1 -E-6

11 .OO HLC Card 12.00 ATLC

Card

Functions

HLC card (KX-T96170) is ior PITS, DSS console

and SLT.

(8 extensions / card)

(1) Standard SLT interface. SLT interface is quite

same as that of SLT card.

(2) PITS and DSS console interface. PITS and

DSS console interface is quite same as that of

PLC card.

(3) Interface for PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-

T123235, KX-l-7130) with OHCA feature.

Interface for PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-

T123235, KX-l7130) with OHCA feature is

quite same as that of PLC.

(4) Power failure transfer by each port. (when

using SLT)

Power failure transfer is quite same as that of

SLC card.

(5) Diagnostic transfer by each port. Diagnostic

transfer is quite same as that of SLC card.

Operation

LED indicator on the HLC card lights when the

system reset or HLC local reset occurs.

Functions

(1) ATLC card. (KX-T96141)

Attendant console interface. (2 circuits / card)

(Attendant console : KX-T96300)

Operation

LED indicator on the ATLC card lights when the

system reset or attendant console local reset

occurs.

l-E-7 ’

13.00 DISA Card

Functions

DISA (Direct Inward System Access) card.

(KX-T96191) chc r, OGT i-“?SS \ 6~. ?

7, rn*b lLe-l”\DDSy

(1) 4 OGM trunks.

OGM duration : 30 seconds,.

OGM Battery Backup : 5 days.

The number of OGM : 1,

Recording Algorithm : ADPCM.

(2) 4 CO-CO speech paths without amp.

A CO-CO speech path consists of up-path

and down-path.

Up-path is from call-originate CO to call-

answer CO, and 1 DTMF receiver and one

speech end detector is connected to it.

Down-path is from call-answer CO to call-

originate CO and one speech end detector is

connected to it.

(3) Speech end detector.

Speech end detector detects call progress

tones.

Operation

LED indicator on the DISA card lights when the

system reset or DISA local reset occurs.

14.00 DID Card

Functions

DID (Direct Inward Dialing) card (KX-T96182)

Wink start/immediate start DID interface.

(4 circuits/card) yt /\s, Irv c,

45V used in circuits is originated from DC-DC OCk,\

sr 1

converter in DID card. ‘YGbW,

Operation y-CD

LED indicator on the DID card lights when the

system reset or DID local reset occurs.

1 -E-8

15.00 OPX Card 16.00 DPH Card

Functions

OPX (KX-T96185) -----Off Premise Extension.

(4 OPX Lines / card)

OPX Power Unit is

necessary.

OPX Power Unit should be connected with OPX

card, and Single Line Telephones for OPX should

be connected with OPX card.

- G G!Qs rnP-f,-. D“1 ?a \‘J _

22. GA

Functions

Doorphone card (KX-T96161)

(1) Doorphone interface (4 circuits / card)

4 doorphones can be connected using a

modular connector.

Doorphone chime is sent to both extension

and doorphone at a time when a doorphone

button is pressed.

(2) Door opener interface (4 circuits / card)

DPH card has 4 relays for door opener.

(12OVAC, 1A)

The relay opens for doorlock, closes for door

release. It also opens in the case of power

failure.

Operation

Terminal plate on the DPH card has 8 terminals,

2 leads from door opener are directly connected

to two of 8 terminals.

Operation interval of door opener is 3 seconds.

1 -E-9

17.00 AGC Card 13.00 RMT Card

Functions

AGC (Automatic Gain Control) card

(KX-T96193)

(1) 4 CO-CO speech paths

with AGC Amp. and

Echo-Suppressor.

A CO-CO speech path consists of up-path

and down-path, up-path is from call-originate

CO to call-answer CO, and AGC amp is

inserted and speech end detector is

connected.

Maximum amplitude rate of AGC is 14 dB.

Echo-Suppressor is inserted in a CO-CO

speech path.

(2) 4 DTMF receivers.

DTMF transceiver is used as DTMF repeater.

So, AGC card microprocessor controls DTMF

repeater.

(3) 8 Speech End

Detectors.

Speech

end detector of AGC

is quite same as

that of DISA card.

Functions

RMT (Remote Circuit) card (KX-T96196)

Modem (300/1200 bps) for remote administration.

Modem protocol (1) free wheeling (TTY).

Operation

LED indicator on the RMT card lights when the

system reset or RMT local reset occurs.

Operation

LED indicator on the AGC card lights when the

system reset or AGC local reset occurs.

1-E-10

19.00 T-SW Conference Expan-

sion Card

Functions

T-SW Conference Expansion card (KX-T336104)

Mounted on T-SW card.

3 party x 64 conference circuits.

20.00 OHCA Card

Functions

OHCA (Off Hook Call Announcement) card

(KX-T96136)

This card is mounted on HLC card (KX-T96170)

or PLC card (KX-T96172)

This card includes 2 OHCA circuits.

Allows an extension user to intrude through the

speaker into another extension that is in

conversation using the handset.

This feature is available only against the following

PITS telephones: KX-Ti 23230D, KX-T123235,

KX-l7130.

21.00 T-SW OHCA Expansion

Card

T-SW OHCA Expansion card (KX-T336105)

This card is mounted on Basic Slot 2 for OHCA

feature.

OHCA card (KX-T96136) for extension port must

be installed on the HLC card or PLC card in

advance.

22.00 OPX Power Unit

Functions

OPX (Off Premise Extension) Power Unit

(KX-T96186).

Input is 120VAC 60Hz.

Output is Ringing Signal (1 OOVAC, 20Hz) and

46V DC for OPX Card.

1 -E-l 1

Section 2

Installation

(Section 2)

Installation

Contents

Page

A Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-A-l

1 .OO introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-A-l

2.00 Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*......................................................-........... 2-A-2

B Installation of Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-B-l

1 .OO Basic Shelf ............................................................................................. 2-B-l

1.01 Basic Shelf Assembly .................................................................. 2-B-Z

1.02 Removing the Panels .................................................................. 2-B-3

1.03 Cable Connections ...................................................................... 2-B-5

2.00 Expansion to 2-Shelf System I.~ .............................................................. 2-B-6

2.01 Expansion Shelf Assembly .......................................................... 2-B-7

2.02 Removing the Panels .................................................................. 2-B-8

2.03 Stacking on the Basic Shelf ......................................................... 2-B-l 0

2.04 Installation of Top Cover .............................................................. 2-B-l 1

2.05 Cable Connections ...................................................................... 2-B-12

3.00 Expansion to 3-Shelf System ................................................................. 2-B-l 3

3.01 Stacking on the 2-Shelf System .................................................. 2-B-l 4

3.02 Installation of Top Cover .............................................................. 2-B-l 5

3.03 Cable Connections ...................................................................... 2-B-l 6

4.00 Ground Wiring.. ...................................................................................... 2-B-l 8

5.00 Fixing on the Floor ................................................................................. 2-B-l 9

5.01 Setting Out and Drilling ................................................................ 2-B-l 9

5.02 Fixing on the Floor ....................................................................... 2-B-22

C Installation of Cards ......................................................................................... 2-c-1

1 .OO Before Installation ............................................................................... ...2-c- 1

1.01 Slot Construction ......................................................................... 2-c-1

1.02 Guide Plate.. ................................................................................ 2-c-2

2.00 Connection of Standard System ........................................................... 2-C-3

2.01 CPU Card .................................................................................... 2-C-3

2.02 T-SW Card.. ................................................................................. 2-C-3

2.03 Power Unit ................................................................................... 2-C-3

3.00 Connection of Optional Cards ............................................................... 2-C-4

3.01 T-SW Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104). ..................... 2-C-4

3.02 T-SW OHCA Card (KX-T336105) ................................................ 2-C-5

3.03 OHCA Card (KX-T96136). ...........................................................

3.04 ATLC Card (KX-T96141) ............................................................. N&

3.05 DPH Card (KX-T96161). .............................................................. 2-c-1 0

3.06 HLC Card (KX-T96170). .............................................................. 2-c-1 4

3.07 PLC Card (KX-T96172) ............................................................... 2-C-l 6

3.08 SLC Card (KX-T96174) ............................................................... 2-C-l 8

3.09 LCOT Card (KX-T96180) ............................................................. 2-c-21

2-l

Page

3.10 GCOT Card (KX-T96181). ........................................................... 2-C-22

3.11 DID Card (KX-T96182). ............................................................... 2-C-25

3.12 OPX Card (KX-T96185). .............................................................. 2-C-26

3.13 DISA Card (KX-T96191). ............................................................. 2-C-28

3.14 AGC Card (KX-T96193) .............................................................. 2-C-28

3.15 RMT Card (KX-T96196) .............................................................. 2-C-28

4.00 Parallel Connection of the Extensions .................................................. 2-c-29

5.00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer ................................... 2-C-30

6.00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D) ...................................... 2-C-32

D Connection of Optional Peripheral Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-D-l

1.00 Paging Equipment .................................................................................. 2-D-l

2.00 External Music Source ........................................................................... 2-D-2

3.00 RS-232C Interface .................................................................................. 2-D-3

3.01 Connection to the Printer ............................................................. 2-D-5

3.02 Connection to the Data Terminal ................................................. 2-D-6

E Installation of Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-E-l

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

Configuration ......................................................................................... 2-E-l

Attendant Console Assembly ................................................................. 2-E-3

Handset Connection .............................................................................. 2-E-4

Installation and Removal of CRT Unit .................................................... 2-E-5

4.01 CRT Unit Installation .................................................................... 2-E-5

4.02 CRT Unit Removal.. ..................................................................... 2-E-7

Keyboard Connection ............................................................................ 2-E-8

Connection with KX-T336 System ........................................................ 2-E-9

AC Power Cord Connection.. ................................................................. 2-E-l 0

Various Adjustments .............................................................................. 2-E-l 1

F Starting Up the KX-T336 System . . . . .._.............................................................. 2-F-l

1 .OO System Power-Up

Prokedure

................................................................ 2-F-l

2.00 CPU Rotary-Switch Features.. ............................................................... 2-F-2

2.01 Operation Switch (MODE) ........................................................... 2-F-2

2.02 System Administration Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM). ...... 2-F-5

2.03 Operation Sequence for System Starting Up .............................. 2-F-6

2-2

A. Prepa.ration

1 .OO Introduction

This section describes !?e prwedures required to install the KX-T336 System.

Detailed instruct,ons fo- panning the installation site, installing the shelves and optional

cards, and

cabimg

of cwoheral equipments are provided.

Further information on system exDansion and peripheral equipment installation is

included.

2-A-i

2.00 Before Installation

Please read the following notes concerning installations and xxectic-s More Installing the

KX-T336 system.

1) Installation Cautions

l

Avoid installing the KX-T336 system in the

following places. (Doing so may result in

malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)

1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid

places. (Temperature range: 32”F-104°F)

2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where

there are thermal springs, etc. may

damage the equipment or contacts.

3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are

frequent or strong.

4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil

may come into contact with the unit.

5. Near high-frequency generating devices

such as sewing machines or electric

welders.

6. On or near computers, telexes, or other

offrce equipments, as well as microwave

ovens or air conditioners.

(It is preferable not to be installed in the

same room with the above equipment.)

7. Install at least 6 feet away from televisions.

(both the KX-T336 system and EMSS

proprietary telephones)

8. Do not obstruct area around the KX-T336

system. (for reasons of maintenance and

inspectiorr-be especially careful to allow

space for cooling above and at the sides of

the KX-T336 system)

2) Wiring Cautions

l

Make sure to Keep the following

instructions when wiring.

1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel

with an AC power source, computer, telex,

etc. If the cables are run near those wires,

shield the cables with metal tubing or use

shielded cables and ground the shields.

2. If cables are run on the floor, use

protectors or the like to protect the wires

where they may be stepped on. Avoid

wiring under carpets.

3. Avoid sharing the same 120V AC power

supply outlet for computers, telexes, and

other office equipments. Otherwise, the

operation of KX-T336 system may be

interrupted by the induction noise from

such equipments.

4. Please use one pair telephone wire for

extension connection of (telephone)

equipments such as single line telephone,

data terminal, answering machine,

computer etc., except proprietary

telephone (KX-T7130, KX-T7030, KX-

Tl23230D etc.,).

1

2-A-2

B. Installation of Shelf

This subsection describes the installation of the she?. with information on expanding the

capacity of an existing system.

Building Block System provides the eclaqe-ent of system’s ability by installing the

optional Expansion Shelf.

Up to two Expansion Shelves can be instaf’ed to !‘-e system

Each expansion shelf can be equipped

with up to 120 lines (including Extensions and

CO lines).

The system can consist of one, two or three shelves (Basic, Expansion 1 and

Expansion 2).

Each shelf contains its own power supply.

1 .OO Basic Shelf

Basic Shelf is always required and it can be equipped with up to 96 lines (including

Extension and CO lines).

The basic shelf includes top cover and base shelf.

The following figure shows a basic system composed of a basic shelf only.

l

2-B-l

1 .Ol Basic Shelf Assembly

r----- _______________--___---------------------------------------------

,16

17

18

19

1. Side Panel (Left) ..)--

2.

Power Unit .- ._

3. Power Indicator

4.

Power Switch

(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Basic Shelf)

5. Backup Battery Connector

(Connects the Battery Adaptor Cable)

6.

Fuse

7.

Power Supply Cable

8. Front Panel

9. Transform Cord

10. Base Side Panel (Left)

11. Power Supply Cable Connector

12. Main Power Switch

(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Whole Unit)

I

\,

I

/

Basic Sheff

Base Shelf

13. Ground Wire Connector (GND)

14. Base Front Panel

15. LED Cable

16. LED Cable Connector

(Connects the LED Cable)

17. Side Panel (Right)

18. Flat Cable Connector

(Connects the Flat Cable from Expansion

Shelf)

19. Cable Opening

20. Base Board

21. Battery Adaptor Compartment

2-B-2

1.02 Removing the Panels

Front Panel

Base Front Panel

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

-

Rotate the key on the front panel

counterclockwise to unlock.

Open the front panel toward you at right

angles to the basic shelf.

Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

_i- _

/.

Open the base front panel toward you while

holding down the button on the panel.

Pull out the base front panel to the right.

2-B-3

Side Panel

d

Screws 4-f

/

8 Screws

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the eight screws.

2. Remove the upper left side panel by loosening the four screws.

Base Side Panel

4/

/

d Screws

1. Remove the lower left side panel by loosening the four screws.

Note :

If the system is to be expanded to 2-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-2.00

“Expansion to 2-Shelf System.”

2-B-4

1.03 Cable Connections

LED Cable

. Plug

the

LED

cable (on the top mverl into :ne

LED cable connector (on the bashc

sheifj.

Power Supply

Cable

l

Plug the power supply cable (on the basic

shelf) into the power supply cable connector

labeled “AC OUT 1” (on the base shelf).

\ power supply cable

2-B-5

2.00 Expansion to 2-Shelf System

The KX-T336 System can be expanded to 2-Shelf System by installing the Expansion

Shelf 1 on the Basic Shelf.

The 2-Shelf system can be equipped with up to 216 lines (including extensions and CO

lines).

The following figure shows a 2-Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and an expansion

shelf.

2-B-6

2.01 Expansion Shelf Assembly

1. Side Panel (Left)

2. Power Unit

3. Power Indicator

4. Power Switch

(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Expansion

Shelf)

5. Backup Battery Connector

(Connects the Battery Adaptor Cable)

6. Fuse

7. Power Supply Cable

8. Front Panel

9. LED Cable Connector

(Connects the LED Cable)

10. Side Panel (Right)

11. Flat Cable

12. Cable Opening

Note :

The construction of Expansion Shelf 1 and Expansion Shelf 2 is identical to each other.

2-B-7

2.02 Removing the Panels

Removing the Top Cover

2)

TOP

/ oover

\ LED cable

1. Disconnect the LED cable (on the top cover) from the LED cable connector (on the

basic shelf).

2. Remove the top cover by loosening the four screws.

2-B-8

Front Panel

1. Rotate the key on the front panel

counterclockwise to unlock.

2. Open the front panel toward you at right

angles to the expansion shelf.

3. Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

Side Panel

,

/

Screws

d

Q

Guides

v

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the four screws.

2. Remove the left side panel by loosening the four screws.

2-B-9

2.03 Stacking on the Basic Shelf

Expansion

shelf

Basic shelf

l

To connect the expansion shelf with basic shelf,

place the holes of the expansion shelf exactly

on the holes of the basic shelf.

l

When the holes are placed properly, fix them

with the three screws immediately to prevent

the expansion shelf from falling down.

\ Note :

If the system is to be expanded-to 3-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-3.00

“Expansion to 3-Shelf System.”

2-B-l 0

2.04 Installation of Top Cover

Expans

shelf

To connect the top cover, place the holes of the

top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion

shelf.

Note:

Before installing the top cover, remove a screw

as shown in the illustration above. Otherwise the

top cover cannot be installed properly.

This screw is necessary for installing an

expansion shelf.

,: .

-.

_C.

<cc.

l

When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the four screws immediately to

prevent the top cover from falling down.

2-B-l 1

2.05 Cable Connections

LED Cable/Flat Cable

Basic shelf -

Base shelf- ,

Top

cover

Expansion shelf -

Flat cable

. 1. Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the LED cable connector (on the expansion

shelf).

2. Plug the flat cable (on the expansion shelf) into the flat cable connector (on the basic

shelf). . .

Power Supply Cable

MI1 I- traslc snelf

Base snelf

.

Plug the power supply cable into the power supply cable connector (“AC OUT 2”).

2-B-12

3.00 Expansion to 3-Shelf System

The KX-1336 System can be expanded to 3-Shelf System by installing the Expansion

Shelf 2 on the 2-Shelf System.

Up to 336 lines (including extensions and CO lines) can be equipped with 3-Shelf

System.

Note :

Before stacking the Expansion Shelf 2 on the 2-Shelf System, remove the front panel

and side panels from Expansion Shelf 2 following the procedures described in Section

2-B-2.00 *‘Expansion to 2-Shelf System.”

The figure below shows a 3-Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and two expansion

shelves.

:

/

c

?

2-B-l 3

3.01 Stacking on the Z-Shelf System

1)

Expansion

shelf 2

Expansion

shelf 1

. To connect the expansion shelf 2 with 2-Shelf

System,

place the holes of the expansion shelf

2 exactly on the holes of the expansion shelf 1.

.

When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the three screws immediately to

prevent the expansion shelf 2 from falling down.

2-B-l 4

3.02 lnsta

llation

of Top Cover

2)

m

Screws

. To connect the top cover, place the holes of the

top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion

shelf 2.

. When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the four screws immediately to

prevent the top cover from falling down.

. .

3.03 Cable Connections

LED Cable/Flat Cable

-.

?

1. Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the LED cable connector (on the expansion

shelf 2). .I

2. Plug the flat cable (on the expansion shelf 2) into the flat cable connector (on the basic

shelf).

2-B-l 6

Power Supply Cable

Top cover

Expansion shelf 2

Expansion shelf 1

Basic shelf

-Base shelf

.

Plug the power supply cable (on the Expansion Shelf 2) into the power supply cable

connector (“AC OUT 3”). .

2-B-l 7

4.00 Ground Wiring

.’ 1.

3

IMPORTANT!!!

I

Make sure to connect the frame c’ :?e KX-‘323 syc’e~

to the earth ground properly to protxt the “- :

,

.

Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector (GND).

2-B-l 8

5.00 Fixing on the Floor

5.01 Setting Out and Drilling

1) Basic System (Basic Shelf)

1214/32

/.

l

Location of the anchor plug (A):

Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the-floor in

accordance with the measurements.

n

Hammer

I# J

al32 inch

143lf32

1 lot32

l

Drive the anchor plug into the hole.

When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor

anchor plugs should always be used to prevent

2-B-i 9

2) 2-Shelf System (Basic Shelf + Expansion Shelf 1)

11 l2l32

-

1214K32"

Tr'*""'""

-@OO

7

00

B,. -

l

Location of the anchor plug (A):

Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in

accordance with the measurements.

4

Hammer

L J

&32 inch

26 25132

_I

1 318"

22l32

:

13932

1 10132

l

Drive the anchor plug into the hole.

When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,

anchor plugs should always be used to prevent

2-B-20

3) 3-Shelf System

(Basic Shelf

+ Expansion Shelf 1 + Expansion Shelf 2j

1112/32

1

1214/32

24/32" 24I32

l

Location of the anchor plug (A):

Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in

accordance with the measurements.

1

:4

Hammer

8132 inch

i

13 5l3T

10132

l

Drive the anchor plug into the hole.

When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,

anchor plugs should always be used to prevent

2-B-21

5.02 Fixing on the Floor

..:.

.:)

l

Attach the two floor-fixing 9ardwares to the

basic shelf as shown in the figure.

Fasten each hardware with four screws.

.

l

Position the shelf on the floor.

Check alignment and level of the shelf.

l

Fix the shelf securely to the floor using

screws and flat washers.

Screw

2-B-22

C. Installation of Cards

.OO Before Installation

.Ol Slot Construction

1

I--

l-

I-+

Expansion shelf 2

PEFFFFFFFFFFFFF

ossssssssssssss

W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

:

Expansion shelf 1

Basic shelf

PFFFFFFFFFFFFBB

ossssssssssssss

W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2

Ei

Basic shelf Expansion shelf l/Expansion shelf 2

Name 1 Number]

POWER - for Power Unit

BSl (Basic Slot 1) - for CPU card

BS2 (Basic Slot 2)

- for optional T-SW OHCA card

BS3 (Basic Slot 3) - for T-SW card

FSl to 12 (Free Slot 1 to 12)

- for optional service card

1

12

F :

1 ”

1:

Ls

1 i

3

2-c-1

1.02 Guide Plate

Screw

Card Latch

Fig.2

Upper Guide Rail

Lower Guide Rail

J2 ._A

Fig.3

1. Before installing the service cards, remove the Guide Plate (See Fig.1) from the

upper front side of the basic shelf (and expansion shelf 1 and 2, if provided) by

loosening the five screws.

2. Install a service

card

(with’facing the components side to the right) along with the

upper and lower guide rails. Press the upper and lower latch firmly until the upper

latch is located inside of the shelf. (See Fig.2 and Fig.3)

Please do not touch the components side of the service card.

3. After installing the service cards, attach the Guide Plate to the upper front side of

the basic shelf (and expansion shelf 1 and 2, if provided) with five screws.

If service cards are not installed properly, the Guide Plate will not be fixed.

2-c-2

2.00 Connection of Standard System

2.01 CPU Card

“CPU” is marked.

2.02 T-SW Card

“TSW” is marked.

2.03 Power Unit

l

This card is already inserted at the factory in

the “CPU” in the Basic shelf.

l

This card is already inserted at the factory in

the “TSW” in the Basic shelf.

l

Power unit is ajre.ady inserted at the factory in

the “POWER” in the Basic shelf and the

Expansion shelf 1,2.

2-C-3

3.00 Connection of Optional Cards

3.01 T-SW Conference Expansion

Card (KX-T336104)

Connector

(30-pin)

m

1 K&T336104 ;SbVCONF

“TSW CONF” is marked.

1) Connection to the T-SW card

l

This card is installed on the T-SW card.

T-SW Conference Card

30-pin connector

(pul)

Make sure the card is in

the correct direction

30-pin connector

(Jack)

T-SW Card

1. Insert the 30-pin connector (plug) on the T-SW CONF card into the 30-pin connector

(jack) on the T-SW card.

2. install the T-SW card into the Basic Slot

1 (BSl). See page 2-C-3.

2-C-4

3.02 T-SW OHCA Card (KX-T336105)

“OHM” is marked.

a

l

insert this card into the Basic Slot 2 (BS2).

2-c-5

3.03 OHCA Card (KX-T96136)

l

This card is installed on the HLC card or PLC

card.

(Spin)

connector

(4-pin)

- connector

(g-pin)

3

1) Connection to the HLC card (KX-T96170)

g-pin connector

(Ph)

Spin connector

(P&l)

i :

4-pin connector

(PW

g-pin connector

(jack)

Spin connector

(jack)

.

4-pin connector

_

(jack)

1. Make sure that the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards.

2. Insert the connector (plug) on the OHCA card into the connector (jack) on the PLC

card.

3. Install the HLC card into a free slot. See page 2-C-l 4.

-% Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card. Refer to

page 2-C-8.

-% The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only:

KX-Tl23235, KX-T123230D or KX-l7130.

I

i

2-C-6

2) Connection to the PLC card (KX-T96172)

OHCA card

l--l

i

I

-+

7 ,

Spin connector

I (PW

n

F

B-pin connector

(PW

4-pin connector

(PW

! i

,:

J

I

:

I

I--,--d

Spin connector

(jack)

g-pin connector

(jack)

4-pin connector

liack)

1. Make sure that the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards.

2. Insert the connector (plug) on the OHCA card into the connector (jack) on the PLC

card.

3. Install the PLC card to a free slot. See page 2-C-l 6.

1

J

% Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card. Refer to

page 2-C-8.

a% The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only:

KX-T123235, KX-T123230D or KX-T7130.

2-C-7

3) Wiring Table

I2NN.i 3A SLE COLOF

“tN 1

I

20 vvt-tT-f3Lu

< , !

I BLU-WHT

,17 WHT-ORN

2 I ORN-WHT

28 WHT-GRN

3 / , GRN-WHT

29 I WHT-BRN

4 i BRN-WHT

30 1 WHT-SLT

5 I SLT-WHT

CLll

NO

l

Connection of the Proprietary Telephones:

KX-T123235, KX-T123230D, or KX-T7130.

T: Tip Dl : Data 1 Pl: 3 Pair Voice

R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice

l

OHCA NO.

(HLC card)

Extension OHCA

Extension

NO1

A

Dl

D2

::

ti

Dl

D2

Pl

P2

T

R

Dl

D2

Pl

P2

A

Dl

D2

;:

T

Cl

D2

Pl

P2

G

Dl

D2

Pl

P2

T

R

Dl

D2

;:

A

Dl

D2

Pl

P2

NO.1

NO.2

NO.3

NO.4

NO.5

NO.6

NO.7

NO.8

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

-iii

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

RED-BLU

BLU-RED

RED-ORN

ORN-RED

RED-GRN

GRN-RED

RED-BRN

31

6

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

10

36

11

37

12

OHCA

rl

NO2

BRN-RED

RED-SLT

SLT-RED

BLK-BLU

BLU-BLK

BLK-ORN

ORN-BLK

BLK-GRN

GRN-BLK

BLK-BRN

BRN-BLK

BLK-SLT

SLT-BLK

38

13

39

14

40

15

(PLC card)

NO3

YEL-BLU

BLU-YEL

YEL-ORN

ORN-YEL

YEL-GRN

GRN-YEL

YEL-BRN

BRN-YEL

31

:z

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

-

49

50

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

19

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

YEL-SLT

SLT-YEL

VIO-BLU

BLU-VI0

VIO-ORN

ORN-VI0

VIO-GRN

GRN-VI0

VIO-BRN

BRN-VI0

VIO-SLT

SLT-VI0

NO4

2-C-8

(10991)

3.04 ATLC Card (KX-T96141)

“ATLC” is marked. /

1

\I

KX-T96141

l

Insert this card into a free slot.

1) Maximum cabling distance of the Attendant Console line cord (2-conductor wiring)

26 AWG: Under 680 feet

4

24 AWG: Under 1130 feet

22 AWG: Under 1770 feet

2) Connection to the Attendant Console (KX-T96300)

Attendant Console (KX-T96300)

Use 2-conductor wiring cord

l

insert the modular plug of the Attendant Console line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the

modular jack on the ATLC card.

2-c-9

3.05

DPH Card (KX-T96161)

“DPH” is marked. /

ri

l

Insert this card into a free slot.

. .

3

1) Maximum cabling distance of the Doorphone and the Door Opener line.

26 AWG: Under 230 feet

24 AWG: Under 370 feet I

22 AWG: Under 590 feet :

*I I

Doorphone ”

26 AWG: Under 230 feet

24 AWG: Under 370 feet

I

I+

I 22 AWG: Under 590 feet

2-c-1 0

2) Installation of the

Doorphone (KX-T30865)

1. Loosen the screw to separate the door-phone

into two halves.

2. Install the base cover to the wall with two

screws.

l

Two kinds of screws are included.

Please choose appropriate one according to

your wall type. See the followings.

. . . . . . . . . . When the doorphone plate has been

,c

3. Connect the wires from the terminal box to the

screws located in the front cover.

.I

To the terminal box

(See page 2-C-l 2) 4. Secure both halves together and reinstall the

screw.

. +,.. --. -.

2-c-1 1

3) Wiring of the Doorphone

4-conductor wiring NY--~-

is required.

Terminal Box 1

.-

Doorp -T30865)

(KX-Tg6’ ” )

Terminal Box 2

. Doorphone 3 (KX-T30865) Doorphone 4 (KX-T30865)

3

i

1. Connect the DPH Card to the terminal box using a 4-conductor modular connector.

2. Connect the wires of doorphone 1 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 1.

3. Connect the wires of doorphone 2 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 1.

4.

5. Connect the wires of doorphone 3 to the red.,and green screws of the terminal box 2.

Connect the wires of doorphone 4 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 2.

2-c-1 2

4) Connection to Door Openers

door opener

1

DPH Card (KX-T96161)

Paired

doorphone 2

door opener 2

doorphone 3

door opener 3

doorphone 4

door opener 4

Paired

l

Set the door opener paired with the doorphone.

-% Only the telephone which received the doorphone call and in conversation can

open the door using door opener. System program determines the telephones

that can receive the doorphone calls and use the door opener.

2-C-l 3

3.06 HLC Card (KX-T96170)

0

HLC

PU H

qv

KX-T96170

F

0

“HLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector

type

50 pin (Amphenol 57JE

series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

.3

l

Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector

(jack) on the HLC card.

% Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins.

See page 2-C-20.

2-C-l 4

3.07 PLC Card (KX-T96172)

KX-T96172

l

lnsefi this card into a free s t‘;

“PLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type

50 pin (Amphenol 57JE

series or the equivalent)

3 l

insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector

(jack) on the PLC card.

.% Refer to the lnstaltation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

. . ‘.

To Extensions

2) Connection of cable pins.

See

page 2-C-20.

2-c-1 6

3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

le

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

24 AWG: Under 750 feet

22 AWG: Under

1180 feet

Proprietary Telephone

I

P4

:

1

2-c-1 7

3.08 SLC Card (KX-T96174)

“SLC” is marked.

3

KX-T96174

P

0

-I

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type

50 pin (Amphenol 57JE

series or the equivalent)

l

Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector

(jack) on the SLC card.

W Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series oWpage 2-C-24. --

= To Extensions

2) Connection of cable pins

See page 2-C-20.

2-C-l 8

3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 2290 feet

24 AWG: Under 3700 feet

22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

_ 4) Auxiliary connection

See

page 2-C-30.

2-c-1 9

I Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Extension Line)

ZONN

PIN CABLE COLOR CLIF

NO. Extension

l

Conneciion c: xe ,L ._ . . .z ,

I^ ^..,.^” p---e &fl’.

__ __-. .

Telephones

KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 a-z %X-7-:3:

TTip Dl: Data

1

p; ; ;a[- .;c<

R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2:

2 ?air L’s:c~

1

l

Connection of other Proprietary Telephones

Connect the only pin number cf ‘T”, ‘9”. “Dl”

and “D2”.

26 WHT-BLU

1

BLU-WHT

27 WHT-ORN

2 ORN-WHT

28 WHT-GRN

3 GRN-WHT

29

4

30

5

31

6

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

10

36

11

37

12

38

13

39

14

40

15

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

19

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

WHT-BRN

BRN-WHT

WHT-SLT

SLT-WHT

RED-BLU

BLU-RED

RED-ORN

ORN-RED

RED-GRN

GRN-RED

RED-BRN

BRN-RED

RED-SLT

SLT-RED

BLK-BLU

BLU-BLK

BLK-ORN

ORN-BLK

BLK-GRN

GRN-BLK

BLK-BRN

BRN-BLK

BLK-SLT

SLT-BLK

YEL-BLU

BLU-YEL

YEL-ORN

ORN-YEL

YEL-GRN

GRN-YEL

YEL-BRN

BRN-YEL

YEL-SLT

SLT-YEL

VIO-BLU

BLU-VI0

VIO-ORN

ORN-VI0

VIO-GRN

GRN-VI0

VIO-BRN

BRN-VI0

VIO-SLT

SLT-VI0

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

::

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

ii

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

2

47

48

49

50

NO.1

NO.2

NO.3

NO.4

NO.5

NO.6

NO.7

NO.8

T

R

Dl

D2

Pl

P2

T

fl

D2

Pl

EL

T

R

::

Pl

P2

A

Dl

D2

::

RT

Dl

::

P2

ii

Dl

D2

::

T R

::

;:

:

;:

Pl

P2

l

Station wiring (3-pair twisted cabling)

l

Connection of a Single Line Telephone

Connect the only pin number ct kT” ard “R”.

l

Connection of a DSS Console

Connect the only pin number of “Dl” and “D2”.

50 Pin Connector Block

Terminal

rfq- - .

Bridging Clips

2-c-20

3.09 LCOT Card (KX-T96180)

KX-T96: 80 . -sert :“:s cart Into a free slot.

I

“LCOT” is marked. )

1) Connection of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type

50 pin (Amphenol 57JE

series or the equivalent)

To Terminal Board

from the Central

Office (CO)

l

Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable) into

the 50-pin connector (jack) on the LCOT card. -_

.% Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins

See page 2-C-23.

3) Auxiliary connection

See page 2-C-30.

2-c-21

3.10 GCOT Card (KX-T96181)

“GCOT” is marked.

\

1

9

KX-T96181

g

-I

l

Insert this card into a free SO:

1) Connection of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type

50 pin (Amphenol 57JE

series or the equivalent)

l

Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable) into

the 50-pin connector (jack) on the GCOT

card.

% Refer to the installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins

See page 2-C-23.

To Terminal Board

from the Central

Office (COj

3) Auxiliary connection

See page 2-C-30.

2-c-22

I Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Central Office Line)

’

CONN.

: PIN CABLE COLOR

26 WHT-BLU

'1

BLU-WHT

27

.i

2

-

28

3

29

4

30

5

31

6

32

7

33

8

34

9

35

10

36

11

37

12

38

13

39

14

40

15

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

19

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

/ 25

WHT-ORN

ORN-WHT

WHT-GRN

GRN-WHT

WHT-BRN

BRN-WHT

WHT-SLT

SLT-WHT

RED-BLU

BLU-RED

RED-ORN

ORN-RED

RED-GRN

GRN-RED

RED-BRN

BRN-RED

RED-SLT

SLT-RED

BLK-BLU

BLU-BLK

BLK-ORN

ORN-BLK

BLK-GRN

GRN-BLK

BLK-BRN

BRN-BLK

BLK-SLT

SLT-BLK

YEL-BLU

BLU-YEL

YEL-ORN

ORN-YEL

YEL-GRN

GRN-YEL

YEL-BRN

BRN-YEL

YEL-SLT

SLT-YEL

VIO-BLU

BLU-VI0

VIO-ORN

ORN-VI0

VIO-GRN

GRN-VI0

‘/IO-BRN

BRN-VI0

VIO-SLT

SLT-VI0

ZLIP

NO.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

26

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

CO Line

NO.6 I A

l

Central Office Line Wiring

X Pin Connector

< CO Line 2

{ CO Line 3

Bridging.Clips

2-C-23

I To connect Amphenol 57JE type (screw-attach-type 50-pin

connector) to the Option Card, follow the procedure below.

1.

The

50-pin

connector (jack) on the Option

Card has two hook-pins.

Remove the upper hook-pin, taking out the

screw.

Screw

Hook-pins

x50-pin connector

2. To attach the Amphenol 57JE type (plug) to

the connector, drive the accessory Screw at

the upper part, and fasten the accessory Wire

Tie around the lower hook-pin and the

Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.

When

connecting a connector of the type shown

below, unscrew the lower hook-pin, too. Then drive

both accessory Screws. .I

2-C-24

3.11 DID Card (KX-T96182)

KX-T96182

“DID” is marked.

1) Connection of the Central Office Line

View of TEL Jack (CO)

(L) and (H) are equipped for

the DID port No.4 only.

l

Insert this card into a free slot.

To Terminal Board or

Modular Jacks from the

Central Office (CO).

DID Port No.4

Use 2- conductor (See “Note” below.)

wiring cord

l

Insert the modular plug of the telephone line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the

modular jack on the DID card.

(Note)

The DID port No.4 is equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads.

If you connect a 4-conductor wiring cord to this port, the on/off status of the system can be detected

through “H” and “L” leads.

When the system is on : Ground is applied.

When the system is off : Ground is not applied.

2-c-25

(10991)

3.12 OPX Card (KX-T96185)

“OPX” is marked. ~

9

0

KX-T96185

;:

1

1) Connection to private lines

Single Line Telephone

l

Insert

this

card into a

free slot

22 AWG: Under 6 miles

R:Ring

T:Xp

rPX Port No.2

OPX Port No.3

OPX Port No.4

l

Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord (2-conductor

wiring) into the modular jack on the OPX card.

2) Connection to public lines

OPX Central

Office Line

View of TEL Jack (CO)

Jo.1

Use 2- conductor wiring cord

l

Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord (2-conductor

wiring) into the modular jack on the OPX card.

2-C-26

3) Connection to the OPX Power Unit (KX-T96186)

4

To earth

ground

Power Switch

(KX-196185)

12OV AC 60Hz .- .‘-

1. Insert the g-pin connector (plug) of the OPX c

Power Unit into the g-pin connector (jack) on

the OPX card.

2. Connect the frame of the OPX Power Unit to

earth ground properly to pro&t the unit.

3. Plug the AC Power cord of the OPX Power

Unit to the AC outlet.

4. Turn on the Power Switch on the OPX Power

Unit.

l

The Power indicator will be lit.

2-C-27

3.13 DISA Card (KX-T96191)

KX-T96191

“DISA” is marked. h

3.14 AGC Card (KX-T96193)

KX-T96193

l

Insert this card into a free slot.

“AGC” is marked.

. .

l

insert thts card into a free slot.

3.15 RMT Card (KX-T96196)

: -.

KX-T96196

s... . .

l

Insert this card into a free slot.

“RMT” is marked.

j-C-28

4.00 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

Any Single Line Telephone can be connected parallely with Proprietary Telephone as

follow:

Panasonic KX-J66

1

4-conductor

wiring cord I

Single tine Telephone

Kx-77020 KX-T61620

Kx-77030 Kx-T61630

ux-77050 Kx-T61650

Kx-77130

KX-T123220

KX-T30820 tWT123230

K&T30830

KX-T123230D

KX-T30850

KX-T123235

KX-T123250

Mote : 1 :‘,G- -.

The 6-conductor wiring cord and the Modular T Adaptor KX-J36 are required when one of

the following PITS telephoms is used for parallel connection. KX-I7130, KX-T123230D

and KX-T123235.

Not only a Single tine Telephone but an answering machine, a facsimile or a modem

(personal computer) can be connected parallely with certain PITS telephones.

Refer to Section 3-F-9.00 Parallel Connection of Extensions” for further information.

2-C-29

5.00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer

Fs.+E-: Fali--- e frarsfe: corr.ects a specific Single Line and PITS telephones to selected

t:;ir.kS

i” t!-

t event of system power failure.

The follow!rg ?lTS telephones can be used during power failure.

KX-T3C630, KX-T61630. KX-T123230, KX-Tl23230D, KX-T123235

For further information about Power Failure Transfer, refer to Section 14-H-1 .OO “Power

Failure Transfer Assignment.”

The Auxiliary Connection (see the illustration below) is required to implement this feature.

*% KX-T336 System changes the current connection to the Auxiliary connection

automattcally when the power supply stops.

-% While the DC power is available by the backup batteries even if the AC power fails,

KX-T336 System does not change the current connection to the Auxiliary connection.

t

1) Connection

T3 Tz Tj RI !+

R3

I

(Modular plug)

Modular

Jack

1

Modular Jack 3

Central Office Line option card Extension option card

(LCOT, GCOT) (SLC, HLC)

l

Insert the modular plugs of connection cords (&conductor wiring) to the modular jacks of

Central Office Line option cards (LCOT, GCOT) and Extension option cards (SLC, HLC).

% PLC card (Extension card) is not available with Power Failure Transfer.

2-C-30

2) Connection of Central Office Line and Extensions

53pin Connector

1

27

2

28

3 29

3”o

5

31

A..-

32

7

33

8

34

9 35

10

36

11

37

;:

13

39

14

40

15

41

16

42

17

43

18

44

.19

45

20

46

21

47

22

48

23

49

24

50

25

Modular Jack 7 w /

Modular Jack 3

50-pin Connector

26

27

228

3 29

4

30

5

31

362

7

33

8

34

9 35

10

36

11

37

12

38

Ai

14

40

15

41

16

42

17

-g- .

19

45

20

46

21

47

22

46

23

49

24

50

25

Central Office Line cards Extension cards

2-C-31

6.00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D)

1) Drive the two small screws (accessory) on the

bottom of the unit.

2) Place the Metal Plate so that the screw heads

insert into the slots as shown.

3) Slide the Metal Plate in the directions of the

arrows, and drive the screws.

Metal Plate

Insert Battery Adaptor into the Battery Adaptor

Compartment (Base Shelf).

Pull out the cords from the left side of the

Battery Adaptor.

i-

i

Slide the Metal Plate on Battery Adaptor

toward you and fix it to the Holder attached to

Base Shelf, as illustrated.

2-C-32

Automobile-type batteries

f

I I I II’?V

‘DC

I I I

(A) (W (Cl

c ’ t

Blue (-

Connect the Battery Adaptor with two

automobile-type batteries (12V DC X 2) using

Battery Adaptor tine Cable as shown.

Make sure of the polarities of batteries and

wires.

Make sure do not short the batteries and

wires.

To connect the two batteries, use accessory

wire.

-1

(A) Ground Wire

(6) Battery Adaptor Cord

(C) Battery Adaptor Line Cable

5.

.

Plug the Battery Adaptor cord to Backup Battery

connector on the Basic Shelf.

l

Connect the Ground Wire of Battety Adaptor to

Ground Wire Connector on the Base Shelf.

Eiicztr

Power Unit

Ground Wire

Connector

2-C-33

6. When one or two Expansion She;ves

iKL--3362S-3:

are installed, connect ano?ner Ba:?rs? Pz;_r-c- !tiX

A26D) with automobile tb E tiatrs-*+: - 2’~. r:.C < 2

following the same procecu:es f-z- : :; 5

Automobile type

batteries

(24V

DC)

Note :

Up to three pairs of automobile-type batteries can be connected to the KX-T336 System.

If power failure occurs, each pair of batteries supplies the power to each shelf (Basic,

Expansion 1, 2) connected respectively via Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D).

2-C-34

D. Connection of Optional

Peripheral Equipments

1 .OO Paging Equipment

Up to two paging equiprents customer-supplied) can be connected to the system as

illustrated below.

Use an RCA connector.

l

Output impedance: 6OOL2

Speaker

/ \

I \

0 Amplifier

Speaker

Paging equipment 1

aging equtpment 2

i

,

2-D-l

2.00 External Music Source

Up to two external music sources (customer-supplied) can be connected to the system as

illustrated below.

.)

. .-

Use

a two-conductor plug

(g/64 inch in diameter)

9 Input impedance

80

EXT MUSIC Jack 1

EXT MUSIC Jack 2

2-D-2

3.00 RS-232C Interface

The KX-T336 System provides two RS-232C interfaces.

These interfaces provide communication between the system and custorre: stipplied

devices such as data terminals and line printers.

RS-232C Port 1 (PROG) is used for system programming, diagnostics and exterra’

system database storage (Save/Load) functions, and Port 2 (SMDR) for Station Message

Detailed Recording (SMDR) only.

SMDF

Y-.

c

2-D-3

1) Pin Configuration (“PROG”, “SMDR”)

Circuit Type

Signal Name t-r

EIA Ccl-i7

1 FG

2 TXD

3 RXD

4 RTS

5 CTS

6 DSR

7

7 SG SG

8

8 DCD DCD

20 DTR

/

Frame Ground AA

Transmitted BA

Data . .

Received Data BB

Request To CA

Send

101

103

104

105

Clear To Send CB 106

Data Set Ready CC 107

Signal Ground AB

Data Carrier CF

Detect

Data Terminal CD

heady

102

109

108.2

. EIA (RS-232C) SIGNALS:

Frame Ground (FG);

Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground

conductor of the AC power cord.

Transmitted Data (TXD);.

l l l l l l l l l

(output)

Conveys signals from the unit to the printer.

A

“Mark” condition is held unless data or BREAK

signals are being transmitted.

Received Data (RXD);.

l l l l l l l l l l l

(input)

Conveys signals fmm the printer. --6%

Request To Send (RTS);.

l l l l l l l l

*(output)

This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON.

Clear To Send (CTS)?

l l l l l l l l l l l

(input)

The ON condition of circuit CTS indicates that the

printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The

unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive

data when circuit CTS is OFF.

Data Set Ready (DSR);.

l l l l l l l l l l

(input)

The ON condition of circuit DSR indicates the

printer is ready. Circuit DSR ON does not

indicate that communication has tjeen

established with the printer.

Signal Ground (SG);

Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all

interface signal.

-Data Terminal-Ready.@TR)-

l l l l l l

*(output)

This signal line is turned ON by the unit to

indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit DTR ON does

not indicate that communication has been

established with the printer. It is switched OFF

when the unit is OFF LINE.

Data Carrier Detect (DCD)*

l l l l l l l l

(input)

The ON

condition is an indication to data terminal

(DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.

2-D-4

3.01 Connection to the Printer

Serial Printer

Serial

Interface

( RS-232C )

l

Connect the R-S-232C connector of the printer to “SMDR”.

l

Cables must be shielded and the maximum cabling distance is 6.5 feet.

.

l

Connection Chart

RS-232C (SMDR) port on the Basic Shelf (KX-T336100) RS-232C

port on the printer

Circuit Type (EIA)

Signal Name bin No.

Pin No. . -

Signal Name Circuit Type (EIA)

AA FG 1 1 FG AA

BA TXD 2 ) 3

RXD BB

BB RXD

3 < 2 TXD BA

cc DSR 6 < 20 DTR CD

AB SG 7 7 SG AB

CD DTR 20 5 CTS CB

A

I

)

) 6 DSR cc

) 8 DCD CF

2-D-5

-“. -,.“’ .\- .) .- .\\ .

3.02 Connection to the Data Terminal

Serial Interface

(RS232C)

l

Connect the RS-232C connector of the data terminal to the “PROG”.

l

Cables must be shielded and the maximum length of the cable is 6.5 feet.

0

‘

. /

0

e

. /

I

l

Connection Chart

RS-232C sort (PROG) on the Basic Shelf

\

Panasonic data terminal ; KX-D4930, etc.

If you connect this unit to a Panasonic Data Terminal, the Communication Parameter

Transmit XON/XOFF on the Data Terminal must be set to “YES.”

For further details, see the Operating Instructions of the Data Terminal.

2-D-6

E. Installation of Attendant Console

1 .OO Configuration

1) Front View

Keyboard cord

CRT unit

Base unit

-...

Keyboard

(Option)

2) Rear View

Jack for attendant console

line cord.

Reset button

AC power cord

2-E-l

3) Left Side View

. .

i

Power Switch

Jack for handset cord

4) Right Side View

\

Ringer volume selector

Jack for handset cord L Speaker volume control knob

2-E-2

2.00 Attendant Console Assembly

Power indicator

CRT unit

Plug for connection

Plug for connecting the

CRT unit is connected

here.

Base unit

Keyboard (Option)

Name 1 Quantity

CRT unit

Brightness adjustment

knob

CRT unit cord

Attendant Console Line cord

(2-conductor wiring)

Ferrite core

2-E-3

3.00 Handset Connection

Base unit

Piug /

Handset cord Plug I Plug

Handset cord

‘1.

Plug the coiled

handset

cord into the jack labeled YO HANDSET” either right side or

left side of the base unit.

2. Plug the other end of the coiled cord into the handset, and then hang up.

% You can use either of the right and left jacks.

:-:

2-E-4

4.00 Installation and Removal of CRT Unit

4.01 CRT Unit Installation

1) Before connecting the CRT unit to the Base unit, be sure to attach the Ferrite core to the

CRT unit cord as shown in the figure below.

(Opening the Ferrite core)

(Attaching the Ferrite core to the CRT unit cord)

Ferrite core

2) Plug the CRT unit cord into the connector (“CRT CONNECTOR”) on the base unit.

I

CRT unit -

II

Connect so that

the arrows face

each other.

Base unit

2-E-5

3) Insert the two rrale ccmponents of the bottom front surface of the CRT unit to the two

female comx~a~!s t: :he to3 front si;tiace of the base unit.

-CRT unit

Ferrite

core

4) Set rear portion of the CRT unit slowly onto the base unit until the stop fixture holds the

CRT unit securely. .

‘Base unit

2-E-6

4.02 CRT Unit Removal

7-

Confirm

that

the AC power cord has been removed.

1. Press the stop fixture toward you and hold it pressed, then lift up the rear portion

of the CRT unit.

2. Unplug the CRT unit cord from the base unit connector.

2-E-7

5.00 Keyboard

1)

Connection

/)i---J ,~

Base unit(bottom panel)

Insert the plug of the keyboard cord into the jack (“KEY BOARD CONNECTOR”)

on the base unit.

Cord clamper

2)

To disconnect the piug,

pull the plug while keeping

the hook pused.

Fasten the keyboard plug securely with the cord clamper.

3)

Stand

\ .

Stands are attached to the bottom of the keyboard so that the keyboard incline can

be adjusted.

Set the stands for maximum ease in key operation.

2-E-8

6.00 Connection with KX-T336 System

\

7

\

0

I

h

0

\

4

J

KX-T336 System

I

l

Insert the modular plug of the attendant console line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the

modular jack (“TO AT Lc”) on the base unit.

% For connection on the KX-T336 System side, see page 2-C-9.

2-E-9

7.00 AC Power Cord Connection

.

!

% Connect the AC power cord only after all attendant console connections have ke? cor:pleted.

To AC outlet (12OV

AC!GOHz).

l

Insert the AC power cord into the AC outlet (12OV AC/GOHz).

Attention!

l

Hold the AC power cord plug to insert or remove the AC power cord.

l

Do not insert or remove the AC power cord with a wet hand.

l

Do not forcefully twist or pull on the AC power cord, and do not leave it only partially inserted.

l

When connecting the AC power cord, be sure to always establish ground wiring...

2)

Power switch

,_-.

l

Turn on the power switch.

(The power indicator lights and the initial screen appears on the display.)

2-E-l 0

8.00 Various Adjustments

1) Display brightness adjustment

Brightness adjustment knob

l

The brightness adjustment knob is used to adjust the brightness of the display.

Turn the knob to the right for increasing brightness until the proper brightness is

established.

2) SP-PHONE volume adjustment

l

Volume control knob is used to adjust the volume level of the call through the SP-

PHONE. Adjust this volume for maximum ease in listening.

- %-

3) Ringer volume adjustment

r

l

The ringer volume selector is used to adjust the ringer

volume.

This selector can be switched among three stages: OFF, LOW and HIGH. Set for

the most appropriate volume.

2-E-l 1

F. Starting Up the KX-T336 System

1 .OO System Power-Up Procedure

+S Complete and check all installation procedures before connecting the AC power

cord (packaged separately).

1. First insert the AC power cord into the AC power cord connector on the back of the

base shelf as shown in Figure 1.

2. Then insert the other end of the AC power cord into the AC outlet (12OV AC/GOHz)

as shown in Figure 2.

3. Turn on the Main Power Switch on the base shelf.

4. Turn on the power switch on the power unit of each shelf.

l

The power indicator on the power unit will light.

Note :

j Each shelf may be powered down individually, without powering down the entire

system.

AC outlet (12OV AC/GOHz) Figure 2.

1.

2-F-l

2.00 CPU Rotary-Switch Features

r

LED

1

(CPU failure)

LED 2 (Battery power down)

RESET button RESET button

Operation Operation Switch 0 to 9 (MODE Switch 0 to 9 (MODE

System Administration Device System Administration Device

Selection Switch: 0 to 9 (SYSTEM) Selection Switch: 0 to 9 (SYSTEM)

I I

2.01

Operation

Switch (MODE)

-

h Operation BVOG ,

CowauPT SYS nJao*\

Mode tk T& liVith sYstm MemoW Without System Memory

I

6

I

a

I

9

On-line

Off-line

Starts up the system with current system

programming data I

. System programming data

is

verified logically -+ on-line

l

System programming data is not

verified logically + off-line

Starts up the system with current system Starts up the system with default

programming data values

Starts up the system with current system Enters to off-line mode without

programming data initializing the data

._.. (Power faiture transfer status)

Special Operation

(Examination on the finished product)

Holds the current system programming data

Assigns default values automatically and “System Installation” screen is displayed

(Installation)

Initializes the current system programming data and “System Installation” screen

is.displayed (Installation)

Holds the current programming data and ‘System Intallation” screen is displayed

(Enters to “Password Entry” screen compulsorily)

Reserved for future expansion

(Functions same as “0”)

Reserved for future expansion

(Functions same as “0”)

2-F-2

[Note]

a) When you start up the system after installation, the Operation Switch (,MODE) should be set to “5” or

“6.”

l No.5

. . ..When you program the system data based on the factory programmed default values.

l

No.6 . . ..When you program the system data without the factory programmed default values.

b) When system programming is finished, the Operation Switch (MODE) should be set to “0,” “1” or “2.”

l No.0

. . . . . When CPU runaway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is

pressed, the system enters to on-line mode if system programming data is verified logically, or

the system enters to off-line mode if system programming data is not verified logically.

l No.1

. . ..When CPU runway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is

! pressed, default value is loaded and the system enters to on-line mode.

If system programming data is not lost, reset-routine will be activated and enters to on-line

mode with the current system programming data.

l

No.2 . . ..When CPU runaway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is

pressed, the system enters to off-line mode with the current System programming data.

c) With System Memory

System memory is provided.

d) Without System Memory

System memory is not provided.

e) Off-line

It is available to perform system data programming but call processing and functional test are not

i available in off-line mode.

..a

1) Power failure transfer

Connects preassigned CO lines and extensions directly, bypassing the system.

g) After you entered the system administration mode, keep the following considerations in mind when

setting the Operation Switch. - -. ~. ._

.-

9

No.5 . . ..Current programming data will be defaulted.

l

No.6 . . ..Current programming data will be removed.

2-F-3

Operation Switch and Screen Display

Operation Switch Backup Clock Setting Data On-line/Off-line Patterns of Screen

Data Display (Below)

0 Without - 3

1

3 8

2

4

7

5

Not assigned yet - On-line 3

With Already assigned 4

Not assigned yet 3

Without Already assigned Ott-line 4

3

With Not assigned yet

Already assigned On-line 4

Not assigned yet

-- Already assigned

Not assigned yet

-- Already assigned Off-line

-- --

(Note) Once you exit the ‘System Ins:allation” screen and “Date & Time Set Up” screen, these

screens are not displayed aga%.

Patterns of Screen Display

Pattern 1 El-i=/ > Password > Date & Time. > Main Menu

Pattern 3 Et-------+ Password > Date & Time > Main Menu

Pattern 4 it-------~~t--------~~l

2-F-4

2.02 System Administration Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM)

I

0

Pre-Programmed device is assigned w\ 5-T kwo WI))

1

Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as UO”) 04c;%

2 VT220 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily

3 Dumb is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily

4 ATT1 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily

5 ATT2 is assigned as the System Administration Device compu!sorily

6 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “On)

7 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)

8 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as .O”)

9 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)

a) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “2” through “5,” System

Administration Device will be assigned compulsorily regardless of the system

programming. Default setting is VT220. (Refer to the table above)

o) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “0,” “1,” or ‘6” through “9,” pre-

programmed device becomes valid as the System Administration Device.

It is possible to change the System Administration Device assignment compulsorily

by pressing the RESET button after selecting the desired switch position, if pre-

programmed System Administration Device is not available due to the hardware

troubles or something.

.

2-F-5

2.03 Operation Sequence for System Starting Up

START

>1

1 Connect the device to I [SYSTEM=43 s”i ;;;

I

SIO#l (upper side) 1 I

Attendant Console

,No -I

MODE=5 MODE=6

I

1

)/Off-line mode

When system data is destroyed, the

system enters to off-line mode

destroyed, start up the

system with default

MODE=0 va’ues MODE=1 MODE=2

I

1 Press the RESET button 1

I I I I

‘B*onw,in;l;;e : Of=;;~;;;,i,

SYSTEM : System Admmlstratlon Device

2-F-6

(Example) The following flow chart shows the operation sequence for System

Starting Up with default values using

Panasonic KX-D4930 in VT mode.

Power ON reset or Press

the

RESET button

Confirm the

Initial screen A

\/

MODE=0

SYSTEM=2

Press the RESET button . .

MODE : Operation Switch

SYSTEM : System Administration Device

Selection Switch

l

To start up the system using Panasonic KX-D4930 in Dumb

mode, set

SYSTEM switch to “3” in above sequence.

2-F-7

Section 3

System Features and Operation

(Section 3)

System Features and

Contents

Operation

Page

A Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .._................................................. . . . . . .._...................... 3-A-l

B Basic Features 3-B-l

. . . . . .._.......................

. . . . ..-.............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..s-..........

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

11.00

12.00

13.00

z. &. 14.00

15.00

16.00

C

Outgoing Call Features . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__.___.....__........................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-c-1

Flexible Numbering.. .............................................................................. 3-B-l

Directory Number (DN) .......................................................................... 3-B-5

Floating Directory Number (FDN) .......................................................... 3-B-6

Tenant Service ............................................... .._ .................................... 3-B-7

Operator.. ............................................................................................... 3-B-8

Class of Service (COS)

..........................................................................

Group. .................................................................................................... z-i-ip

- -

7.01 Intercom Group.. .......................................................................... 3-B-11

7.02 Call Pickup Group ........................................................................ 3-B-l 2

7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group ........................................ 3-B-l 2

7.04 Paging Group. ............................................................................. 3-B-l 3

7.05 Trunk Group.. .............................................................................. 3-B-13

Night Service ......................................................................................... 3-B-14

8.01 Directed Night Answer ................................................................. 3-B-l 5

8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA) .................................................... 3-B-16

8.03 Flexible.Night Service .................................................................. 3-B-l 7

8.04 Fixed Night Service ..................................................................... 3-B-l 7-1

.~

8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode ...................................................... 3-B-l 8

Mixed Station Capacities ....................................................................... 3-B-l 9

Variable Time-Gut .................................................................................. 3-B-20

Lockout .................................................................................................. 3-B-21

Automatic Station Release .................................................................... 3-B-21

Distinctive Dial Tone .............................................................................. 3-B-22

Distinctive Busy Torte..

................................. .............................. 3-B-23

Confirmation Tone :...:” z..

...................................................................... ‘-3-B-24 .............

Tone and Ringing Patterns .................................................................... 3-B-25

1.00 Toll Restriction .......................................................................................

1 .Ol Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access ................................

1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System.. ....

1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct

Trunk Access. ..............................................................................

1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access ....

1 .05 Operator/International Call Restriction ........................................

1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction ...............................................................

1.07 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction .............................................................

2.00 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ..........................................................

3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion .........................................................................

4.00 Automatic Pause Insertion ....................................................................

3-c-1

3-C-2

3-c-5

3-c-7

3-c-1 0

3-c-1 3

3-c-1 5

3-C-20

3-C-21

3-C-36

3-c-37

Page - .-.

D Receiving Features.. ... . .................................................................................... 3-D-1

1.00 Attendant Console (ATT) Operation ...................................................... 3-D-1

1 .Ol Load Sharing ............................................................................... 3-D-2-l

1.02 Simultaneous Ringing..

................................................................ 3-D-2-2

1.03 Interconsole IRNA ....................................................................... 3-D-2-3

2.00 Attendant Console-less Operation ........................................................ 3-D-3

2.01 Direct In Line (DIL) ...................................................................... 3-D-3

2.02 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) .......................................... 3-D-4

2.03 Direct Inward Dialing (DID). ......................................................... 3-D-7

2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.. ............. 3-D-8

2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-General..................................... 3-D-9

2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with/without OGM ..................... 3-D-11

2.07 Private CO (PCO). ....................................................................... 3-D-15

2.08 Single CO (SCO). ........................................................................ 3-D-16

2.09 Group CO (GCO)

......................................................................... 3-D-l 7

2.10 Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment .................................................. 3-D-1 7-l

2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment ........................................................... 3-D-l 7-4

3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment ................................................................ 3-D-18

3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment-No Ringing .................................... 3-D-18

3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment-Delayed Ringing ........................... 3-D-18

4.00 Discriminating Ringing.. ......................................................................... 3D-19

5.00 Station Hunting :.I.. ........... ...

;.;. .............................................................. 3-D-20

5.01 Station Hunting-Circular .............................................................. 3-D-20

5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal ............................................................. 3-D-21

E Holding Features.. ............................................................................................ 3-E-l

1.00 Music on Hold ....................................................................................... 3-E-l

2.06 Held Call Reminder..: .%. ............................... :r.; ..;. ................................. 3-E-2 ;L .

3.08 Transfer Recall ..................................................................................... 3-E-3

F Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-F-l

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

11 .oo

12.00

13.00

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .......................................... 3-F-l

0ff Premise Extension (OPX) ................................................................ 3-F-3

Walking Station.. .................................................................................... 3-F-3

outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ...................... 3-F-5

Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA). .................................................... 3-F-8

Rerouting ............................................................................................... 3-F-9

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ....................................... 3-F-l 0

CO Busy Cut .......................................................................................... 3-F-11

Parallel Connecttin of Extensions.. ....................................................... 3-F-l 2

Voice Processing System (VPS). ........................................................... 3-F-l 3

10.01 Voice Mail Integration ................................................................ 3-F-15

10.02 DTMF-Tone Integration ............................................................. 3-F-21

Call Accounting Summary ..................................................................... 3-F-52

Waiting for Second Dial tone ................................................................. 3-F-62

Timed Reminder with CGM (Wake-up Call) .......................................... 3-F-64

A. Preparation

This section provides the basic information on

each of the system features which are

programmed at system level.

System features are those that affect the entire

operation of the system.

In this section, system features are divided into

the following five categories.

. Basic Features

l

Outgoing Call Features

l

Receiving Features

l

Holding Features

l

Other Features

3-A-l

B. Basic Features

1 .OO Flexible Numbering

Description

This system comes wi?h a varier! S! serdli+-%

and

the

feature numbers used wr,en exec,:.?g

these services can be set as required.

Feature numbers can be from one to four clglts.

‘utilizing numbers “0” through “9” as well as --”

and “#.”

Directory Numbers (DN) can be three or four

digits in length, and it is acceptable for some to

have three digits and others four digits.

When three-digit DN’s are used, any number can

be set as the initial digit; when four-digit DN’s are

:) used, any numbers can be set as the initial two

digits.

The feature numbers

are

set in the “System-

Numbering Plan” screens.

Two default parameters sets are provided for the

feature numbers and when either is used in its

original form, the Numbering Plan option in the

“System-Operation” screen is set to “Fixed 1” or

. “Fixed 2.”

In this case, the settings cannot be changed in

the “System-Numbering Plan” screen. When a

feature number is to be changed, select Flex in

the “System-Operation”, Numbering Plan before

making the change in the “System-Numbering

Plan.”

.)

Programming

~~

Conditions

Ttie followings are

examples

oi feature number

conflicts:

Examples: 2 and 21, 32 and 321, etc.

Conversely, the following numbers can be used

without conflict:

Examples: 2 and 3,3 and 41: 41 and 42,450

and 451, etc.

=*” and “#” cannot be used for extension

numbers (extension blocks).

When u*” and “#I” are included in a feature

number, it will not be possible to execute the

corresponding feature using a dial pulse type of

Single Line Telephone (SLT).

Only “0”, ‘1” to “9”, u*A” and “#” are valid for

entering feature numbers into One Touch dial

buttons.

When “FLASH”, y-m ,

“PAUSE” and “SECRET” are

included into feature numbers, reorder tone is

sent and the features cannot be executed.

“V cannot be used for the feature numbers listed

below, for those features require r$” as a

delimiter when setting the feature:

“Call Forwarding-to TrunK

“Pickup Dialing Programming”

“Speed Dialing-Station”

The feature numbers which have been set in the

“System-Numbering Plan* screens can be used

when dial tone is heard. However, feature

number for “Account Code” may be used at times

other

than

when dial tone is heard.

3-B-l

In addition to the feature numbers which can be

set in System-Nun&ring Plan,” fixed feature

numbers are prcv&d ant these are shown in

the following table

Fixed Feature Numbers

Functor!

While busy tone is heard

Call-back (for extensions only)

Busy Override

While Do Not Disturb tone is heard

DND Override

When handset is on-hook (PITS only)

Time display/date display switching

Background music onioff

Day/Night mode display

While talking to doorphone

Open the door

Others

Extension time and data display mode

switching

Account code delimiter

Account code delimiter (for dial pulse type

SLT only)

Account code re-input

-I-

I

Numbs

6

1

*

1

#

5

*

#

99

*

l

The feature numbers which are set in the

“System-Numbering Plan” are listed on the

following pages.

._ --.

--

w

e..

F F

3-B-2

Flexible feature Number6

Operator Call (Specific)

ARS/Locaf CO Line Access

Trunk Group 01-08 Access

I - -

9 9

81 81

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access 82 I 82

Trunk Group 17-24 Access I 83 83 I

1 1. dl I

Speed Dialino - System

Doorphone Call (l-4)

Speed Dialing - Station

External Paoina

1

40

42

I 40

I

42

41

I

41

4-J

I

I 45

I

44

I

44 I

I ss I 45

46 A6

Station Paaino

cxternar ragtng Answer

Station Paaina Answer

------.- -a

Night Answer 1

Nioht Answer 2

s-------- - -

Dial Call Pickup

HoM ExtenskSK’Retrieve

Redinl

. .--.-.

External Feature Access

Account Code

I

50 50

u # *#

i

Do Not Disturb Set

Call Fowardinq/Do Not Disturb Cancel

Dial Call Pickup Deny Set

Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel

I ++, ++1

##O MO

61’ 61+

I 61# 61#

3-B-3

(30393)

Flexible feature NL’clbers

Remote Tmed Reminder Confirm

Remote Timed Reminder Set

Remote Timed Reminder Cancel

I 73 -

7*1 -

7# -

3-B-4

(30393)

4

2.00 Directory Number (DN)

Description <Example>

Directory numbers are the software type logical

numbers which are programmed to match the

hardware type physical numbers (port numbers)

attached to ports of extensions.

Accordingly, directory numbers are extension

numbers.

System-Numbering Plan

F--S------------------------‘----r---~---~----~----,

1 No. 1 Feature ; DGll DG21 DG31 DG41

;- ’

T------------------------;----:---;---~----~---~

; 1 ; 1 st Hundred Block Extension ; 5 f : - ; - ;-

r--T----------------- -------,----r---1--- -r----l

; 2 ;2nd Hundred Block Extension ; 6 ; ; - ; - i

r--+------------------------t ----p---*----p---,

1

Directory numbers are assigned in “Configuration-

DN Assignment” to be three or four digits.

Only numeric characters “0 to 9” can be used as a

Directory Number.

D’

lrec o

t ry number setting follows the setting in

“System-Numbering Plan”, 1 st Hundred Block

Extension through 16th Hundred Block Extension.

Programming

I

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

Numbering Plan (l/9)

I 3 !3rd Hundred Block Extension i 7 : 0 : - f - I

c--+------------------------i------~---~----~---~

i 4 /4th Hundred Block Extension i 8 [ 0 i - i - i

DNs from 8000

to

8099

are assignable.

DNs from 7000 to 7099 are assignable.

DNs from 600 to 699 are assignable.

DNs from 500 to 599 are assignable. p

‘Configuration-DN Assignment” 9-c-3.00 lo-c-3.00

. “System-Numbering Plan (l/9) (2/g)“, 9-D-6.01 10-C-10.00

1 st Hundred Block Extension 9-D-6.02

.

I

16th Hundred Block

Extension I I I . .

Conditions

There are two types of directory numbers: the

Primary Directory Number (PDN) and the

Secondary Directory Number (SDN).

For further details of PDN, refer to Section 4-B-3.01

“PDN Butto??’ For SDN, refer to’Se&ion 4-B-3.02

“SDN Button.”

If you assign only one digit in “System-Numbering

Plan”, 1 st Hundred Block Extension through 16th

Hundred Block Extension, you can assign three-

digit DNs which start with the pre-assigned digit in

“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

If you assign leading two digits in “System-

Numbering Plan,” you can assign fourdigit DNs

which start with the pre-assigned two digits in

“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

3-B-5

3.00 Floating Directory Number

FW

Description

It is possible to assign virtual directory numbers

to resources and make them appear to be

extensions. Those directory numbers are

defined as Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).

For example, if an operator receives an incoming

CO call for Remote Administration, the operator

can transfer the call to Remote Administration

resource using the FDN, in the same way as if

the operator transfers an incoming CO call to an

extension, that is, if the operator is PITS, by

pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the

FDN. ^.

FDN can be assigned to the followings:

1. Pilot number for UCD groups 01 to 32

2. General Operator Call (two FDN’s can be

programmed)

3. Attendant Console number (Al7 , AlT2)

4. Remote Administration resource

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

‘Special Attended-UCD (l/2)“, 9-K-3.01 1 O-WLOC

FDN

‘System-Operation (l/3)“, 9-D-l .Ol 1O-c-4.00

FDN for General Operator Call

“System-Operation (2/3)“, 9-D-l .02

Remote Directory Number

“Extension-Attendant Console ._ ..I 9-G-4.01 10-&28.00

(l/2)-, DN

Conditions

FDN setting must follow the assigmmer! z!

“System-Numbering Plan”,

1

st Hundred Bloc4

Extqsion through 16th Hundred Block

Extension, as well as DN setting.

3-B-6

4.00 Tenant Service

Description

A single system can be used as if two systems

were available.

This enables the configuration of two systems

which, in each case, are suited to a different

customer.

(Customer

1)

(Customer 2)

Some of resourcescan be divided up between

the tenants and others are used in common.

A list of resources in each classification is given

below.

[Resources which can be divided up]

l

Trunk Groups

l

Attendant Consoles

l

Extensions

l

Direct inward System Access (DISA)

l

Automatic Gain Control (AGC). _

l

Number of Speed Dialing-System

l

External pagers

l

Doorphones

l

Background Music or Music on Hold

l

Number of Call Park-System parking zones

l

Number of Flexible Absent Messages

l

Number of possible Message Waiting

entrjes

. Passwords (Walking COS, PlTS‘zystem

Programming)

[Common resources]

l

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

l

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

l

Numbering Plan

l

Remote operation control

l

Class of Service (COS)

l

Administration Device

l

Toll restriction tables

To enable Tenant Service, set “System-

Operation’, Tenant Service to “Yes.”

“System-Tenanr, programming is used to

determine how the resources will be divided up

between the tenants.

Programming

11

Conditions

The Night Mode can be operated separately

for

each tenant.

Calling to extensions in the other tenant can be

enabled by setting “System-Tenant”, Inter-Tenant

Calling to yes.”

However, even when this function has been set

to “Yes,” it is not possible to call the Attendant

Console in the other tenant. . .

3-B-7

5.00 Operator

Description

The system allows the operator to answer,

monitor and control the incoming calls.

Up to two operators (operator 1 and 2) can be

assigned in the system.

If tenant service is employed, up to two operators

can be assigned to each tenant individually.

Not only the ATT (attendant console) operator but

the extension user can be assigned as an

operator.

“Operator 1” must always be selected when only

one operator is assigned.

If an attendant console is connected to the

system, the operator assignment should be

arranged as follows.

(When one attendant console is connected)

operator 1 Fj or p

Operator 2 extension

(When two attendant consoles are connected)

Operator 1 1 AlT 1

Operator 2 I ATr I

The operator assignment can be done in the

system programming “System-Operation (3/3).”

dperatdr 1 and O$&tor 2.

The following list shows the special functions available with each operator.

14 Local Alarm Indication

0 0

X

15 Remote Timed Reminder

0 0* 0’

l In case of an extension, only a PITS with display is available. 0 : available

x : not available

3-B-8

(40993)

Programming

System Programmq Reference

VT / Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)“,

Operator

1

Operator 2

“System-Tenant”,

Operator 1 (Tenant 2)

Operator 2 (Tenant 2)

9-D1.03 10-c-5.00

902.00 10-c-5.00

Conditions

l

Tenant Service

If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and

2) can have unique operator assignment

individually. that is, up

to

four operators can be

assigned to the system.

In this case, the operator assignment should be

arranged as follows.

Tenant

1

Tenant 2

Operator 1

Operator 2

The operator assignment can be done in the

system programming as follows.

(Tenant 1)

“System-Operation (3!3)“, Operator

1

and

Operator 2.

(PITS users) .\

Section 4-F-l .Ol “Unscreened Call Transfer to

Station”

&t;; 4-F-l .02 “Screened Call Transfer to

. ”

Section 4-F-l -06 “Unscreened Call Transfer to

Attendant Console”

(SLT users) ..ri

Section 5-D-l .Ol “Unscreened Call Transfer to

Station”

Section 5-D-l -02 “Screened Call Transfer to

Station”

Section 5-D-l .04 “Unscreened Call Transfer to

Attendant Console”

l

Hold

(Tenant 2) The extension user cannot hold a call with an

“System-Tenant”, Operator

1

and Operator 2. attendant console operator.

l

Invalid Operator Assignment

The following arrangement is invalid in the

operator assignment whether tenant service is

employed or not.

Operator

1

fi[

Operator 2 ATT

l

Operator Call

The extension user can call the operator in the

system by dialing the feature number for

“Operator Call (General)” or “Operator Call

(Specific) .”

For further information, refer to the following:

(PITS users)

Section 4-C-l 0.60 “Operator Call”

(SLT users)

Section 5-A-8.00 “Operator Call.”

l

Transfer

The extension user can transfer a call to the

operators (Attendant Console or Extension) by

both screened and unscreened call transfers.

For further information, refer to the following.

3-B-9

(30393)

6.00

Class of Service (COS)

Description

16)

The functions executed by the extensions users

can be restricted by the COS No. assigned for

each extension user.

A total of 32 classes of service are available.

A Class of Service is assigned to every extension

in “Extension-Station”, Class of Service. The

available options are set in “System-Class of

Service”.

17)

Programming

18)

System Programming

“System-Class of Service”

“Extension-Station”,

Class of Service

Heference

VT Dumb

9-D-4.01

lo-c-7.00

9-D-4.02 1o-c-8.00

9-G-l .Ol lo-c-22.00

19)

Conditions

A list of the items which can be set in “System-

. Class of Service’ are given below!

1) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode)

2) Outgoing call restrictiin level (Night mode)

3) Maximum number of digits allowed for a CO

call

4) The ability to allow or deny Call Forwarding

and Do Not Disturb

5) The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the

called station

6) The ability to forward or transfer a call to an

outside party.

7) Forced account code operation-enable/disable

8) BSS/OHCA override operation-enable/disable

9) BSS/OHCA deny-enable/disable

10) Executive Busy Override of called party-

enable/disable

restriction/no access

11) Executive Busy Override deny-enable/disable

12) Electronic Station Lock Out/Walking COS-

enable/disable

13) Walking Station-enable/disable

14) The ability to perform PITS System

Programming-enable/disable

15) ARS/Local toll restriction-with restriction/no

Trunk groups available for an outgoing CO

call when the outgoing call is made by

specifying a trunk group. This setting is not

valid for one-touch CO line outgoing calls,

outgoing calls by specifying a Virtual Trunk

Group, and local CO line outgoing calls

including Automatic Route Selection calls.

Special carrier access-enable/disable

(Setting of accessible carrier when outgoing

calls are made by specifying Virtual Trunk

Group)

Setting of accessible paging group with

station paging

Setting of accessible external pager with

external paging

‘\

. .

-.

3-B-l 0

7.00 Group

7.01 Intercom

Group

Description

Conditions

Each extension

is assigned to an intercom group

‘1 !o 8). The extension users in the same intercom

group can call each other by dialing the intercom

number (one or two digits) using ICM button on a

PITS telephone. It is also possible to make an

intercom call by dialing u*” and the directory

number (three or four digits) B

vt*

Refer to Section 4-C-5.02 “Intercom Calling” for

further information.

If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of

each intercom group is determined by the

programming in “Group-ICM/Paging Group”

screen.

There is no limit on the number of extensions that

each Intercom Group can include, but an

extension user can be assigned to only one

Intercom Group.

1 The intercom group affiliation of each extension

user is determined in the “Extension-Station”, ICM

Group and the intercom numbers are set by

“Extension-Station”, Intercom Number.

All extensions (PITS and SLT) must belong to one

of eight intercom groups.

Intercom numbers are composed of one or two

digits. This means that there are a maximum of

100 intercom numbers (00 through 99) per

intercom group.

Extensions belonging to different intercom

groups can have the same intercom number.

Since intercom numbers cannot be given to SLT, it

_ is only possible to call these telephones by using

their directory numbers.

Also,

since SLTs are not

provided with ICM buttons they can only call PITS

using the directory numbers.

The relationship between intercom’groups and

paging groups is determined by programming the

‘Group-Call-Pickup Group” screen.

Programming

?

i

System Programming

UGroup-kl/P&q Group”

“Group-Call Pickup Group”,

ICM

“Extension-Station”,

Intercom Number

ICM Group

Reference

VI- Dumb

9-E-2.00 10-C-l 6.00

9-E-3.00 1 O-C-l 7.00

9-G-l .Ol 10-c-22.00

.I

-

3-B-1

1

7.02 Call Pickup Group 7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)

Description

Group

Extensions belonging to a particular intercom

group can be divided into call pickup groups

which can execute the

Dial Call Pickup feature.

The call pickup group belonging to an intercom

group is set by programming in the “Group-Call

Pickup Group”, ICM.

Description

It is possible to execute

UCD

functions in a group

composed of one or more Call Pickup Groups.

Such a group is called a UCD group.

The “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen

determines whic.J pickup group(s) will be in the

UCD group. A

Up to 32 UCD groups can be assigned in the

system.

The UCD group and the call pickup group

configuring the UCD group must belong to the

same intercom group.

See Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD)-without OGM” and Section 3-D-2.06

“Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with OGM” for

further information about the UCD functions.

See the previous Section 3:B-7.02 “Call Pickup

Group” for details on Call Pickup Groups.

See Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for

further information about ICM Groups.

Up to 32 call pickup groups can be assigned in

the system.

Extensions programmed into call pickup groups

are set in the “Extension-Station”, Pickup Group.

It is not necessary for all extensions to be in a

pickup group.

See Section 4-D-3.01 “Dial Call Pickup” for

further information about the Dial Call Pickup

feature.

Programming

.~~I Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

Conditions

Different call

pickup

groups can have the same

UCD and/or paging groups.

See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for details

on Paging Groups.

See the following Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call

Distribution (UCD) Group” for details on UCD

Groups.

“Group-Call Pickup Group”,

UCD

1 9-E-3.00 1

10-C-17.00 (

Conditions

None

3-B-12

7.04 Paging

Group

Description Description

It IS F;ssible :a execure paging functions in a

grol;p

composed of one or more pickup

groups.

Such a group IS called a “Paging Group.”

Up to eight paging groups can be assigned in the

system.

When Tenant Service is employed, the “Group-

ICM/Paging Group” screen sets which tenant the

paging group belongs to.

The ‘Group-Call Pickup Group” screen sets

which pickup group(s) make up a paging group.

To

suppon efficient utilization of trunks, they can

be grouped together (up to 16 groups) if all

trunks in the group perform the same function.

The following six kinds of trunk groups can be

assigned in the system.

The items listed below are set in the “Group-

Trunk Group” screen.

Programming

(4

@I

(c)

(d)

(e)

1 f)

19)

(h)

;;;

(k)

(1)

I;)

(0)

(P)

(4)

(0

(9

0)

Trunk group type

Trunk group name

Tenant selection

Trunk group direction

Incoming destination (Day)

Incoming destination (Night)

Intercept Routing (Day)

Intercept Routing (Night)

Toll restriction level

Toil restriction table

Dialing plan selection

Disconnect time selection

Pause time selection

Hookswitch flash time selection

DID digit modification table selection

Entry of PBX access code (No restriction)

Entry of PBX access

code (Restriction)

Restriction

time on CO-CO calls

DIL (I:N) destination

Maximum number of digits after External

Feature Access

CO appearance type

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

Conditions

If tenant service is employed, pickup groups

which can be used to configure a paging group

are limited,within the same tenant.

See Section 4-H-l .OO “Paging” for further

information about paging features.

7.05 Trunk Group

(u)

The “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group determines

which trunk group the CO line belongs to.

Programming

System Programming Referenoe

VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group”

g-E-1.01 lO-CL14.00

g-E-1.02 10-C-15.00

“Trunk-CO Line”. Trunk Grow 9-F-1.00

10-C-18.00

Conditions

A single CO line cannot belong to more than one

trunk

group.

3-B-l 3

8.00 Night Service

Description

Special arrangements are required to handle

attendant-seeking incoming CO calls during period

when the operator at Attendant Console is not

available, for example at night and on weekends.

Attendant-seeking incoming CO calls will be

redirected to the designated extension an&or a

group of extensions (Directed Night Answer)or will

ring an external pager (Universal N.ght Answer) in

night mode.

1. Treatment of attendant-seekina incomina

CQ

calls in niaht mode

(Directed Night Answer)

Used to redirect incoming attendant-seeking CO

calls to the designated extension or a group of

extensions automatically in night mode.

(Universal Night Answer (UNA)) Erl

2. Treatment of other calls in niaht mode

DID and PC0 calls are not assignable to Night

Service.

A DID call will ring at the appropriate extension

and PC0 call will ring at designated extension

regardless of Day/Night mode.

The following list shows the relationship

between incoming Mode (Day) and assignable

Incoming Mode (Night) of the Trunk Group.

/ lhcomini Mode (Day) 1 IhCOg (Night) /

Allows any extension user in the system to

Incoming Mode (Day) Incoming Mode (Night)

DISA Day Mode

answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls

ringing at an external pager. by dialing the

feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.” i-lI$Fi EFB~E / ;

Note: Incoming attendant-seeking CO calls can

be redirected to the Remote Maintenance

Resource for the System Administration. To continue the same Incoming Mode for a

Night Answer Destination can be administered trunk group both in Day and Night, set

either by fifed mode (Fixed Night Se&e) or “Incoming Mode (Night)” to Day Mode.

flexible mode (Flexible Night Service). (Note)

(Flexible Night Service) if Incoming Mode (Day) of a trunk group is set

Allows the Operator 1 to change the pre- to ATT, Day Mode can not be selected for

assigned night answer destination- Incoming Mode (Night).

-4. ,,

(Fixed Night Service)

The Operator 1 cannot change the pre-assigned

night answer destination.

Only the system administrator can change the

pre-assigned night answer destination.

Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service

is almost the same.

The difference is:

The following calls directed to the Attendant

Console in day mode can be redirected to the

designated extension in night mode.

DPH, DID, DISA and Extension calls

To utilize this redirection, assign desired

extension number in “Extension-Attendant

Console” Night.

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

or Extension) can change the night

answer destination.

Fixed A group of extensions (Night

Answer Group) can be assigned as

the destination of one or more CO

lines in night mode

3-B-l 4

(30393)

8.01 Directed Night Answer

3. Switchina of DaviNioht Mode

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either

automatically at pre-assigned time or manually

by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or

Extension User)

at

any time desired.

(Automatic Switching)

The system willswitch the day and night modes

at the programmed time automatically each day.

(Manual Switching)

Operator 1 can switch the Day/Night mode at

desired time.

(Supplement)

The following programming items may be

assigned in a different way between day mode

and night mode.

l

“System-Class of Service”

Toll Restriction Level (Day)

Toll Restriction Level (Night)

(Refer to Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of

Service (l/2).“)

l

“Group-Trunk Group”

incoming Mode (Day)

Incoming Mode (Night)

Intercept Routing (Day)

Intercept Routing (Night)

(Refer to Section 9-E-l .Ol “Trunk Group

(W.“)

l

“Extension-Station”

Day Ring

Night Ring

(Refer to Section 9-G-l -02 “Station (B).“)

Description

Lrsec ;o redirect Incoming attendant-seeking CO

calls to !?e designated extension or a group of

extensor& (Night

Answer

Group) automatically in

nght moue.

To activate

this feature, set “Group-Trunk

Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE

and “Trunk-CO Line” Night

Answer Point to EXT:

xxxx or NAG (Night

Answer Group).

Night Answer Group

A single group of extensions (called the Night

Answer Group) can be created to receive Calls at

night.

Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at

this group.

The size

limit of the group is 32 extensions.

co1 co2 co3

v

Night Answer Group

To utilize this feature, program as follows.

1. Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode

(Night) to “FIXED.”

2. Assign ‘Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to

“NAG.”

This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group

whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to

FIXED.

3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions

by using NAG command.

3-B-15

(30393)

System Programmrg

:0-c-14.00

lG-C-18.00

10-G59.00

Programming

Conditions

1.

RNA and Rerouting

lf an incoming CO call directed to a single

extension is not answered within a specified

time period, the caller will receive Rerouting

or IRNA treatment.

For further information, refer to Section 3-F-5.

00 “Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)” and

Section 3-F-6.00 “Rerouting.”

2. Remote Administration

To execute the system administration from a

remote location at night, select “RMT” for

“Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point

assignment.

For further information about remote,.

administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00

“System Administration from a Remote

Location .”

3. Tenant Service

If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1

. and 2) can have unique Night Service

arrangement individually.

In this case, Night Service assignment for

tenant 1 is determined by the system

programming “System-Operation” and Night

Service assignment for tenant 2 is determined

by the system programming “System-Tenant.”

8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA)

Description

Allows any extension user in

the system to

answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls

ringing at an external pager, by dialing the

feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.”

. To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE

and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA

1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External

Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External

Pager 2. All CO lines belonging to this trunk

group are covered by this assignment.

External pager must be connected to the system

beforehand.

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

the system.

To answer calls ringing at external pager 1, dial

the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to

answer calls ringing at external pager 2, dial the

feature number for “Night Answer 2.”

For further information about external pager

assignment, refer to Section 4-H-l .03 “Paging

External Pagers.”

Programming

System Programming

“Group-Trunk Group

(1 R)“,

Incoming

Mode (Night)

“Trunk-CO

Line”,

9-F-1 .OO lOG18.00

Night Answer Point

‘System-Numbering Plan (319) 9-D-6.03 10-G10.00

Night Answer 1

Night Answer 2

3-B-l 6

(30393)

Conditions

1. UNA and TAFAS

Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS.

The difference is that TAFAS is available in

day mode and UNA is available in night

mode.

For further information about TAFAS, refer to

Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any

Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”

2. IRNA and Rerouting

If incoming CO calls are not answered for any

reason within a specified time period, the

caller will receive Rerouting or IRNA

treatment.

For further information, refer to section 3-F-6.

00 “Rerouting” and Section 3-F-5.00

“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”

3. Remote Administration

To execute the system administration from a

remote location at night, select “RMT” for

‘Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point

assignment.

For further information about remote

administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00

“System Administration from a Remote

Location.”

4. Tenant Service

If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1

and 2) can have a unique Night Service

arrangement individually.

The affiliation pf each external pager is

determined by the system programming in

‘Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External

Pager- Tenant.

Extension users cannot answer the UNA calls

ringing at an external pager in the diierent

tenant.

Operation

Refer to the following:

(PITS) Section 4-l-l .Ol “Universal Night

Answer (UNA)”

(SLT) Section 5-G-l .Ol “Universal Night

Answer (UNA)”

8.03 Flexible Night Service

DescriptBon

Flex&e

Kqn:

Service allows the Operator 1

(AttendaT Console or Extension user) to change

the assignea night answer destination on a CO

line bavs cy dialing the feature number for

“Flexibie Night Service.”

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO

lines which belong to this trunk group are

covered by this assignment.

If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the

assigned night answer destination can not be

changed by the Operator l_

Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service

is almost the same.

The difl erence is:

Flexible I The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

I

or Extension) can change the night

answer destination.

Fixed ’ A group of extensions (Night

Answer Group) can be assigned as

the destination of one or more CO

, lines in night mode

Programming

System Programming

“Group-Tank Group (l/2)“.

IncomIng Mode (Night)

“Trunk-CO Line”,

Night Answer Point

“System-Numbering Plan (8/9)”

Flexibia Night Service

Conditions

Tenant Service

. .

Refc

VT

SE-1 .Ol

SF-l.00

SO608

once

Dumb

lo-c-14.00

10-C-18.00

1o-G10.00

If tenant service is employed, the night answer

destination for a CO line can only be changed by

the Operator 1 in the same tenant.

Operation

For the operation of changing the Night Answer

destination. refer to the following:

(PITS) Section 4-l-l .02 “Flexible Night Service”

(SLT) Section 5-G-l .02 “Flexible Night Service”

(ATT) Section 6-J-l .Ol “Flexible Night Service”

3-B-l 7

(30393)

8.04 Fixed Night

Service

Description Programming

Call handling in Flexrble ano Fixed nqnl seryce is

almost the same.

The difference is:

1

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

or Extension) can change the nqht

answer destination.

Fixed A group of extensions (Night

Answer Group) can be assigned as

the destination of one or more CO

lines in night mode

If FIXED is selected, the assigned night answer

destination can not be changed by the Operator

1.

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to “FIXED.” All CO lines

belong to this trunk group are covered by this

assignment.

. Night Answer Group

A single group of extensions (called the Night

Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at

night.

Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at

this group.

The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.

Night Answer Group

To utilize this feature, program as follows.

I Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode

(Night) to “FIXED.”

2. Assign “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to

“NAG.”

This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group

whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to

FIXED.

3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions by

using NAG command.

Conditions

None

Operation

None

3-B-17-1

(30393)

8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode

Description

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either

automatically at pre-assigned time or manually

by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or

Extension) at any time desired.

If

Manual Switching mode is assigned, the

Operator 1 must-dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode

Cancel” for day service.

If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system

will switch the day and night modes at the

programmed time each day.

To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “System-

Operation (s/3)” Night

Service to “Auto” and

assign desired mode switching time to “Auto

Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.

To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “System-

Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”

The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto

Mode setting, that is Manual Mode can be

. established, by dialing the feature number for

“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the

Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature

number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

If tenant service is employed, night service

assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and

Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.

The assignment in “System-Operation (33)” is

applied to Tenant 1 and the assignment in

“System-Tenant” is applied to Tenant 2.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

‘System-Operation (3/3)“. 9431.03

lo-t-4.00

Night Service

Auto

Start Ttme

“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-c-5.00

Night Service (Tenant 2)

Auto Stan Time

“System-Numbering Plan (8/9)“. SD6.08

la-10.00

Night Mode Set

Night Mode Cancel

Night Service Manual Mode

Set

Night Service Manual Mode

Cancel

Conditions

If Auto

Stan Tvme on a certain day is not

assigned. the current mode fs continued until a

new stat7 time Is encountered. --

If the Start Ttme for

Day mode and Night mode

on the same day are set identically, the current

mode is continued.

lf Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed

at all, the current mode is continued. In other

words ii the current mode is Day then Day Mode

is continued, and if the current mode is Night

then Night Mode is continued.

Operation

Refer to the following:

(PITS) Section 4-l-l -03 “Switching of Day/Night

Mode”

(SLT) Section 5-G-l .03 “Switching of Day/Night

Mode”

(ATT) Section 6-J-l .02 “Switching of Day/Night

Mode”

3-B-l 8

9.00 Mixed Station Capacities

Description

The KX-T336 System supports a wide range of

telephone sets, not only PITS (Proprietary

Integrated Telephone System) telephones but

also Standard Rotary telephones (10 pps/20 pps)

and Standard Push-button telephones.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

Dumb

“Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00

. The PITS telephones can be categorized as

!ollows:

Conditions

None

KX-T308 system : KX-T30820

KX-T30830

KX-T30850

KX-T616 system : KX-T61620

KX-T61630

KX-T6 1650

KX-T1232 system: KX-T123220

KX-Tl23230

KX-T123230D

KX-T123235

KX-Tl23250

KX-T7000 series : KX-T7020

KX-T7030

KX--I7050

KX-l7130

Hybrid Line Circuits (HLC) card or Proprietary

ITS tine Circuits (PLC) card are required for

PITS

telephones. Hybrid tine Circuits (HLC) card

or Single Line Circuits (SLC) card are required

for single line telephones.

ThB “Configuration-Slot Assignment” screen

defines which card is installed in which slot.

3-B-l 9

10.00 Variable Time-Out

Description Programming

The timer values listed below can be set and

changed in system programming.

Common system timer values are set by the

“System-System Timer” screen and ‘Special

Attendant-DISA” screen. The timer values used

with each trunk group are set by the “Group-

Trunk Group” screen and the timer values used

by the CO lines are set by the “Trunk-CO Line”

screen. The timer values used with each

extension are set by the “Extension-Station”

screen.

System timer values:

<l> Held Call Reminder

<2> Held Call Reminder (Attendant)

~3s Transfer Recall

c4> Pickup Dial Waiting

<5> External First Digit Trme-Out

<6> External Interdigit Time-Out

c7> External Interdigit Time-Out (PBX)

<8> Toll Restriction Guard Time-Out

<9> Call Forwarding-No Answer Time-Out

~10~

Intercept Routing-No Answer Time-Out

(System)

~11s Intercept Routing-No Answer Time-Out

(DISA)

~12s Attendant Overflow Time

cl 3> SMDR Duration Time

<14>

Delayed Answer (DISA)

~15 Prolonged Time (DISA)

Trunk group timer values:

cl> CO-CO Duration Limit

“.X2> Disconnect Time

~3s Pause Time

<4> Hook Switch Flash Time

CO Line timer values:

cl> DTMF Duration Time

<2> CPC Detection Time (Incoming)

r

System Programming

“System-System Timer”

“Special Attended-DIM”,

Delayed Answer

Prolong Time

“Group-Trunk Group”,

CO-CO Duration Limit

Disconnect Time

Pause Time

Hook Switch Flash Time

“Trunk-CO Line”,

DTMF Duration lime

,CPC Detection

‘Extension-Station”,

Day Ring

Night Ring

Reference

v-r Dumb

9-D-3.00 1 O-C-6.00

9-K-l 90 1 O-C-40.00

9-E-l .Ol 10-C-t 4.00

9-F-l .OO 10-C-18.00

9-G-l .02 1 O-G22.00

Conditions

None

Station timer values:

cl

> Delayed

Ringing

3-B-20

11 .OO Lockout 12.00Automatic Station Release

Description

If the extension user remains off-hook after the

completion of a call, he or she will be

disconnected from the channel after hearing

reorder tone. .I

Lockout applies to all types of calls:Extension,

Intercom and CO line calls.

Description

If an extension user fails to dial any digits within a

specified time period after getting a line for

making a call, he or she will be disconnected

from the channel after hearing reorder tone.

To get a line for making a call again, the

extension user must once go on-hook and then

off-hook.

Programming

None

Conditions

If the extension user remains off-hook after the

completion of a CO call on which “CPC

Detection” has been set to “None,“-reorder tone

is not sent even if the other party, on the CO line,

goes on-hook.

Refer to Section 3-F-7.00 “Calling Party Control

(CPC) Signal Detection” for further information.

When making an outgoing CO call with either

PITS and SLT, the timers set by “System-System

timers”, External First Digit Tme-Out, External

Interdigit Time-Out and External Interdigit Time-

Out (PBX) are used.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

“System-System Timer n, 9-D-3.00 10-c6.00

External First Digit

Time-Out

External Interdigit

Time-Out

External Interdigit

Time-Out

F’W

Conditions

This function does not work when originating an

intercom call or extension call with a PITS.

This function works in the following cases when

originating a CO line call with a PITS.

cl> When nothing has been dialed before the

External First Digit

Time-Out

expires. This

timer is started after ‘CO dial tone has been

heard.

c2> When the External Interdigit Time-Out has

expired during dialing.

This function works in the following cases when

originating a call with an SLT.

4 > When the first digit was not dialed within 10

seconds after dial tone was heard.

c2> When the time between the digits being

dialed exceeds five seconds (only when

originating an extension call).

3-B-21

13.00 Distinctive Dial Tone

The following condi: ens apply when originating a

CO call with an SLT.

cl> When the first digit was not dialed within 10

seconds after dial tone was heard.

c2> When the five second interdigit timer expires

when dialing on a CO line.

<3> When the first digit was not dialed before the

External First Digit Timer Time-Out expires

after the CO diai tone was heard

c4>

When the External Interdigit Time-Out

expires during dialing.

Description

Multiple dial tone patterns are presented to the

extension user to give some information about

selected lines, features set to the lines, etc.

There are five dial tone types, as follows:

Dial tone 1 : Normal dial tone, sounds when

calling on DN buttons.

Dial tone 2 : Sounds to request an account code

entry or DISA user code entry, or

sounds when an extension goes

off-hook after Timed Reminder.

Dial tone 3 : Sounds if the extension user has

set any of the following features:

l

Do Not Disturb

l

Call Forwarding

l

Absent Message

l

Timed Reminder

l

Walking Station

l

Walking COS

Dial tone 4 : Sounds if the extension user has

set UCD Log Out. .I

Dial tone 5 : Sounds when intercom calling (only

for PITS’s).

Programming

None

Conditions

The patterns for dial tone are listed in Section 3-

B-l 6.00 “Tone and Ringing Patterns.”

3-B-22

14.00 Distinctive Busy Tone

Description Conditions

There are three busy tone patterns as follows: If Automatic Callback to Trunk is programmed.

the function is automatically set when making an

outgoing CO call and going on-hook when

hearing busy tone.

See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic

Callback-Trunk” for details.

When the Automatic Callback to Trunk function is

enabled in system programming, special busy

tone is sent. When Automatic Callback to Trunk

is not enabled in system programming, busy tone

1 or busy tone 2 is sent. See Section 3-B-16.00

“Tone and Ringing Patterns” for the busy tone

patterns.

Busy tone 1 : Normal busy tone.

Busy tone 2 : A unique busy tone which allows

users with busy tone detection

SLT’s to use Busy Override, etc,

when encountering a busy line.

Busy tone 3 : A special busy tone sent when a

trunk is busy to inform the

extension user that Automatic

Callback to Trunk will be set by

going on-hook automatically.

Busy tones 1 and 2 are not used at the same

time. Only one tone is selected by “System-

Operation”, Busy Tone.

If busy tone 2 is selected, PITS’s follow the

setting.

Programming

System

Programming

Reference

VT I Dumb

“System-Operation (l/3)“,

Busv Tone / 9-D-1.01 / 10-C-4.00 1

3-B-23

15.00 Confirmation Tone

Description

After several operations the system confirms the

success of the operation by sending a

confirmation tone to

the

extension user.

Multiple patterns of confirmation tone is sent

when the following operations have been

successfully conducted:

Confirmation tone

1 :

When a function is set, indicates that the new

setting differs from the previous setting.

Confirmation tone 2 :

When a function is set, indicates that the new

setting is identical to the previous setting. In

addition, the tone is sent when holding a

calling party (including Consultation Hold and

Call Park) or setting Call Park and when

setting or releasing Message Waiting, and

setting BGM through External Pager on and

Off.

Confirmation tone 3 :

The tone is sent when calling by OHCA,

answering by Call Pickup or by Call Hold

Retrieve-Station, or when making and

answering the paging announcement, or

when calling a doorphone or starting

conference, and so on.

Confirmation tone 4 :

The tone is sent when converting conference

into a two party call.

A setting can be made by programming “System-

Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in to

determine whether confirmation tone is to be sent

or not when two party conversation is

successfully converted into a three party

conversation (Busy Override, Conference, etc.).

Confirmation tone from external pagers can be

selected to be sent or not in “Trunk-Pager &

Music Source”, External Pager-Tone.

Refer to Section 3-B-16.00 “Tone and Ringing

Patterns” for the confirmation tone patterns.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

“System-Operation

(l/3)‘,

9-D-l .Ol 1o-c-4.00

Beep Tone for Bsy-cvr/Brg-in

Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 1 O-C-l 9.00

External Pager-Tone

Conditions

Dial tone is sent after confirmation tone has been

sent. However, if the Automatic Callback to

Station function has been set, reorder tone is

sent after confirmation tone.

When a function is set using a PITS with the

display, details of the setting appear on the

display while confirmation tone is sent.

If

any operation is performed, the message on

the display will be terminated at that time.

3-B-24

16.00 Tone and Ringing Patterns

Description

-i ^ ^, _. . -

s ,*a> sf>\=.., cffe:s ~arioc;s tone patterns and

ringirc xtle:“5 2-r

listed below:

Tone Patterns

Busy tone 1

Busy tone 2

Busy tone 3

Reorder tone

L I I I

Ringback tone i I 1 . .

I

i

I I

Do Not Disturb (DND) 711

tone pn l-l

ill l-l

I

1

I I I I I I

I I I , I

Confirmation tone 1 I I I I I

1 I I t I

,

Confirmation tone 2

I I / I i I

Confirmation tone 3

Confirmation tone 4

Warning tone

CO-CO timeout

warning tone I I I L I /

I t I I

Held Call Reminder !-I I I I

21: : P /

1

I I

3-B-25

Ringing Payers

+-1 secj

LO rlnglng/CO Held

Cail

Reminder

Extension ringing,’

Extension Held

Call

R!&inder

intercom ringing

Callback ringing

Timed Reminder/

Doorphone ringing

See Section 3-B-l 3.00

See Section 3-B-l 4.00

See Section 3-B-l 5.00

. See Section 3-D-4.00

Programming

None

“Distinctive Dial Tone” for details of dial tone.

“Distinctive Busy Tone” for details of busy tone.

“Confirmation Tone” for details of confirmation tone.

“Discriminating Ringing.”

Conditions

None

3-B-26

C. Outgoing Call Features

1 .OO Toll Restriction

Description

Toll Restriction is a system program;razle fearure

that, in conjunction with the assign& Ciass of

Service, can prohibit selected extension users

from placing unauthorized toll call.

Toll Restriction types depend on the following

four ways of selecting a trunk:

. Local Trunk Dial Access (Refer to Section 3-C-

l .Ol)

l

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

(Refer to Section 3-C-l .02)

1

l

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct

Trunk Access (Refer to Section 3-C-l -03)

l

Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access

(Refer to Section 3-C-l .04)

Three Toll Restriction types below are common to

the above listed four methods:

l

Operator/International Call Restriction

(Refer to 3-C-l .05)

. . 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C-

l .06)

l

7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C-

l .07) _

3/6 Digit Toll Restriction and 7/l 0 Digit Toll

Restriction are used in pairs.

1

--

Flow charts and Programming are used to

explain Toll Restriction types.

Flow chart illustrates the flow of procedures.

Programming shows !be programming

reference and the method to execute each .: ..

program for the procedures illustrated in the flow

chart. Each Programming has a number, which

matches the numbers attached to the procedures

in the flow chart: cl>, c2> . . .

Toll Restriction Level

Toll restriction level is one of the elements used

to judge Toll Restriction. The level consists of 16

stages from 01 to 16. 01 is the highest level and

16 is the lowest:

3-c-1

01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10,11,12,13,14,15,16

% high i > low

The higher the level of an extension is, the less

the extension is restricted. Conversely, the lower

the level the greater the restriction. c

The levels of extensions are assigned in “System-

Class of Service”, Toll Restriction Level (Day) and

Toll Restriction Level (Night) as be’low:

System& of Service ;OFL~R+CR+lR

----s-----m __ _

Class of Service (COS)

No.=01

(112)

r A----------

Toll

Restriction Level (Day) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1

01

1 Toll Restriction Level (Night) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02 1

Level of Extension

-I

‘7011 Restriction Level of Extension” is referred to

as YRLE” in the following.

Each Toll Restriction type can set its own level

and executes restriction by comparing its own

level with TRLE.

For example, the toll restriction level for Local

Trunk Dial Access can be programmed in

“System-Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction

Level.

System-Local Access Group fC+Gf LINPR

--s----m--- -- -

r ------

Tofl Restriction Level l-,----1

------mm------

I I T I

Level of Local Access Group

In the flow charts, marks such as “>” are used to

compare TRLE and the level of each Toll

Restriction type.

When TRLE is equal to or higher than the toll

restriction level, it is described as follows:

TRLE 2 Toll restriction level

When TRLE is lower than the toll restriction level,

it is described as follows:

TRLE

c

Toll restriction level

TRLE ,... 03

Toll restriction level . . . . 08

The levels above are described as :

TRLE > Toll restriction level

1.01 Toll Restriction for Local

Trunk Dial Access

Flow Chart

The llovr

chat-l

bebw shows the procedures for

restricting outgoing calls when a user makes an

outgoing CO call by dialing the feature number for

“ARSbcal

CO

line Access” in the system

without

ARS service.

f

P

cl > When

“AfWLocal

Access”

in g> When ‘AR.S/Local Access” in cl> When ‘ARSRocal Access” in

the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is

programmed to ‘No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Acts.”

I I I

&Is the selected trunk group

programmed to “Yes’ in

“Class of Service - Trunk-

Group Access”?

Yes

No

No <3> Is the trunk group type innSystem-Local Access Group’: Local Access

Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX?

A

c4>

Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in

“Group-Trunk Group’.PBX Access Code with Restriction ?

I

No

.I

- Yes

<5> Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll Restriction Level of Local TRLEl TRLL

Access (TRLL).

1 TRLE<TRLL

~._. L

Determines whethefi% call is an operator call (leading &it is-u). Equal

Access, custom caflff. local call. or long distance call. -1

Local, or long distance call Cperator call

Remed .&B Executes 3/6 Digit Toll Executes Operator/International Call ~estrfcted

Restriction (Refer to 3-C-l .06) Restriction. (Refer to 3-C-l -05)

Not restricted I

Executes 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction

(EiF.Feorder ) * Note

4 Equal Access is prohibited. Custom Calling is performed.

3-C-2

Programming tl> Programming <4>

I

System Programming Reference

Vl 1 Dumb

I

‘System-Class

of Service”,

ARSILocal Access Pol l’G7.w I

Extension users may be restricted from Local

Trunk Dial Access by “System-Class of Service”,

ARS Local Access, as follows:

!f set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is

impossible (reorder tone is returned).

If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is

possible with restriction by “System-Class of

Service”, Trunk Group Access.

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is

possible with no restriction by ‘System-Class of

Service”, Trunk Group Access.

Programming t2>

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

‘System-Class of Service”,

9-0-4.02 104-8.00

* Trunk Grout Access

Programming 43~ TRLL is assigned in the item below:

System

Programming

When “Type” of the trunk group which is set to

“Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01”

in Local Access Group is programmed to “PBX,”

the types of the other trunk groups preset to other

“Hunt Sequence” than “01” are all regarded as

“PBX”. “PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and

“PBX Access Code (Restriction)” of the trunk

group which is set to “Hunt Sequence 01” are

used to judge.

Referexe

VT 1 Dumb

If this system works into the host PBX, PBX

access code is required to dial through the

connected PBX.

To execute Toll Restriction, register PBX Access

Code in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code

(Restriction).

To access the Host PBX without executing Toll

Restriction, register PBX Access Code in ‘Group-

Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No Restriction)

Programming <5>

System

Programming

“Class of Service (1 R) 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Toll Restriction

Level (Day)

and (Night)

“System-Local Access Group”,

40-5.00 1c-G9.00

Toll Restriction Level

System-Local

Access Group I OFLl PRd LIN l DIR

-------m-w I,LI-L-

r ------

Tofl Restrictii

Level &y----1

--------------

I

Toll R&triction Level of

Local Access (TRLL)

When TRLL is programmed higher than TRLE,

the procedure advances to the next step.

When TRLL is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, the call is not restricted and

performed.

3-c-3

Programming t6>

T

System Progra;;lmlng I t*e??rm?

, ,-

: . ! 5-s 4

“System-Local Access Grow‘ w-5 32 l&c-330

Toll Restriction Table

The number that is registered in the “System-

Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the

number of the Area/Office Code Table

System-Local Access Group IOFLl

PRd LIN’ C

----------

-L-L-!-L

r ------ ----

Toll Restrictiin Level L8 1

t- ------ ----

Toll Restriition Table L -l

, r------T ---- 1

T

.

Toll Restriiion-Area/Off&3 Code

---e--m- PCj

S&SEl

Are&Mike Code Table No.

=l Entry dO0

r-f----------l

t--f----------l

1 ~-f-T--rl--rl-r~

. .

3-c-4

r30,L

3 v-3 ‘i fiqs d

1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic

Route Selection (AM) System

Flow

Chart

The flow chart below shows the toll restriction

feature number

for ‘AM/Local CO Line Access’ rn

procedures for outgoing calls when an extension the system with ARS service.

user makes an outgoing CO call by dialing the

I

<l> When =ARS/Local Access” in

the Class of Service is

programmed to ‘No RSTR.’

cl > When ‘ARSRocal Access’ in

the Class of Service is

programmed to 7N/RSTR.’

cl > When DARSILocal Access’ in

theClassofSewices

programmed to “No Acts.’

c2> ls the selected trunk group No

programmed to ‘Yes’ in )

“Class of Service-Trunk-

Group Access”?

Determines whether the call is an operator call

(leading digit is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local

call, or long distance call. -1

Local, or long distance call Operator call

. .

wlJ= c3> Compares Toll Restriction Level of Local Access 1

(TRU) with TFiLE in Class of Setvice. Advances to Toll Restrictiin

I for Local Trunk Dial Access

1 TRLE<TRLL

<4> Executes 316 Digit Toll Restriction.

(Refer to 3-C-l .06)

I

1 Not restricted

Restricted

, &

Executes 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction.

(Refer to 3-C-1.07)

Restricted

-4 Not restricted

<5> Does the dialed number suit the dial type (A,B or No

C) preset in “System-Operation”, Home Dialing

Plan ?

Yes

Executes ARS.

(Refer to 3-C-2.00)

Prohibited by ARS

c5

Calls

Note (~rf$ibits (Sends reorde?

~1

Equal Access and custom calling are prohibited.

3-c-5

(40993)

Programming cl >

Programming ~4,

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“System-Class of Service”,

AFWLocal Access

9-D-4.01

10-C-7.00

Extension users may be restricted from Local

Trunk Dial Access by the assignment of “System-

Class of Service”, ARS Local Access, as follows:

The number that is registered in System-Local

Access Group”,

Toll Restriction Table is the

number of the Area/Off ice Code Table.

If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is

impossible (reorder tone is returned).

I

System-Local Access Group !OFL !PRG! LIN ; DIR

If set to ‘7NIRSTR” (With Restriction), calling is

possible with restriction by “System-Class of

Service”, Trunk Group Access.

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is

possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-

tem-class of Service”, Trunk Group Access

assignment.

Programming ~2s

I

System Programming Reference

VI- i Dumb

l

SystemClass of Service”,

Trunk Group Access . .

9-D-4.02 lo-c-8.00

Toll Restriion-Area/Office

------- IOR ~PRG+R&

-- -

Are&office Code Table No. -1 Entry200

r/-T-Tl-rr-T-T-1

I I I

IIII Il l

Programming ~52

Programming t3~

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“System-Local Access Group”,

Toll Restriction Level

9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00

3-C-6

(40993)

Dialing Plan

TRLL is assigned in the item below: -2 -

There are three types of dialing plans for local calls

and long distance calls depending on areas, as

f0ii0ws: -

System-Local Access Group !OFL f PRG! LM ! DIR

I

Toll Restridion Level I

08 I

--------------

I ‘T I

Type A

Long distance call : l-NPA-NXX-XXXX

Local call NXX-XXXX

Toil

Restriction Level of

Local Access

(TRLL)

When TRLL is set higher than TRLE, Toll Restric-

tion advances to the next step.

When TRLL is set equal to or lower than TRLE,

Toll Restriction advances to ARS without execut-

ing 3/6 and 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restrictions.

We C

Long distance call : 1 -NPA-NM-XXXX

Local call (charged) : l- NNX-XXXX

Local call NXX-XXXX

r -----

Toll Restriction Level x-----~

I I I

r------i-

I

Toll

Restriction Table

i

------ -----

, . I I

Long distance call : NPA-NXX-XXXX

Local call NNX-XXXX

N=2 to 9, P=O or

1,

A=0 to 9, X=0 to 9

NPA : Area code

NXX, NNX : Office code

XXXX : Subscriber number

1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual

Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct

Trunk Access

Flow Chart

Shows the

procedures for restricting outgoing

calls when an extension user makes an outgoing

CO call by employing Individual Trunk Group Dial

Access/Direct Trunk Access. Start

Q

cl>

Is the selected

trunk

group set available for access in No

Class of Service?

No

<3> Is the type of the selected trunk group PBX?

1 Yes

! LL .

Prohibits

(Sends reorder

tone)

c2> Does the selected trunk group belong to the same No

tenant that the extension belongs to? 1

I

c4> Does the PBX access code coincide with the code

that is registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX

Access Code (Restriction).

No

45~ Compares Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group

(TRLT) with TRLE in Class of Service.

TRLEcTRLT I! _

TRL~TRLT

”

Local or long distance call Determines whether the call is an operator call (leading

I , digit is 0). Equal Access, custom calling, local call, or

Access (10XxX)

> Execute 316 Digit Toll ReskicM

Restriction. t-l I

I

1 Not restricted I I

I

Execute 7/10 Digit Toll

Restriction.

Notes

tl Custom calling is performed.

*2 In case TRLEcTRLS. determines again if the call is

with Equal Access Carrier

Code in Equal Access?

<8> Is the selected trunk group

available for Equal Access? No

<9> Compares Toll Restriction ”

c Level of Special Carrier

Access (TRLS) with TRLE in

Class of Service.

TRLEzTRLS

an operator call, Equal Access, custom calling, local

call, or long distance call. In this case, checks the

subsequent dialed numbers after “1OXXX.”

3-c-7

Programming

cl>

~1

When the selected trunk group is assigned to

“No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group

Access, calling is impossible.

When you want to make a trunk group

unavailable for outgoing calls, assign the trunk

group to “No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk

Group Access.

Programming ~2s

System Programming Reference

VT I Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant 9-E-i .Oi 10-C-14.00

“Group-ICM/Paging Group” 9-E-2.00 IO-Gt6.00

“Extension-Station”, ICM Group 9-G-l .Ol 10-C-22.00

The tenant of the selected trunk group is

assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant.

. An extension should belong to one of eight ICM

groups.

The tenant that the extension belongs to is the

tenant that the ICM group belongs to.

The tenant that the ICM group belongs to is

programmed in “Group-ICM/Paging Group.”

The iCM group that the extension belongs to is

programmed in “Extension-Station”, ICM Group.

Programming

c3>

System Programming

‘Group-Trunk Group”. Type

Reference

VT Dumb

9-E-1.02 10-C-l 4.00

Programming ~4,

System Programming

“Group-Trunk Group”.

Reference

VT I Dumb

9-E-l .02 11 O-C-l 5.00

PB% Access Code (No

Restriction)

PBX Access Code (Restriction) I I I

To execute Toll Restriction, the PBX Access

Code must be registered in “Group-Trunk Group”,

PBX Access Code (Restriction).

To access the Host

PBX

without Toll Restriction,

the PBX Access Code

must

be assigned in

“Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No

Restriction).

Programming

c5>

System Progr2mming

“Class

of Service (l(2)“.

Toll

Restriction Level (Day)

and (Night)

“Group-Trunk Group”,

Toil Restriction Level

Reference

VT DL-C

904.0; I o-c-; ;i

9-E-l .Ol 1 O-C-l 4.00

TRLT is assigned in the item below (Assuming

Trunk Group No.=01 ):

Toll Restriction Level

Toll Restriction Level of

Trunk Group (TRLT)

When TRLT is programmed higher than TRLE,

Toll Restriction advances to the next step.

When TRLT is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, calling is performed without

restriction.

Programming <6>

*I

The number that is registered in “Group-Trunk ..

Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the number of

the Area/Office Code Table.

I

Trunk Group No.=31 (1!2)

I r ____------- 1 I

/r7-r-n-r-i-T-n 1

. .

3-C-8

Programming <7> Programming <9>

System Frogramming

“Special Carrier Access-Equal

Access”, Equal Access Carrier

Code

Referexe

VT Gumb

9-H-l .OO ! S-C-30.00

There are four types of Equal Access Tables to

check if the dialed XXX corresponds with assigned

numbers in four types of tables.

I

Equal Access No.=3

, 1 Equal Access No.=2 ,

Special Carrier Access-Equal Access

r 1 Equal

Access No.=4 ,

L

Equal Access No.=1

----------- -1

‘r

\

lr---- -----.-.

I I

II

Equal Access Carrier Code I222 /

When the dialed XXX does not correspond with

any of the tables, calling is performed without

. restriction.

When the dialed XXX corresponds with any table,

the procedures in steps 8 and 9 in the flow chart

(3-C-l .03) depend on the table that the dialed

XXX corresponds with.

Programming <8>

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“Special Carrier Access-Equal

Access”, Toll Restriction Level

/ 9-H-l .OO / ! O-C-30.001

TRLS is programmed in the item below:

Special Carrier Access-Equal Access

{j

Toll Restriction Level 1 IO / Trunk Group 04 ! Yes

Toll Restriction Level of Special

carrier

Access (TRLS)

When TRLS is programmed higher than TRLE,

checks again if the call is an operator call, Equal

Access, custom calling, local call, or long

distance call.

When TRLS is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, calling is performed without

restriction.

. .

.f

“Special

Carrier Access-Equal

Access”, Trunk Group 01-l

6

/ 9-H-l .OO / ! ?-C-30.001

_-

3-c-9

1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual

Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access

Flow Chart

Shows the procedures for restricting outgoing

calls when an extension user makes an outgoing

CO call by employing Individual Virtual Trunk

Start

Group Diat Access.

Q

cl> Is the selected virtual trunk group set available for

access in

Class of Service? -1 I

Yes

Y

Determines if the call is an operator call (leading digit

is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local call, or long

distance call. -2

Local, or long distance call

v

I ‘

I

with TRiE. ’ ’

I

TRLEcTRLS

&Compares Toll Restriction Level of Special Carrier

Access fTRLS1 in Eaual Access or OCC Access I

No

1

c3> Executes 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction.

(Refer to 3-C-l .06)

I

Not restricted

I

Executes 7/10 digit Toll Restriction.

(Refer to 3-C-l .07)

-11 Not restricted

c4=- Does the dialed number suit the dial type (A,B or No

C) preset in “System-Operation”, Home Dialing

Plan? t-

I

I Yes

7 ,

Modifies the dialed number, depending on “Special

Carrier Access-Equal Access”, Digit Modification or

-0CC Access”, Digit Modification.

( SFFeorder)

#I3

Calls

Notes

-1. When available, aazesses an idle trunk group that is assigned to “Yes” in “Special Carrier Access-Equal

Access” or “-CCC Access.”

02.Operator calls, Equal Access, custom calling are prohibited.

P

3-c-1 0

Programming cl> Programming <3>

System Programming Refe-2nce

VT 1 Dumb

System-Class of Service”,

Special Carrier Access 9-D-4.02 ‘J-C-8.00

Programming <2>

System Programming Refe:37ce

VT 1 Dumb

“Special

Carrier Access-Eqtial

Access”, Toll Restriction Level

“Special Carrier Access-OCC

Access”, Toll Restriction Level

9-H-l .OO

1

O-C-8.00

9-H-2.00 70-C-8.00

TRLS of Equal Access is assigned in the item

below (when virtual trunk group 1 is designated):

pecial Carrier Access-Equal Access

Toll Restriction Level of Speczi Carrier

Access (TRLS)

TRLS of OCC Access is assigned in the item

below (when virtual trunk group 5 is designated):

Special Carrier Access-OCC Access

OCC Access No.=1

Toll Restriction Level of Special

Carrier Access (TRLS)

When TRLS is programmed higher than TRLE,

the procedure advances to the next step.

I

S,. slem Prog:amming

“Specia. Carrier Access-Equal

Access-. Toll Restriction Table

Access’. Toll Restriction Table

The number that is registered in “Special Carrier

Access-Equal Access”, Toll Restriction Table is

the number of the Area/Office Code Table.

Czzer Access-Equal Access f OFLkRG; SCRPL

SD-------- -- -l

Equal Access No.=1 I

---

r-7-r T----

--------m

Area/Office Code Table No. =8 Entry=200

I I I I

I

r ------ l---F-7-1

When TRLS is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, the procedure advances to check the

dial type in “Home Dialing Plan” without executing

3/6 and 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restrictions.

3-c-1 1

The number that is registered in “Special

Carrier

Access-CCC Access”, Toll Restriction Table is

the number of the Area/Office Code Table.

(when virtual trunk group 5 is designated):

\

roll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tabl

---------

Area/Office Code Table No.=8 Entry=200

r -----e--m-- 1

I I

Programming <4>

zi

There are three types of dialing plans for local

and long distance calls. Each area has one of

the three plans as mentioned before.

3-C-12

1.05 Operator/International Call

Restriction

-

Flow chart

The flow chart below shows the toll restriction

procedure for Operator (telephone company) and

International calls.

cl> Compares Operator Call Restriction Level (ORLV) TRLEcORLV

with TRLE in Class of Service. .I,

Prohibits operator calls and

TRLE=>ORLV international calls.

Y (Sends reorder tone)

Is the call an international call (leading digit is 01 or fqo

Oil)? I

I I +

I I \

1 Operator call is performed. 1

45 Compares International Call Restriction Level

(IRLV) with TRLE in Class of Service.

TRL&IRLV

Y

nternational call is performed

TRLE<IRLV

(Sends reorder tone)

3-c-13

Programming <la Programming c2>

;I

“System-Operation , Restrb2on

ORLV is assigned in the item below:

System-Operation

_-----_ 1 OFL>RG; SCR>EL

_--_ _- -

Operat’bn( l/3)

I

r------l-----1 I

Restriction Level-Operator 06

Cperator Call Restrictiin International Call Restriction

Level (ORLV) Level (IRLV)

When ORLV is programmed higher than TRLE,

operator and international calls are prohibited.

System Programming

“System-Operation”, Restriction

Level-international

RekB

VT

SD-1 01 10-C-4 C0

IRLV is assigned in the following item:

When IRLV is programmed equal to or lower than

TRLE, international calls are performed.

When ORLV is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, operator calls are performed.

International calls advances to the next

procedure.

3-c-1 4

1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction

Flow Chart

Local and long distance calls can be restricted by

area codes only, or by off ice codes only, or by both

area codes and off ice codes.

The procedures are shown below:

Q

tart

l> Determines if the call is local or tong distance,

depending on “System-Operation”, Home

Dialing Plan or “Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing

1 Plan.

Local call

Is the item “L” in Area/Office Code

Table assigned to “Y”?

I I

No J

Long distance call

or call except

types A, B and C.

TRLE%L Compares “RL” in Area/Office Code Tabte with

TRLE in Class of Service.

I

Checks ‘CC” in Area/Office Code Table.

I

blank

I

No

Is off ice code register I

Are-i

Code Table

Office Code

Table

<2>

(Advances to 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction)

3-c-1 5

Programming <la

t

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“System-Operation”,

Home Dialing Plan

“Group-Trunk Group”,

Dialing Plan

9-D-1.01 l@C-4.00

9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

When a call is made by ARS or Individual Virtual

Trunk Group Dial Access, the call is judged by

“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan.

When a call is made by Local Trunk Dial Access

or Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct

Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk

Group”, Dialing Plan.

Programming <2>

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“loll Restriction-Area/Office Code 9-l-l .OO 10-C-32.00

Tables”

“Toll Restriction-Office Code 9-I-2.00 10-C-33.00

Tables”

l

Eight Area/Office Code Tables are prepared to

program various restrictions for calling ways

such as Local

Trunk

Group Dial Access,

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access, etc. Each

table consists of 16 screens:

l

64 Off ice Code Tables are also prepared.

Each table

consists of four screens:

I

. =64

.

I

=02

Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables

t

----s-m--

Office Code Table No.=01

I

1 I

(1) Programming

the 3/6 Digit

Toll

Restriction plan

(General)

Before programming the toll restriction plan,

determine the TRLE of each extension user in

Class of Service programming.

Table 1 Toll Restriction Level of each Extension

user

I

ITRLE 1 RLl IRf.2 IRL3jRL4jRL5 /RL6 I

President 1 A A A A A A

Vice-President 2 RAAAAA

Part-Timer 2 6 RRRRRA

Legend:

TRLE - Toll Restriction Level of Extension

RL - Restriction Level

A - Allowed

R

- Restricted

3-C-l 6

Assuming that your telephone system is located

in-the area, Area Code (AC)=200, Off ice Code

(OC)=320, accordingly, your CO number is

(1) +

200 + 320 + XXXX.

Determine the Restriction Level of each AC and

OC respectively according to the TRLE of each

extension user (Table 1).

Table 2 Restriction Level of each AC and OC

I I

1C=213 I I

AC=21 4

3L=l I I

I

O&322 O&320

Ix=1

I

I I

OC=321

I I

AC=209 1 I

X=321 I I AC=210

RL=2

-I I I

I

OC=322

I

OC=320 1 IRL=2 1

I I t

oc=3; !l AC=205 , I AC=206

RL=3 I I

; OC=322 O&320 ; I RL=3

_ _ _ OC=321 1 OC=321 _ _ _ _

AC-201 I AC=202

RL=4 ;OC=322 O&320; &RL=4

I I

X=320 _ _ ______ _ 0~~321 I I 1 _ OC=321 .-------- o&322

OC=320 AC=200 ’ O&322

_ -----

O&320 - - O&321 : O&322 - - - - - - - OG322

OC=320 RL=5 t RL=5

-'- - - - -, OC=322

I----

._ - - : pzq :---,

; OC=320 ;

’ RL=6 1

OC=322 I-----,-----I O&320

OC=320

OC=322 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ O&324 j ;Lc_23 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ O&320

RL=5 O’S320

X=322 . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0~~321 I

O&321

--------. OC=320

I I

O&321 AC=204 :OC=320 OC=322: AC=203 OC=321

.-------- - - - - - _ - -

RG4 I ’ RL=4

I

I I

_------- AC=208 : OC=322 OC=322 : - _ _ - - _ _ _

AC=207

OC=32 1 RL=3 I I RL=3 OC=321

I

I I OC=321

I OC=320 OC=322 I

AC=21 2 I f AC=21 1

RL=2 I I RL=2

, I

I I

AC=2161 OC=321 I O&320 OC=322 I

I I

the boundaries of Area Code

-_-__---- the boundaries of Office Code

3-c-1 7

Now program the 3/6 digit toll restriction plan

according to the Table 1 and Table 2 using “Area/

Office Code Table.”

In this table, numbers in “Code” field can be used

either as AC or OC.

First select “N” in “L” field, and enter Restriction

Level for each AC or OC in “RL” field according to

the Table 2.

294

3-c- iI In the area where Dialing Plan Type B is adopted,

there are no Office Codes which are identical with

Area Code, so you can assign the Restriction

Level of AC and OC respectively using different

“Area/Off ice Code Table.” (Refer to 3-C-l .02 for

Dialing Plan.)

When there are some Office Codes which are

identical with Area Codes, refer to

“(3) Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction

Plan by selecting ‘Y” in I” field.” L= LJX~L?

Toll Restriction-Area/Offi& Code Tabk>F $X *L

_-----_--- - -- -

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry =200

---------

'210 ‘No1

I bl

I 1::

I lb’

I I

Ino I lrnl 12* I

I- Enter Restriction Level of Area Code

Select N (Defautt Setting)

Area Code

Toil Restriction-Area/Office Code Tabi~~~~$R kL

_--------- - -

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry =300

Enter Restriction Level of

Office Code

Select N (Defautt Setting)

Office Code

(2) Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction

Plan Using “OC” field.

When you want to restrict an outgoing call for

certain area except a district within that area,

program the toll restriction plan by entering Office

Code Table No. in “OC” field of that Area Code

and set Office Code of the destrict in that Office

Code Table.

Assuming that your system is located in Area A

AG200, and Restriction Level of Area 6 is set to

“10.”

So extension users with TRLE of 11-16 are

restricted to place a call to Area B.

Area A

AC=2001 !

I

O&322 i O&320 OC=320

RL=l6 f RL=16

L

I

------ ---s-w

l-

OC=322

I

L

O&323

3-C-l 8

If you do not want to restrict an extension user

from originating CO calls for district B-l within

Area B, because calls for district B-l are

considered local calls.

Then enter “01” in “OC” field of Area Code 201,

and register

Office Code 321 in the Office Code

Table No.=1 as follows.

.-

1

roll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables f ONL t PRG! SCRkEL

____------ -- -

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry =200

roll Restridion-Office Code Tables

m--------s

Office code Table No. =

----

/2 Hundred Off ice ~4

----

EHHundred Office CodJ

‘EL

I

I- Select"21"

Now Restriction Level 10 is not applied to calls for

district B-l ((1) + 201 + 321 + XXXX).

(3) Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction

Plan by selecting “Y” in “L” field.

When your system is located in the area where

Dialing Plan Type A or Type C is adopted, some

Office Codes may be identical with Area Codes,

(Refer to 3-C-l .02 for Dialing Plan.) 3 _ c.. ,$

Assuming that your system is located in the area

(AC=200, O&320) where Dialing Plan Type A or

Type C is adopted.

OC=201 is identical

with AC=201

I

RL=16 / RL=16

, System I O&321 i OC=320

I I

I 8 I

I I I

I

_------------- I

I

OC=322 I OC=323

I

In this case, do not assign Restriction Level of AC

and OC using different Area/Office code table

respectively and program the toll restriction plan

as follows.

L

Toll Restriction-AreaIOffii Code Tables !

ONL t PRd

SCR?L

--s----s- - -

Area/Office Code Table No.=1 Entry -200

rr:7-r::I-~.-j-1-7-r7

cc& Lfnoc cd0 LRLCC Code LRLOC Code LFiL.cc cc& YRLCC

L Enter Restriction Level of Area Code 201

L!z

Select “Y

Area Code

Select “Y” in “L” field and enter Restriction Level

“10” in “RL” field

of Area Code 201.

When “Y” is selected in “L” field of code 201,

Restriction Level 10 is applied to AC=201 only,

and not applied to O&201 within Area A

(If you select “N” in “L” field of Area Code 201,

Restriction Level 10 is applied to both AC=201

and OC=201)

3-c-1 9

1.07 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction

Flow

Chart

7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction is to restrict calls that

are not restricted by 3/6 Digit Toll Restric!ion,

employing off ice codes and subscriber numbers,

as follows:

Start

0

cl> Does the dialed number suit the dial

/ type(A:B;rC)pr;n“System-. /NO ,

Operation , Home Dlallng Plan or In

“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan ?

I Yes 1 I

e2> Is the dialed number registered in “Toll . No

Restriction-7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction” ? ¶

I

Yes

. .

(iiiiik+

Programming 4~ Programming <2>

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“System-Operation (l/3)“,

Home Dialing Plan

“Group-Trunk Group”,

Dialing Plan

SD-1 .Ol 10-C-4.00

SE-1 .Ol 10-C-14.00

When a call

is

made by

ARS

or individual Virtual

Trunk Group Dial

Access,

the call is judged by

“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan.

A

Calls

7

System Programming Reference

VT O&

“Toll Restriction-70 0 Digit Toll 41-3.00 10-c-34 00

Restriction”

Enter the off ice codes and the subscriber

numbers that you want to restrict into “Toll

Restriciton-7/10 Digit Toll Restriction” Table.

Up to 64 entries can be assigned to the table

When a call is made bv Local Trunk Dial Access

Note

or Individual Trunk G&p Dial Access/Direct

Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk

Group”, Dialing Plan.

If there are several subscribers who have the

same off ice code and the same subscriber

number in different areas, all the calls for the

subscribers are restricted by entering the code

and the number into the 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction

Table.

3-C-20

2.00 Automatic Route Selection

(A w

Description

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system

programmab!e feature that automatically selects

the least expensive route available at the time an

outgoing CO calf is made. It is executed by dialing

the feature number for ‘ARS/Local CO Line

Access” from a DN button, then making a long

distance call or local call.

To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred

call routing plan

in the system

programming

“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “System-

Operation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.”

Programming _

SystemProgramming

“System-Operation”,

Automatic Route Selection

Home Dialing Plan

“System-Numbering Plan (2’9)‘.

AM/Local CD Line Access

‘Automatic Route Selection”,

Leading Digit Table

Offii code Tables

(ARS)

Route Plan Tables

Route Lists Tables

Modified Digit Tables

Condtions

Reference

VT Dumb

g-D-1.01 1o-c-4.00

w-6.02 lo-c-10.00

g-J-1.00 lo-c-35.00

g-J-2.00 1oG36.00

g-J-3.00 lo-c-37.00

9-J-4.00 lo-c-38.00

SJ-5.00 lo-c-39.00

Automatic Route Selection is applied after the toil

restri bn procedure.

Automatic Route Selection is ineffective for

telephone numbers which start with “10,” “11.”

“* ” or Y#.” When a caller dials those numbers,

he hears reorder tone.

ARS is restricted by “System-Class of Service”,

ARSRocai Access. as follows:

If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an

outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone is

returned.)

If “No RSTR (No Restriction) is set, calling is

possible regardless of the assignment of “System-

Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access.

ARS feature is not applied to a call made by

specifying a trunk group.

Operation

1. Lii the

handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

ARSRocai CO Line Access “9”

(default).

3. Dial the telephone number of the

external party.

l

The system follows the pre-

programmed sequence and

selects the least expensive route.

” The dialed digits are then sent

after ARS adds or deletes digits

according to programming.

If “WIRSTR” (With Restriction) is set , calling is

possible with restriction by “System-Class of

j Service”, Trunk Group Access.

3-c-21

(40993)

2.00 Automatic Route Selection

- (ARS)

Description

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system

programmable feature that automatically selects

the least expensive route available at the time an

outgoing CO call is made. It is executed by dialing

the feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line

Access” from a DN button, then making a long

distance call or local call.

To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred

call routing plan in the system programming

“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “System-

Operation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.”

Programming

System Programming

“System-Operation”,

Automatic Route Selection

Home Dialing Plan

“System-Numbering Plan (2/g)“,

ARS/Local CO Line Access

“Automatic Route Selection”,

Leading Digit Table

Office Code Tables (ARS)

Route

Plan Tables

Route Lists Tables

Modified Digit Tables

9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00

9-J-l .OO 10-C-35.00

9-J-2.00

10-C-36.00

9J-3.00 lo-c-37.00

9-J-4.00 10-C-38.00

9-J-5.00 104-39.00

Conditions

Automatic Route Selection is applied after the toll

restriction procedure.

Automatic Route Selection is ineffective for

telephone numbers which start with “10,” “11,”

“?c ” or “#.” When a caller dials those numbers,

he hears reorder

tone.

ARS is restricted by “System-Class of Service”,

ARS/Local Access, as follows:

If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an

outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone is

returned.)

If “W/RSTR” (With Restriction) or “RSTR (No

>

Restriction) is set, calling is possible regardless of

the assignment of “System-Class of Service”,

Trunk Group Access.

Operation

1. Lift

the

handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“ARSLocal CO Line Access.”

3. Dial the telephone number of the

external party.

l

The system follows the pre-

programmed sequence and

selects the least expensive route.

l

The dialed digits are then sent

after ARS adds or deletes digits

according to programming.

ARS feature is not applied to a call made by

specifying a trunk group.

3-C-21

Explanation <Example>

ARS Programming

The following is an example to show the procedures

for programming ARS feature.

Five types of tables are used to program ARS

feature;

The ARS feature, when accessed, selects the least

expensive route as follows.

Explains the procedures to program ARS plan for

calling the XYi’ Company, which has the

telephone number “201-234-5678” and is long

distance.

Three telephone service companies are available

to call the XYZ Company: telephone company A,

B and C.

Telephone companies A and B are the long

distance carriers.

Proqrams Routinq Procedures

Dial

I

(Toll Restriction)

I

Leading Digit Table - - - -

Office Code Tables [Analyze theldialed digit]

Route Plan Tables- - - - - Analyze the time of day

1

Route Lists Tables- - - - - Check the restriction

level of trunk groups

and search an idle

trunk group

I

JI

Modified Digit Tables- - - Modify the dialed digits

1

Sends the dialed number

Telephone company A has:

l

Local access code: 765-4321

l

Authorization number: 012345

Telephone company B has:

l

Local access code: 987-6543

l

Authorization number: 567890

Telephone company A is connected to trunk group

01.

Telephone company B is connected to trunk group

02.

Telephone company C is connected to trunk group

03.

Telephone companies A, B, and C charges for

Monday are as follows:

high

T

Charge

12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9

a.m. p.m.

+ Time

(Table 1)

3-C-22

The companies are shown below in order from

least to most expensive :

Hour Least Costly Company Next Less Costly Company Most Costly Company

7:00

a.m. to 1:OO p.m. B A C

1:OO p.m. to 6:00 p.m. B C A

6:00 p.m.

to 7:00

a.m. A B C

(Table 2)

Based upon Table 2,

the order of trunk group

numbers connected to the telephone companies

are shown below:

Priority 1 Priority 2

Priirity 3

(Least Costly Trunk Group) (Next Less Costly Trunk Group) (Most Costly Trunk Group)

Route List 01

(7:00 a.m. to 1:OO p.m.) 02 01 03

Route List 02

(1:OO p.m. to 6:00 p.m.) 02 03 01

Route List 03

(6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.) 01 02 03

(Table 3)

3-C-23

When an extension user calls the XYZ Company

by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the

local access code and the authorization number of

the telephone company A or B before dialing the

telephone number of XYZ Company, as follows:

When trunk group 01 is selected to use the

telephone company A;

765-4321 P P 012345 201-234-5678

II

r

E

XYZ Company

Authorization number of

the telephone company A

Pause

Local Access Code of the telephone company A

When trunk group 02 is selected to use the

telephone company B;

P ;

-

Pause

U-234-5678 567890

I

Authorization

number of the

telephone

Telephone company B

.number of

XYZ Company

LLocal Access Code of the telephone company B

Modified Dioit Table

Enter the digits which you want to add

automatically to the user dialed number into the

“Digits to be Inserted” field.

Enter the number of digits which you want to

delete from the beginning of the user dialed

number except the feature number for “ARS /

Local CO Line Access” into “DEL” field.

Deleting “012” from the beginning of the user

dialed number and adding number ‘987”,

Enter “3” in “DEL” field.

Enter “‘987” in “Digits to be Inserted” field.

La J+ A----- ----

IENT.1 DELI Digits to be Inserted

l--l--l-------

I 01 I 3 I987

;::; I

I

PI I

When “9-012-345-6789” is dialed,

012 345 6789

T Three digits are deleted and “987” is added

here.

“987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.

. \

To add the above focal access code and the

authorization numbers of the telephone

companies to the user dialed digits, the Modified

Digit Table is made up in the following manner.

3-C-24

When an extension user calls the XYi’ Company

by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the

focal access code and the authorization nut-r&r of

the telephone company A or B before dialing the

telephone number of XYZ Company, as follows:

When trunk group 01 is selected to use the

telephone company A;

54321 p 12345 201-234-5678

--

x=cosrQaw

, Authorization number of

the telephone company A

L Pause

* Local Access Code of the telephone corqoany A

When trunk group 02 is selected to use the

telephone company B;

P

-

7-6543 p 2f X-234-5678 567890

I~

I

Authorization

number of the

telephone

Telephone company ’

number of

XYz oany

Pause

Local Access Code of the telephone company B

LvL--

Modified Dioit Table

Erzer the ~C!AS which you want to add

automaticalty to tne user dialed number into the

-Digits tc be Inserted” field.

Enter the r-rum of digits which you want to

delete from the beginning of the user dialed

number except the feature number for “ARS /

Local CO Line Axess” into DEL” field.

iExan-qle l>

Deleting “012” from the beginning of the user

dialed number and adding number ‘987”,

Enter 3” in “DEL’ field.

Enter ‘987” in ‘Digits to be Inserted” field.

-----------

IENT.1 DELI Digits to be Inserted

l---I--t-------

R 3 ‘987

I

PI I

IO41 I

When ‘9-012-3456789” is died,

p12 345 6789

L Three digits are deleted and ‘987” is added

here.

‘987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.

Toaddtheabovelocalaccesscodeandthe

authorization numbers of the telephone

companies to the user dialed digits, the Modified

Digit Table is ma& up in the following manner.

3-C-24

dxample 2>

To register the bcal access c&e and the

authorization number of the telephone corrpany A

which you want to add automatically when trunk

group 01 or 02 is accessed, enter those numbers

into “Digits to be Inserted” field.

When trunk group 02 is accessed:

987-6543 P P 201-234-5678 567890

I I

Enter these numbers into “Digits to

When trunk group 01 is accessed: be Inserted” field of “ENT’ 02.

7654321 P P 012345 201-234-5678

I

L

Enter these numbers into “Digits to

be Inserted” field of “ENT” 01.

4utornatic Route Selection-Modified Digit Table 1 OFLj PRq SCRl DIR

_---------------s------s-----------

1121 I

(Table 4)

The numbers stored in “Digits to be lnserteg is

sent to the CO line first before the user dialed

number is sent.

To insert the user dialed number into the stored

number, enter “H” at the proper place. Then the

user dialed number is insarted where ‘Ii” is

.I entered and sent to the CO line.

The registered numbers in the above table are

i sent to the CO line as follows: i’

When ‘7654321 PPO1234” is stored:

7654321

m

_

-xz

012345 2012345678 is sent to the CO line.

A r User dialed number

Automatically added number

When “9876543PPH56789” is registered :

9876543

T Automatically added number

2012345678 567890 is sent to the CO line.

Automatically added number

User dialed number

3-C-25

Route Lists Table

Entering ‘TG’

Enter the trunk group nur&ers in “TG-

field

according to the Table 3.

Enter the numbers “02” “01” “03” (7100 a.m. to

1:OO p.m.) in Route List ##Ol.

Enter the numbers “02” “03” ‘01” (1 XXI p.m. to

6:00 p.m.) in Route List ##02.

Enter the numbers “01” “02” ‘03” (6:OO p.m. to

7:00 a.m.) in Route List #O3.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table I OFL 1 PRG 1 SCR I DIR

Route Lists Table (l/6)

Gioutel

I List t

I I

---

I #ml I

I #02 I

I #03 I

I *04 I

I #a5 I

----

p&m 1 r-T--p~~j-----i--

T I

i I

I I I

Trunk group

--

ALV 1

--I

I

number

(Table 5)

----

Priority 3

I

03 I

ITl

--i- - -

M_o_ELI dALVT TG7 &s

I-+-+--t-- I

Il l I I

Il l l I

ll I l I

II I l I

Entering WOD”

Selact the digits that you want to add to or delete

from the telephone number depending on Modified

Digit Tabte (Table 4) and enter the applicable

“ENT” number in “MOD” fiekl.

I.

For trunk group 01, enter ENT “01” in “MOD” field.

For trunk group. 02, enter ENT “02” in “MOD” field.

.- -

I

Automatic Route Selectiin-Route Lists Table I~FLIPRGISCRI DIR 1

Route Liis Table (l/6)

1 #04 I

I I

----

iii? TG IMOD

-t,,-l,l-

I 03 1

I 02

1 02

t- “ENT’ number in Modified Digit Table (Table 4)

(Table 6)

Leave “MOD” field blank if there are no digits to be entered or deleted.

3-C-26

Entering “ALV

It is possible to set

ARS restriction levels from

“01” to “16” for Priority 2, 3, and 4. Enter ARS

restriction level into “ALV” fiekl.

k I

---- -.-

rTE

k:Drd

xJ TG 1

MOD

w

%V

1 T&ODi~A~V~ yGT&

ä -+-+-i--i--i--~t--i-I--i-t-t-l--f

I I II I I II I I II I I I

Entering ‘W

It is programmable to send the warning tone to

the user or not when the trunk group of Priority 2

to 4 are seized, by selecting “Y” in ‘WT” field of

Priority 2.

4 a 4

I

1

-- ---- _-.- -A.-

TG TM~D,~ EJ TG I MODri+-r ALV I T$ MOD~~A~V~ TG~~J

~-+-+-i--i--i--~t--i-1--i-+-t-l-i

I I II I I

II I I II I I I

(Table 8)

Route Plan Table Route Plan Table No. =Ol

Enter the starting Hour designated in Table

2 in the “Start Hour” field.

Enter the Route List Number” in Route

Lists Tabfe (Table 6) depending on the

trunk group in Table 3 into “Route List

Number” field.

r --- --------------

1 1

1 Start Hour I Route List Number (01-64)

r-i-t---l--

1. ._

I--T’T-T-7-1

1 Hour

lAM/PMI MON. I TUE. IWED. I THU. I FRI. I SAT. I SUN. I

l-T--f--l-- r-t-t-t-t-1

l7lAw01l I I I I I I

Enter Route List Number “01” for “Hour” :

7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m..

Enter Route List Number “02” for “Hour” :

1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m..

Enter Route List Number “03” for “Hour” :

6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m..

r-r--r-l-7-1-l--,--,--I

I l I PM I O2 I I I I I I I

,-,--r-r-T-T-7--l

I

Enter the “Route List Number” in Route

Lists Table (Table 6) into each field

divided by hour and the day of the week.

Enter the starting Hour according to Table 2.

(Table 9)

3-C-27

Leadina Didit Table/Office Code Table

1. Leading Digit Table

Leading Digit Table is used for assigning Route Assuming that your system is located in the area

Plan Tabfe Number (RPN) for Area Code or A&200, OG320, that is, your CO number is

office code respectively. (1) + 200 + 320 + XXXX, and Route Plan Table

Route Plan Table number assigned to the &ea number for each Area Code and Offii Code are

Code is applied to the long distance call and determined as follows.

Route Plan table number assigned to the Offii

Code is applied to the local call.

AC-205

--.I

RPN=13

I I

;

CC=322 OC=320

;

CC=321

-------

OC=320

1 I

AC=201 1 AC-202

RPN=lO : OG322 OC=32Oj RPN=lO

O&321

--mm---

OG322

OC-321 OC-321

_--___--

OC-322 OC-322

OC-320

--m--v-.

I I

RPN=l3 ’ CC=320 OC=322

'

RPN=14

AC=208

I I

AC-207

the boundaries of Area Code

-m------- the boundaries of Office Code

3-C-28

Assign Route Plan Table number for each Area C&e or Office Cc&? as follows,

For Long Distance

Call

t

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digu Tab& 1 ONL 1 PRG 1 SCR 1 DIR

--------------------------____

Leading Digit Talk Entry=200

r-r

--f-,---r-r--7--r--r-~--~

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

~-C--I-~---C-C--$--~--t-~--~

I 200 I 1210 I

I

220

I

201

110, I I

I I

1

202

110, 1 1

I 203 p I I

I I

1 204 113 06,

I I

205

I I I I

1 206 114: 1 1

I I

I 207

114, I I

I I :

I I

Enter Route plan Table nun-her for Area Code

For Local Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Dgit Table 1 ONL 1 PRG 1 SCR 1 DIR

-------------------------------

Leading Digit Table Entry=300

r-r--T-,---r-~--T--r--r-7--~

Entry

l---l-

AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

I

300

I

--~-~---c-c--~--~--+-~--~

I

310

I

1 320 1 , 02

I

330

I I

I

301 I 1311 I

1 321

1 , 02 1 1 I I - . ,~ 1

I-I I-I

1 322 1 , 05 1 - 1

Ill Ill I 323

324

I

,09

I 325 1 ,03 1

-

I

. I

1.1’ 1-I

I * I I - I

I I I I I/I I I

- Enter Route Plan Table number for Office Code

L Office Code

3-c-29

2. Office Code Table

Route Plan Table number for Area Code is

applied to the long distance call, accordingly,

the same Route Plan Table number is applied

to all Office Codes within that area.

Office Code Table is used when you want

assign another Route Plan Table number to

an Cffice Code within that area.

Assuming that your system is located in the

area AC=201, CG320, and Route Plan Table

number 7 is applied to the calls for Area A,

AC=200.

Area A

AC=200 1 I

RPN=7 1 OC=321 - 1 d&322

OC=320 1 I

------------

I I

OC=323 1 OC=324 1 OC=325

I

1 RPN=5

------m-m---

Area B

I

OC=326 O&327

I

I I

O&326 O&320 ’ O&323

RPN=2 lSysteml

I

the boundaries of Area Code

__---____ the boundaries of Office Code

In above case, usually Route Plan Table number

7 is applied to all Cffiie Codes within Area A,

AC=200.

But if you want to assign Route Plan Table

number 5 to CC=325 and Route Plan Table

number 2 to CC=328 withii Area A, program the

Leading Digit Table as follows.

3-c-30

Automatic ficute Seklron - Leading Dkjt Tabk 1 ONL 1 PRG 1 SCR 1 DIR

-- --------------------m---- ---

Leading Dgn Table Entry=200

Enter Route Plan Table number

office Code Table No.=01(1/4)

r------------f I--3~“;red--~

2 Hundred Office Code

e--------s----

-----------s-m

l I I I

’ : : : I I ::::::::: I

’ , , ,

I , I , I I ,.,,,,25+ I

I I I

I , , I I I I

’ , I > I I I

’ , # 1 I I I

’ > , I . .

I I I

I ” ’ I I I

I ” ’

c -------em--

-----

I

Area Code

r-

L

200

1

J L-----------4

-------------------

----A* Route Plan Table No. when hit data (0132) 1 05 I

----------------- “t -I

Enter the Area Code.

To register the Office Code 325, enter the last two digits of 325 into

“3 Hundred Office Code” fieki.

200-325-xxxx

IL The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number (TabIe 9) which is applied to calls for

the area, AC=200, OC=325.

Route Plan Table number 5 is applied to the Office Code 325 within the

Area A.

3-c-31

Office Code Table No.=01

(l/4)

r- _-----__- ---

, r------------7

I 2 Hundred Office Code I I

3

Hundred Office Code I

-----__---- _----B---v-

--.

_- -

I

I I I

1 : : : I I :::;;:::: I

1 , , I I I I>,,,,.

I , , , I I

,++--

I , t I I I I

1 , , * I I I

1 # I I I I I

1 I , > I I I

1 I , I I I I

I ” ’

r --------A--

J L-----------;

------

__------------------

I

L

Route Plan Table No. when hii data (01-32) 1 02 I

_------------- --- T- J

Enter the Area Code.

To register the Office Code 328, enter the last two digits of 328 into

‘3 Hundred Office code” field.

200-328-xxxx

-L

The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number (Table 9) whiih is applied to calls

for the area, AC=200, OG328.

Route Plan Table number 2 is applied to the Office Code 328 within the

Area A.

.

3-C-32

The

flow

chart shows the procedures for ARSfeature:

The user dials.

r

I

1 (After passing through the toll restriction procedure)

Following “System-Cperation”, Home Dialing Plan, de-

termines whether the leading digits indicate an area

code or an office &de.

Office code

1

Area code

--- Leading Digit Tabfe 17 r--l Leading Dgit TableOffii code Table -es

1

c2wcks whether Route Plan 7

Table number is entered or ‘t/’

not in ‘CC” field. 7

Table number from

.j

I I

/ f

/ I

I I

I /

; I

I I

.----A

i

I

Prohibits, sends Checks whether dialed Area

I

reorder tone Code is entered or not in “Area

I

Code” of Office Code

Table.

I

Not entered Entered

I

I I

Checks whether dialed Office

I

Code is entered in Office Code I

Table which contains dialed I

Area code.

I

Not entered

Entered

I

obtains applii

Obtains appfii Route Plan

- ,_-

1

I

Route Plan Table Table number from Office Code I

number from

Table which contains dialed

Leading Area Code and Office Code

I

\ I I

I

L --A -t ---------- ---

-t -I

I

Checks whether Route Plan

I

Table number is entered or not

in “AC” field.

I

Not entered

(blank)

I

Entered

I 9

3

*a. I

I

r -------- ---------j

I

Determines Route Lii number by the present time of the day. (Sends reorder tone when

I

Continued from Route Plan Table

.‘”

--- _------

Route Lists Table ------------/

I

. I

I

1 assigned or not.

L ------

r --------------- __------

I

-&,

No --

I Yes

.L

Not obtainable Checks whether an idle line

1 is obtainable or not from the

As: aned si!

I L

Ched<s whether

the next priority is

assigned or not. I

Not assigned

Continued to Modified Digit Table

W TRLE : toll restriction level of extension assigned

in Class of Service.

3-c-34

I

Continued from Route

Lists Table 1

r _----_

Deletes the number of digits entered in “DEL” field from the begin-

I ning of the user dialed nun&?r except the feature number for “A%/

Local CO Line Access.”

I

I v

I

Adds the digits entered in “Digits to be Inserted” field to

I

the user dialed number.

I

.

I ,. I I

L -4

------------ ----------es- -J

3-c-35

3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion

Description

Conditions

When the DTMF dial mode is established on a

CO line, the dial signal sent from an extension

(tone or pulse dial mode) is converted into DTMF

signals by the COT (LCOT,GCOT) card and sent

to the Central Office.

If the PULSE dial mode is established on a CO

line, the dial signal sent from an extension (tone

or pulse dial mode) is converted into pulse signal

by the COT card and.,sent to the Central Office.

When making a CO call, if the trunk is assigned

to a PULSE dial mode, in the following conditions

the dial signal is converted into DTMF signal after

sending a telephone number.

1) A telephone number belongs to “Special

Carrier Access-OCC Access.”

2) The selected trunk group belongs to the

trunk group in “Special Carrier Access-

OCC Access.”

The “DTMF dial mode” or “PULSE dial mode” is

set in “Trunk-CO Line”, Dial Mode.

Set “DTMF” for a CO line which can accept both ‘--

DTMF and PULSE dialing.

Programming

System Programming

“Trunk-CO Line”, Dial Mode

Reference

VT Dumb

9-F-l .OO 1 O-C-1 8.00

After External Feature Access, until the

maximum digits are dialed,‘the’dialing mode is

changed to the mode set in “Trunk-CO Line”, Dial t

Mode.

(With a PITS, Tone Though mode is released

temporarily during this time.)

With a PITS, Tone Through mode is established

automatically after the dialing sequence. 4

After pressing the Tone Through Break button,

until the maximum digits are dialed, the dialing

mode becomes the dialing mode set in “Trunk-

CO Line”, Dial Mode. Tone Through mode is .

released temporarily during the time.

Refer to Section 4-G-l 2.00 “Tone Through (End

to End DTMF Signaling)” for further information.

3-C-36

4.00

Automatic Pause Insertion

Description

When a host PBX or Centrex is accessed and

PBX access code with no restriction or restriction

is programmed, a pause is automatically inserted

after the access code.

This function can only be executed for a trunk

group whose Type PBX. The access code after

which the pause is to be inserted is determined by

programming “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access

Code (No Restriction) or (Restriction)

An example of using the system as behind PBX is

given below.

Dial details: 811 9 201 3456

I

-Tephone

number

Host PBX CO line

accesscode

Feature number for

selecting the CO line

When “9” is entered in “PBX Access Code (No

Restriction)“, the pause b automatically inserted

after dialing 9. * -

When “9” is entered in ‘PBX Access Code

(Restriction)“, the pause is automatically inserted

after dialing 9, and the outgoing restrictions are

checked for the “201 3456” phone number.

The length of the automatically inserted pause

depends on the “Group-Trunk Group”, Pause

Time setting.

Programming

He

System Programmtng VT

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

9-E-l

.Ol

Type

Pause

lime

“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)“, SE-1 .O:

PBX Access Code (No

Restriction)

PBX Access Code (Restriction)

Conditions

When the type of the top priority trunk group is

PBX with the “System-Local Access Group”,

Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

setting, all local access is considered to be host

PBX or Centrex line access. The data set in the

top priority trunk group is used as the data

required for the access.

In the same trunk group, the access codes set in

“PBX Access Code (No Restriition)” and “PBX

Access Code (Restriction)” must be different.

3-c-37

D. Receiving Features

1 .OO Attendant Console Operation

Description An incoming call from a CO line can be routed to the Attendant Console

operator who can then transfer it to the target extension.

This function works by setting “Group-Trunk Group’. Incoming Mode

(Day) to ATT (Attendant Consoles).

--- Up to two Attendant Consoles (with CRT display - Optbnaf) can be

equipped with the KX-T336 system.

The Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Port 1 is for Attendant

Console 1 and Port 2 is for Attendant Console 2.

Outline drawings of the basic process are shown bebw.

Attendant Console Incoming Mode

1. Single Console Operation

l

When Tenant Service is employed:

Attendant-seeking

incoming CO calls

1

2. Dual Console Operation

Attendant-seeking

incoming CO calls

l

When Tenant Service is employed:

Tenant 1 or 2

q :--&

Attendant-seeking

incoming CO calls

1 ‘.-

3-D-l

(30393)

Programming

Dual Console Operation

When two attendant consoles are equipped with the system, one of the

following three types of incoming Mode can be selected.

Options B and C work only for the incoming outside call routed via a CO

line which belongs to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is

assigned as “ATT.”

A. Load Sharing (Section 3-D-l .Ol)

Incoming calls are distributed evenly to two attendant consoles so that

they can share the same load. (default)

B. Simultaneous Ringing (Section 3-D-l .02)

An incoming outside call rings at two attendant consoles

simultaneously.

C. Interconsole IRNA (Section 3-D-l .03)

If an incoming outside call ringing at one attendant console is not

answered within a specified time period (Attendant Overflow Time), it

will be automatically transferred to another attendant console.

This selection can be done by entering the WS3 command at Dumb

programming mode.

Refer to “Attendant Incoming Mode” in Section 10-C-53.00 World Select 3

(WS3).

System Programming Reference

VT I

Dumb

Conditions

“Group-Trunk Group

(l/2)“,

Incoming Mode (Day)

“World Select 3 (WS3)“.

9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 . .

- 10-c-53.00

(1) The attendant console is not availabfe to receive a call in:

l

Night mode (Section 3-B-8.00)

l

ATT-FWD mode (Sectio$&A-1.00) .- 3 ,‘i

(2) What if all six LOOP keys on the attendant console are in use?

l

Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station (Section 6-G-2.00)

(3) What if an incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key is not

answered?

. Automatic Redirection If No Answer (Section 6-G-7.00)

(4) Tenant Service

To use two attendant consoles in dual console operation mode, both

consoles should belong to either one of two Tenants.

:

(5) Operator Assignment

With Dual Console Operation, two attendant consoles must be

programmed as operator 1 and operator 2 for the above operation to

be valid. See Section 3-B-5.00 “Operator” for further information.

3-D-2

(30393)

1.01 Load Sharing

Description

When two attendant consoles are equippec

with the

KX-T336 system,

incoming calls directed to the attendant

console

are distributed to each

console evenly so that both consoles can

share the same

load.

KX-T336 System

Al-T.1

1st -------_-------.._-----------------

3rd _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - 71

2nd -----_-_------_..---________________L

4th ---------------..------------------

Incoming call Ll

Al-f2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.

This setting can be changed to one of the following other two settings by

using the WS3 command at Dumb programming mode.

l

Simultaneous Ringing (Section 3-D-l .02)

l

Interconsole IRNA (Section 3-D-l .03)

Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming

Conditions

I

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1 LZ)“,

Incoming Mode (Day)

“World Select 3 (wS3)“.

9-E-1.01 10-G14.00

1o-c-53.00

. .

1. General and Specific Calls

Incoming outside calls directed to the attendant console are categorized as

“General” or “Specific.”

(General Calls)

l

Operator Call (General)

l

Incoming outside calls routed via CO lines which belong to a Trunk

Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT.”

l

FDN for General Operator Call

(Specific Calls)

l

Operator Calls (Specific)

- Directory Number for ATT1 and 2

2. Call Distribution Order

General calls are distributed to each console on the basis of “First In First

Out.”

Specific

calls always arrive at the specified attendant console.

3-D-2-l

(30393)

3. Automatic Redirection If No Answer

If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to a

Trunk Group whose incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a LOCP

key of ATT1 or 2 is not answered within a specified time (Attendant

Overflow Time), it may be redirected to the extension assigned as the

overflow destination.

Refer to Section S-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for

further information.

KX-T336 System

Al-T1

I

AT-T 2 Ringing at ATT2

i 1

;o No Answer

1

Overflow Extension lime ‘1”’ (Attendant Overflow Time)

Ringing at Overflow Extension

3-D-2-2

(30393)

1.02 Simultaneous Ringing

Description

When two arrendanr wnsoks are equipped with the KX-T336 system, an

incoming outside tail directed to the attendant console will ring on a LOOP

key of both attendant consoles simultaneously.

Programming

KX-T336

System

t

r _-mm-- --m-m) All-l Ringing

: a ’

--------------------------------~

Incoming outside call : 0

L _--m-e ---me) AIT2 Ringing

Conditions

In Dual Console Operation mode,

“Load

Sharing” is the default setting.

This “Simultaneous Ringing’ setting can be selected by using the WS3

command at Dumb programming mode.

Refer

to

Section 1 O-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WSS)” for further information.

1.

A

call

will ring simultaneously at both AlTl and 2 when:

l

An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk

Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATE”

l

Both ATT1 and 2 are available to receive a call.

l

An idle LOOP key is available at both ATT1 and 2.

Otherwise, a call will ring at either one of two attendant consoles.

2. Automatic Redirection If No Answer

If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to

a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a

LOOP key of two attendant consoles simultaneously is not answered

within a specified time (Attendant Overflow Time), it may be redirected

to the extension assigned as the overflow destination.

Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for

further information.

KX-T336 System

I I

--------J ,

I i

I

, k.-.-

L __-. ___-- 3

Al-f2

Overflow Extension

Ringing

Ringing !

No Answer

1

Time Out

1

Ringing at overflow extension

3-D-2-3

(30393)

1.03 Interconsole IRNA

Description

When two attendant consoles are eqd~ped wflr: the KX-T336 system, if an

incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key o: one atiendant console is

not answered within a specified time (Attendant Overtrow Time), it will be

redirected to another attendant console automatically

KX-T336 System

,

Programming

Conditions 1. Interconsole IRNA works when:

Incoming outside

call I

No Answer

0 1

Trne Out

All-2 1

Ringing at AlT2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the defautt setting.

This “Interconsole IRNA” setting can be selected by using the WS3

.’

command at Dumb programming mode.

Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WSS)” for further information.

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

Incoming Mode (Day)

“World Select 3 (WS3)“.

GE-l.01 10-C-14.00

-

1 o-c-53.00

l

An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk

Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATT.”

l

An idle LOOP key is available at the second console when a call

ringing at the first console is not answered within a specified time.

--..

.-.

2. Attendant Overflow Time

The timer which applies to the feature is “System--System Timer”,

Attendant Overflow Time. ‘: 4’

3. Automatic Redirection If No At&& 1 .-._

If an incoming outside call

(a

call routed via a CO line which belongs to

a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATI”) ringing on a

LOOP key of ATT2 (see illustration above) is not answered within a

specified time (Attendant Overflow Time) it may be redirected to the

extension assigned as the overflow extension.

Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for

further information.

KX-T336 System

Ringing at AlT2

1

No Answer

1

lime Out

Overflow Extension 1

Ringing at overflow extension

3-D-2-4

(30393)

2.00 Attendant Console-less

Operation

2.01 Direct In Line (DIL)

Description .-

Once set in system program, this function makes

it possible for an incoming call from a CO line to

go directly to an-extension without assistance of

the attendant.

This function can be performed in two ways, as

described below.

DIL 1 :l : For putting an incoming call from a CO

line trunk to a single destination

Assignable destinations are:

l

Extension User .,.i .‘.’

l

FDNfor Remote

l

FDN for UCD group

DIL 1: N: For putting an incoming call from a CO

line to a maximum of eight destinations

simqltaneously

Assignable destinations are:

l

Extension User

l

Pickup Group

l

ICM Group

For DIL 1 :l , set “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming

Mode (Day) to OIL 1:1, and program the CO

line to thii Trunk Group using Trunk- CO Line”,

Trunk Group. Then set the incoming destination

in “Trunk-CO Line”, Direct Termination.

For DIL 1: N, program “Group-Trunk Group”,

Incoming Mode (Day) to DIL 1: N, and program

the “Group-Trunk Group”, Destination (DIL 1: N

Only) Type and Number.

To use these functions in the Night mode, set the

Day mode to the DIL

1 :l

or DIL 1: N setting, and

set “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming Mode (Night)

to Day Mode.

Programming

DIL 1:l

System Programming Refc

VT

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

Incoming Mode (Day)

Incoming Mode (Night)

“Trunk-CO Line”,

Trunk Group

Direct Termination

9-E-1.01

SF-1 .oO

rence

Dumb

10-C-14.00

lO-Gl8.00

DILl:N

System Programming Reference *

VT 1 Dumb

I I

-Group-Trunk Group (1 R)“, 9-E-l .Ol

Incoming Mode (Day)

Incoming Mode (Night)

“Group-Trunk Group (2Q)“. 9-E-l .02

Destination (DIL 1: N Only)

Type and Number

10-C-14.00

r

10-C-15.00

;d use the DIL 1 :l and DIL

1:

N’&ctions,

program “Group-Trunk Group”,IncomingKIutgoing

to Both-Way or Incoming Only.

Conditions

If CO buttons are assigned, an incoming call to a

PITS will arrive at one otthe CO buttons (except

PC0 button). lf no CO button is assigned, it will

arrive at a PDN.

When a DIL 1

:l

incoming call arrives at a PDN. it

will also arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose

owner is that PDN.

When a DIL 1: N incoming call arrives at a PDN,

it will not arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose

owner is that PDN.

It is programmable that an incoming CO call

routed via DIL 1 :N feature anives at “CO button

only” or “CO button or PDN button.” For further

information, refer to Section 1 O-C-53.00 “World

Select 3 (WS3).”

3-D-3

2.02 Direct Inward System Access

(DISA)

Description

DISA allows an outside party calling into the

system on a DTMF line to directly access certain

system features, without attendant assistance.

After gaining access to the system, the caller can

access allowed features by dialing the appropriate

feature number.

The caller is required to enter DISA User Code

before being allowed to make an outgoing CO call

via DISA feature.

Once a DISA call has gained access to the

system, it is treated as any other incoming CO

call.

Extension call via DISA is made as follows:

JgpiEq-/-~~gbn~

Party L-----------------,--~

Outgoing call via DISA is made as follows:

Outside

Party

central .:- *__

off ice

i-1

X

Outside Party

To utilize DISA feature, a DISA card is required

and assign “Special Attended-DISA”, For Use to

“DISA.” _

It can be used as one of the following four ways.

1. OGM 1 for UCD with OGM

2. OGM 2 for UCD with OGM

3. OGM for DISA

4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)

Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the

system.

Programming

System Programming

Zonfiguratbn-Sbt Assignment”

‘System-System limer”,

Intercept Routing Time-Out

(DISA)

‘Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

Incoming Mode (Day)

Incoming Mode (Night)

Intercept Routing (Day)

InterceptRouting (Night)

Trunk-AGC

‘Special Attended-DISA”

Reference

VT Dumb

9-c-2.00 lo-c-2.00

9-D-3.00 104-6.00

9-E-l .Ol lO-Gl4.00

9-F-3.00 10-C-21 .OO

9-K-l .oo 1 o-C-40.00

to 41 .oc

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of

DISA card can be programmed by “Special

Attended-DISA*, Tenant-

Automatic Gain Control can be used for DISA to

maintain the volume of CO-CO call via DISA

feature by equipping up to four AGC cards. lf

Tenant Service is employed, the AGC card can

be assigned to a tenant in ‘Trunk-AGC.”

Dialing *’ allows the user to call again or

disconnect the line. It is possible to disable it by

setting ‘Special Attended-DISA’, Control Code

*“to “No.”

Four digit DISA User Code is necessary for

making outgoing calls via DISA. It is assigned in

“Special Attended-DISA”, DISA User Code.

To execute Intercept Routing-No Answer and

Rerouting for DISA calls, assign “System-System

Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA) and

“Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day)

and (Night).

For further information, refer to Section 3-F-5.00

‘Intercept Routing-No Answer (RNA).”

3-D-4

(40993)

Conditions

DISA calls should be made from external callers

by DTMF dial type telephone instruments.

I! reorder tone is returned but WW is not dialed in

10 seconds, the line will be disconnected.

Rerouting starts in the cases below:

1)

2)

3)

4)

When nothing is dialed in 10 seconds during

no tone heard after OGM is sent.

When a wrong extension number is dialed.

When the number of “Out Service” status

extension is dialed.

When a wrong DISA user code is dialed.

If the destination of Intercept Routing is

programmed, extension calls unanswered in

programmed period are forwarded to the

destination. The call will be disconnected after

60 seconds, if the destination does not answer.

If no destination is programmed, extension calls

are disconnected after 60 seconds, if

unanswered.

Procedures for outgoing calls are similar to that

from extensions.

Warning tone is sent during CO-CO conversation

15 seconds before time limit programmed in

“Group-Ttunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit. It

is possible to prolong the duration by dialing a

digit other than *” and Y.” Prolonging the

duration is enabled or disabled by system

programming.

It-can be selected whether dete&& of fhe CPC

signal is done at the end of the CO-CO

conversation or not in %unk-AGC”, Tone Detect.

If “Tone Detect” is set to “Yes,” the followings will

occur in each case:

cl> tf the calling party finishes first, both lines

are disconnected.

Operation

Calling an extension from outside

Dial the telephone number of the

line which is programmed as a

DISA line in this system.

l

You hear ringback tone u&l

the system detects your call.

l

When it is detected, you hear

the outgoing message if

recorded, or no tone if not

recorded.

Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

You hear ringback tone.

When the extension answers,

start conversation.

<2> If the receiving party finishes first, reorder

tone is sent to the caller.

3-D-5

Calling an external oafly

1. Da. ye :&es-oze -*l--a- of the

U,. -_.

1ir.e ivnich is orogrammez as a

DlSA ilne ir iEqs system.

L Ak I

l

You hear ringback tont until

the system detects yo,r call.

l

When it is detected, ycu hear

the outgoing message

if

recorded, or dial tone t if not

recorded.

2. Dial the feature number for

selecting a CO line.

) -

l

You hear dial tone 2.

3. Dial the DISA user code: four

digits.

4. Dial the telephone number of the

external party.

\

id

I

5. When the external.party

answers, start conversation (CO-

CO conversation).

(Supplement)

If account code entry is forced for the accessed

line by programming, you must dial the account

code in step 4 before the telephone-number.

Calling again

While talking with an external party, or hearing

ringback tone, busy tone, or reorder tone.

11 1. Dial I‘*.”

l

You hear dial tone 1.

(13

q

2. To call an extension, follow the

456

7*0 procedure for calling an

* extension from step 2.

To call an external party, follow

the procedure for calling an

external party from step 4.

(Supplement)

If you dial u*n while hearing OGM, or hearing no

tone in 10 seconds after OGM is sent, or hearing

dial tone, you are disconnected from the line.

If you dial U*” during conversation with an

extension, you are not disconnected and able to

continue the conversation.

3-D-6

2.03 Direct inward Dialing (DID)

Description

Incoming calls can be put through directly to

extensions in accordance with the subscriber

numbers sent from the Central Office.

Either an Attendant Console or UCD group may

serve as the destination of the incoming calls.

DID lines are for incoming calls only. They cannot

be employed for outgoing calls.

To make use of DID trunks, program “Group-

Trunk Group”, Type to DID, and assign the CO

lines to be used for DID by programming the

“Trunk-CO tine”, Trunk Group option. It is also

necessary to set the DID Start Arrangement in

“Trunk-CO Line* and the DID Digit Modification

Table in “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)“. The digit

modification table is used to convert the

subscriber numbers sent from the Central Office

into DNs or Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).

The number of received digits, the number of

digits to be deleted and the digits to insert are

programmed in the “Special Attended-DID”

screen.

Programming

System Programming

‘Group-Trunk Group”,

Type

DID Digit Modification Table

“Trunk-CO Line”,

Trunk Group

DID

Start Arrangement

“Special Attended-DID”,

Receive Digit

Delete Digit

Insert Dial No.

Rei

v-r

9-E-l

.Ol

9-E-l .02

9-F-l .OO

9-K-2.00

ence

DWTlb

10-c-14.00

10-G15.00

10-C-18.00

1O-c-q.00

Conditions

Exactly

how

a subscriber number received from

the Central Office is converted into a DN or FDN

in the DID Digit Modification Table is explained

below using an example.

“Special Attended-DID” Table settings

Receive Digit: 4

Delete Digit: 2

Insert Dial No.: 2

Subscriber number received from the Central

Office: 43112

Processing

cl> The “2” in 43112 is ignored since there are

four receive digits. This leaves 4311.

c2> “43” is deleted since there are two delete

digits. This leaves 11. Note that the digits

are deleted from the front of the number.

<3> Insert Dial No. ‘2” makes the final number

211 which serves as the DN or FDN. Note

that digits are inserted at the front of the

number.

Reorder tone is sent to the DID caller if the

number of digits received is less than the number

programmed in “Special Attended-DID”, Receive

Digit.

The subscriber number received from the Central

Office is converted into a DN or FDN. If it could

not be put through to the incoming call

destination, because the DN or FDN does not

exist or the destination is Out of Service, the call

is sent

to

the destinatfdn specified by the “Group-

Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day/Night). If

there is nothing programmed for intercept routing

then the call is sent to Operator 1.

When the CO Forward Mode function has been

programmed in “System-Class of Service” for

the DID incoming call destination, forwarding will

not take place, and the call will be put through to

the extension.

3-D-7

2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station

(TAFAS)-Day Service

Description

Incoming CO calts programmed for TAFAS will

ring the external pager

and

any extension user in

the system can answer the calls by dialing the

feature number for ‘Night Answer 1” (when a call

is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2”

(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).

To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk

Group”, incoming Mode

(Day) to TAFAS 1 or

TAFAS 2,

and

“Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1

to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming

Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).

To utilize the external pager, assign “System-

Operation”, External Paging 1,2” to “Yes.”

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external

pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external

pager 2.

. Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The

difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode

and UNA is available in night mode.

For

further information

about UNA, refer to

Section 4-l-l -01 “Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

Programming

System Propmmkg Reference

VT Dumb

‘System-Operation (I/3)‘.

9-D-l .Ol ltMz-4.00

External Paging

1,2

‘System-Numbering Plan (3B)“. 9-D-6.03

lO-GlO.00

Night Answer

1

Night Answer 2

“Group-Trunk-Group (I@“. Q-E-1

.Ol 10-C-14.00

incoming Mode (Day)

“Trunk-CO Lie’. SF-l.00

lo-C-18.00

Trunk Group

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00

lO-C-19.00

External Pager-Tenant

Conditions

If tenant service is employed :

The affiliation of each external pager is

determined by the system programming in

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-

Tenant.

Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call

ringing at an external pager in the different

tenant.

,l ,. i.

3-D-8

2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-

General

Description

Calls to a UCD group are distributed unifomtly

among the group members so that each member

can share the same load.

This UCD feature is particularly helpful when

certain extension receives a high volume of calls

compared with other extensions.

E=mpW

DIL 1:l

Switching

system

co1 Extension A

co2 Extension B

co3 Extension C

Calls from CO 1 akays arrive at Extension A

Calls from CO 2 always arrive at Extension B

Calls from CO 3 always arrive at Extension C

M Switching

system

Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle station in

a

circular way, starting at the extension folbwing

the last one called.

Call completion time is minimized without

attendant assistance.

UP to 32 UCD groups can he set up in the system

and they can be categorized into the following

two types.

1. UCD group with CGM (01-04)

-Section 2.06-l

2. UCD group without OGM (0532)

-Section 2.06-2

Detaifed information is described in the Section

3-D-2.06.

.*i7-.

The UCD group is comprised of one or more

pickup groups in the same Intercom group.

An extension can be in only one UCD group.

Members can leave the group temporarity, to

prevent calls being sent to their extension

o-ogw -

3-D-9

(40993)

2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-

with/without OGM

2.06-l

UCD Group

with OGM (01-04)

Description

UCD Groups 0144 are provided exclusively for

receiving outside calls.

co

;;

-.

, lrj-LJyl]

EXLlOi Ext.101

4 < I

I J

Ext.102

UCD group (01-04)

If all

group members are busy

A caller may receive an answer delay

announcement (OGM 1,Z) and be placed in the

waiting queue until any one of busy

group

member goes on-hook, or be redirected to

another destination (Overflow destination), or

receive any other treatments.

A type of treatments may diier depending on the

preprogrammed UCD Timetable.

a call (All Logout

A call will be redirected-to another destination

(Overflow destination) immediately.

1

1 UCDW) 1

(All busy)

(only one for each group)

Programming

“Group-Trunk Group (1 R)

incoming Mod&

(Dayj

-DIL

1 :l

Incoming Mode (Night)

-Day Mode .’

“Group-Call Piiup Group”. UCD

Trunk-CO Line”,

Direct Termination-DN

‘Extension-Station

(1 n)“,

Pickup Group

“Special Attended-DISA”,

For Use

“Special Attended-UCD

(1 R)".

01 to 04

Special Aftended-UCD (2f2)

--la

VT

SE-l.01

9-E-3.00 1&c-17.00

SF-l.00 lo-c-18.00

9-G-1.01 10-GZOO

SK-l.00 1O-C-4O.00

SK-3101 1O-G44.00

9-K-3.02 1tX-45.00

3-D-l 1

(40993)

Condttions

1. Calts which can arrive at a UCD group (with

OGM) are:

l

Incoming outside calls via DIL( 1 :l) for which

destination is set as FDN of a UCD group

l

Incoming outside calls via DID by dialing

FDN of a UCD group

l

Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing

FDN of a UCD group

l

incoming outside calls transferred by an

attendant console or extension

2. Login and Logout

Members can leave the group temporarily

when they will be away from their desks, to

prevent calls being sent to their extension.

o-ogw

They can return to the group when they are

ready to answer a call. (Login)

Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 “Uniform Call

Diiributlon (UCD)-Log Out” for more

information on login and logout.

3. Busy status

l

When ‘Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call

Forwarding” has been set to the extension.

l

When any one of PDN has been used.

(Including using own PDN as an SDN at

another extension)

l

When the extension is off-hook.

4. Auto-Logout

When a group member does not answer a call

more than a set time period (“Call Forwarding-

No Answer Time-Out”), the call will be

automatically transferred to another member’s

extension.

If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs twice in

succession, the extension is automatically set

to bgout status.

What if all members are logged-out?

Assuming that a UCD group has three

members and twc are already logged out, and

)

a call rings into the UCD.

lf the member that is logged-in does not

answer after two cycles, “Auto-Logout

happens.

3-D-l 2

(40993)

Then depending on your software version, the

call is handled as follows.

(Software version 8. XX and above)

The call overflows to the overflow destination

immediately after the Auto-Logout.

This is changed from 6.XX versions.

(Software version 6.XX and below)

The call is put in the wafting queue.

But continues to hear ringback tone.

Not timetable.

5 Overflow destination

One of the following three destinations can be

assigned as the overflow destination (OFDN)

per UCD group (0144).

l

Attendant Console

l

Extension

l

Another UCD Group (0%04), (0532)

(Treatment of the calls transferred to the overflow

destination (OFDN))

(1) What-if the.overfbw destination is busy?

The call is put in the waiting queue, and will

begin to ring at the overflow destination as

soon as it becomes idle.

or

The call may begin to ring at a group

member’s extension, if it becomes idle while

overflow destination is still busy.

Thecallisputin *No Is ovetfbw

the waiting queue. destination idle?

I

Ir

The call begins to

ring at overflow

1 destination.

(2) What if a call rinoina at overflow destination

/AlT/EXT.) is not answered?

Overfbw destination (ATT/EXT.)

I

(No answer)

(A) A call which comes in directly on the overflow

destination*’ continues to ring on it.

(B) A call which comes in on the overflow

destination after being answered or held

once by the system’2 will be disconnected

automatically, if not answered by the overflow

destination within 60 seconds.

l

’ A call via DIL 1 :l , DID.

l

2 A call via DISA, transferred by ATT or

Extension, or a call held by the system as a

treatment of the UCD Time Table.

6.

OGMl

and OGM2

To utilize OGM, install Direct Inward System

Access (DISA) card to the system and assign

the usage of DISA card to ffiM1 and/or

OGM2 by system programming in advance.

The Operator 1 can record OGM.

Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the

system.

Four OGMs per DISA card can be sent to

outside callers simultaneously.

Refer to Section 3-F-4.00,4-l-l 3.00 and

6-J-6.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM)

Recording and Playing Back,” tor further

information.

7. UCD TImetable

When all extensions in a UCD group are busy,

calls are handled according to the pre-

programmed timetable.

The timetable is assigned to the system by

employing “UCD Time Table-UCD (2Q)” in

system programming.

(1) Number of timetables

Each UCD group (01 to 04) has own timetable

respectively.

(2) Up to 16 steps can be registered par timetable

by selecting a command listed below.

Command list and functions

Command Functions

1T Callers are put in the waiting queue

for 15 seconds.

2T Callers are put in the waiting queue

for 30 seconds.

3T Callers are put in the waiting queue

for 45 seconds.

4T Callers are put in the waiting queue

for 60 seconds.

OlW When OGMl is in use, wait until

OGMl becomes available and then

OGMl is sent to the caller.

02w When OGM2 is in use, wait until

OGM2 becomes available and then

OGM2 is sent to the caller.

01s OGMl is sent to the caller if

available.

02s

H

TR

OFF

When OGMl is in use, skips to the

next step without sending OGMl .

OGM2 is sent to the caller if

available.

When OGM2 is in use, skips to the

next step without sending OGM2.

Music-on-Hold is sent to the caller.

Transfers a call to the overflow

destination set by “OFDN” of

“Special Attended-UCD( l/2)” in

system programming.

Disconnects the outside call.

Note: Any command after “TR” or “OFF” does not

function.

3-D-13

(40993)

i

(3) Music on Hold is sent to the caller in the

queue until a group member answers it.

(Example)

In the following case, Music on Hold is sent to

the caller, during 4T (60 seconds) interval.

OlW+4T ~

--L Sends MJsic on Hold

Timetable operation examples

(Example

1) 01s -+ 4T -+ 2T+ 02s + TR

I

(1)

(2) (3) (4)

f

UCD Group

(1) The caller hears OGMl , if available.

(Example)

I

Sorry, all lines are busy.

Please wait a moment I

.

atdOGM1 is&&

Steps (1) and (2) will be skipped.

The caller hears OGM2, if

available (Go to Step 3).

lf “01 W is used instead of ‘YXS.’

the caller first hears ringback tone

and then will hear OGMl as soon

as it becomes available (Go to

Step 2).

.

at rf ffiM1 IS Out of Service?

Steps (1). (2) a& (3) will be

skipped. The caller is directly

transferred to the Overflow

destination (Go to Step 4).

(2) The caller hears Music on Hold for

90 seconds (4T + 2T).

(3) The caller hears OGM2.

(E=mW

I

Sorry, all lines are still busy.

Calling the Operator. I

(4) The caller is transferred to the

Overflow destination (Operator or

covering extension).

Note:

l

During steps (1) through (3), the

caller will be connected to a UCD

group member as soon as

anyone of members becomes

available to answer the call.

3-D-l 4

(40993)

(Example 2)

(Example 3)

01S+&-+4T-+2T--+02S-+H =

+TR

If “H” command is used as shown

above, Music on Hold is always

sent to the caller whether OGMs

are In Service or not.

OtS+ 2T+02W+OFF

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

- 1

UCD Group

(1) The caller hears OGMl .

(E=wle)

If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service,

thii step will be skipped.

Then the caller hears ringback

tone.

(2) The caller hears Music on Hold for

30 seconds (2T).

(3) The caller hears OGM2.

WwW

If OGM2 is busy, the caller first

hears ringback tone and then will

hear OGM2 as soon as it becomes

available. ,

(4) The caller is disconnected from the

switch.

(Example

4) H + TR

(1)

+ 1

UCD

Group

(1) The caller hears Music on Hold until

anyone of the group members or

Overflow destination becomes idle.

Note:

l

If ‘IT” command is used instead

of “H,” the caller hears ringback

tone instead of Music on Hold.

(Example 5) H + 01s + TR

(1)

(2)

(3)

L , 1

i

UCDGroup ’

(1) This step is skipped automatically.

“H” does not function.

(2) The caller hears O&l followed by

Music on Hold.

(3) The caller is transferred to the

Overflow destination.

3-D-14-1

(40993)

2.08

Single CO (SCO)

,

Description

To support prompt handling of outside calls. a CO

line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS

telephone.

When this function is assigned, a DN button on

a

PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button.

SC0 button feature provides easy access to the

CO lines for extension users who make and

receive many outside calls.

The PITS telephone user can access a CO line

by simpiy pressing the SC0 button without

dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming

outside

call can be directed to the

PITS

telephone via dedicated SC0 button without

assistance

of the Operator.

In

addition, the associated status LED provides

busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

SC0 button can be used either one-way service

(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways

service (Both-Way).

. SC0 button can be assigned to a PITS telephone

\ in conjunction with DIL 1:l or DIL 1 :N feature.

SC0 button with 011 1: 1 feature

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SC0 button

can be assigned to the PITSfelephone

programmed as the destination of DIL 1: 1

feature.

If SC0 button is not assigned on the PITS

telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN

button on it.

The table below shows the relationsmetween

the DN button programmed as Single CO and the

CO line status:

\.-

Indicator

CO Line Status

off Idle

Lights green l-use

Green 60 wink l-hold

Green 120 wink

l-exclusive hold,

consultation hold,

unattended conference

Green 240 wink Incoming call (DIL

1: 1)

Lights red

Other-use, exclusive hold

Red 60 wink Other-hold

Red 120 wink Privacy release possible

Red 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

CO line which can be assigned as a SC0 button

is:

. A CO line which belongs to a trunk group

assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and

whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL

1: 1, or DIL

. .

. A CO line which belongs to a trunk group

assigned as Outgoing Only.

i

Programming

e efenca

System Programming VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)“. m-1 a lo-c24.00

Type and Number

Conditions

. Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

function is set, it is overridden by an outgoing

call made by pressing the Single CO button.

. The Single CO button indicator will light up red

in the following circumstances.

cl>

When the Single CO is not.@ Service

<2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out

status

<3> Idle status and Single CO in trunk route

control status

When the Single CO button is pressed in

any of these statuses, its indicator lights up

“i

green but busy tone is heati.- Lt.-

In the following cases, the Single CO button

indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is

sent.

4 > When Calling

Party

Control signal

has

been detected during a call using the

Single CO.

~2>

When outgoing restriction applies to an

outgoing call made from the Single CO.

3-D-16

(30393)

2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-

with/without OGM

2.06-Z UCD Group without OGM (05-32)

DescrlptCon

UCD Groups (05-32) are provided to receive both

extension and outside calls.

I co

r-.

Extw

Extlll

UCD group (05-32)

If all qmup members are busy

A call is placed in the waiting queue and the

caller hears ringbadc tone.

A call in the queue will be redirected to another

destination (Overflow destination) it all group

members are still busy after a specified time

period (Overflow hmer - OT) has elapsed.

are not

a call (All Loaout)

A call will be redirected to another destination

(Overflow destination) immediately.

2%

UCD (05)

(All busy)

(All logout)

1

Overflow timeout

(01

.

Overflow destination

(OFDN) -

I

Programming

System Programming Refemloe

VT

Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2) SE-101 l&C14.0(

Incoming Mode

(Day)

-DIL

1:l

Incoming Mode (Night)

-Day Mode

‘GroupCall Pickup Group”, UCD Q-E-3.00

lO-Gl7.oL

‘Trunk-CC tine”, SF-1 .OO lo-C18.00

Direct Termination-DN

‘Extension-Station (In)“, 9-G-l .Ol 10-C-22.00

Pickup Group

‘Special Attended-UCD (112)” SK-3.07 lW-44.0(1

05to32

3-D-14-2

(40993)

Condftlons

1. Calls which can arrive at UCD group (0532)

are:

(1)

Outside calls

l

Incoming outside calls via DIL (1 :l) for ’

which call destination is set as FDN of a

UCD group

l

Incoming c&ide calls via DID by dialing

FDN of a UCD group

l

Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing

FDN of a UCD group

l

Incoming outside calls transferred by the

Extension or Attendant Console

(2) Extension calls

l

Calls made by extension or attendant

console by dialing FDN of UCD group

l

Calls transferred by extension or attendant

console by dialing FDN of UCD group.

2. Login and Logout

Members can leave the group temporarily

when they will be away from their desks, to

prevent calls being sent to their extension.

wxw)

They can return to the group when they are

ready to answer a call. (Login)

Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 YJniform Calt

Diiributiin (UCD)- Log Out” for more

information on bgin and bgout. d 9

3. Busy status

l

When ‘Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call

Forwarding. has been set to the extension.

l

When any one of PDN is used.

(Induding using own PDN as an SDN at

another extension)

. When the extension is off-hook.

<LCD display> (Extension user only)

When all extensions within a UCD group are

busy, the display, if provided, of the callets PITS

shows:

4. Overflow destination

One of the following three destinations can be

assigned as the overflow destination (OFDN)

per UCD group (0532)

l

Attendant Console

l

Extension

l

Another UCD Group (05-32)’

l

UCD group (01-04) is not available to set

as the overflow destination of a UCD

group (0532).

<LCD display> (Extension user only)

When a call to a UCD group is transferred and

placed to another UCD group assigned as

ovetfbw destination, the display, if provided, of

the calleh PITS shows:

I- 5678: UCD GRP 08 1

(Treatment of the calls transferred to the overflow

destination (OFDN))

(1) What if the overflow destination is busy?

The caff is put in the waiting queue, and will

begin to ring at the overfbw destination as

soon as it becomes idle. ”

or

r

The call may begin to ring at a group

member’s extension, if it becomes idle while

overfbw destination is still busy.

Thecallisputin *No Is overfbw

the waiting queue. destination idle?

I

FDN UCD group number

3-D-l 4-3

(40993)

1

(2)

What if a call ringing at overflow

destination

is not answered?

In case the overflow destination is

an

Operation

Making a call from extension to a UCD group

attendant console or extension. z

1.

Lii the handset or press the SP-

L-l

PHONE button.

&==

l

Dial tone 1 or 3 or 4 sounds.

1. When the call ringing at overflow

destination has originally arrived to

a UCD

group by call transfer.

(Transfer&call)

The call will ring back at the attendant

console/extension who transferred it, if not

answered until the transfer recall timer has

elapsed.

F-l

2. Dial FDN of the UCD group.

AlTEXT.

Transfer

UCD group (0532)

(All Login)

1

2. When the call ringing at overflow

destination has originally routed via DISA.

The call will be disconnected automatically,

if not answered within 60 seconds.

5. Automatic Logout

When an extension in a UCD group does not

answer more than a set time period’, the call

will be automatically transferred to another

membel’s extension.

If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs twice in

succession, the extension is automatically set

to logout status.

l

“Call Forwarding-No Answer Time-Out”

3-D-1 4-4

(40993)

2.07 Private CO (PCO)

Description Conditions

It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were

connected directly to a DN button on a PITS.

This operation is called Private CO (PCO).

It is then no longer possible to place outgoing

calls from other extensions using this CO line.

Also, an incoming call from the CO line assigned

as PC0 will arrive only at this PITS.

A Private CO button lights up red at the times

below.

1) When the Private CO line is not In Service.

2) When the Private CO line has been set to

CO Busy-Out.

3) When access using the Trunk Verify

function is made by the Attendant Console.

To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk

Group’, Type to PVL and program the CO line to

the Private trunk group in ‘Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk

Group.

Also, program the DN button on the PITS to

PRV-CO using “Extension-Station (Z/S)“, Type

and assign the physical number of the Private

CO line under Number.

Programming

System Programming Retefence

VT 1 Dumb

I

‘Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“, 9-E-l .ot

10-C-14.00

Type

“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00

“Extension-Station (2/a)“,

g-G-1.02 10-c-24.00

Type and Number

A call held on a Private CO button can not be

retrieved by other extensions, however, an

incoming call to a Private CO button can be

transferred.

When an incoming CO calf arrives, ringing occurs

instantly. Delayed ringing is not available.

zF.+. .-

-.-

iye.+-. i.

3-D-l 5

2.08

Single CO (SCO)

Description

To

support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO

line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS

telephone.

When this

function is assigned, a DN button on a

PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button.

SC0 button feature provides easy access to the

CO lines for

extension

users who make and

receive many outside calls.

The PITS telephone user can access a CO line

by simply pressing the SC0 button without

dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming

outside call can be directed to the PITS

telephone via dedicated SC0 button without

assistance of the Operator.

In addition, the associated status LED provides

busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

SC0 button can be used either one-way service

(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways

service (Both-Way).

. SC0 button can be assigned to a PITS telephone

\ in conjunction with DIL 1 :l or DIL 1 :N feature.

SC0 button with DIL 1: 1 feature

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SC0 button

can be assigned to the PlTSfelephone

programmed as the destination of DIL 1: 1

feature.

lf SC0 button is not assigned on the PITS

telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN

button on it.

The table below shows the relations@&tween

the DN button programmed as Single CO and the

CO line status:

Indicator CO Line Status

off Idle

Lights green l-use

Green 60 wink l-hold

Green 120 wink l-exclusive hold, consultation hold,

unattended conference

Green 240 wink Incoming call (DIL

1: 1)

Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold

Red 60 wink Other-hold

Red 120 wink Privacy release possible

Red 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

CO line which can be assigned as a

SC0

button

is:

l

A CO line which belongs to a trunk group

assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and

whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL

1: N.

l

A CO line which belongs to a trunk group

assigned as Outgoing Only.

Programming

Conditions

l

Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

function is set, it is ovemdden by an outgoing

call made by pressing the Single CO button.

l

The Single CO button indicator will light up red

in the following circumstances.

cl> When the Single CO is not& Service

<2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out

status

c3>

Idle status and Single CO in trunk route

control status

When the Single CO button is pressed in

any of these statuses, its indicator lights up

green but busy tone is heard? ;-:..

In the following cases, the Single CO button

indicator remains fit green and reorder tone is

sent.

cl> When Calling Party Control signal has

been detected during a call using the

Single CO.

<2> When outgoing restriction applies to an

outgoing call made from the Single CO.

3-D-l 6

(30393)

2.09 Group CO (GCO)

Description

To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a

group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned

to a DN button on a PITS telephone.

When this function is assigned, a DN button on a

PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.

GCO button feature provides better service with

a given number-of CO lines.

GCO button can be assigned to a PITS

telephone in conjunction with DIL 1: N feature.

incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group

can be directed to a maximum of eight

destinations (extension user, ICM group, pickup

group) simultaneousty.

In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons

on the PITS telephone.

If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls

via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.

To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user

can access an idle CO line in the group by simply

pressing the dedicated GCO button.

The table below shows the relationship between

the DN button programmed as Group CO and the

CO line status:

Indicator CO Line Status

off Free CO line in trunk group and no

incoming CO call

Lights green l-use

Green 60 wink l-hold

Green 120 wink l-exclusive hotd. consuhation hold,

unattended conference

Green 240 wink -

Lights red No idle CO lines in trunk group

and no incoming call in trunk

group

Red 60 wink -

Red 120 wink -

Red 240 wink CO line receiving an incoming call

in trunk group

Trunk group which can be assigned as a GCO

button is:

l

A trunk group assigned as Bothway or

Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode

(Day) is DIL 1 :l or DIL 1: N.

l

A trunk group assigned as Outgoing Only.

Programming

Conditions . .

When the ARS function is set, it is overridden by

outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.

Pressing a Group CO button when it is red

serves to set the ‘Automatic Callback to Trunk”

function.

See Section 4-C-6.01,5-A-4.01 “Automatic

Callback-Trunk” for details.

In the following cases, the Group CO button

indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.

cl> When Calling Party Control signal has

been detected during a call using the

Group CO.

c2>

When outgoing restriction applies to an

outgoing call made from a Group CO.

3-D-l 7

(30393)

2.10 Flexible SCOlGCO Assignment

Descrtption

1. Restricxns”on SCOGCO Assianment has been lifted.

Therefore. CO lines of the same trunk group can be assigned to both GCO

(as a group unit) and SC0 (as a single unit) at a time.

*’ Refer to CO Appearance Type in Section 9-E-l .02 “Trunk Group (U2).”

Assuming that Trunk Group 01

consists of the following CO lines.

Case 1. Case 2. Case 3.

-1 r-l r-

EXT.100 EXT.100 EXT.1 00

sco-1011

sco-1012

x0-01

Old version

Case 1 1 Case 2 Case 3

Available * 2 Not Available

1 New version 1 Avaifabfe I

*2 In old version. either Case 1 or 2 is avail&k for the Trunk Group 01

depending on the setting of “Group-Trunk Group: CO,Appearance

Type.

(Appearance of the call indication in Case 3.)

SC0 has priority over GCO when incoming CO calls come.

When an outside call via CO line-l

011

comes in on an extension, the

call indication appears on SCO-1011, not on GCO-01.

However

it may appear on GCO-01, if SCO-1011 is in use as follows.

3-D-17-1

(40993)

(Example)

1. SCO-1011 is in use.

2. Indication

of

the call which comes in on Ext.100

via CO

line-1011

appears on (X0-01 .*’

7.

2

EXT.100

SCO-1011 is lit

in green.

sco-1011

SCO-1012

GCO-01

EXT. 100

GCO-01 is flashing

in red or green.

*’ In old version, SCO-1011 cannot be assigned together with GCC-01 at

single PtTS in Case 3.

sco-1011

SCO-1012

GCO-01

A call comes in on Ext.1 00 via CO line-l 011 is put on waiting

status

until (X0-01 becomes available.

2. Retrieving a call held on GCO from SCO.

Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines and

GCO and SC0 buttons are assigned as follows. .,

TGOl CO line 1011

CO line 1012

CO line 1013

CO line 1014

--. “,

GCO-01 is in use at EXT.100 now.

_ ,-... . . .

/ I IGco-ol

EXT. 100 EXT.101

GCO-01 is lit in SCO-1011 is lit

green*. in red*.

I sco-1011

Ei ;z:::3’

m sco-1014

=a In case, CO line 1011 is captured by pressing GCO-01.

3-D-l 7-2

(40993)

Programming

When a

call

on GCO-01

is

put on hold at EXT.1 00.

GCO-01 begins to

flash in green and SCO-1011 on En.101 %xyx 1:: t!ash in fed

as

follows:

L

sco-01

EXT.101

sco-1011

sco-1012

sco-1013

sco-1014

EXT.101 can retrieve a call held on GCO-01 by simply pressing the red

flashing SCO-1011.

Conditions None

- --i--

3-D-l 7-3

(40993)

2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment

Description

Restrictions on GCO button assignment has been lifted.

Therefore, more than one GCO button of the same trunk group can be

assigned to a srngle PlTS extension.

(Example)

Assuming that Trunk Group

01

consists of the following CO lines.

Programming

Case 1.

q

m

GCO-01

Ext.1 00

Case 2.

/

Ext.1 00

GCO-01

~ CD

Ext.101

a

II

a

Ext.101

Old version

Case 1

Available

Case 2

r-.

Not Available

1 New version 1

Available I

System Programming Fteference

VT

I

Dumb

“Extension-Station (213)“.

Type and Number

GCO-01

3-D-l 7-4

(30393)

Conditions

(1) Appearance of the call indication in case 2

If more than one outside call (via CO lines of the same trunk group)

comes in under the following situation. the seCOnd call will appear on

the next GCO button of

the

same extension.

(Example)

Trunk Group 01

CO Lines

CO Line

1011

CO Line

1012

Direct Termination

Ext. 100

Incoming Mode (Day):

DIL

1: 1

CO Line 1013

CO Line 1014

Ext. 101

1. GCO-01 is in use at Ext.1 00.

2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.1 00 via a CO line of

Trunk Group 01 appears on another GCO of Ext.100.’

1.

2

El

I

L

GCO-01

c3co-01

GCO-01

Ext. 100

Ext.1

00

* In case 1 (Old version), the indication of this call does not appear until

GCO-01 on the Ext.100 becomes available.

3-D-l 7-5

(30393)

3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment

3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment- 3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment -

No Ringing Delayed Ringing

Description Description

Each line access button on the PITS telephone

can be programmed to ring or not to ring when

incoming calls arrive during the day or at night.

When incoming calls are placed to PITS from

extensions, CO lines or doorphones, the

indicators of the PDN: SDN, SCO, GCO and PC0

buttons corresponding to the respective incoming

calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing

is sent to the phone.

It is possible to disable the ringing and have

different settings in the day and night mode.

When incoming calls are placed to PITS from

extensions, CO lines or door-phones, the

indicators of the PDN, SDN, SC0 and+GCO

buttons corresponding to the respective incoming

calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing

is sent to the phone.

It is possible to delay the ringing and have

different settings in the day and night mode.

“Extension-Station”, Day Ring and Night Ring are

set to delayed ringing.

The delay time can be set to any one of three

values.

“Extension-Station”, Day Ring and Night Ring are

set to No Ring.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT i Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)“,

Day Ring

Night Ring

9-G-l .02 1 O-C-24.00

Conditions

..;$

When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,

SCO, GCO or PC0 button for which no-ringing

has been set, it is still possible to answer the call

flashing in 240 wink. In other words, responding

to incoming calls is not affected by no ringing

assignment in any way.

Delayed 1: 5 seconds after placement of

the incoming call

Delayed 3: 15 seconds after placement of

the incoming call

Delayed 6: 30 seconds after placement of

the incoming call

Programming

System Programming

“Extension-Station (2/3)“,

Day Ring

Night Ring

. s Reference

VT Dumb

9-G-l .02 1 O-C-24.00

Conditions

When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,

SC0 or GCO button for which delayed ringing

has been set, it is still possible to answer the call

flashing in 240 wink before ringing begins. In

other words, responding to incoming calls is not

affected by delayed ringing assignment in any

way.

::f- . .

. .

3-D-l 8

4.00 Discriminating Ringing

Description

It is possible to identify the type of an incoming call

by the ringing pattern.

In an SLT, the Held Call Reminder for CO cats :s

the same as the CO line incoming ringing

pattern. The ringing for extension hold is the

same as the extension incoming ringing pattern.

The ringing patterns are listed on Section 3-B-l 6.

00 ‘Tone and Ringing Patterns.” There is no distinction made for calls to an Off

Premise Extension (OPX): The CO line incoming

Programming

None

Conditions

All Transfer Recall signals have the same ringing

pattern as Held Call Reminder.

If there are multiple incoming calls on an extension

when the extension user goes on-hook, the calls

are rung in the following sequence.

cl > Consultation Held Call Reminder

c2> tn a PITS, an incoming call from a line in which

the Prime Line Preference (incoming) function

has been set

<3> Call Waiting. The call was waiting when the

user was off-hook.

<4> CO line incoming call, extension incoming call,

intercom incoming call, door-phone incoming

call, Held Call Reminder, Transfer Recall,

Unattended Conference Recall.

When there is more than one of the above

incoming calls in a PITS, the calls are

prioritized in DN sequence (PDN takes top

priority). Intercom incoming calls have the

lowest priority.

.- .<5> Automatic Callback ..-,*.

“F. .

<6> Timed Reminder

When a multiple number of incoming calls arrive at

a PITS in the on-hook status, priority as to which

calls should be rung is generally on a “first-come

first-served” basis. However, when the Prime tine

Preference (incoming) function has been set. this

line takes precedence.

ringing pattern only.

.I.;. .

e.. .

When there are multiple calls placed to an SLT

which is on-hook, priority as to which calls should

be rung is generally on a “first-come first-served”

basis.

3-D-i 9

5.00 Station Hunting

5.01 Station Hunting-Circular

Description

Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of

incoming calls to an idle member of a hunt group

when the called extension is busy. Idle extensions

are automatically hunted in accordance with the

hunting sequence set in the system program, and

the call is put through to an idle extension.

See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.

See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call

Distribution (UCD)-without OGM/-with OGM” for

details on the UCD function.

The following calls do not receive the Station

Hunting treatment.

.j

The hunting sequence is set by “Extension-

Station”, Next Hunt Station.

The group formed by this setting is called a

hunting group.

Busy status applies when there are no idle PDNs

for the extension

and

when the extension is Out of

Service or in fault condition.

When the incoming destination extension is in

any of the following statuses, the operation below

is %ccomplished.

Circular hunting is enabled when the last DN in the

hunting group sets the first

DN

as the Next Hunt

Station as follows.

DN 100

DN 200 <- incoming call

5. c

J

DN 110

t-- : Hunting

&

DN 120

Status Operation

Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller

hears ringback tone)

FWD setting FWD processing

DND setting DND processing

Depending on the status of the hunted

extensions, the operation below is accomplished

after hunting starts.

;3

Hunting Group - Circular

When an incoming call cannot be put through

even after hunting all the extensions belonging to

the hunting group, busy tone is sent to the calling

w-W.

Programming

The call forwarded to a busy extension/Voice

Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station

Hunting if programmed.

Refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice Processing

System (VPS)” for further information.

Conditions

A call redirected to another PITS extension by

the Station Hunting feature always rings on a

PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed

on a SC0 or GCO button.

\ Extensions can be in only one hunting group.

Extensions in a UCD group cannot belong to

hunting groups. Similarly, extensions in hunting

groups cannot belong to UCD groups.

3-D-20

(21292)

l

A call on the ICM button.

l

An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1 :N

or Private CO feature.

l

A call on the SDN button.

Status

Operation

Hunting proceeds to next station

5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal

Description

Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of

incoming calls to an idle member of a hum group

when the called extension is busy. Idle ex!ensions

are automatically hunted in accordance v&f-r the

hunting sequence set in the system program, and

the call is put through to an idle extension.

See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.

See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call

Distribution (UCD)-without OGM/-with OGM” for

details on the UCD function.

The hunting sequence is set by “Extensioc-

Station”, Next Hunt Station.

The group formed by this setting is called a

hunting group.

Busy status applies when there are no idle PDN’s

for the extension and when the extension Is Out of

Service or in fault condition.

The following calls do not receive the Station

Hunting treatment.

l

A call on the ICM button.

l

An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1 :N

or Private CO feature.

l

A call on the SDN button.

When the incoming destination extension is in

any of the following statuses, the operation below

is accomplished instead.

Terminal hunting is selected when the last station

in the hunt leaves the Next Hunt Station blank.

Example

I status I

Operation I

DN 100

DN 200 <= Incoming call

.L

DN 110 t-- : Hunting

A

DN 120

_. :

Depending on the status of the hunted

extensions, the operation below is accomplished

after hunting starts.

Hunting Group - Circular

When an incoming call cannot be put through

even after hunting up to the last extension in the

hunting group, busy tone is sent to the calling

party.

Programming

(1

The call forwarded to a busy extension/Voice

Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station

Hunting if programmed.

Refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice Processing

System (VPS)” for further information.

Conditions

3-D-21

(21292)

A call redirected to another PITS extension by

the Station Hunting feature always rings on a

PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed

on a SC0 or GCO button.

An extension can belong to only one hunting

group.

Extensions belonging to a UCD group cannot

belong to hunting groups. Similarly, extensions

belonging to hunting groups cannot belong to UCD

groups.

Idle PDN

FWD setting

DND setting

Incoming cell processed (caller

hears ringback tone)

FWD processing

DND processing

Status Open&on I

Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller

hears ringback tone)

Busy Hunting proceeds to next station

FWD setting Hunting proceeds to next station

DND setting Hunting proceeds to next station

E. Holding Features

1.00 Music on Hold

Description Conditions

The

external music device (up

to

two units can be

accommodated by this system) automatically

sends Music on Hold to a party on Hold.

Music on Hold is not sent to the party on Hold

unless the settings outlined in description have

been made.

This function will only be executed when

“System-Operation”, External Music Source 1,2

is set to Yes, “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,

Music Source - For Use set either to “HOLD” or

“HOLD & BGM” and the external music device

has been connected.

Programming

I

System Programming 1 $efyen& 1

“System-Operation

(l/3)“, 9-D-1 .Ol 10-c-4.00

External Music Source

1.2

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00

Music Source - For Use

Music Source - Tenant

If Tenant Service is employed, the “Trunk-Pager

& Music Source”, Music Source - Tenant setting

determines which tenant the external music

device belongs to.

When both external music devices are

accommodated in the same tenant and the

applications of both devices are set identically,

the device connected to port 1 is used as the

Music on Hold.

An example of this is given below.

Port

number

1

2

Trunk-Pager & Music Source

Tenant For Use

1 HOLD

1

HOLD

3-E-l

2.00 Held Call Reminder

Description

When the Hold, Exclusive Hold or Call Pa-<

(system or station) function has been activated,

the party on Hold cannot be kept waiting icnger

than a specific time. A call (when on-hook or call

waiting tone (when off-hook) is generated :s the

attendant console or extension as a reminier that

there is a party on Hold.

The alarm tone sent when the handset is c?f

hook, is heard through the speaker of a PITS and

through the handset of an SLT.

Conditions

If more than one call is placed on hold at an

extension, this function is executed starting with

the earliest held call.

To execute this function, set “System-Operation”,

Held Call Reminder to “Yes.”

The extension and Attendant times for this

function to be activated are respectively stt by

“System-System Timer”, Held Call Remincsr and

Held Call Reminder

(ATT).

in order for the call waiting tone to be seni the

feature number for “Call Waiting Set” mus: be set.

Programming

System Programming Referenz

VT :cJmb

‘System-Operation (l/3)“, 9-D-l .Ol 1 C-X.00

I Held Call Reminder

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 lC-X.00

Held Call Reminder

Held Call Reminder (AU)

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 1 C-Z-1 0.00

Call Waiting Set

In a PITS, the CO line and extension Held Call

Reminder call signals have respectively the

same ringing pattern as the CO line and

extension incoming call signals, and a monotone

call signal is sent.

While the Held Call Reminder call signal or call

waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a

display, it shows:

In an SLT, the CO line and extension Held Call

Reminder call signals are exactly the same as

the CO line and extension incoming call signals.

3-E-2

3.00 Transfer Recall

Description Conditions

If a call tratsferrec by the Unscreened Call

Transfer. Camp-@ Transfer or Ringing Transfer

function is not answered by the destination party

within a preprogrammed time period, the call will

return to the extension user or attendant console

that transferred the call.

When there are more than one parties on hold,

this function is started from the earliest time for

the transfer operation.

When the handset is on-hook or off-hook, the

Transfer Recall call signal or call waiting tone,

respectively, enables the party attempting the

transfer to be advised that the call has not been

answered. The call waiting tone sent when the

handset is off-hook, is heard through the speaker

in the case of a PITS and through the handset in

the case of an SLT.

In a PITS,

the

CO line and extension Transfer

Recall call signals have the same ringing pattern

as the CO line and extension incoming call

signals,

and a

monotone call signal is sent.

While the Transfer Recall call signal or call

waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a

display, it shows:

l

When the transfer destination extension does

not have a name programmed:

The time taken to ac$ivate this function for the

extension or attendant console is set by “System-

System Timer”, Transfer Recall.

Programming

I

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

“System-System TimeP,

Transfer Recall

_..

RCL: Ext 1234

-r L Extension number (DN)

l

When the transfer destination extension has a

name programmed:

In an SLT, the CO line and extension Transfer

Recall signals are exactly the same as the CO

line and extension incoming call signals.

~.

3-E-3

F. Other Features

1.00 Station Message Detail

Recording (SMDR)

Description

SMDR Parameters

When an output device such as the printer

‘provided with RS-232C interface etc., is

connected to the system, it is possible to print out

the foliowing information.

l

Information about outgoing CO calls

l

Information about incoming CO calls

l

Error log data

l

Programming data

l

Traffic data

Page Length

The page length may be selected to position a

title and data on each page. _ ,,

A page length code indicates the number of

lines per page.

A title will be printed on the first three lines of

each page.

To execute SMDR, connect the output device to

SIO #2

port of

RS-232C on the basic shelf (KX-

T3361 CO) and set ‘System-Operation”, SMDR to

“Yes.”

4

.

9’9

4 lines per page

.

b9 lines per page

To print out the information about outgoing CO

calls, set ‘System-Operation”, Outgoing Duration

Log to -Yes.”

Standard Continuous Paper (11 inches)

To print out the information about incoming CO

. calls, set “System-Operation”, Incoming Duration

Log to -All Call.”

To print out error log data, set “System-

Operation”, Error Log to “Yes.”

To prinr out programming data, set “System-

Operaiion”, Programming to “Yes.”

To prinT out traffic data, set ‘System-Operation”,

T

page

length

L

g-e -w-s

! T :

x

66

lines

8

Fi JJDefault) i

o-----o

:

x

8

T 8

%

machine 0’

H perforation E

8

! !

Tra’ff ic io “Yes.”

Programming

System Programming

;ysterr;-Operation”,

SMDR

Page

Length (4-99)

Skip

Perf (O-95)

OutGoing Duration Log

Incorning Duration

Log

Atiendant Duration

Special Carrier Name

Prim Secret Dial

Error Log/Programming/Traffic

System-Communication Interface”

skip

1 perforation

To print data, page length must be longer than

skip perforation by four or more lines.

Skip’ Perforation

The skip perforation code indicates the number

of lines to be skipped. When the print head

reaches the line designated, the print head

moves to the top position of the next page.

0

Print head does not skip. (Default)

1 Print head skips the last line.

2 Print head skips the last two lines.

. .

.

I I

.

/,‘,I l

Print head skips the last 95 lines.

3-F-l

Typical SMDR Call Detail

Report

(Informatiorl abodt CO ca!Is)

t*tC*~r**tfttl.l*ttt**.*.........*..~..*~.~~ . ..I ..*tff.tt****ttltfr.1*

Date Time T CD Sour Dest 3N D a1 Number Duration Act code

f**t*t****t*trtttt****...*..*.~*~..~~.~~..*..**~ r-~tf*tttt~*ft*l**tt**

03/24/91 10:03AM 1 El011 T1017 1011 ~23456'3?0123456 00:05'12 1234567890

03/24/91 10:05AM 1 El012 T1014 1011 4222144 00:01'24

. ..'

(1) Date (start of call)

03124191

IT

Iyear

day

)

month

(2) Time (start of call)

10:05AM

I -r- 5a.m.orp.m.

minute

hour

(3) T (tenant number)

5

lor2

(4) CD (condition code)

(6) (7) ia, (9) (10)

A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD handling

Al : Attendant Console 1 handling

A2 : Attendant Console 2 handling

Dl : DISA code 1

D2 : DlSAcode 2

D3 : DlSAcode 3

04 : DISA code4

D5 : DISA code 5

D6 : DlSAcode 6

D7 : DISA code 7

D8 : DlSAcode 8

FW : Call Forwarding to Trunk

RM : Remote Maintenance

RA : Remote Alarm

TR : Transfer

OR : COS Override (Dial transfer,

Walking COS)

(5) Sour (source: calling party)

EXXXIEXXXX : extension number

A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD

Al IA2 : Attendant Console number

TXXXX : trunk physical number

(6)

Dest (destination: called party)

EXXXIEXXXX : extension number

A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD

Al/A2

: Attendant Console number

TXXXX : trunk physical number

(7)

DN

(directory number)

xxxlxxxx : used directory number

(Blank) : when using CO button

(8) Dial Number

Dial Number printout type changes

depending on the setting of “System-

Operation”, Special Carrier Name.

When it is set to “Dial”:

The number dialed to the CO line is

printed out at a maximum of 21 digits.

When it is set to “User Name”:

The name stored in “Special Carrier

Access”, Name is printed out in three

letters or marks.

When it is set to “Default”:

When using Equal Access, “EC?1 to EQ4”

is printed out.

When using OCC Access, “OCl to OC4”

is printed out.

(9) Duration (duration of call)

00 : 01 ’ 24

I’-

71 second

minute

hour

(10) Act code (account code)

Account code is printed out at a maximum of

10 digits.

3-F-2

2.00 Off Premise Extension

(OW

Description

Single line telephones .-staI!ed c” the premise

can be operated via a public or prrvate network in

exactly the same way as extension which are on

the premise.

Up to 80 Off Premise Extensions can be installed

per system.

The OPX card and OPX Power Unit are required.

OPX must be set in the ‘Configuration-Slot

Assignment.”

Programming

Conditions

When an incoming call is placed to OPX, ringing

is heard in all the CO line incoming patterns.

A doorphone incoming call cannot be sent to an

OPX telephone.

-.y,

With a PITS, this function is executed from a

;” <&‘DN. t

The telephone type (PITS, SLT, OPX) must be the

same at the source and destination.

3-F-3

If a busy tone is heard when dialing the feature

number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the

extension number, it means that the moving

extension is being used (possibly by another

station with an SDN of the moving station) and

the function cannot be completed. In cases like

this, dial a ain. If

ckd

our PITS has a display, it

shows: Try Agarn

Dialing the feature number for “Walking Station

Cancel” and the extension number at the move

destination in a PITS cannot be done with the SP-

PHONE on.

First lift the handset and then proceed.

3.00 Walking Station

Description

It is possible to move an extension to a new

location without re-programming.

When moving a telephone, dial the feature

number for “Walking Station Set” at both the

source and destination telephones.

After the move, dial the feature number for

“Walking Station Cancel” and the original

extension number of the moved extension. Up

to two telephones in a system can be moved

simultaneously.

Before executing this function, assign ‘System-

Class of Service (1/2)n, Walking Station to “Yes”

for the extension.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Walking Station

“System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“, 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00

Walking Station Set

Walking Station Cancel

Conditions

It is possible to move a telephone to an extension

which is in the preinstall status. .Ln this case, dial

the feature number for “Walking Station Set” only

at the extension to be moved, and dial the feature

number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the

original extension number at the destination

extension.

I

Operation

Before proceeding with the move, complete steps

1 lo 3 at the source and destination extensions.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

6.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button

(Supplement)

When moving to an extension in the pre-iniialied

t 23

q

2. Dial the feature number for status, follow steps

1

to 3

for the

extension

4s. before moving it.

7..

“Walking Station Set.”

I No settings are required for an extension in the

. Confirmation tone 1 or 2 is

heard.

pre-installed status.

.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

WST (E xxxx) ON

$

Extension number

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

After the move, complete steps 4 to 6 at the

move destination extension.

4. Lii the handset s-

B-

5. First dial the feature number for

“Walking Station Cancel” and

then dial the original extension

number.

l

Confirmation tone

1

or 2 is

heard.

. If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 WST (E xxxx) OFF ]

3-F-4

4.00

Outgoing Message (OGM)

Recording and Playing Back

Description

Up to four types of OGM’s can be recorded by the

Operator 1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so

that different messages can be used for different

situations.

The following four types of OGM can be recorded

respectively:

DISA, UCDl, UCDP and W-UP (Wake-up)

OGM for outside parties

OGM for DISA is played to the outside patty who

called the system via DISA feature.

(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System

Access (DISA).“)

OGM for UCD 1 and UCD 2 are played to the

outside party in conjunction with UCD feature.

(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD)-with OGM.“)

OGM for extension users

OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wake-

up message for the extension user.

(See Section 3-F-13.00 Tmed Reminder y-ith

OGM (Wake-up Call).“)

Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.

A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to

four DISA cards can be installed to the system.

..;

Usage of each DISA card is determined by the’

system programming.

(See Section 9-K-l .OO “Special Attended-DISA.“)

Programming

I

System Programming

Conditions

( 1) Tenant Service

If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of

each DISA card is determined by the system i

programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.

The Operator 1 of each tenant can record and

play back the OGM within the same tenant.

(2) Recording of OGM

. OGM recording is executed by selecting an

OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the

following four types:

1.

OGMl for UCD with OGM

2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM

3. OGM for DISA - 4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)

l

If the type of multiple DISA cards are the

same in a tenant, the same message is

recorded for them at a time.

(3) Playing back of OGM

l

The following two ways are available:

A. By selecting an OGM type

B. By designating the logical number of

each DISA card directly.

l

If there are multiile DISA cards of the same

type in the system or a tenant and the OGM

type is selected to play back, playback starts

from the lowest DISA card physical number.

(4) o?hers

Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited

during OGM recording and playing.

‘System-Numbering Plan (g/9)‘, 9-06.09 10-C-10.00

OGM Record

OGM Playback

‘Special Attended-DISA”. For Use 9-K-1.00 10-G40.00

3-F-5

(40993)

Operation

Recording OGM from PITS (For Operation from

Attendant Console, refer to Section 6-J-8.00

“Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing

Back.“)

1.

3. Begin your message.

NJ-m

q

4.

a

WY

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

; You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for CGM

Record ‘791” (default) and the

resource number (1 to 4) in

succession.

(Resource number)

1 : OGMl for UCD

2 : OGM2 for UCD

3 : OGM for DISA --’

4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

l

The MEMORY indicator flashes

in red 60 wink, confirmation tone

3 is heard.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

xxxxxxxx Rec. : 00

T

Indicates recording

time, counts up by

second.

UCD-OGMl or

UCD-OGM2 or

DISA-OGM or WkupOGM

As soon as you finish, press the

MEMORY button.

l

The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.

l

After confirmation tone 3

sounds, the recorded message

is played back automatically.

If your PITS has a display, n

shows:

1 xxxxxxxx Play : 00 J

T +

Indicates playback

time, counts up by

second.

UCD-OGMl or

UCD-OGM2 or

DISA-OGM or Wkup-GGM

When playback is finished, the

MEMORY indicator goes out.

You hear confirmation tone 3,

then no tone.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is

terminated and playback starts automatically.

Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4

afterward. .\

In step 3 if you wish to change the message

during recording, you can start recording again

by dialing I’++.”

In step 4 if you wish to intenupt and finish

playback, press the MEMORY button.

3-F-6

(40993)

Playing back OGM (Supplement)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP- In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish

PHONE button. playback, press the MEMORY button.

L I During playback you can start pfaybadc again

from the beginning by dialing rc .-

2. Dial the feature number for OGM

Playback 792” (default) and a

number below in succession.

(Resource number)

1 : OGMl for UCD

2: OGM2forUCD

3 : OGM for DISA

4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

(“” and DISA No.)

l

1: selectscard 1

* 2: selects card 2

* 3: selects card 3

*m

-- card 4

l

The MEMORY indicator lights in

fed.

You hear confirmation tone 3,

then the message.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

(DISA-OGM Play: 00 f

; -When playback is finished, you

hear confirmation tone 3, then

no tone.

l

The MEMORY indicator goes

Out.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

3-F-7

(40993)

5.00 Intercept Routing-No

Answer (IRNA)

Description

If an incoming outside call directed to a single

extension is not answered in a specified time:

period, it can be redirected to another destination

in the system.

Another destination can be:

l

An Attendant Console

l

An extension user

l

A Voice Mail extension

For further information about IRNA and a Voice

Mail extension, refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice

Processing System (VPS).” -*-

This feature also applies to the following calls.

l

When an incoming outside call rings back at the

extension who once put the call on hold, is not

answered in a specified time period. (Held

i

Reminder Call)

l

When an incoming outside call rings back at the

extension who once transferred the call to

another extension, is not answered in a

specified time period. (Transfer Recall)

The destination of Intercept Routing during day

and night are assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”,

Intercept Routing (Day) and Intercept Routing

(Night) on a trunk group basis.

Set the duration to start Intercept Routing in

“System-System lamer”, Intercept Routing Time-

Out (System).

The duration to start Intercept Routing for D&A

calls follows the setting in “System-System Timer”.

Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA).

For details about DISA, refer to Section 3-D-2.02

“Direct Inward System Access (DISA).”

Programming

System Programming

“Group-Trunk Group (11’2)“.

Intercept Routing (Day)

Intercept Routing (Night)

“System-System Timer”.

Intercept Routing Time-Out

(System)

Intercept Routing Time-Out

WW

Conditions

Intercept Routing-No Answer works for the

following incoming CO calls.

1. All incoming CO calls other than calls

placed on DlLl : N, Private CO, Attendant

Consoles, Remote and UCD

2. Transfer Recall calls (except those to

Attendant Consoles)

3. Held Call Reminder calls (except those to

Attendant Consoles, calls on Exclusive

Hold, calls on hold on Private CO lines)

4.

An incoming outside call via DISAIDID

which comes in on an extension in the DND

mode.

Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature

assigned on the IRNA destination does not work

on the call which has been transferred to it by the

IRNA

feature.

If the IRNA destination is not currently available to

answer the call transferred by the IRNA feature,

the call may receive the treatment of the Station

Hunting feature.

If the destination extension of a direct incoming

outside call is in the data line security mode,

IRNA feature does not work on it.

Refer to Section 4-I-6.00 “Data Line Security” for

further information.

If the destination is a PITS with display, it shows:

1 + CO: PANASONIC/

3-F-8

(30393)

6.00 Rerouting

Description

If an incoming outside call cannot be placed

anywhere, the call can be routed to another

destination. This is called Rerouting.

Rerouting will take place in the following cases.

,l. lf the system cannot determine the

destination to place the call (for example,

no destination is assigned).

2. if the system determines the destination but

the destination cannot currently receive the

call (for example, it is not “In Service”).

3. If a call arrives at a trunk which is set to

“Outgoing Only.”

If a call is rerouted, the call will be s& to the

following destinatiotis:

1. lf “Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing

(Day/Night) is assigned, the call is sent to

the assigned destination.*

2. If it is not assigned, the call is sent to

Operator 1 in the receiving tenant.

* If the assigned destination is a Voice Mail

extension, the call is not sent to it.

Refer to Section 3-F-l 0.00 “Voice Processing

System (VPS). for further information.

Programming

~1

Conditions

If a call is rerouted to an extension user and the

user’s PITS has a display, if shows:

-&ample>

--w CO : PANASONIC

f

Indicates the name of the CO line.

3-F-9

(21292)

7.00 Calling Party Control (CPC)

Signal Detection

Description Programming

CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is the on-hook

indication (disconnect signal) sent through the CO

line when either calling or called party goes on-

hook.

System Programming

To support efficient utilization of the CO lines, the

system monitors the status of the CO lines, and

when CPC signal is detected, the system

disconnects the CO lines connected compulsorily.

In default mode, CPC signal detection works on

incoming CO calls, and does not work on outgoing

CO calls (except once they are placed on hold or

consultation hold).

In this case, if the extension user remains off-hook

after the completion of an outgoing CO call, the

system does not release ail the switches used to

establish the connection, and a CO line connected

will continue to be seized by the extension user

ineffectively.

“Trunk-CO Line”, CPC Detection 9-F-l .OO 1 O-C-18.00

‘CPC Signal Detect Timing- - 1 o-c-49.00

Outgoing CO Calls (CPC).

Conditions

Some switching system of the central office may

send CPC-like signal in dialing sequence and the

attempt of making a call may be terminated.

If your switching system does not send CPC-like

signal in dialing sequence, we recommend to

make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO

calls.

To prevent the extension users from such invalid

. seizure of CO lines, it is administrable to make

CPC signal detection effect on outgoing CO calls

by using CPC command at dumb programming

mode.

This feature is assignable on a CO line basis.

Refer to Section 1 O-C-49.00 “CPC Detect Timing-

Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)” for further information.

CPC signal detection can be assigned to

incoming CO calls only or both on incoming and

outgoing CO calls. If CPC signal detection is

assigned to.outgoing CO calls only, it does not

function.

Reference

VT ( Dumb

3-F-i 0

8.00

CO Busy Out

Description Operation

Setting CO Busy Out to a CO line (from operator

1)

Allows the operator 1 (extension user or attendant

console) to busy out the invalid CO lines.

Any user (including the operator at attendant

console) cannot seize the busied-out CO lines.

To busy out the invalid CO line, dial the feature

number for “Busy Out Trunk” and trunk port

physical number of the associated CO line.

To return the busied-out CO line to service, dial the

feature number for “Unbusy Trunk” and trunk-port

physical number of the associated CO line.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone.

2. Dial the feature number for “Busy

Out Trunk” and trunk port physical

number.

It is assignable to busy out the invalid CO lines

automatically by using ABC command at dumb

programming mode.

Refer to Section 1 O-C-50.00 “Automatic Busy-Out

Count (ABC)n for further information.

For CO Busy Out from Attendant Console, refer to

Section 6-J-l 0.00 “CO Access Control.”

l

You hear confirmation tone.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Busy Out: T xxxx 1

-?-

Programming

Reference

System Programming v-r Dumb

System-Numbering Plan (9/g)“, 9-O-6.09 104-10.00

Busy Out

Trunk

Unbusy Trunk

“Automatic Busy-Out Count - 10-c-50.00

(ABC)”

Trunk port physical

number

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling CO Busy Out (from dperator 1)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

Conditions

None

l

You hear dial tone.

__

9 13

q

2. Dial the feature number for

45s

,a* “Unbusy Trunk” and trunk port

Is physical number.

l

You hear confirmation tone.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Unbusy: T xxxx 1

T

Trunk port physical

number

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

3-F-l 1

9.00 Parallel Connection of

Extensions

Description

Programming

An):

‘+g!e L,?e Telep3one can be conneced

parallely

with

a PITS telephone.

When

para!!ei connection is made, an extension

user

caq make and answer a call by usinc either of

both telephones.

However, the operation of parallely connected

Conditions

Single Line Telephone is somewhat restriced as

follows:

Features not available are:

l

External Feature Access

l

Conference

l

Pickup Dialing

l

Account Code Entry

Cannot make a call when parallely conneded PITS

telephone is:

l

In the BGM mode

l

Being paged through built-in speaker

l

In the PITS programming mode

Will not ring if parallely connected PITS telephone

is:

l

In the Intercom Automatic Answer mode

l

In the Voice Alerting mode

Not only a Single Line Telephone but an

answering machine, a facsimile, or a modem

(personal computer) can be connected parallely

with certain PITS telephones.

The parallel connection of a Single Line

Telephone and a PITS telephone becomes

available under the following conditions. _ ,

- Parallely connected PITS telephones are

interfaced with HLC card.

- The number of Single Line Telephones which

can be connected parallely with PITS

telephones must be within 48 lines per shelf.

To make parallel connection effective, assign

“Extension-Station,” Parallel Connect to “Yes” at

parallely connected PITS telephone side.

3-F-l 2

10.00 Voice Processing System (VPS)

Description

The KX-T336 system provides the following features to enhance the performance of th,e

Voice Processing System (VPS) - KX-TVP15D.

l

Voice Mail Integration (Section 3-F-l 0.01)

l

DTMF Tone Integration (Section 3-F-l 0.02)

Voice Mail lntearation

The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension’s mailbox.

(Configuration)

incoming

DIL 13 DIL 1 :I

DIL 1 fl MO& (Day): DISA DISA

ATT DID DID

co co co co

v Hunting

ExLlI

Ext. Ext. ATT

VPS

Hunting

Console FWD (Follow on ID is sent)

IRNA (Follow

on ID is sent)

i

FWD (Follow

on ID is sent) VPS VPS

FWD (Follow on ID is sent)

3-F-l 3

(21292)

DTMF Tone lntearation

The KX-T336 syste-r: can serd codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,

ringing, disconnect,

e!c.)

in

addition

?o the normal call progress tones.

(Configuration 1)

DIL 1 :l

DlSA

DID

co

Ext. 1 *

Transfer

I

Ext.

Hunting

VPS

$

,!s, c * ] FWD(FollowonIDissent)*

Hunting I I Hunting

(Configuration 2)

DIL 1:l

DISA

DID

I co I

FWD (Follow on ID is sent)

l nL

I

*Available if the Voice Mail

Integration feature is enabled.

. .

Hunting

I

Hunting

1 Hunting 1 Hunting

*Available if the Voice Mail

Integration feature is enabled.

3-F-l 4

(21292)

10.01 Voice Mail Integration

Description The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension’s

voice mailbox, if the caller is forwarded to a Voice Mail Port (all calls, busy

or no answer) and this feature is enabled by the extension user.

The KX-T336 system automatically sends the digits of mailbox number of

the called extension with DTMF tones to the Voice Mail Port before

connecting the caller.

These digits are commonly known as the Follow on ID.

A max of 16 extension ports (HLC or SLC card) of the KX-T336 system

can be programmed for connection to the Voice Processing System

KX-TVP150.

This feature applies to the following calls.

Calls transferred by :

l

Call Forwarding - All Calls

l

Call Forwarding - Busy/Off-hook

l

Call Forwarding - No Answer

l

Call Forwarding - Busy/No Answer

(including the calls transferred to the extensions on which one of the

above mentioned Call Forwarding feature is assigned.)

l

Intercept Routing - No Answer (RNA)

(including the transfer recalled outside call and held reminder outside

call)

Extensions assigned as Voice Mail Port are not allowed to connect to

each other. For example, an Automated Attendant Port is not allowed to

connect to another Voice Mail Port.

Note this feature can be programmed in Dumb mode only.

Programming

(Dumb programming mode) 1) Press [CTRLI key and

q

key simultaneously when Main Menu

screen is displayed at VT programming mode.

2) Enter m F] I[ and press [G/ key when Dumb programming

mode initial prompt ( ; > ) is displayed. Then programming mode initial

prompt ( ; PRG > ) is displayed on the screen.

3) Program the required items as follows:

3-F-l 5

(21292)

Voice Mail Port Assignment:

Input Format PRG>VMD AT i;eT yk -::&r 1 ’ .: 5~ 1; 7

Input Value for

Item Number

To remove the existing setting, use ‘%CLR” command.

For further information about prcgrammng, refer to Section 1 O-C-54.00

“Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD).”

Mailbox Number Assignment:

Input Format PRG>MBN AT index Number CR

index Number = Physical Number of Extension Port or DN

Input Value for

Item Number Item

-* Assigning Items ’ Input

Value

Number

None Mailbox Number Up to 10 digits of numeric

characters (O-9), “*” and ” # ”

(Default = Extension Number)

Mailbox

Number specific to each extension (same as the extension

number) is assigned to all extensions by default.

To remove the existing setting, use “$CLR” command. . .

For further information about programming, refer to Section 1 O-C-55.00

“Mailbox Number (MBN).”

Conditions

1) Station Hunting Group - Circular

To use the Voice Mail Integration feature efficiently, we recommend to

program

a

station

hunting group among the Voice Mail (VM) Extensions,

this would reduce the possibility of the callers encountering the busy

status.

When

“Station Hunting Group - Circular” is programmed among the VM

Extensions, a cal! transferred to the busy VM Extension (including “Not

INS” status) by Call Forwarding

(FWD) or Intercept Routing

No Answer

(RNA)

feature will be automatically transferred to an idle VM Extension.

3-F-l 6

(2 1292)

2) Call Forwarding and Station Hunting

The KX-T336

system can send the

Follow

on ID (the digits of mailbox

number

of

tne called extension) to the Voice Mail Port, if the caller is

forwarded :3 a Voice Mail Port.

The foilowng simplified flow chart shows the treatment of the call

forwarded to a VM extension.

t

Follow on ID is not sent.

Is FWD destination a VM extension?

No

k

Does It have the next hunt station

1 I

Yes

t

.

The treatment of the call

depends on the types of

the Call Forwarding

feature assigned.

(Refer to “5. Treatment

of the call forwarded to

the busy extension/VPS”

on page 3-F-46 for

further information.)

‘&LStation Hunting Group?

Is there any idle

VM

extension within

I Yes I

Callers are forwarded to the called

extension’s mailbox directly.

I

3-F-l 7

(21292)

3) intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) and Station Hunting

The KX-T336 system car! seti the Follow on ID (the digits of

mailbox number o!

i%

cali+z efle-slonj to the Voice Mail Port, if the

caller is transferred 10 a Voke Ma2 Port by IRNA feature.

The following simplified flow than shows the treatment of the call

which has been transferred 10 a VM extension by the IRNA feature.

No

4

Is IRNA destination a VM extension?

I

1

Follow on ID is not sent.

No

J Yes

NO v

I I

I . -- 1 Does it have the next hunt station?* 1

4 Yes

(Refer to “8. Treatment of No

the call transferred to the 4 Is there any idle VM extension within

busy extensionNPS” on a Station Hunting Group?

. page 3-F-51 for further

information.)

Caller are transferred to the called

* If a call transferred to a b&y i&l extension by IRNA feature is “Transfer

recalled call” or “Held Reminder Call.” it will be put on the waiting status

whether the IRNA destination has the next station assignment or not.

3-F-l 8

(21292)

4) Call Transfer and Voice Mail MegratIon

Nor only an morning call directed to the extension, but a transferred call

jbo? screened and unscreened call transfer) is applied to the Voice Mail

Integration teature.

Camp-on

Transfer to

a VM extension and Transfer Recall

Example

VM. 108 (busy) VM.107 (busy) VM.106 (busy)

Ext.100

Ext.101

I-

> 1

Making a

Transferring

call

a call FWD-All Calls

to VM.106

1. The Ext.1 00 makes a call to the Ext.1 01.

2. The Ext.101 answers the call from the Ext.100. and transfers it to the

Ext.1 02 (Call Forwarding - All Calls to VM 106 is assigned). Then

replaces the handset.

3. Since FWD destination VM.106 and all other VM extensions in the

Station Hunting Group are busy, the call from Ext.1 00 is put on the

waiting status.

&amp-on Transfer to a VM extension>

If VM.106 becomes idle before the transfer recall timer has been elapsed,

the call is connected to the VM.106, and the caller can access the

Mailbox of the fZxt.100 automatically.

Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension is only available when “Call

Forwarding-All Calls” is assigned to the Ext.1 02.

<Transfer R&all> .

If kM.106 is still busy after the transfer recall timer has been elapsed, the

call will ring back at Ext. 101.

What if Call Forwarding (FWD)-No Answer is assigned on the

extension where a call has been transferred without announcement

(Unscreened Call Transfer) ?

A call is forwarded

to the

FWD destination after the Call Forwarding No

Answer timer has been expired.

If the FWD destination is busy, the forwarded call will ring back at the

extension who transferred the call.

(Note)

In above

case, if the destination of Call Forwarding-No Answer is an

Attendant Console, the transferred call is not forwarded to an Attendant

Console.

The transferred call rings back at the extension who transferred the call

after the Call Forwarding No Answer timer has been expired.

3-F-l 9

(21292)

5) Others

(a) If the extension to which calls are to be ‘cwardec! :!seif is !n a call

forward mode, a call will not be forward= t,nnerrve arc ir IS

connected to the first forwarded extension.

Example

Ext. 100 Ext.101

Ext. 102

Anincomingcall _j // __j /I $+ ‘1

(Programming) Forward to : Forward to :

Ext.1 01 Ext.102

An incoming call is forwarded to Ext.1 01 and connected tc tt, not

forwarded to Ext.1 02 furthermore.

(b) If an Operator calls to the extension in a call forward mode by

employing “One time FWD cancel” feature, a call is not forwarded

furthermore and rings on the FWD setting extension.

(c) Conference call

The VM extension can not originate a conference call.

(Example)

During a call with the Party 1 while putting the Party 2 on consultation

hold.

l

If an SLT extension (not a VM extension) presses the switchhook, a

conference call among three parties is established. .I

l

In case of a VM extension, it will be connected to the Party 2 and the

Party 1 is disconnected.

Reference Station Hunting - Circular (Section 3-D-5.02)

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) (Section 3-F-5.00)

Call Fowarding (FWD) (Section 4-F-2.00, Section 5-D-2.00)

.- _

Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD) (Section 1 O-C-54.00)

Mailbox Number (MBN) (Section 1 O-C-55.00)

3-F-20

(21292)

10.02 DTMF Tone Integration

Description

On extensions ~7 +

.he Vz+ce Ma:! Port parameter enabled, the KX-T336

system can set-c =36es 3 7vtF xnesj to indicate the sate of the call

(busy, answered. - -qing. sscorrect, etc.) in addition to the normal call

progress tones. I

‘;lese ccces erable the Voice Processing system to

immediately recoqxe :ne zrrez state of the call and improve its call

handling performaxe. These codes apply to all incoming

calls:

Outside

calls only indicate 5sconnect (provided the KX-T336 system is

programmed properly for

CPC

detection and the Central Office sends the

CPC signal).

Programming

‘.S... *;.

1) Press m key and 13 key simultaneously when Main Menu

screen is displayed at VT programming mode.

2) Enter p/ /R) EI and press j-1 key when Dumb programming

mode initial prompt (;>) is displayed. Then programming mode initial

prompt (; PRG>) is displayed on the screen.

3) At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:

;PRG>WS3 AT31 (J)

The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:

; PRG>WS3 AT3

t 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration . . . . .._....... N

I INPUT >>

4) At

the

Input

prompt (INPUT >>), type:

; PRG>WS3 AT3

, 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

, INPUT >> Y fl (--I )

5) The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) for Item 1 as

follows:

; PRG > WS 3 AT 3 -As _ _ ::-i-, .%*

, 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

.

. INPUT >> Y

> 1 : DIL 1 N CO Key Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

INPUT >> I

6) To store the nets assignment to the system, at Input prompt

(INPUT >>), type:

; PRG>WS3 AT3

3 : DTMF-Tone Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

, INPUT >> Y

1 : DIL 1 :N CO Key Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._ N

INPUT >> $ EOD m (-I)

This assigns the DTMF-Tone Integration feature to the system, and the

programming prompt (PRG>) appears on the screen again.

3-F-21

(21292)

Conditions

The

following table describes

the

DTMF

codes, call state and typicai

condition where the KX-T336 system would send the code.

Code

mIl

@ml

mzl

IZIEI

Elrzl

Em

Call State

Ringback Tone

Busy Tone

Reorder Tone

DND Tone

Answer

Forwarded to Voice

Mail (Ringing)

Forwarded to Voice

Mail (Busy)

Forwarded to

Extension (Ringing)

Confirmation Tone

Disconnect

(Reorder Tone)

Typical

Conditions I

Sent to the VPS when the exteqsion 17 ,

dialed is ringing.

Sent to the VPS when the extension it

dialed is busy.

Sent to the VPS if it dials an invaiid

extension number or if it is

inadvertently connected to another

VPS.

Sent to the VPS if the dialed extension

has set DND feature (Do Not Disturb).

Sent to the VPS when the called

extension answers the call.

Sent to the VPS if the caller is

forwarded to a voice mail port and that

voice mail port is available to accept

the call.

Sent to the VPS if the caller is

forwarded to a voice mail port and that

voice mail port is not avaiiable to

accept the call.

Sent to the VPS if the caller is

forwarded to another, non-voice mail,

extension.

Sent to the VPS when it successfully _

dials a message waiting lamp on or

message waiting lamp off code.

Sent to the VPS when the calling party

disconnects.

3-F-22

(21292)

A. Treatment of the call transferred by the VPS

The treatment of the call from a VPS extensio- svaries depending on the

conditions.

The following detailed information expiains the Treatment of a call from a

VPS extension by the types of the cai:.

1. Direct Call

l-l. To an extension

Transfer Ext. 1

The type

of the

DTMF

tones sent to the VPS depends on the status of the

called extension as follows.

Code Call

State

Conditions

lmzl Ringback Tone The Ext.1 is idle.

q

111 Busy Tone The Ext.1 is busy.

IBIn DND Tone The Ext.1 is in the DND mode.

mzl Answer The

Ext.1

answers the call.

l-2. To another VPS extension

A call from a VPS extension~doeis ring on another VPS extensibn whether

it is idle or not.

Code Call State

Conditions

mzl

Reorder Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected

to the VPS 2

3-F-23

(21292)

2. Station Hunting

2-l. All

members of a huntino arouo are non-VPS extensions

Hunting~EkP~ Hunting

Transfer f

Ext.1

Hunting Group

Hunting1 IHunting

~ Ext.2 ,

Code Call State I Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy

Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

2-2. All members of a huntina arouo are VPS extensions

VPS3 1

A call from a VPS extension does not ring on another VPS extension

whether it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

lmzl Busy Tone The VPS I is inadvertently connected

to another VPS.

3-F-24

(21292)

2. Station Hunting (continued)

2-3. Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of

a

huntina aroup

A) When the destination is a VPS extension

A call from a VPS extension does not ring on another VPS extension

whether it is idle or not.

Conditions

The VPS

1 is inadvertently connected

to another VPS.

B) When the destination is a non-VPS extension.

VPS 1 Ext.1

Hunting Group

* 1 Hunting ~ vps 2 ,

The call hunts for the idle non-VPS extension only.

Code Call State Conditions

(A ii] Ringback Tone

13 /?$ Busy Tone

The Ext.1 or 2 is idle.

Both Ext.1 and 2 are busy. *

* This way, the VPS 1, typically an A&omatad-Attendant, knows it must give the

caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-25

(21292)

3. Call Forwarding

(FWD)

3-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension

Caller

VPS 1

FWD

mode

Forward Ext.2

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State

Ell3l Ringback Tone

[a 111 Busy Tone

Conditions

The Ext.2 is idle.

The Ext.2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code

Em

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)

1

The Ext.2 is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

1

. .

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the ^

Ext.2 and ringing on it)

Ringback Tone

(The call is y ng at the Ext.1 )

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

The Ext.2 is busy.

The call is still ringing at the

Ext.1.

3-F-26

(21292)

3. Call Forwarding (FWD)

(continued)

3-2. FWD to a VPS extension

x Forward . 4 VPs 2 / Transfer 4~

FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions ;

/

Em Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.

i

(The call is forwarded to the I

/

VPS 2.) *’ I

I

Busy

Tone ** The VPS 2 is busy. :

I

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State

(A( 111 ’ Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

.L

Conditions

The VPS 2 is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

L

@ 111 RingbackTone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS 2.) *’

1x1 FJ Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

1

The VPS 2 is busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Trme

has been elapsed.

1

El@/ Ringback Tone **

J

*1 This way. the VPS 1, typically an Automa!ed-Attendant, can release the call to

the VPS 2 and take another incoming c&i.

The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to tie VPS 2.

** This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the

caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-27

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting

4-l. FWD to a non-VPS extension

(All members of a titinting group are non-VPS extensions)

FWD r:ode

(FWD-Ail/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

El131 Ringback Tone At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Elm Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

ElII]

Elm

El111

Ringback Tone

(The call is rtging at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to an idle

extension of a hunting group

~ and ringing on it.)

Ringback Tone

(The call is r:ging at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

The call is still ringing at Ext.1.

At least dhe extension

of a hunting group is

idle.

All extensions of a

hunting group are busy.

3-F-28

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)

4-2. FWD

to a

VPS extension

(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)

FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

q n1

c 1

Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is forwarded

to

an idle VPS extension of a hunting

1 &tension and ringing on it.) *l

1 group is idle. -.I

m 121 Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

(MID-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

%lm Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is r?ng at Ext.1) extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

-L

q q

RingbackTone

(The call is forwarded to an idle VPS

extension and ringing on it.) *1

q

111 Ringback Tone All members of a

(The call is ringing at Ext.l) hunting group are busy.

1

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

L

Em Ringback Tone **

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to

an idle VPS extension and take another incoming call.

The Follow on ID of the Ext. 1 is sent to an idle VPS extension.

** This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the

caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-29

(21292)

i

4.

Call

Forwarding

and Station Hunting (continued)

(Both VPS and non-VPS

extensions are members of a hunting group)

FWD mode

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group

following the programmed order.

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State

14 131 Ringback Tone -

(The call is ringing at Ext.2)

Conditions

The Ext.2 is idle.

IZIEI

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but

(The call is forwarded to the the VPS 2 is idle.

VPS 2.) *’

lclm

Ringback Tone The Ext.%and VPS 2

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) are busy.

The Ext.3 and the VPS

3

are idle.

13 121 Busy Tone ** All members of a

hunting group are busy.

*l This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to

the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.

The Follow on ID of the

Ext.1

is sent to the VPS 2.

** This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the

caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-30

(21292)

4.

Call Forwarding

and Station Hunting (continued)

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

IAIm Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

1

Call Forwarding No Answer l7me

has been elapsed.

.l-

Em Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2

and ringing on it.)

Em Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) The VPS 2 is idle.

.L

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

L

Em Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *I

Fj r/ Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 2

(The call is ying at Ext.1) are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer TTme The Ext.3 and the VPS

has been elapsed.

3

are idle.

1

Em Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

Ext.2 and ringing on it.)

mm Ringback Tone --- All member. of a

(The call is yging at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

1

q

121 Ringback Tone *2

*l This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to

the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.

The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.

*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the

caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-31

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)

1 I

--

‘:v’:3 io a VPS extension

3~:: VPS and non-VPS extensio-s are members of a hunting group)

cz ,e: i

4,

t-i,-ting /

Ext.2 ;

I_ Hunting

Hunting Group

FWD

mode A

H-t:ing 1 Hunting

I

The call hunts for both VPS and ncn-VPS extensions in a hunting group

following the programmed order.

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions I

I

E!iIl Ringback Tone 1 The VPS 2 is idle.

(The call is forwarded to the 1

VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

I

I I

q q

Ringback Tone i The VPS 2.3 and 4 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) i busy.

1

I

/ The Ext.3 is idle. 1

I

( q q

Busy Tone *z j All members of a

1 hunting group are busy. ,

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State

q

m Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

1

Conditions

The VPS 2 is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

m 111 Ringback Toie

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *l

Continued

3-F-32

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding

and Station Hunting (continued)

Continued

Code Call State Conditions

m 111 Ringback Tone The VPS 2,3 and 4 are

(The call is Tging at Ext.1) busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer mrne The Ext.3 is idle.

has been elapsed.

1

m 131 Ringback Tone

(The

call is forwarded

to the

Ext.3 and ringing on it.)

q

111 RingbackTone All members of a

(The call is rying at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer lime

has been elapsed.

1

a

q

Ringback Tone **

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to

the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.

The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.

** This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the

caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

. t. . i

3-F-33

(21292)

B. Treatment of the call placed by the extension or outside party

The

treaiJ%nr

of a call from the extension or outside party varies

depending on the conditions of the called extension.

The <X-i335 system does not send codes (DTMF tones).

The fohowq detailed information explains the treatment of a call from

the extension or outside party by the types of the call.

1. Direct Call l-l. ‘To an extension

Ext.l/VPS 1

The type of call progress tones sent to the caller varies depending on the

status of the called extensionA/PS as follows.

Call State Conditions

I

Ringback Tone

l

’ I The Ext.lNPS 1 is idle. I

Busy Tone Ttie Ext.l/VPS 1 is busy.

DND Tone The Ext.l/VPS 1 is in the’ DND mode.

l

z

Answer The Ext.l/VPS 1 answers the call.

In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l, DISA.DID)

If an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time

period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. ‘L IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

l

? In case of calls via DlSAlDlD

lf a call via DISA/DID is directed to an extension in the DND mode, it will be

automatically redirected to another extension (including VPS extension) or an

attendant console assigned as the IRNA destination.

For further information, refer to Section 4-D-6.00, S-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb

(DND).”

3-F-34

(30393)

2. Station Hunting

2-I.

Call State

Ringback Tone

l

Conditions

At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

*

In case of outside calls (DIL

1 :l

. DISA.DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered

by the extension in a specified time

period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

2-2. etg~ are VP

Hunting?, Hunting

Ext

JCO VPS 1

Hunting

Group

? unting 1 ’ ~ vps2 , Fg

Call State

Ringback Tone

l

Conditions

At ieast one VPS extension of a

hunting group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

* The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-35

(21292)

2. Station Hunting

(continued)

2-3. Both VPS and nc--‘..PS 5x:5-s 3-1 2-2 -$-:3ers :- ? huntina arouD

A) When the des: -Ziior s =, . . ?S +;:-3ns 3~

Call State

Ringback Tone *’ +-5

Busy Tone

Conditions

At least o-e extension of a hunting

group is ice.

-T

All members of a hunting group are

busy.

*I In case of outside c&r (DIL 19. DISA.3lD)

In an incoming outsica call is not answrred by the extension in a specified time

period (IRNA timer), ir will be transfer& to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to -6. Intercept ?outing No Answer (IRNA)” and ‘7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-S-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follcw on .9 (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VFS extension. ansv*srs the call.

3-F-36

(21292)

2. Station Hunting

(continued)

B) W>;en :!y CC

j::nation ~5 a non-VPS extension.

Hunting riEkl Hunting

v

Ext.1 Hunting Group

I

Hunting / 1 Hunting ~

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone

l

‘.

l

* At least one member of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time

period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

l Z The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a ‘JPS extension answers the call. \

. ..-.

.__

3-F-37

(21292)

3. Call Forwarding (FWD)

3-l

_ FWD to a non-VPS extension

Ext./CO

(FM/D-All/Busy)

Call State

Ringback Tone *’

Busy Tone *’

Ext. 1

FWD mode

Conditions

The Ext.2 is idle.

The Ext.2 is busy.

Ext.2

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone

(The call is ying at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

1

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2

and ringing on it) *’

The Ext.2 is idle.

Ringback

Tone

(The call is ying at the

Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

1

The Ext.2 is busy. ~

The

call is still ringing at the

_ _

Ext.1. *

*I In ease of outside calls (DIL 1 :l, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time

period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

** The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extensionNPS” for further

information.

3-F-38

(21292)

3.

Call

Forwarding (FWD)

(continued)

3-2. FWD to a

VPS

extension

(Ext.iCO

(FWD-All

Busy)

Ext.1

FWD mode

Fo-&-a-c

Call State

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS I.,) *:

Conditions

The VPS : is idle.

Busy Tone *’ The VPS 1 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone

(The call

is Fing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Trne

has been elapsed.

The VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS

1.) *’

Ringback Tone

(The call is rfinging at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Ime

has been elapsed.

&

The VPS 1 is busy.

. . r

Ringback Tone **

(The call is still ringing at Ext.1 .)

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

** The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to -5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extensionNPS” for further

information.

: ._

3-F-39

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting

4-1. FWD tc a non-VPS extension

(All

members of a hunting group

are non-VPS extensions)

Hunting r’=+l Hunting

t

Ext.2

FWD mode

Ext.3 1

(FWD-Ail/Busy)

t

Hunting

Call State

Ringback Tone *’

Conditions

At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone O2

l

t All members (including the Ext.1) of a

hunting group are busy.

(RND-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone

(The call is ying at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

At least one extension of

a hunting group is idle.

The call is forwarded to an idle

extension of a hunting group

and ringing on it. *’

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

1

All extensions of a

hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

3.

The call

is

still ringing at Ext.1. w

*’ In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l , DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time

period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*p The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to ‘5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further

information.

3-F-40

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting

(continued)

4-2. FWD to a VPS extension

(All members of a hunting group

are

VPS extensions)

Hunting pzI Huntrng

FWD mode

f

VPS 1

Hunting Group

Hunting t Hunting

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to an idle

VPS

extension

and ringing on it.)

l

’

Busy Tone +’

Conditions

At least one

VPS

extension of a hunting

group is idle.

All members of a hunting

group are busy.

l 1

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

extension of a hunting

1 group is busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

1

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to an idle

VPS extension and ringing on it.)*’

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

-1

All members of a hunting

group are busy.

‘.’ Call Fonvarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

L

Ringback Tone

l

2

(The

call is still ringing at Ext.1 .)

The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when

a

VPS extension answers the call.

rZ The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further

information.

3-F-41

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)

4.3 FWD to a non-VPS extension

(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Hunting rm+j Hunting

Ext./CO

FWD mcde

$

Ext.2

Hunting t Hunting

VPS 1

)

‘The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group

following the programmed order.

(PWD-All/Busy)

Call State

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.2)*’

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS 1 and ringing on it.) **

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) *’

Busy Tone *’

Conditions

The Ext.2 is idle.

The Ext.2 is busy but the

VPS 1 is idle.

The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are

busy. . .

The Ext.3 and the VPS 2

are idle.

Ail members of a hunting

group are busy.

*I In case of outside calls (DIL 1 :l , DISA,DID) 4,‘:

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified

time

period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and ‘7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

** The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*’ The treatment of calls diirs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to 4. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further

information.

3-F-42

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)

(FWD-No Answer)

-..

Call State

Ringback Tone

(The call is Fing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

Conditions

The Ext.2 is idle.

- . . .

3.

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2

and ringing on it.) *’

Ringback Tone

(The call is Fing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

The Ext.2 is busy.

The VPS 1 is idle.

1

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the VPS

1 and ringin on it.) *2

Ringback Tone

(The call is Fng at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are

busy.

The Ext.3 is idle.

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the Ext.3

and ringing on it.) *’

Ringback Tone ‘. All members ofa?iunting

(The call is rfirging at Ext.1) group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer IRrne

has been elapsed.

1 -

Ringback Tone

(The call is still tinging at Ext.1) *3

*’ In case of outside

calls (DIL 1 :l , DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time

period

(IRNA

timer), it wilt be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to ‘6. intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through

3-F-50

for further information.

--

3-F-43

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

l ’ The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extensionNPS” for further

information.

4.4 -MD to a VPS extension

(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Forward

Ext.1

’

Hunting/-ET

VPS 1

Hunting Group

Hunti;

VPS 3

FWD mode blunting

L vps2 , ] Hunting

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group

following the programmed order.

(FWD-Ail/Busy)

Call State

Ringbaok Tone

(The call is forwarded to the VPS

2 and ringing on it.) *’

Conditions

The VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.2) *I

The VPS 1,2 and 3 are

busy.

The Ext.2 is idle.

-.

Busy Tone *’ All members of a hunting

group are busy.

3-F-44

(21292)

4. Call Forwarding

and Station Hunting (continued)

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State

Ringback Tone

(The call is y ing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

Conditions

The VPS 1 is idle.

1

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the VPS

1 and ringing on it) *’

Ringback Tone

(The call is yging at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

The VPS 1,2 and 3 are

busy.

The Ext.2 is idle.

J.

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the Ext.

2 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting

(The call is Fing at Ext.i) group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time

has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone

(The call is still ringing at Ext.1) *’

*I In case of outside calls

(DIL l:l,

DISA,DID) _

In an incoming

outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time

period (RNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. - IRNA

Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and 7. IRNA and Station

Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further infonnation.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*’ The treatment

of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to ‘5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further

information.

,‘...C’

.-- __

3-F-45

(21292)

5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extensionNPS

The following table shows the treatment of the call forwarded to the busy

extension or VPS (including all members of the Station Hunting Group are

busy) by types of the Call Forwarding feature assigned.

Extension Call DID

Outside Call

DIL 1 :l DISA

The call is put on the waiting status,

and it will be connected to the FWD

destination as soon as it becomes

idle. If the FWD destination is still

busy after the IRNA timer has been

elapsed. a call will be transferred to

the IRNA destination.

Call Forwarding - All Calls:

_________________--------------

The caller hears busy tone. If the IRNA destination is not

programmed.

-------‘--------r------‘---------

The call is put I Thecallwillbe

on the waiting ! disconnected

status until the f within60

__* FWD destination I seconds after the

becomes idle. i IRNA timer has

, beenelapsed.

I

Call Forwarding does not function.

The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be

transferred to the IRNA destination after a

When the call ringing at The call specified time period* has been elapsed.

-__---------------------------------------

Ext.1 is not answered. continues to If the IRNA destination is not programmed.

. .

ring at Ext.1. --------‘--T’-‘---------------------------

The call / The call is disconnected within 60

continues i seconds after the IRNA timer has

to ring at I been elapsed.

Ext.1. I

If Ext.1 is Call Forwarding does not function.

anSLTora

PlTS with The caller hears busy tone.

all PDN

buttons are

in use.

When Call Forwarding does not function.

Ext.1 is

busy or If Ext.1 isa The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be

transferred to the IRNA destination after the IRNA

off-hook. PITS and The 4 timer has been elapsed.

one or two ___----____________-----------------------

PDN continues to If the IRNA destination is not programmed.

buttons on ring on an idle -----------T----------------------- -------

it are not in pDN of f=fi. The call ! The call will be disconnected within

use. continues i 60 seconds after the IRNA timer

to ring at I has been elapsed.

Ext.1. I

l

Call Forwarding No Answer timer + IRNA timer

3-F-46

(21292)

6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)

6-1. IRNA to a non-VPS extension

co Ext.2

DIL 1:l

DISA

DID

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone * The Ext.2 is busy.

* Refer to S. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extensionNPS by IRNA

feature’ for further information.

6-2. IRNA to a VPS extension

co VPS 1

DIL 1:i

DISA

DID

Call State I Conditions I

Ringback Tone

(The call is transferred to the

VPS 1.) *’

The VPS 1 is idle.

I The VPS 1 is busy. I

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

** Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA

feature” for further information.

3-F-47

(21292)

7. IRNA and Station Hunting

7-t .

IWA to a non-VPS extension

(All memoers of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)

Hunting +X+1 Hunting

+

Ext.1 Ext.2

OIL 1:i

DISA

DID

Hunting 1 Ext.3 , 1 Hunting

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one extension in a hunting group

is idle.

Busy Tone * *.

All members in a hunting group are busy.

* Refer to ‘8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by RNA

feature” for further

information.

7-2. IRNA to a VPS extension

(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)

Hunting rkq Hunting

Ext.1

t

VPS 1 Hunting Group

DIL 1:l

DISA

DID

Hunting L vps2 , 1 Hunting

The call hunts for an idle VPS extension in a hunting group following the

programmed order.

Call State

Ringback Tone

1

(The call is transferred to an idle

VPS extension.) *’

Conditions

At least one VPS

extension in a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members in a hunting

group are busy.

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*I Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA

feature” for further information.

3-F-48

(21292)

7. IRNA and Station Hunting

(continued)

7.3 to

IRNA

(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Hunting FE/ Hunting

$

Ext.2

DIL 1:1

DISA

DID

Hunting L vpS 17 1 Hunting

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in

a hunting group

following the programmed order.

r

Calf State

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ex-t.2)

Conditions

The Ext.2

is idle.

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS 1 and ringing on

it.) *’

The Ext.2 is busy but the

VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are

busy.

The Ext.3 and the VPS 2

are idle.

Busy Tone **

All members of a hunting

group are busy.

1

*I The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

-<z --7

:::.::.

. _.

*2 Refer to 3. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy exfensionNPS by IRNA

feature” for further information.

3-F-49

(21292)

7. IRNA and Station Hunting (continued)

7.4

IRNA to a L’PS exlwssion

(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Hunting r’=/ Hunting

Ext.1

t

VPS 1 Hunting Group

DIL 1:l

DISA

DID

Hunting L vps2 , 1 Hunting

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group

following the programmed order.

I Call

State

Conditions

Ringback Tone

(The call is forwarded to the

VPS l..) *’

The .VPS 1 is idle.

Ringback Tone

(ihe call is ringing at Ext.2)

The VPS 1,2 and 3 are

busy.

The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone *)I All members of a hunting

group are busy. .*

*’ The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*1 Refer to ‘8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA

feature’ ti further information.

3-F-50

(21292)

8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA feature

The following table shows the treatment of the call transferred to the busy

extension or VPS (including all members of a Station Hunting Group are

busy.)

DID

The call continues to

ring at the called

extension or VPS, and

it will not be

transferred to the

IRNA destination by

the IRNA feature.

DIL 1:l DISA

The call is put on the waiting status, and it will

be connected to the IRNA destination as soon

as it becomes idle.

__-__--------------_--------------------

If the IRNA destination does not become idle.

--------------------r---‘------‘------’-

A call continues to be f

on the waiting status

; The call will be

; disconnected if the

until the IRNA : IRNA destination

destination becomes : does not become idle

idle. i within 1 minute.

! (In case of the IRNA

I destination is an

:

I attendant console, a

i calt will be

I disconnected within 3

:

I minutes.)

I

3-F-51

(21292)

11 .OO Call Accounting Summary

The KX-T336 System has the following three programming .tems rela:eo to Call

Accounting.

l

System - Class of Service

“Forced Account Code Mode”

( Section 4-I-2.00, Section 5-G-2.00 ‘Account Code Entry”

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (l/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CSl))

l

Account Code Verified (ACV)

(Section 1 O-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified”)

“i

l

Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls

(Section 1 O-C-57.00 “Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL))

You can use any combination of those three programming items as follows.

Table 1. shows available combination of those three programming items.

Forced Account

Code Mode

-.

Account Code

Verified (ACV)

Account Code Entry

on Long Distance

Calls (ACL)

1 Yes Yes

2 Yes No .

Yes

3 (Forced mode) No Yes

4 No No

5 Yes Yes

6 Yes No

(0ptioNn”mode)

7 No Yes

8 No No

Table 1.

3-F-52

(21292)

Table

2.

shows how each combination of programming items works.

3

4 Restricted

5

6

7

8

Account Code Entry

Always required

Not required

Validity Check j

/

Restriction by Toll

Restriction Table

! Not restricted, if a system

registered account code is

entered

Always checked

Restricted

Not checked

Not restricted, if an

appropriate account code

is entered

Checked

(if the account code

is entered)

Not restricted, if a system

registered account code is

entered

Restricted

Not restricted, if an

appropriate account code

Not checked is entered

Restricted

Table 2.

3-F-53

(21292)

When both ACL and ACV features are assigned

The extension user can override the restriction on numbers (registered in the

Toll Restriction Table) by entering the account code before making an outside

call if the validly of the account code entered is proved by the system.

The following example shows how to restrict the extension users from dialing a

specific outside number, and allow some of them to dial that number.

Example

(A) To prevent the extension users (whose COS NO&~) from dialing a

specific outside number, follow the steps below.

(For example)

(1) + 201 + 204 + XXXX (Dialing Plan -Type-A or C)

1. Assign TRLE of the extension lower than TRLL and TRLT as follows.

(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.“)

TRLL (Toll Restriction Level of Loctil-Access)

System-Local Access Group 1 OFLlPRGl LIN 1 DIR

.I- I--------- - ---- ---+--+-+ ---- b --I.

+-----------------------------~

1 Toll Restrktion Level I 01

-------------I- --------------

I I + I

Level of Local Access Group

0-W

f

Section 9-D-5.00 “Local Access Group”

I Section 1 O-C-9.00 “Local Access Group (LAG)” )

TRLE (Toll Restriction Level of Extension)

System-Class of Service (OFLIPRGISCRI DIR

--_-------- t-+--i---t

class of Selvice (COS, No.= 02 (l/2)

t--- ---_-e-----------

1 Toll Resbi&n Level (by) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 02 1

I Toll Restriction Level (Night) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 02 I

+

Level of Extension

(TRW

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (l/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CSl)”

3-F-54

(21292)

,(ln case of “Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.“)

TRLT (Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group) of a specific trunk groclp

Group -Trunk Group 1 OFLIP%/ SCR] SEL

_________----_______------------- -t----+----t----~----

Trunk Group No.= 02 (l/2)

+ _______________---------------------- ---I

1 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DDD I

I Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I

/ - 9

I Intercept Routing (Night)1 En5002 (Typedo.) I

1 Toll Restriction Level......I 01

I

t

Level of Trunk Group

U-W

Section 9-E-l .Ol ‘Trunk Group (l/2)’

Section 1 O-C-l 4.00 “Trunk Group 1 (TGl) 1

TRLE (Toll Restriction Level of Extension)

System-Class of Service IOFLIPRGISCRI DIR

.----------------------I--------+-+---f-----~---

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (l/2)

+-------------------------------------~

1 Toll F&diction Level (Day) . . . .._................... i 02 I

I Toil Restriction Level (Night) ’ 02 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

t

Level of Extension

(TRE)

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (l/2)”

Section 1 O-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CSl )” 1

3-F-55

(21292)

2. Program the Area/Office Code Tables as follows.

Toll Restriction-AreaiOce Code

Tables ONL PRG SCR SEL

----------------------------------~--+---

Area0ftice Code Table

No.=1 Entry=200

___------------------_____-__________------------

lcw LRL~l~lLfeocl~lLRLoc(~~LRLocIcodel~.RLocl

-----------------_______----------------------

I ml I2101 I I I I I I I

la11 Y.021 I I I I I I I I

Enter Restriction Level of Area Code 201

Select ‘Y

Area Code

Select Y” in “L” field

and enter Restriction Level “02” in “RL” field of Area

Code 201.

When ‘Y” is selected in I” field of code 201, Restriction Level 02 is applied

to AC=201 only, and not applied to OC=201 within Area A (If you select ‘N

in “L” field of Area Code 201, Restriction Level 02 is applied to both AC=201

and OC=201)

3. Register the last 7-digit (Office Code + Subscriber Number) of a spacific

outside number to be restricted for COS.02 extensions as follows.

Toll PatrietIm - 7no Dish Toll PdMrictim Tabl* I OR

-

mT.l iambor lElrr.Indor lenT.Ilhl&r

I :

I 01 I I 16 I 1311

ID31 I 17 I

1321

I

03

I I 1s I 1331

~ ID4 I 19 I

l34i

I I 05

e

1201 I351

~ lo61 I2ll 1381

~ 1071 lrrl I371

1081 1231 I 38 I

IOSI I241 I391

I

10

I IZJI I401

I 11

I lasl I

41

I

IMT.I WIubr

.+ :

1451

1471

l4al

1491

I501

Ial

1621

1631

1541

1561

ISal

the la& 7dgit of a specific outside number to be restricted.

Section 9-I-3.00 “7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction Table”

Section 10-C-34.00 “Toll Restriction 3 (TR3)” 1

Note:

The

outside

number registered applies to both local and long distance calls.

(1) + 201 + 204 + XXXX (Long Distance)

204

+ XXXX (Local)

3-F-56

(21292)

5. Register the .4reaCffice Code Table No. to be used as follows:

(Local Trurlk Dial Access)

1 Syster-Local Azess Gxcp

~ OFL j PRGl LIN 1 DIR

i-----------------------------------------~

j Toll Reztrrction Level Cl I

________-___-_______----------------------

1 Toll Rns’riction T-ble : i I

______=-L-__-_-9____----------------------

I ’

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table i OIL 1 PRG 1 SCR 1 SEL

__-____--____-______-------

------- ++ -_-- i --__- + ----

Area/Office Code Table No. =l Entry 200

+-----------------------------------------~

__________-__----------------------- j

_---_____-__-_______----------------------

j ‘I I I! III II

(Individual Trunk Group Dial Access and Direct Trunk Access)

1 Group-Trunk

G:oup

t

1 OFL(PRGISCRI SEL

----------------------------------L----+----

Trum Group No. =32 (1;2)

f-----------------------------------------~

Toil Restriction-Area/Office Code Tab!e OfL PRG SCR SEL

t ____________________-------------- ++ ---- 4 --___ + --__ j

Area/Office Code Table No. -1 Eniry 200

f----------------------------------------,-

! I II I I II.1 I

3-F-57

(21292)

(B) To allow the extension users (whose COS No.=02) to override the

restriction on numbers.

1. Assign System - Class of Service “Forced Account Code Mode” for COS.02

to “No.” as follows.

Toll Res!rictior! Level (Day) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I

I

( Toll Restriction Level (Night) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..(_ i 02 I

6 -

I CO Transfer

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I Yes I

I Forced Account Code Mode . . . . . . . . . . .._.......... I ’ No I

t

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (l/2)”

Section

1

O-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CSl)” 1

2. Assign ACV and ACL features to “Y (Yes)” for COS.02 extension users as

follows.

ACV

; PRG>ACV AT<CR>

; Class of Service No. 01 . . . . . . . . . . . N

INPUT>> <CR>

I Class of Service No. 02 . . . . . . . . . . . N

INPUT>> Y <CR>

I Class of Service No. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . N

; PRG> INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>

( Section

1

O-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )

ACL _. - ._ -.. .

; PRG>ACL ATcCR>

; Class of Service No. 01 . . . . . . . . . . . N

INPUT>> <CR>

I Class of Service No. 02 . . . . . . . . . . . N

INPUT>> Y <CR>

I Class of Service No. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . N

; PRG> INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>

( Section 10-C-57.00

“Account Code Entry on

Long Distance Calls (ACL)” )

3-F-58

(21292)

3. To register the System Account Codes, first divide the System Speed Dialing

area into two areas by entering the SPB command as follows.

To assign 80

Speed

Dialing Codes

and 120 System Account Codes in the

Speed Dialing Screen, enter as follows.

; PRG>SPB AT&R>

; Speed Dial Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

INPUT>> 080 <CR>

; Speed Dial Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 080 *

: PRG> INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>

( Section 1 O-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )

Then you can register the System Account Codes into the System Speed

Dialing Codes from No.081 to 200 as follows.

bsta - Swd Dialis - Smtu

I On I PEG 1 SX I DII

---- - : --c--c-

Smtca SF& Dial Ik. = odl

.

l atpa>

I no. I Tm I Did I 00:llcwu

h8lI#m234

I 01:Prtrictia Lnel-01

I

02:Putrictim Lad-D2

1062 IO1 I5678

I

Ds:Rutrictim

Led-03

lo83lOlI I 04:lsrtrktim LeeI-D4

lD84lOll I Qb:trtrictfml Led-(15

l085l01l I o6:btrietim Lwel-06

loss IO2 I I UMutrlctim tevel-U?

lo67 IO2 I

I CWutrictiaa Level-l

lca8 IO2 I I og:tatrictim Lad-00

ID69 ID2 I I 1o:wictim Level-10

IO90 loo I I

ll:xrtrictim Lad-11

lo9I IO9 I I

P:Pu~ietia Level-l2

loIlL IO9 I

I l3:htrictim Level-11

IOOI IO9 I I 14:BmMeticP M-14

IO94 I 16 I

I

lwartrictim

Led- I5

*- + Y:PesWtti011 Level- 16

I

~aaonllllllla B I I gmlDwY# I

Section 9-D-8.00 ‘Speed Dialing - System”

Section 1 O-C-l 2.OQ3peed Dialing - S.ptem (SPD)” j

3-F-59

(21292)

When the prog-zmming procedures from 1 to 5 have already been done, the

treatment of an outside call made by an extension user (whose COS.No. is

02) depends or rhe operation as follows.

(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.“)

PITS

Operation Result

1 cl

9

+ [( 1 j -

201+] 204xxxx i The outside number dialed

i is Restricted by “Toll

Restricted. , Restriction Table.”

(Call is not :

&-nplet&.) i The account code

; entered is “Not valid.”

3 OrI

9 i- iWD/DND + 1234# + [(l) i- 201+] 204xxxx Restriction on number is overridden.

(Call is completed.)

SLT c

1

-

2

-

3

Operation

-

pJ + [(l) + 201+] 204xXxX

psJ+ E q

+34!56#+ [(1)+201+]204xxxx

pJ+ q

fg +1234#+ [(1)+201+]204xxxx

Result

: The outside number dialed

Restricted. i is Restricted by “Toll

, Restriction Table.”

(Cell is not i

completed.) : The a-unt code

f entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

(Call is completed.)

(In case of ‘Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.“)

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access

When making an outside call by specifying the trunk group 02.

PITS

Operation

Result

1 pq-qm+ [(1)+201+]204xxxx

i The outside number dialed

Restricted. i is Restricted by 7011

, Restriction Table.”

3 q unn

8 1 2

+ FW’/DN’ + 1234# + ((1) +

‘O’+] 204~

(call is completed )

Restriction on number is overridden.

3-P-60

(21292)

SLT

Operation

1 mr;l ~+[(1)+201+]204xxxx

2 mr;? r;;l+mm +3456#+[(1)+201+]204xxxx

3 T [-i-&-j •+~]~j +1234#+[(1)+201+]204xxxx

Direct Trunk Access

PITS

Result

f The outside number dialer

i is Restricted by ‘Toll

Restricted. , Restriction Table.”

(Call is not j

amp/&&.) ;

The account code

; entered is -Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

(Call is completed.)

I 7

I I

Operation

I I

1 -1: [(I) + 201+] 204xxxx

2 + 3456#! + [(l) + 201+] 2D4xxxx

Result _.

-~-I-- ~

i The outside number dialec

; is Restricted by ‘Toll

Restricted. : Restriction

Table.”

(Call is not i

completed.) ; The account coda

: entered is ‘Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

(Call is completed.)

j

% CO buttons which belong to the trunk group 02.

3-F-61

(21292)

I- \. . . . --..

12.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone

Description

In some areas. upor: zcmore!Y)n

of

area code entry, the extension user must

ensure the receptkor; o! the second dial tone from the central office before

continuing to

dial the rest of tne

telephone number.

The following dialing procedures assume that the required system

programming has already been done.

Dialina Procedures

(1)

Manual Dialing

1. 1 Feature number for selectinq a CO line 1 + 1 Area Code 1 is dialed.

1

2. CO line specified is seized instantly, if available. I* ‘1

L

3. Area code dialed is sent to the Central Office.

1

4.

Second CO dial tone is returned in a delayed timing. I* *.

l

3

l

‘I

1

5. The rest of the telephone number dialed at an extension is sent to

the Central Off ice.

(2) Memory Dialing

1. 1 One Touch Dialing] / -1 I m] I m]

1

2. CO line specified is seized instantly, if available. ~~~~

-1

3. Leading one through four digits (Area code) of the memorized

number is sent to the Central Office automatically. I* 2

l

3.

l

4,

3.

4.

Second CO dial tone is returned in a debyed timing. I* *.

l

a

l

.I

1

5. The rest of the memorized number is sent to the CO line

automatically. I* *

l

’

l

4’

To support the WSD dialing procedure,

the

following system programming

should be done beforehand.

3-F-62

(30393)

Note:

.

Assrgn “CO Accxs Instantly (CAI)” feature to “Yes” on a trunk group by

entering the

CAI

command.

This feature is programmable on

a

rrunk group

basis.

In case of Local Trunk Dial Access, the system decides the mode by the

top trunk group of Local Trunk Hunt Sequence.

Refer to Section 1 O-C-58.00 “CO Access instantly (CAI)” for further

information.

‘* *

Set

the

WSO

(Waiting

Second Dial tone) mode to “Yes” by entering the

WS3 command.

Refer to Section I O-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further

information.

I- a Assign “External First Digit Time-out” timer longer than a delayed timing

of the second dial tone from Central Office.

I* ti Register the required area code and pause time by entering the WSD

command.

Refer to

Section

1

O-C-61 .OO “Waiting for Second Dial tone (WSD)” for

further information

Programming

System Programming

“System--System Ttmef,

External First Digit Time-Out

“World Selecf 3 (WS3)”

“CO Access Instantly (CAI)” _.

“Waiting Second Dial Tone (WSD)”

Conditions

External First Digit Time-Out

This timer is usually used to set the waiting time albwed between CO dial

tone or pseudo dial tone and the lime-out first digit dialed.

However, if the WSD feature is utilized by system programming, this timer

works to set the waiting time atbwed between area code dialed and the

remaining number dialed.

3-F-63

(30393)

13.00 Timed Reminder with OGM (Wake-up Call)

Description

A wake-up call can be set erther by any extenson user to his or her own

extension, or by the Optraror 1 3r 2 (Attendant Console or Extension) to any

extension.

When this feature is activated, the extension user can hear

a

wake-up message

by

going off-hook after being alerted by

the

alarm tone at a specified time.

To utilize this feature, a wake-up message should be recorded by the Operator

1 beforehand.

(Refer to Section 3-F-4.00, 4-I-13.00 and 6-J-8.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM)

Recording and Playing Back.“)

This feature is functionally equivalent to %ned Reminder” (if set by the

extension user himself) or ‘Remote Timed Reminder” ( if set by the Operators).

The difference is, this feature provides the wake-up message instead of the

second dial tone when the extension user goes off-hook.

Up to four extension users per DISA card can initially hear the wake-up

message at a time, and a maximum of four DISA cards can be installed to the

system. That is, up to 16 extension users can initially hear the wake-up

message at a time, if a maximum of four DISA cards are installed.

Assuming that one DISA card (For Use is W-UP) is installed in the system, and

six extension users have set the wake-up call to ring at 7:30 A.M.

1.

2.

3.

. .

At 7:30 A-M, timed reminder tone (alarm tone) begins to ring at six

extensions simuttaneously.

‘q.*Pl PI

) .*:*-

~ ‘.:wg.- ..-.g ..:;dwg . .:..g : .::g.. $

Each extension user goes off-hook respectively.

The first four extensi& users (who go off-hook earlier than two other

extensions) can hear the wake-up message and two other extensions hear

BGM.

l

’

Two other extension users will hear the wake-up message instead of BGM

when:

l

Next playback of the message begins.

l

A DiSA resource is released, that is, the extension user goes on-hook after

hearing the wake-up message.

3-F-64

(40993)

Note:

Programming

l

- To urdue BGM. set the usage of music source to “BGM” or “Hold 8 BGM.”

If set to ‘Hold.’ other two extensions hear the second dial tone instead of BGM

and vnll not be able to hear a wake-up message.

(See Secton 9-F-2.00 “Pager and Music Source.“)

l

a Endless bop OGM

A wake-up message is abays played back from the beginning of it to the

extension user when he or she goes off-hook to hear a wake-up message.

It is played back repeatedly until the extension goes on-hook.

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“Special Attended - DISA”,

For Use

‘System - Operation (113)“.

External Music Source I, 2

Trunk - Pager 8 Music Source”,

Music Source - For use

Musice

Source - Tenant

9-K-l .oo

1O-C-4O.00

9-D-1.01

1o-G4.00

SF-200 104-20.00

conditions

The following simpfified fbwchart shows the treatment of the extension user

who goes off-hook after being alerted by an afann tone.

t

Intermittent tone (dial tone 2)

is sent to the extension when No DlSAfor

l

’

he or she goes off-hook wake-upis

4 assigned?

Yes

No -

9GMis l ’ Ia

- assigned? * 4 DtSAcerd

l

’

‘INS-?

YeS

-

BGM is sent to the

extension when he of

she goes off-hook.

YOS

No OGMresouroe m

is idle?

Yes

wake-up

messageis

sent to the

extension

when he or

she goes off-

hook.

3-F-65

(40993)

Note:

l

’ This feature works if the extension user goes off-hook while the alarm tone IS

ringing for 2 minutes.

‘2 Tenant Service

If the tenant service is employed, each tenant (1

and 2) can have its unique

wake-up message respectively.

In this case, afflications of the wake-up message and the extension should be

the same tenant.

l S Operating Status

Refer to Section 14-C-2.00 “Definition of Operating Status.”

l ’ OGM busy

Up to four extensions per DISA card can initially receive a wake-up message at

a time.

To utilize BGM, set the usage of music source to “BGM” or “Hold & BGM.”

(Refer to Section 9-F-2.00 “Pager and Music Source.“)

l ’ From BGM to a wake-up m&sage

The extension who currently hears BGM will hear the wake-up message instead

of BGM when:

l Next playback of the message begins.

l A DISA resource is released, that is, the extension user goes on-hook after

hearing the message.

3-F-66

(40993)

Section

4

Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

: Section 4)

Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Contents

A Preparation Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . ..-......-................................................ 4-A-l

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

4.00

Outline ..___.

..-.....................................................................

Configuration . . . . . . . . . .._..._. ._ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A- 1

. . ..-.................................................................

2.01 Location of Feature Buttons 4-A-l

2.02 Controls . . . . . . . . . ..f............................................ 4-A-2

. . . . ..-.......-........................................................................

LED Indication Patterns 4-A-l 5

Display-LCD .-...-......-............................................................ 4-A-l 9

. . . . ..-......................--.....-......................................................

4.01 Trne and Date Display 4-A-20

4.02 Dialed Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A-20

. . . . . ..-........................................................

4.03 Duration Trne of Call Display 4-A-21

4.04 Incoming Call Source Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A-21

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.05 Station Programmed Data Display 4-A-22

4.06 Station Name Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A-22

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A-23

B Feature Buttons .... . ......................................................... ................................. 4-B-l

Fixed Feature Buttons ........................................

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

Assignable Feature Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

...................................

...........................................

............

Line Access Buttons

3.01 PDN Button ..............................................................................

................................................

3.02

SDN Button ..................................

...................................................

3.03 ICM Button ...............................

...................................................................................

3.04

PC0 Button ................................................

3.05 SC0 Button .................................

................................................

3.06 GCO Button .................................

.................................................................................

4-B-l

4-B-4

&‘B-6

4-B-6

4-B-7

4-B-8

4-B-9

4-B-10

; ,

C

Outgoing Call Features . . ..-...--.......................................................................... 4-C-l

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

Line Selection-Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 .Ol Prime Line Preference-Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.02 Idle tine Preference-Calling

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.03 No tine Preference-Calling

............................

On-Hook Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

....................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Making Outside Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.01 Local Think Dial Access

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access . .

............

...........................................

3.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access

3.04 Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.-..............................................,

. . . . . . ..-...........

4-c-i

4-C-2

4-c-3

4-c-4

4-C-6

4-c-7

4-C-8

4-c-9

4-1

Page

4-c-10

4-c-11

4-c-14

4-c-1

5

4-C-1

6

4-c-17

4-c-l

7

4-c-l

8

4-c-19

4-C-20

4-C-21

4-C-22

4-C-24

4-C-25

4-C-26

4-C-27

4-C-28

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

Automatic Dialing.. .................................................................................

4.01 One Touch Dialing .......................................................................

4.02 Speed Dialing-System.. ...............................................................

4.03 Last Number Redial (LNR) ..........................................................

4.04 Automatic Redial .........................................................................

4.05 Saved Number Redial (SNR) ......................................................

Making Internal Calls .............................................................................

5.01 Inter Office Calling .......................................................................

5.02 Intercom Calling.. .........................................................................

5.03 Intercom-Voice Calling..

...............................................................

5.04 Intercom-Busy Station Signaling

(BSS)

.......................................

5.05 Intercom Oft-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ....................... .

.

Automatic Callback.. ..............................................................................

6.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk ...........................................................

6.02 Automatic Callback-Station .........................................................

Executive Busy Override .......................................................................

Do Not Disturb (DND) Override ........... . .................................................

Walking COS (Class of Service). ...........................................................

Operator Call .........................................................................................

D Receiving Features .......................................................................................... 4-0-l

- . .

1.00 Line Selection-Answering ...................................................................... 4-0-l

1.01 Ringing Line Preference-Answering.. .......................................... 4-D-l

1.02 Prime Line Preference-Answering ............................................... 4-o-2

1.03 No Line Preference-Answering.. .................................................. 4-O-3

1.04 Direct Answering (Pre-selection) 4-O-3 ”

.................................................

2.00 Intercom Answer .................................................................................... 4-D-4

2.01 Intercom Hands-Free Answerback .............................................. 4-D-4

2.02 Intercom Answer Voice Calling Deny .......................................... 4-D-5

2.03 Intercom Answer BSSIOHCA Deny.. ........................................... 4-D-6

3.00 Call Pickup ............................................................................................. 4-D-7

3.01 Dial Call Pickup ........................................................................... 4-D-7

3.02 Directed Call Pickup .................................................................... 4-D-6

3.03 Call Pickup Deny ......................................................................... 4-D-9

4.00 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.. ....................... 4-O-10

5.00 Executive Busy Override Deny .............................................................. 4-D-11

6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) .............................. ............................................. 4-D-l 2

7.00 Call Waiting ............................................................................................ 4-D-15

8.00 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-Log Out.. ............................................. 4-D-l 7

4-2

.

Page

E Holding Features _.......__...___._.... ._... .._.. 4-E-1

1 .OO Hold .............................................................. ............ 4-E-l

2.00

Exclusive Hold .......................................................................

4-E-2

3.00 Consultation Hold ........................................................................... 4-E-3

4.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station .................................................................... 4-E-S

5.00 -Call Park ............................................................................................... 4-E-6

5.01 Call Park-System.. ....................................................................... 4-E-6

5.02 Call Park-Station ......................................................................... 4-E-8

6.00 Call Splitting ....................... ..i............................_ .................................... 4-E-l 0

F

Transferring Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._......_......................-............................. 4-F-l

1 .OO Call Transfer .......................................................................................... 4-F-l

1 .Ol Unscreened Call Transfer to Station.. .......................................... 4-F-l

1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station ................................................ 4-F-2

1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk .................................................. 4-F-3

1.04 Ringing Transfer. ......................................................................... 4-F-4

1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote .......................................... 4-F-5

1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer to Attendant Consob.. ....................... 4-F-5-l

1.07 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) ............. 4-F-5-2

2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD) .........................................................................

4-F-6

2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls ............................................................. 4-F-6

2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook ................................................. .

. 4-F-9

2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer ......................................................... 4-F-12

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo Answer ................................ 4-F-l 5

2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk ............................................................. 4-F-l 8

. .

G Conversation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-G-l

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

11 .oo

12.00

Programmable Privacy.. ........................................................................ 4-G-l

Privacy Release .....................................................................................

4-G-2

privacy Attach ........................................................................................

4-G-3

Hands-Free Conversation ......................................................................

4-G-4

Conference ............................................................................................

4-G-5

5.01 Conference-One Appearance ......................................................

4-e-5

5.02 Conference-Two Appearances ....................................................

4-G-7

Unattended Conference ......................................................................... 4-G-9

6.01 Unattended Conference-One Appearance.. ................................ 4-G-9

6.02

Unattended Conference-Two Appearances ................................

4-G-11

Doorphone .............................................................................................

4-G-13

Flash ......................................................................................................

4-G-14

External

Feature Access.. ...................................................................... 4-G-15

Microphone Mute ...................................................................................

4-G-16

Intercom Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ...................................

4-G-1 7

Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling). ........................................

4-G-18

Page

H Paging

Features ............................................................................................... 4-H-l

1

.OO Paging..

..................................................................................................

4-H-l

1

.Ol

Paging All Extensions.. ........... .....................................................

4-H-l

1.02

Group Paging .............................................................................. 4-H-3

1.03 Paging External Pagers.. ............................................................. 4-H-5

- 1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers ............................... 4-H-7

2.00 Background Music (BGM) !hrough External Pager..

.............................. 4-H-9

I Other Features ................................................................................................ 4-l-l

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

11.00

12.00

13.00

14.00

Night Service ......................................................................................... 4-l-l

1

.Ol

Universal Night Answer (UNA) .................................................... 4-l-l

1.02 Flexible Night Service..

................................................................ 4-l-2

1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode ...................................................... 4-l-3

Account Code Entry ............................................................................... 4-l-5

Timed Reminder .................................................................................... 4-l-7

Background Music (BGM)

...................................................................... 4-l-9

Secret Dialing ........................................................................................ 4-l-l 0

Data Line Security ................................................................................. 4-I-l 1

Absent Message Capability

Message Waiting .................................................................. 4-l-l 2

................................................................................... 4-l-15

Electronic Station Lock Cut ................................................................... 4-l-l 8

Assigned Feature Clear ......................................................................... 4-l-19

Remote Station Feature Control ............................................................ 4-I-20

DSS Console ......................................................................................... 4-l-22

12.01 Automatic Transfer .................................................................... 4-l-24

Outgoing Message @GM) Recording and Playing Back ...................... 4-l-25

Remote limed Reminder - One

Ti

................................................... 4-l-28

(23)

A. Preparation

1 .OO Outline

Panasonic EMSS PITS (Proprietary Integrated

Telephone System) telephones are provided to

utilize the various features of the

KX-T336

system, in addition to supporting

basic telephone

service (making and answering calls).

This section describes special features and

required

operatigm of PITS telephones.

4-A-1

2.00 Configuration

PITS telephones can be categorized as the

following four types.

Type 20 KX-T30820, KX-T61620, KX-T123220

1 Type 30 KX-T30830,

KX-T61630, KX-T123230, KX-T1232300, KX-T123235

Type 50

KX-T30860, WC-T61 650, KX-T123250

7000 Series KX-l7020, KX-l7030,

KX-77050, KX-T/130

2.01 Location of Feature Buttons

crype 20)

!

Common

Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is

common to all Type 20 PITS telephones.

1

2

3

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons

2 CONF Button and Indicator

3 FVVDIDND Button and lrtckator

4 PAUSE Button

5 TRANSFER Button

6 AUTO/MEMORY Button and indicator

- Refer to the

following page.

-4

-5

-6

-7

-6

I I I I L-L-

9 IO 11 12 Microphone

7 AUTO ANSMUTE Button and Indicator

8 SP-PHONE Button and ~hdiior

9 SAVE Button

10 REDIAL Button

11 FLASH Button

12 HOLD Button

4-A-2

Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.

KX-T123220 KX-T30820

MESSAGE

(Message

Waiting) Button

and Indicator

DN (Directory

Number) Buttons

and Indicators

ICM (Intercom)

Button and

Indicator

KX-T61620

Number) Buttons

and lndlcators

DN3

DN2

DNl

DN (Directory

Number) Buttons

and Indicators

ICM (Intercom)

Button and

Indicator

ICM (lnterwm)

Buttonand

indicator

4-A-3

Programmable Feature buttons

PFO5

PFO2

/ -Y

2 i I

PFOl ’ t Ii& j3 f&- PF03

1

PF04 4 kzi

5

Et8

E 74

- &- PFO6

I

PF07 ’ ia

8

B’

3

i % +---- PFO9

PFlO lo

L El ” i I@

:2

PF12

/

_

4-A-4

Common

Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is

common to all Type 30 PITS telephones.

3-.

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

2 PF (ProgrammabIe Feature) Butms

3 CONFButtonandhdicaw

4 WD/DNDBut!onandI~

5 PAUSE Button

6TRANSFERButton

7 AlJTOmAEhdORY Button a& Indkaor

Microphone

the

page-

8 AUTO ANSMUTE Button and Indiior

9 SP-PHONE Button and lndicabr

1osAvEButton

11

REDIAL Button

12 FLASHButton

13 HOLDButton

4-A-5

-xation of DN buzons is specific to each model as follows.

-‘X-T1 23230, KX-T: 232300, KX-Tl23235 KX-130830

-

and Indicator

. DN (Directory

Number)

Buttons and

Indicators

MESSAGE

I -- (Message

Waiting) Button

ICM (Intercom) I- ICM (Intercom)

Button and Button and

Indicator Indicator

KX-T61630

DN6

DN5

DN4

ON (Dlrectow

J

Number) a

Buttonsand

Indicators

iLDNI J

DSS (Direct

Station Selection)

Buttons and

Indicators

DN (Directory

Number) Buttons

and indicators

Indicator

4-A-6

Proprnmable Featux buttons

PF05

PFOl

PF04

PF07

PFlO

PF03

PFO6

PFO9

PF12

I

\

PFi 1

PFO8

4-A-7

i

Common

Location of Feature Bucons kstrared below is

common to all Type 50 PITS telephones.

0

Panasonic

.)

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons

2 TRANSFER Button . .._ --

3 AUTO/MEMORY Button

4 PAUSE Button

5 MONITOR Button

I I I I

6 7 a 9

6 CONFButton

7 REDIAL Button

8 FLASH Button

9 HOLD Button

Memory Card

Refer to the

following page.

.:.

4-A-8

Lxx~on of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.

k-x-T? 33250

I*

KX-T30850

DN (Directory

Number) Buttons

and ln&atoE

Buttonand

Indicator

ICM (Intercom)

Button and

Indicator

I

KX-T61650

~@i=w

Number)

Butkmsand

IMibtOrS

ICM (htercom)

Buttonand

Indicator

4-A-9

. .

f

Programmable Feawe x%ns

4-A- 10

(7000 Series)

Preliminary Remarks:

Some x. -tons orovided for the KX-T7020, KX-T7030, KX-17050 and KX-T7130 are

caikd 2, names sther ?han the ones described in this manual.

If yol: ZSP these Todels, please press the equivalent buttons shown below instead of

the buttons described in this manual.

1 Description here ) Equivalent button 1

KX-T7020

3

4

Panasonic 7

‘0

HYBRID SYSTEM

-2

1; ’

-7

-a

-9

-10” .; .;:

-11

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons

2 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and

Indicators

3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator

4 CONF Button and Indicator

5 FWD/DND Button and Indicator

6 MESSAGE Button and Indicator

7 TRANSFER Button

8 PAUSE Button

9 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator

10 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and

Indicator

11 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator

12 REDIAL Button

13

FLASH Button

14

HOLD Button

4-A-l 1

KX-T7030

1

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons

3 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and

Indicators

4 INTERCOM Button and indicator

5. CONF Button and indicator

6 FWD/DND Button and Indicator

7 MESSAGE Button and Indicator

8 TRANSFER Button

v1

HYBRID SYSTEM

4

5

13 14

9

10

11

- . .

12

13

14

15

PAUSE Button

AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator

AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and

Indicator

SP-PHOsButton and Indicator ‘*’

REDIAL Button

FLASH Button

HOLD Button

4-A- 12

KX-T7050

r

I I

Panasonic.

0

HYBRID SYSTEM

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons

2 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and

indicators k

3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator

4 MESSAGE Button and indicator

5 TRANSFER Button

6 PAUSE Button

...

_ .4!

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

"7

-8

-9

7 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and indicator

8 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and

indicator

9 MONImd Button and Indicator

10 REDIAL Button

11

FLASH Button

12 HOLD Button

4-A-l 3

KX-l7130

HYBRID SYSTEM

‘000000

000000

nooaII0

1

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons

3 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and.

Indicators

4

INTERCOM Button and Indicator

5 CONF Button and Indicator

6 FWD/DND Button and Indicator

7 SAVE Button

8 MESSAGE Button and Indicator

14 15 16 .

9 TRANSFER Button

10 PAUSE Button

11

AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator

12 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and

Indicator

13 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator

14

REDIAL Button

15 FLASH Button

16 HOLD Button

4-A-l 4

2.02 Controls

Various controls are provided for each type of PITS telephones as sh3wr Seiow

Controls Usage Type Type 702c 7C3G

20/50 30 ] x5: 7’ 30

MEMORY Switch SET Normal operation

PROGRAM: Local station programming

(See Sections 11 and 12) 0 opio

RINGER Volume HIGH/LOW: Sets the desired ringervolume

Selector OFF: The telephone does not ring 0 0 0 0

HANDSET VOLUME NORMAUHIGH: Determines the desired - -

Selector handset volume 0 0

VOLUME Control A sliding lever used to control the speaker

volume 0 0 0 0

CONTRAST Selector Set to “LOW,” “MID” or ‘HIGH” to choose -

the best display intensity 0 - 0

HANDSET/HEADSET HANDSET: Normal operation

Selector HEADSET: When using an optional -

headset, KX-T30890 0 - 0

POWER FAILURE OFF: Normal operation

Switch ON: When power failure occurs - 0 - -

(See

Section 14-H-l 40)

DIALING MODE This is used to set the dialing mode during

Selector power failure. -

TONE: Sets tone dialing mode 0 -‘)-

PULSE: Sets pulse dialing mode

0 : provided

- : not provided

:-‘

4-A-l 5

Location

(Type 20/50)

1 VOLUME Control

2 RINGER Volume Selector

3 MEMORY Switch

.sEl..PRo3Ak4

4-A- 16

(Type

30)

123 456

7

.,.

1 VOLUME Control

2 RINGER Volume Selector

3 CONTRAST Selector

4 DIALING MODE Selector

vauts

MAX - YIN

5 POWER FAILURE Switch

6 MEMORY Switch

7 HANDSET/HEADSET Selector

-lml-

El

TUUE..FlLSE

is

4-A-l 7

(7000

series)

KX-T7020, KX-T7050

Left

HANDSET VOLUME Selector

RINGER VOLUME Selector

VOLUME Control

)

Rear

MEMORY Switch

KXJ7030, KX-T7130

Left

Rear

I

HANDSET VOLUME Selector

RINGER VOLUME Selector

VOLUME Control

MEMORY Switch

HANDSET/HEADSET Selector

CONTRAST Selector

4-A-l

a

3.00 LED Indication Patterns

Line conditions are displayed by three patterns of flashing LED indicators on PITS buttons, as follows.

I I

I I I

0 I

Pattern 2

(60 wink)

I

Pattern 3

(120 wink)

Pattern 1 : Shows call arriving with 240 winks/min and is called 240 wink.”

Pattern 2 : Shows holding a call with 60 winks/min and is called “60 wink.”

Pattern 3 : Shows Unattended Conference and Privacy Release with 120 winks/min and is called “120

wink.”

Light on steady shows busy status and light off shows idle status.

4-A-l 9

4.00 Display-LCD

4.01 Time and Date Display

Description

This is a function for a PITS provided with the

display to offer a display either of the present

time or of the date and the day of the week. It is

indicated on the display when the PITS is on-

hook and the SP-PHONE is off.

Two display modes are available: the time

display mode and the date display mode. For

instance, the displays for “January 1, Friday, 12:

00 a.m., 1999” in each mode are as follows:

$ In the time display mode:

1 Jan 1 12:00 AM 1

In the date display mode:

” Jan 1.1999 FRI

To alternate the modes, dial U*” while on-hook

and SP-PHONE off.

$

::

Setting the time and date is executed by “Date &

Time Set Up Screen” and “Change Date & Time.”

Extensions assigned to a “Class of Service” in

which Maintenance Capability is set to “Yes” can

also set the time and date. Refer to Section ll-

C-2.00 “Setting Date and Time.”

Programming

~1

“System-Class of Service (l/2)., 94-4~01 10-i-7.00

PITS System Programming Reference

Setting Date

and

Time

11-c-2.00

Operation

Changing the time display mode to the dare

display mode

Be sure the telephone set is on-hook and the SP-

PHONE is off.

In1

1. Dial “*.n

l

The message on the display of

PITS changes to the daie

display mode.

Changing the date display mode to the time

display mode.

•l

1.

Dial ‘*.”

*

l

The message on the display

changes to the time display

mode.

Conditions

None

\

4-A-20

This is a function for the user of

a PITS

with the

display to see the dialed

number of the other

party shown on the display. It is displayed when

the user is

calling an extension or an outside

party

and also when talking with it.

4.02 Dialed Number

Display

4.03 Duration Time of

Call Display

Description Description

This function permits a PITS with the display to

show the

duration of an incoming or outgoing CO

call by second.

This function does not apply to extension calls.

Programming

None

Conditions

None

Operation

The following is an example of the display when

calling an extension. . .

Operation: Display:

Lift the handset. I

Dial “1 .n I 1 I

Dial “2.”

Dial “3.”

12

I 1231

Callina the extension. 1 1 2 3 : Jack I

An example of the display is shown below:

1 DDD02 1:30’25 ]

lc second

minute

hour

For an incoming call from an outside party, the

duration starts at the time an extension answers

the call.

For outgoing calls to outside patties, the starting

time of count is assignable in “System-System

Timer”, SMDR Duration Time. .-..

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

‘System-System TmW.

SMDR Duration Time 9-D-3.00 1o-G6.00

.

Conditions

Holding of an outside party or in conference with

outside parties is also counted as part of the

duration. Consequently when returning to the

conversation with the party after retrieving the

hold or after concluding the conference, the

display shows the continued period including the

period of the hold or the conference.

The display duration is held for five seconds after

the handset is replaced.

Operation

None

4-A-21

4.04 Incoming Call Source Display

Description

If the user of a PITS prc\/lded with the display is

called by somebody, :?e use7 can see the name, if

pre-assigned, of me ca:;tr.g oarty on the display.

The display contents defier according to the type of

arriving calls as illustrated below:.

When called by an extension using the DN button :

1 23 4: Tony i

:

l-l-

I

station name

directory number

When called by an extension using the ICM

(intercom) button :

KM1 2: Tony 1

?_15_ ~~~~nmuember

When called by an outside party :

1 CO: PANASONIC 1

-lLIEi ~~~~~~ name

A station name or a trunk name does not appear

unless they are assigned in ‘Extension-Station”,

Station Name or “Trunk-CO tine”, Trunk Name.

3

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

“Trunk-CO tine”, Trunk Name

‘Extension-Station (l/3)”

Station Name

4.05 Station

Programmed Data Display

Description

When a PITS provided with the display is on-hook

and the SP-PHONE button is off? pressing the

following buttons provides the display of the kind

of the pressed button or the content assigned to

the button on the display for five seconds:

REDIAL or LNR (Last Number Redial) button

SAVE or SNR (Saved Number Redial) button

MESSAGE (Message Waiting) button

PF (Programmable feature) buttons

FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb)

button

Programming

None

Conditions

When the assigned data exceeds 16 characters,

.&” appears on the mostright side of the display.

Operation

Press the button to be confirmed.

Conditions

None

Operation

None

4-A-22

4.06 Station Name Display

Description

This s a func:ion that shows the user of a PITS

.Cth :ne display the other

extension’s directory

~7%’ and, if

stored, its name. This is .

displayed

when the user is calling or called by or

takng with an extension

party.

[Example]

When calling/called by/talking with an extension

on the DN button :

When calling/called by/talking with an extension

on the ICM button :

ICM12: Tony

-Lb Fzizzzlber

Station names do not appear unless they are

assigned in “Extension-Station”, Station Name.

Programming

Cohditions 2 -

When calling an extension on the DN button, if

the called party answers on the SDN button, the

display on the calling station changes as follows:

When calling extension 1234 :

1 1234: Tony

After extension 1000, whose SDN is owned by

extension 1234, answers the call:

[I

The example below shows the display on the

calling station when calling an extension

assigned

to

Call Forwarding on the DN button :

[Example]

Extension 2000 calls extension 1000.

Extension 1000 sets the destination of Call

Forwarding-No Answer to extension 1001.

The following display appears on the dis$ay of

extension 2000 :

] + 1001: Jack 1

The following display appears on the display of

extension 1001 :

1 + 2000: Betty 1

Operation

None

4-A-23

B. Feature Buttons

1.00 Fixed Feature Buttons

Description

Feature Buttons, like features, are either fixed or assrgnable.

Fixed Feature Buttons, (for example m ,) have specific :JCIIO~S permanently

associated with them.

The following table shows all Fixed Feature Buttons provided on the PITS telephone

by each type.

_’

Feature Button Type 20/30 I Type 50 7020/7030 I 7050 I 7130 I

‘t

SP-PHONE * 0 OS’ 0 0 “’

0

AUTO/MEMORY *

-------------------------

AUTO DIAUSTORE *

PAUSE * 0 0 0 0

0

$

I

REDIAL (LNR)

lololololol

I

SAVE (SNR) 1 0 None *2 I - None ‘2 I

None

“2 j

0

I

ICM *

-------------------------

INTERCOM *

AUTO ANSIMUTE *

-------------------------

AUTO ANSWER/MUTE *

I

HOLD

I

TRANSFER

lololololol

I

FWDIDND * j 0 1 Nonei3~T 0 None *3 171

I

CONF *

lololololol

FLASH *

lololololol

MESSAGE *

I 0 *4 I 0 *4 I 0 I 0 I 0 I

[Note]

In the above list, Feature Buttons marked * have an LED indicator.

33’ The MONITOR button is provided instead of the SP-PHONE button.

‘2 The SAVE button can be assigned to the PFl button.

*3 The FWD/DND button can be assigned to the PF 3 button.

4-B-i

g4 The MESSAGE button is not provided on rhe PITS’s listed below, but can be assigned to the

assignable burl-tons respxrively. as !oilcws

I

PITS not providea with MESSAGE 1 Assignable Buttons 1

KX-T30830 DSS 8

KX-T30820, KX-T30850 DN3

I- __~

KX-T61620, KX-T61630, KX-T61650 DN6 I

For the assignment of the

FWD/DND: SAVE and MESSAGE buttons, refer to the

following.

FVVD/DND button Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)”

SAVE button Section 12-C-2.00 “PF (Programmable Feature)

Button Assignment”

MESSAGE button Section 9-G-l .02 “Station (U3)”

Section 9-G-l -03 “Station (313)”

Usage

SP-PHONE (MONITOR) Button and Indicator

This key allows the set user to receive or originate calls without using the handset.

Each time the SP-PHONE button is pressed, the speaker and microphone are

alternately switched on and off.

AUTO/MEMORY. AUTO DIAUSTORE Button and Indicator

This button is used for dialing system speed dial numbers and for storing the

results of a local programming operation.

PAUSE Button

This button is used to insert a pause in a speed dial number.

REDIAL (LNR) Button

This button is causes the last number dialed to be redialed when the key is

pressed.

SAVE (SNR) Button

This button allows the set user to store the telephone number to make the same

call again by pressing the key.

ICM, INTERCOM Button and Indicator

This button is used to make or receive an intercom call.

AUTO ANS/MUTE. AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and Indicator

This dual function button is used to automatically answer an intercom call or

disable the microphone during handsfree operation.

HOLD Button and Indicator

This button allows

the set

user to place any call at the set on hold.

TRANSFER Button

This is used to transfer an outside or an intercom call to another extension.

4-B-2

FWD/DND Button

This button can be used for setting or canceling the Call Forwarding or Do Not

Disturb feature.

CONF Button and Indicator

Allows the user to perform a three party conference.

FLASH Button

This button causes a flash signal to be sent’to the Central Office.

MFSSAGF mton and Indicabx

This button can be used for Message Waiting feature.

4-B-3

2.00 Assignable Feature Buttons

Description

Assignable Feature Buttons can have features assigned !o them. oy the System

Programming or by the PITS Station Programming.

The following three types of Assignable Feature Buttons are provided on :tie PITS

telephones. -

l

DN button

l

DSS button (KX-T30830 only)

l

PF button

(Note)

DSS button and PF button are also provided on the DSS consoles.

The following list shows all features available to Assignable Feature Buttons by type of

buttons.

DSS DN (Direct Station Selection-DN)

DSS ICM (Direct Station Selection-ICM) o* 0 0 &’ 0 0

ONETOUCH

(One Touch Dialing) 0 0 0 0 0

PRV-CHG (Privacy Change) 0 0 0 x EXT FEAT (External Feature Access) 0 0 0 0 E

CALL

PAR (Call Park-System) 0 0 0 0 0

CALL

STA (Call Park-Station) 0 0 0 0 0

RNG TRN (Ringing Transfer) 0 0 0 0 0

SPLIT (Call Split) 0 0 0 0 0

FWD/DND

(Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) X x x OS’ x

TONE-BRK

(Tone Through Break) 0 0 0 0 0

SAVE

(Saved Number Redial) x x x OS2 x

4-B-4

In the list on the previous page:

u On indicates that

the

feature is assignable.

I‘

X

” indicates that

the

feature is not assignable.

For example, “PDN” is assignable to DN button

only and “Call Park-System” is assignable to all

types of Assignable Feature Buttons (DN, DSS,

PF).

The assignable features in the shaded part can

be assigned and canceled by the system

programming only.

l

Secondary Directory Number (SDN)

l

Private CO

l

Single CO

l

Group CO

%l <Example>

The FWD/DND button is not provided on the

PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 as a Fixed Feature

Button but can be assigned to the PF3 button.

352

SDN 100 and SDN 100

Group CO 01 and Group CO 01

The SAVE button is not provided on the following

PITS telephones, but the SAVE function can be

assigned to the PFl button of them.

PITS type 50

KX-l7020

KX-T7030

KX-T7050

Each of the following features can be assigned to

only one Assignable Feature button of a PITS.

Assigning the same feature to multiple buttons of

a PITS is impossible.

Programming

l

Off-Hook Call Announcement

l

Message Waiting

l

UCD Log In

l

Local Alarm

l

Privacy Change

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“Extension-Station

(l/3)“,

Primary Directory Number

“Extension-Station (2/3)“,

“Extension-Station (3/3)“,

PF Key Type and

Number

DSS Key Type

and

Number

‘Extension-DSS Console

(2/3)“,

‘Extension-DSS Console (3/3)”

9-G-l .Ol 10-C-22.00

9-G-l .02 1 OC24.00

9-G-l .03 10-G25.00

9-G-2.02 lgQ6.00

9-G-2.03

PITS Station Programming Reference

Assigning DN (Directory Number)

Buttons

Assigning PF (Programmable Feature)

Buttons

Assigning DSS

(Direct Station

Selection)

Buttons

12Cl .oo

12-C-2.00

12-C-3.00

Conditions

A code number for any of the iollowing

foarxes

can be assigned on only one DN buttcn

of a

PITS.

Assigning the same number to multiple buttons o+

a PITS is impossible.

4-B-5

3.00 Line Access Buttons

3.01 PDN Button

Description

When the KX-T336 System is installed, a Primary

Directory Number (PDN) button is always

assigned to every PITS telephone.

A PDN is a user’s extension number.

Each PITS telephone has at least one PDN

button that is used not only to make and receive

calls but to access system features.

The DN-01 button is fixed to PDN.

Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned to

each PITS telephone.

If you assign three PDN buttons, they must be

arranged consecutively.

PDN buttons are assigned in “Extension-Station”,

Type and Number.

By default setting, PDN button is seized

automatically by simply lifting the handset or

pressing the SP-PHONE button.

DN-03

I I I

DN-02

I I

DN-01

1

ICM

11 I

I

PDN

(DN buttons-PITS type 20,30,50)

PDN-. .--

-1

(DN buttons - PITS 7000 series)

Programming

System Programming Reterence

i vT i Dumb

I I

“Extension-Station (2/3)‘. 9 G

1 02 10-C-24.00

DN

Key Type and

Number I --. 1

1

Conditions

The table below shows the relationship between

the DN button and the CO line status.

Indicator CO Line Status

off Idle

Lights green l-use

Green 60 wink l-hold

Green 120 wink l-exclusive hold, consultation

hold or unattended conference

Green 240 wink Incoming call

Lights red Other-use, exdusive hold - -

Red 60 wink Other-hold

Red 120 wink Privacy release possible

-

4-B-6

3.02 SDN Button

Description

Allows an extension user to assign PDN buttons

of other extensions on DN buttons of PITS. This

assigned DN buttons are called SDN buttons.

The assignment of SDN buttons make it easier to

transfer or answer other

extensions.

SDN buttons are assigned in “Extension-Station”,

Type and Number.

3.03 ICM Button

Description

Allows an extension user to make/receive an

intercom call within an ICM (Intercom) group.

Programming

Conditions

The table below shows the relationship betieen

the DN button and

the CO line status.

. 1 Indicator

I

CO Line Status I

Off

Lights green

Green

60

wink

Green

120

wink

Red 240 wink

idle

l-use

I-hold

l-exclusive hold, consultation

hold or unattended conference

Other-use, exclusive hold

Other-hold

Privacy release possible

Incoming call

3

Preferential order of SDN indicators is as follows:

1. l-use, hold, exclusive hold, consultation

hold, unattended

conference : Lights green,

Green

60 wink, Green 120 wink

2. Incoming call : Red 240 wink

3. Other-hold : Red 60 wink

4. Privacy Release : Red 120 wink

5. Busy : Lights red

6. Idle : Off

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

“Extension-Station (l/3)“,

Intercom Number

Conditions

The table below shows the relationship between

the indicator and the intercom status.

I

Indicator I Intercom Status I

off I

Idle

tights green l-use, Off-Hook Call Announcement

(OHCA)

Green

240 wink Incoming call

4-B-7

3.04 PC0 Button

Description Conditions

It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were

connected directly to a DN button on a PITS.

This operation

is

called Private CO.

ft is then no longer possible to place outgoing

calls from other extensions using this CO line.

Also, an incoming call from the CO line will arrive

only at this PITS.

A Private CO button lights up red at the times

below.

1) When the Private CO line is not In Service.

2) When the Private CO line has been set to

Busy-Out.

3) When access using the Trunk Verify

function is made by the Attendant Console.

To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk

Group”, Type to PVL and program the CO line to

the Private trunk group in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk

Group.

Also, program the DN button on the PITS to

PRV-CO using “Extension-Station (2/3)“, Type

and assign the physical number of the Private

CO line under Number.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (l/Z)“,

Type

9-E-l .Ol 10-C-14.00

“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-l .OO 1 O-C-1 8.00

“Extension-Station (2/3)“, 9-G-l .02 1 O-C-24.00

Tvoe and Number

A call held on a Private CO button can not be

retrieved by other extensions, however, an

incoming call to a Private CO button can be

transferred.

When an incoming call arrives, ringing occurs

instantly. Delayed ringing is not available.

4-B-8

3.05 SC0 Button

Description

To support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO

line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS

telephone.

When this function is assigned, a DN button on a

PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button.

SC0 button feat_ure provides easy access to the

CO lines for extension users who make and

receive many outside calls.

The PITS telephone user can access a CO iine

by simply pressing the SC0 button without

dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming

outside call can be directed to the PITS

telephone via dedicated SC0 button without

assistance of the Operator.

In addition, the associated status LED provides

busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

SC0 button can be used Qither one-way service

(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways

service (Both-Way).

SC0 button can be assigned to a PITS telephone

in conjunction with DIL 1:l or DIL 1 :N feature.

idle

I-use

Green 60 wink I-hold

Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold.

unattended conference

Green 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1:

1)

Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold

Red 60 wink Other-hold

Red 120 wink Privacy release possible

Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

1 Red 240 wink

SC0 button with DIL

1: 1

feature

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SC0 button

can be assigned to the PITS telephone

programmed as the destination of DIL

1: 1

feature.

If SC0 button is not assigned on the PITS

telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN

button on it. j

The table below shows the relationship between

the DN button programmed as Single CO and the

CO line status:

CO Line Status

CO line which can be assigned as a SC0 button

is:

A CO line which belongs to a trunk group

assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and

whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL

l:N.

A CO iine which belongs to a trunk group

assigned as Outgoing Only.

Programming

hi

Conditions

Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

function is set, it is overridden by an outgoing

call made by pressing the Single CO button.

The Single CO button indicator will light up red

in the following circumstances.

cl

> When the Single CO is not. In Service

c2> idle status and Single CO in Busy Out

status

<3> idle status and Single CO in trunk route

control status

When the Single CO button is pressed in

any of these statuses, its indicator lights up

green but busy tone is heard.

In the following cases, the Single CO button

indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is

sent.

cl> When Calling Patty Control signal has

been detected during a call using the

Single CO.

c2> When outgoing restriction applies to an

outgoing call made from the Single CO.

4-B-9

(30393)

3.06 GCO Button

Description

To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a

group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned

to a ON button on a PITS telephone. ’

When this function is assigned, a DN button on a

PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.

GCO button feature provides better service with

a given number if CO lines.

GCO button can be assigned to a PITS

telephone in conjunction with DIl 1: N feature.

Incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group

can be directed to a maximum of eight

destinations (extension user, ICM group, pickup

group) simultaneously.

In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons

on the PITS telephone.

If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls

via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.

To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user

can access an idle CO line in the group by simply

pressing the dedicated GCO button.

The table below shows the relationship between

the DN button programmed as Group CO and the

CO line status:

I~ ~

Indicator

off

Lights green

Green 60 wink

Green 120 wink

Green 240 wink

tights red

Red 60 wink

Red 120 wink

Red 240 wink

CO Line Status

Free CO tine in trunk group and no

incoming CO

call

l-use

I-ho@

l-exclusive hold, consultation hold,

unattended conference

-

No idle CO lines in trunk group

and no incoming call in trunk

group

-

CO line receiving an incoming call

1 in trunk group

Trunk group which

can be assigned as a GCO

button is:

l

A trunk group assigned as Bothway or

Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode

(Day) is DIL 13 or DIL 1: N.

l

A trunk group assigned as Outgoing Only.

Programming

Conditions

When the ARS function is set. it is overridden by

outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.

Pressing a Group CO button when it is red

serves to set the “Automatic Callback to Trunk”

function.

See Section 4-C-6.01.5-A-4.01 “Automatic

Callback-Trunk” for details.

In the following cases, the Group CO button

indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.

<l> When Calling Party Comrol sig+l has

been detected during a call using the

Group CO.

~2s When outgoing restriction applies to an

outgoing call made from a Group CO.

4-B-l 0

(30393)

C. Outgoing Call Features

1 .OO Line Selection-Calling

Description

PITS telephones may have many line access

buttons and the set user can access a desired line

either directly by pressing the button or by

employing automatic line selection feature.

This Line Selection-Calling feature offers the

following three line-preferen&and the user can

select only one preference for his or her PITS set:

l

Prime Line Preference-Calling (default)

l

Idle Line Preference-Calling

l

No Line Preference-Calling

If Prime Line Preference or Idle tine Preference is

selected, the user can get the programmed line

automatically for making a call by simply lifting the

handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button (On-

Hook Dialing).

If No Line Preference is selected, no line is

accessed until the user directly presses the

desired button.

Every PITS telephone is assigned to Prime tine

Preference on PDN button by default setting. This

can be changed on a PITS telephone basis using

PITS station programming.

Refer

to Section 12-C

4.00 “Automatic Line Hunting (Calling).”

Line Preference-Calling feature newly assigned on

a PITS telephone overrides the previous

assignment.

!.dQ&

Line access buttons that are available for a PITS

telephone are:

l

DN buttons... Primary Directory Number

(PDN) buttons

Secondary Directory Number

(SDN) buttons

(Refer to Section 4-B-3.01

through 3.02.)

l

CO buttons... Private CO (PCO), Single CO

(SCO), Group CO (GCO)

(Refer to Section 4-B-3.04

through 3.06.)

l

ICM (Intercom) button

(Refer to Section 4-B-3.03.)

4-c-1

1 .Ol Prime Line Preference-Calling

Description

Automatically connects a PITS telephone to a

line pre-assigned as Prime Line by simply lifting

the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

Once the Prime tine Preference is selected from

the Preference Calling features, one of the

following buttons should be assigned as the

Prime tine of the PITS telephone:

l

DN button - PDN (default), SDN

l

CO button - PCO, SCO, GCO

l

KM button

Programming

Conditions

A line access button except PDN and ICM cannot

be assigned as the Prime tine unless it has been

assigned to a PITS telephone by system

programming.

PDN button and ICM button are fixed feature

buttons and always provided on PITS

telephones.

However, SDN, PCO, SC0 and GCO buttons are

assignable feature buttons.

If you assign SDN, PCO, SC0 or GCO button as

Prime tine, pre-assignment as a line access- _

button on a PITS telephone must be dbne

beforehand by system programming.

Silence when going off-hook indicates that the

prime line is busy.

This feature is available when a PITS

telephone

has no incoming call, or when a PITS telephone

does not answer an incoming call automatically

by going off-hook, that is, “Ringing Line

Preference-Answering” overrides “Prime Line

Preference-Calling.”

Refer to Section 4-D-l .Ol “Ringing tine

Preference-Answering” for further information.

_..

The user can override the preferred line

temporarily to access another line (Pre-

selection). To override the line, without lifting the

handset nor pressing the SP-PHONE button,

press the desired line access button .listed below:

. PDN button

l

Group CO button

l

Private CO button

l

ICM button

l

Single CO button

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

I

l

The indicator on the button

assigned as the prime line

lights in green.

l

Dial tone 1 or 3 or 4 sounds.

2. Call the other p&ty depending on

the assigned line.

When two or more PDN buttons are assigned on

a PITS (up to three PDN buttons can be

assigned per PITS), line selection feature always

functions if at least one PDN button is available.

4-C-2

1.02 Idle Line Preference-Calling

Oescription

S-s of :ne idle DN buttons (PDN, SDN) or CO

x:ons !PCO, SCO, GCO) on a PITS telephone

*i.j & automatically selected by lifting the

handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

It

is determined by the system programming that

which button (DN or CO) will be selected as an

idle line.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “System-Operation

(l/3)” for programming.

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the selected

idle line access button lights in

green.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

Programming

.“r )I

PITS Station Programming Reference

2. Call the other party depending on

the selected line.

Automatic tine Hunting (Calling)

12c4.00

Selection

I I

Conditions

Silence when going off-hook indicates that no

idle line is available on the PITS telephone.

ICM button is not selected automatically by this

feature.

This feature is available when a PITS telephone

has no incoming call, or when a PITS telephone

does not answer an incoming call automatically

by going off-hook, that is, “Ringing tine

Preference-Answering” overrides “Idle tine

Preference-Calling.”

Refer to Section 4-D-l .Ol “Ringing tine

Preference-Answering” for further information.

The user can override the preferred line

temporarily to access another line (Pre-

selection). To override the line, without lifting the

handset nor pressing the SP-PHONE button,

press the desired line access button listed below:

l

PDN button

l

Group CO button

l

Private CO button

l

ICM button

l

Single CO button

4-c-3

1.03 No Line Preference-Calling

Description

If No Line Preference is assigned to a PITS

telephone, no line is automatically connected to a

PITS telephone when it goes off-hook.

To get a line for making a call, the extension user

must press the desired DN (PDN or SDN) or CO

(PCO, SC0 or GCO) or ICM button on a PITS

telephone.

This feature can be assigned on a PITS

telephone basis.

Programming

I

PITS Station Programming Reference I

Automatic Line Hunting (Calling)

I I

12-c-4.00

Selection

Condition

Going off-hook selects no line and no tone is

heard.

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear no tone.

2. Press the desired line access

button.

l

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

3. Call the other party depending on

the pressed button.

2.00 On-Hook Dialing

Description

On-Hook Dialing enables various hands-free

dialing operation. This permits the PITS

telephone users without lifting the handset to

access a line and dial telephone numbers,

intercom numbers, and feature numbers, or do

other dialing performances.

Programming

None

Conditions

If Prime tine Preference or Idle Line Preference

is assigned to a PITS, pressing the SP-PHONE

button automatically selects the preprogrammed

line.

If No tine Preference is assigned to a PITS

telephone, no tone sounds when SP-PHONE

button is pressed, and to get a line for making a

call, press the appropriate line access button.

The SP-PHONE button is turned off

automatically, if no operation is made within 15

seconds in the following states after the SP-

PHONE button is pressed. I

The states are:

l

While hearing one of the following tones;

Dial tone

Busy tone

Reorder tone

DND tone . . .

l

While no tone is heard

4-c-4

Operation

Without lifting the -aodset. Dress Fe desired

iine

access button iis:ti below axt

pedorm an

appropriate dialing operatw-

l

SP-PHONE button

l

Single CO button

l

PDN button

l

Grow CO button

l

Private CO button = ICM button

By pressing the SP-PHONE button

IjyEq

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in red.

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the telephone number of the

other party.

By using the PDN button

1. Press the PDN button.

l

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in red.

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the telephone number of the

other party.

By using the Private CO button

q

1. Press the Private CO button.

l

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in red.

The indicator on the Private

CO button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

By using the Single CO button

I 1 1. Press the Single CO button.

/

II l

.

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in red.

The indicator on the Single CO

button lights in green.

You hear dial tone 1.

2. Dial the telephone number of the

external party.

By using the Group CO button

El 1.

Press the Group CO button.

l

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in red.

The indicator on the Group CO

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

Dial the telephone number of the

external party.

By using the ICM button

n

1. Press the ICM button.

,F-, .

.

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in red.

The indicator on the ICM

button lights in green.

You hear dial tone 5.

2. Dial the intercom number of the

other extension.

2. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

4-c-5

3.00 Making Outside Calls

3.01 Local Trunk

Dial Access

Description

Allows

extension users to make outgoing CO

calls by automatic selection of an idle CO line.

Dialing the feature number for ARSILocal CO

Line Access” enables you to execute this

function.

To

activate this feature, set “System-Operation”,

Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If set to

‘Yes,’ ARS feature is activated instead of this

feature.

Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route

Selection (ARS)” for further information.

Programming

System Programming

“System-Operation (l/3)“,

Automatic Route

Selection

“System-Local Access Group”,

Hunt Sequence

“System-Numbering Plan (2/9)

APB/Local CO Line Access

Reference

-y

9-D-l .Ol 10-C-4.00

I

9-D-5.00 1 o-c-9.00

9-O-6.02 10-ClO.oC

Conditions

An idle CO fine available and hunting sequence

is determined by the system programming

“System-Local Access Group”, Hunt Sequence.

If an extension user hears busy tone, there is no

idle CO line available.

If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user

is restricted from accessing this feature.

Refer to Section 3-C-l .Ol “Toll Restriction for

Local Trunk Dial Access,” for further information.

If tenant service is employed, accessible trunk

groups are limited to the trunk groups within the

same tenant.

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for ‘.“’

“ARS/Local CO Line Access.”

1 .A4 I

l

You hear dial tone 1.”

3. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk

group in hunt sequence 01 in ‘System-Local

Access Group.”

4-C-6

3.02 individual Trunk Group Dial

Access

Description

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO

calls via an idle CO line in the specified trunk

group by dialing the feature number for Yrunl(

Group 01-08 Access” or Yrunk Group 09-l 6

Access.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT i Dumb

10-C-8.00

Conditions

Trunk groups to be specified are limited to the

ones assigried in ‘System-Class of Service”,

Trunk Group Access.

.j .

If an extension user hears busy tone, all CO lines

in the specified trunk group are not available.

If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user

is restricted from accessing the specified trunk

group.

Refer to Section 3-C-l .03 roll Restriction for

individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct Trunk

Access,” for further information.

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.’

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

Trunk group specifying number

matches trunk group number,

-

as follows:

Trunk Group

TrunkGroup

Specifying Number Number

1 01

2 02

3 03

4 04

5 05

6 06

7 07

8 08

2-2 Specifying one trunk group

from 09 to 16

11 Dial the feature number for

I

“Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access.”

2) Dial the number for specifying

the trunk group: 1 to 8.

l

Trunk group specifying number

matches trunk group number,

J

1

!

I

as follows:

1

drunk Group

specifying Number

1 . .

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Trunk Group

Number

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

3. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

123

q

2-l Specifying one trunk group

456

,(I0 from 01 to 08.

*

1)

Dial the feature number for

“Trunk Group 01-08 Access.”

2) Dial the number for specifying

the

trunk group: 1 to 8.

4-c-7

3.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group

Dial Access

Description

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO

calls using Special Carrier Facilities by simply

dialing the feature number for “Trunk Group 17-

24 Access.”

Detailed data, such as access codes and

authorization codes, required to Special Carder

Access must be programmed beforehand in

“Special Carrier Access” screen.

Trunk groups available for Special Carder

Access is also defined in the same screen.

Special carriers available for each extension user

is defined in “System-Class of Service (2/2)

Special Carrier Access.

It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier

Access on system-wide basis.

Refer to Section 1 O-C-52.00 “World Select 2-

ECWOCC Access Assignment” for further

information.

Programming

System Programming

‘System-Class of Service (2/2)“,

Special Carrier Access

“System-Numbering Plan (2/g)“,

Trunk Group

17-24 Access

“Special Canier Access-Equal

Access/OCC Access”

World Select 2”

Condition

None

Reference

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

t-

I

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Trunk Group 17-24 Access.”

3. Dial the number for specifying

the virtual trunk group: 1 to 8.

l

Virtual trunk group number

matches virtual trunk group

specifying number and digit

modification table number

(Equal access table number 1

to 4, OCC access table number

1 to 4 which should be

assigned beforehand), as

follows:

virtual Trunk Virtual Trunk Digit Modiition

Group Number

~~ro~e~pecffying Table Number

17

18

19

20 21

22

23

24

1

Equal access I

2 table number 2

3 3

4 J 5 OCCaccess ;’

6

7

8 .*..

A, 2.

4. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

4-C-8

3.04 Direct Trunk Access

Description Operation

Allows a PITS telephone

user one-button access

to a CO line.

You can make an outgoing CO call without

dialing the feature number for CO line access.

This feature requires a CO button assignment on

a PITS telephone.

There are three types of CO buttons available in

this system: Private CO (PCO), Single CO (SCO)

and Group CO (GCO) buttons. r. :

For further information about CO button features,

refer to Section 3-D-2.07 through 2.09.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

‘Extension-Station

(2/3)“.

DN Key Type and Number

/ 961.02/ lo-G24.00 /

Condition

1. Press the desired CO button.

l

The indicator on the CO button

lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

2. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

.:<..

.

\

Direct trunk access (for making calls) can be

done by simply pressing the appropriate CO

button without lifting the handset or pressing the

SP-PHONE button.

Refer to Section 4-C-2.00 “On-Hook Dialing” for

related information.

4-c-9

4.00 Automatic Dialing

4.01 One Touch Dialing

Description

Extension users can program frequently dialed

telephone numbers (of bolh extensions and

outside parties) or feature numbers into memory

on the following PITS telephone’s Assignable

Feature buttons.

l

PF buttons

l

DN buttons

l

DSS buttons (KX-T30830 only)

To dial a number stored in an assignable feature

button, the extension user just press the button

and the PITS telephone automatically dials the

number.

This feature can be programmed by either

system programming and PITS station

programming.

Programming

System Programming

‘Extension-Station (2/3)“,

DN Key Type, Number

‘Extension-Station (3/3)“,

PF Key Type, Number

DSS Key Type, Number

‘Extension-DSS Console (l/3)“,

DSS Key Type, Number

‘Extension-DSS Console Q/3)“,

PF Key Type, Number

Reference

9-G-2.01

9-G-2.02

1 O-c-25.00

1 O-C-26.00

1 O-C-24.00

1 o-c-25.00

PITS StaMn Programming

DN (Directory

Number) Button

Assignme’nt .

PF (Programmable Feature)

Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station

Selection) Button

Assignment

Reference I

Conditions

Each stored number can have up to 16 digits

including CO line access code. “0 to 9,” %,’ “#,”

“PAUSE,” ‘FLASH,” y-” and “SECRET” can be

registered.

For employing One Touch Dialing for calling an

outside party, stored number must include a

feature number for selecting a CO line as leading

digits.

For calling an outside party automatically:

AFWLocal CO Line Access - telephone number

The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:

l

ARS/Local CO tine Access

l

Trunk Group 01-08 Access

l

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

l

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

Operation

Making a call using One Touch Dialing

1. Lift the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

El

2. Press the One Touch button.

1” ..

l

Stored number is sent.

(Supplement)

In step 2, dialing a feature number for selecting a

CO line before pressing the One Touch button

ignores the stored feature number and seizes the

CO line selected by manual operation.

instead of the operation in step 1, pressing the

Private CO, the Single CO, or the Group CO

button ignores the stored feature number for

selecting a CO line and seizes the CO line of the

pressed button. . .._

ea..

One Touch Dialing, Speed Dialing, La% iz%ber

Redial, Saved Number Redial and manual dialing

can be used in combination.

An extension user can store a number consisting

of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in

two assignable feature buttons.

In this case, feature number for selecting a CO

line should not be stored on the second button.

To dial the number, first press the first One Touch

button, and then press the second One Touch

button.

4-c-1 0

4.02 Speed Dialing-System

Description

System Speed Dialing allows any extension user

ro call oti:s;de paflies by simply

pressing the

AUTO buttor: and dialirg a pre-assigned 3-digit

code

(001

to 200) common

to any extension user

in the system.

Up to

200 Speed Dialing Codes can be registered

to the system

The Speed Dialing Codes

are registered in

“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and toll

restriction level unique to each speed-dialing code

can be assigned In the same screen.

Refer to 7011 Restriction Plan for System Speed

Dialing” on next page for further information.

If Tenant Service is employed, Speed Dialing

Codes can be divided by two tenants. In this

case, one tenant cannot use the Speed Dialing

Codes which belong to the other tenant.

Programming

‘i .

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

“System-Tenant”, Speed

9-D-2.00 1 O-c-5.00

Dialing-System Boundary

‘System-Speed Dialing- 9-D-9.00 1

O-C-l 2.00

System”

. ...:)

PITS System Programming Reference

Storing Speed Dialing-System

11-c-3.00

Conditions

Each stored number can have up to 32 digits

including CO line access code. “0 to 9,” =*,- Y,,

“PAUSE,” “FLASH,” Y-n and “SECRET” can be

registered.

When you register a telephone number to a

System Speed Dialing Code, a feature number for

selecting a CO line must be stored as leading

digits.

The

feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:

1

l

ARS/Local CO tine Access

l

Trunk Group 01-08 Access

l

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

l

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

Operation

Calling an outside party using Speed Dialing-

System

1. Lift the handset

or press

the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Press the AUTO button.

l

The indicator on the AUTO

button lights.

l

You hear no tone.

3. Dial the speed dialing code.

l

The registered number is sent.

I 44 I

(Supplement)

Before pressing the AUTO button in step 2,

dialing a feature number for selecting a CO line

seizes the dialed CO line and starts outpulsing,

ignoring the feature number for selecting a CO

line registered in the speed dialing code.

Instead of the operation in step 1, pressing

Private CO, Single CO or Group CO ignores the

feature number for selecting a CO line stored in

the speed dialing codes and makes a call to an

outside party through the pressed CO line.

While dialing a speed dialing code in step 3,

cancelit@ the code is possible by pressing the

AUTO button. Then repeat steps 2 to 3 for the

new entry.

One Touch Dialing, Speed Dialing, Last Number

Redial, Saved Number Redial and manual dialing

can be used in combination.

An extension user can store a number consisting

of 33 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in

two speed dialing codes. In this case, a feature

number for selecting a CO line should not be

stored on the second speed dialing code.

To dial the number, first press the AUTO button

and dial the first speed dialing code, and then

press the

AUTO button and dial the second

speed dialing code.

4-C-l 1

<Toll

Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing>

The system administrator can assign Toll

Restriction Level of System Speed Dialing

(referred to as “TRLSD” in the

following)

to each

code as follows:

System - Speed Dialing - System

----------------_---------------------

System Speed Dial No.

=OOl

+ .-em- ---w--m--- -- -I------------- i'

:No. i

; -------. 4

:001 I

i 002 ;

; 003 :

8 :

Toll Restriction Level of System

Speed Dialing (TRLSD)

TRLSD consists of 17 levels (YOO” and “01 to 16”)

TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from

TRLSDs “01 to 16.”

In TRLSD “01 to 16,” Iy)l“ is the highest level and

“16” is the lowest.

1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=OO)

When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing

a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=OO),

extension users receive standard toll

restriction treatment.

If selected speed dialing code includes Looal

Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a

call is checked against 7011 Restriction for

Local Trunk Dial Access.”

If selected speed dialing code includes

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as

leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll

Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial

Access.”

For further information about System Toll

Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-l .OO

“Toll Restriction.”

2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16)

Code

(TRLSD=Ol to

16), the system

compares Toll Restriction Level of Extension

(TRLE) with TRLSD.

If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLSD

(TRLE2TRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLE is

lower than TRLSD (TRLEcTRLSD), a call is

checked against System Toll Restriction

feature.

For further information about TRLE, refer to

Section 3-C-l .OO “Toll Restriction.”

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an

outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed

Dialing Code (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLE of 6

is higher than TRLSD of 7 (TRLE>TRLSD), so a

call is made.

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an

outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed

Dialing Code (TRLSD=4), in this case, TRLE of 6

is lower than TRLSD of 4 (TRLEcTRLSD), so a

call is checked against the System Toll

Restriction feature.

When an extension user makes an outgoing

CO call by dialing a System Speed Dialing

4-c-1 2

The following flowchart shows rhe simplified procedure of toll restriction plan for

System Speed Diaikg.

Start

I i I

le f

When an outgoing CO cari is, made by When an outgoing CO call is made by

dialing a System Speed Dialing Code dialing a System Speed Dialing Code

(TRLSD=Ol to 16) (TRLSD*OO)

)‘ ‘I

Compares TRLSD with TRLE .-+ Checks a call against System Toll

Restriction feature

TRLEcTRLSD

TRLEzTRLSD’

v

The call is made

(Transmit the registered

number to CO line)

not restricted restricted

* In this case, ‘Local Trunk Dial Access restriction” and ‘Individual Trunk Group Dial

Access restriction” assigned in Class of Service are disregarded. . .

4-c-13

4.03 Last Number Rediai (LNR)

Description

:,:~ma: :a!ly saves the last outside number

3 2

sd

frs~ a PITS telephone and allows the

-h:tiris.;n &er to make the same outgoing CO

tail aga$n by simply pressing the REDIAL (or

LNR j

button.

Programming

None

Conditions

Up to 32 digits except the feature number for

selecting a CO line can be memorized

automatically as the last dialed number.

“+ ” “#,” “PAUSE,” or “SECRET” are counted as

on’e digit respectively.

Last number redialing memory is renewed

automatically every time you make a new

outgoing CO call and even one digit is sent to CO

line. Dialing a feature number for selecting a CO

line only does not renew the memorized number.

Operation

Calling an outside party by LNR on the DN button

or the CO button

1. Press the DN button or the CO

button.

l

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

l

If the last call was made on the

CO button, calling by the DN

button is unavailable and

pressing the REDIAL (LNR)

button is ignored.

Calling by LNR after dialing a feature number for

selecting a CO line

5 1. Press the DN button.

l

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

. .

2. Dial a feature number for

selecting a CO line.

3. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

Interrupting redialing

While you hear busy tone, ring back tone, or

reorder tone,

RENAL

n

1. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

cl

4-c-14

4.04 Automatic Redial

Description

Automatic Redialing is activated by pressing the

SP-PHONE button and REDIAL (LNR) button

successively (On-hook dialing).

Redialing will be repeated 15 times automatically

at 40-second intervals until the called party

answers.

(These settings can be changed by system

I

pq;am=~ng.

Refer

to Section 1 O-C-51 .OO

-;Vc:id Select 1 (WSl)” for further information.)

F*io answer after dialing 15 times conclude this

function, turning the SP-PHONE button off.

Automatic Redialing is available with the

following PITS telephones only:

KX-T123230D, KX-T123235, KX-T7130, KX-

T7030, KX-T7050

, .- I

Press the REDIAL (LNR) button in hands-free status

I

Redialing automatically

I

I I

When no idle line is When the opposite

available station is busy When ringbaLk tone sounds

from the other party

Busy tone sounds

for five seconds

The other party answers

I

c

Conversation 1

i

Stand by for 40 seconds.

(During this time, the indicator

on the SP-PHONE button

:

. .

flashes in red slowly. In other

status, indicator lights).

.:)

I I

Programming

None -L

Conditions

Besides the number, this function memorizes the

button used for the last call and executes

automatic redial on that button.

Pressing the REDIAL (LNR) button while the last

used button is in use causes the system to wait

until the button becomes idle. As soon as the

button becomes idle, this function is executed.

If the last used button was the PDN and multiple

PDNs are available, the system selects any idle

PDN.

Automatic Redialing is terminated, if any key

operation is made during Automatic Redialing.

If a CO line is not seized, busy tone sounds for

five seconds. a .

Turning the SP-PHONE off while hearing busy

tone activates Automatic Callback-Trunk.

For further information, refer to Section 4-C-6.01

“Automatic Callback-Trunk.”

Operation

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

l

The indicator on the SP-

PHONE button flashes in red

slowly for 40 seconds of

standby status.

4-c-1 5

4.05 Saved Number Redial (SNR)

Description

Saved Number Rediar allows rhe exte-sion zxr

to store the

telephone

numbe- ot me ourside

party when the called line is sC;sy 3’ -ftkng a

conversaion and make the same ca!l again by

simply pressing the dedicated feature buttor::

SAVE or SNR button.

Programming

None

Conditions

Up to 32 digits of a dialing number can be stored

for this function, not counting the feature number

for selecting a CO line.

y *,” “#,* “PAUSE” or “SECRET” is counted as

one digit.

Saved Number Redialing memory remains intact

until another number is stored in memory.

. ..’

Operation

Storing the phone number into SNR memory

When you are speaking on the CO line or when

the called CO line is busy

r-l

1. Press the AUTO button.

In

WNORY

2. Press the SAVE (SNR) but%%.

+&

l

System saves the:dialed

telephone number.

rl

,z,

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

I I

Calling an outside party by SNR on the DN

button or the CO button

1.

Press the DN button or the CO

button.

I I

l

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

PITS type 50, KX-l7020, KX-T7030,

KX-T7050

However, the SAVE button can be assigned to

the PFl button of the above listed PITS

telephones.

4-C-l 6

Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3) and

Section 12-C-2.00 “PF (Programmable Feature)

Button Assignment” for further information.

2. Press the SAVE (SNR)button.

l

If the saved call was on the

CO

button, calling on the DN

button is ineffective: pressing

the SAVE (SNR) button is

ignored.

Calling by SNR after dialing a feature number for

selecting a CO line

1. Press the DN button.

l

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial a feature number for

selecting a CO line.

3. Press the SAVE (SNR)button.

Interrupting redialing

While hearing busy tone, ring back tone, or

reorder tone from a CO line

1. Press the SAVE (SNR) button.

(Supplement)

SAVE button is not provided on the following

PITS telephones:

5.00 Making Internal Calls

5.01 Inter Office Calling

Description

Inter Office Calling allows the

extension user to

call another extension user within the system by

dialing the directory number (three or four digits)

on a DN button.

Programming

None

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, Inter Office Calling

to the other tenant (inter-tenant calling) can be

enabled or disabled by programming.

Refer to Section 3-B-4.00 =Tenant Service” for

further information.

)

Operation

Calling an extension

mth the

handset

1.

Lift the handset.

t 3.

La

I

Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

You hear ringback tone.

When the other party answers,

start conversation.

After concluding conversation,

replace the handset.

Calling an extension hands-free

SP-PlmNe

0

1.

In

Ll

3.

I

SP-PHONE

0

4.

El

Press the SP-PHONE button.

Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

You hear ringback tone.

When the other party answers,

start conversation.

Press the SP-PHONE button

after concluding conversation.

4-C-l 7

5.02 Intercom Calling

Description

Intercom Calling allows the extension Jspr to ca.l

another extension user in the same ktercom

group by dialing the

intercom Number

(one or

two digits) on the ICt,vl button.

Refer to Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for

details about Intercom group.

Besides Intercom Calling, Intercom facility offers

the following features:

l

Intercom - Voice Calling

l

Intercom -

Busy

Station Signaling (BSS)

l

Intercom - Off-Hook Call Announcement

(OHCA)

Refer to descriptions on the following pages.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT

I

Dumb

‘Bxtension-8tetion

(l/3)",

Intercom Number

ICM Group

9-G-l .Ol 104-22.00

Conditions

Intercom Calling is available within the same

Intercom group.

SLT telephone users can neither execute nor

receive Intercom Calling.

--m .-

.- -

Dperation

1.

ICY

El

2.

1431

4.

I

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

Press the ICM button.

l

You hear dial tone 5.

l

The indicator on the ICM

button lights in green.

Dial the intercom number of the

other extension.

l

You hear ringback tone.

l

An intercom number is one or

two digit(s).

When the other party answers,

start conversation.

0

After finishing conversation,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE

button.

(Supplement)

In step 3, you can also call the other party by

pressing “*,” then dialing the directory number of

the extension, instead of dialing the intercom

number. .I_

*

4-C-18

5.03 Intercom-Voice Calling

Description Canceling the Voice Cailing mo&

Intercom-Voice Calling allows an extension user

to call another extension user in the same

Intercom group through intercom Calling with his

voice instead of ringing.

While

calling an extension, the

user can change

the voice calling mode to the ringing mode by

pressing “ *.” The ringing mode cannot be

changed to the voice caliing mode while calling.

1.

Lift the handse: CT z-zss 1-e SF’-

PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Voice Calling Mode Cancel.”

-’

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

r)

‘System-Numbering

Plan (6/9)n, 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00

Voice Calling Mode Set

Voice Calling Mode Cancel I

Conditions

If the called extension has enabled Voice Calling

Deny, Intercom-Voice Calling resujts in ringing

call even though the caller sets “Voice Calling

. Mode Set.”

For further information about Voice Calling Deny,

refer to Section 4-D-2.02 ‘Intercom Answer Voice

Calling Deny.”

Use PDN button to set or cancel this feature.

Operation

Setting the Voice Calling mode

) 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 7 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

‘voice Calling Mode Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Tone Ringing 1

Changing to the ringing mode during Intercom-

Voice Calling

1.

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

/o/

4.

*

Press the ICM button.

Dial the intercom number of the

other extension.

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

l

Start Ini%$rcom-Voice Calling t6 -

the opposite party.

Dial *.”

l

Ringing the other party starts .

l

You hear ringback tone.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Voice Alerting ]

4-c-1 9

5.04 Intercom-Busy Station Signaling

Description

When

the called extension user is busy talking on

a DN or CO button, and the ICM button is idle,

Intercom-Busy Station Signaling informs the

other extension user that he or she is called by

another extension through Intercom Calling with

the flashing ICM button.

The called extension user’s telephone must be

off -hook.

To activate this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, BSS/OHCA to “Yes.’

If the called extension user’s telephone is PITS

KX-T1232300, KX-T123235 or KX-l7130, Busy

Station Signaling turns into Intercom Off-Hook

Call Announcement (OHCA).

Refer to the next page for further information.

BSS feature is available between the extension

users in the same Intercom group.

.~,

‘System-Class of Sentice (l/2)-, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Conditions

Intercom-Busy Station Signaling is effective if the

called extension is

preset

to either of the

following functions:

-.

l

‘System-Class~~f Service*, BSSJOHCA

Y

Deny is set to y/es.

l

‘System-Class of Service-, Call

Forwardin@

Do Not Disturb is

set

to Yes.”

Operation

Calling an

extension

1.

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

3. Dial the IntercOrn number of the

c!her extension.

l

You hear ringback

tone.

l

The indicator on the ICM

button of the other station

flashes in 240 wink.

(Supplement)

If the ICM button of the other station is occupied,

the caller hears busy tone.

Answering the call

The indicator on the ICM button flashes in 240

wink and you hear call waiting tone.

Talking to the second caller by disconnecting the

fira Party

1. Press the ICM button.

l

Talktothesecond party.

l

The indicator on the ICM

button lights;

Talking to the second caller by holding the

. .

first

r-l

r=l

1. Press the HOLD button.

H

l

The first party is placed on

hold.

2.

Pre&?6 ICM button. -

l

Speak to the second party.

l

The indicator on the ICM

button lights.

3. Press the button that is flashing

in 60 wink to talk to the first party

again.

l

The second party is

disconnected. Talk to the first

Party.

2. Press the ICM button.

4-C-20

5.05 Intercom Off-Hook Call

Announcement (OHCA)

Description

When the called extension is busy talking on a

DN or CO button, and the ICM button is idle,

OHCA allows the calling extension user to inform

the called party that another call is waiting,

through the built-in speaker of the called party’s

PITS telephone.

OHCA works under the following conditions:

l

The ICM buttons on both the calling

extension’s telephone and the called

extension’s telephone are idle.

l

The called extension’s telephone is PITS

KX-T1232300, KX-T123235 or KX-l7130.

l

The called extension’s handset is off the .

hook.

To activate this function, install T-SW OHCA card

(KX-T336105) in the Basic Slot 02, and OHCA

card (KX-T96136) on the PLC or HLC card.

Refer to Section 2-C-3.02 “T-SW OHCA Card

(KX-T336105)” and Section 2-C-3.03 ‘OHCA

Card (KX-T96136)’ for further information.

In the system programming, assign ‘System-

Class of Service (l/2)“, BSS/OHCA to “Yes” at

calling extension, and assign

‘Extension-Station

(l/3)“, OHCA Circuit to “Yes” at the called

extension.

Programming

.)

System Programming

Reference

-L_ L_. VT 1 Dumb

1 I

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

SSS/OHCA

‘Extension-Station (l/3)“, 9-G-l .Ol 1 o-c-22.00

OHCA Circuit

Conditions

OHCA does not work if the called extension is

under one of the following conditions:

l

The ICM button is not idle.

l

Talking in the speaker phone mode.

l

“System-Class of Service”, BSSOHCA

Deny is set to “‘Yes.”

l

“System-Class of Service”, Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is set to “Yes.”

Operation

Executing OHCA

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Press the ICM button.

3. Dial the intercom number of the

extension. .

l

When the extension is off-

hook, you hear confirmation

tone 3.

q

4. Talk to the other party.

L A-

4-C-21

6.00 Automatic Callback

6.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk

Description

if no idle

CO

line is

available when dialing a

feature number

for selecting a CO line and the

telephone number of

an

outside party, the caller

hears special busy tone.

On-hook while hearing the special busy tone

calls back the caller as soon as a CO line

becomes idle: call-back ringing. Off-hook or

pressing the SP-PHONE button catches the CO

line automatically, and sends the last dialed

telephone number to the CO line.

Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing

cancels this function.

Also no answer in four ringings (within 10

seconds) after the start of callback ringing

cancels this function.

To activate “Automatic Callback-Trunk,” assign

“Extension-Station”, Automatic Callback-Trunk to

“Yes.”

This setting is assignable on an extension basis.

Programming

System Programming

1

Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

Operation

Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk (1)

1.

122

EI

2.

4ss

TO*

*

(22

E!tl

3.

4SS

72*

*

“Extension-Station (l/3)“,

Automatic &&a&Trunk

(Supplement)

Conditions

Multiple.exiensions are able to set this function to

one or more CO lines at the same time.

A maximum of 64 Automatic Callback-Trunk can

be active in the system.

If 64 extensions already set this function to one

or more CO lines, another caller’s

attempt to

execute this setting is rejected by normal busy

tone, not by special busy tone.

Even if an extension user sets Call Forwarding-

No Answer or Do Not Disturb, he or she can set

Automatic Callback-Trunk: callback ringing is

effective to the extension.

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

Dial the feature number for

selecting a CO line.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

l

You hear busy tone 3.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows: . .

1 Trunk Queuing 1

The following four feature numbers are available

for selecting a CO line:

l

AF?S/Local CO tine Access

l

Trunk Group 01-08 Access

l

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

l

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

Automatic Callback-Trunk cannot be set by the

extension which has a consultation hold call.

4-C-22

Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk (2)

El

1.

121

E!ll

2.

.99

799

.-.

‘) *

BP-PHONE

r-l

3.

II

Press the CO button (PCO,

SCO* or GCO) which is lit in

red without lifting the handset.

l

The indicator on the pressed

CO button lights in green.

You hear dial tone 1.

l

You are in hands-free mode.

Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

l

You hear busy tone 3.

Press the SP-PHONE button.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 TrunkQueuing 1

* In non-privacy system, pressing the SC0

button does not set Automatic Callback-Trunk

but establishes a three-party conversation.

Refer to Section 4-G-l .OO “Programmable

Privacy” for further information.

Answering callback ringing

As soon as the specified CO line or a CO line in

the specified trunk group becomes idle, callback

ringing starts.

1.

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

I- I

l

The last dialed number is sent

to the line automatically and

calling the other party starts.

4-C-23

6.02 Automatic Callback-Station

Description Operation

If busy tone is

heard when calling an extension

user, dialing “6”

and hanging up causes

Automatic Callback to the caller as soon as the

called party concludes conversation:

I

l

You hear dial tone 1.

l

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

When callback ringing for the caller starts,

answering by off-hook or pressing the SP-

PHONE button offers calling the other party

automatically.

Off-hook prior to the start of till-back ringing

cancels this function.

Also no answer during four ringings after the start

of call-back ringing cancels this function.

Programming

None

Conditions

Up to four extensions are able to assign this

function to one extension at the same time.

. The fifth extension attempting to set this function

is rejected by reorder tone.

If you do not dial “6” within 10 seconds after

hearing busy tone, you hear reorder tone and

cannot execute this feature.

Even if an extension user sets Call Forwarding-

No Answer or Do Not Disturb, Automatic

Callback-Station is effective to that extension.

Automatic Callback-Station cannot be set by tRe,.,

extension which has a call on consultation hold.

1. Lift

the

handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

You hear busy tone 1 or 2.

m

3. Dial “6.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and reorder tone.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Callback Ext xxxx 1

Direct&y number

4. Replace the handset.

. .

Answering callback ringing

As soon as the other extension user concludes

the conversation, callback ringing starts.

1, Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear ringback tone.

Calling the other extension

starts.

4-C-24

7.00 Executive Busy Override

Description

Executive Busy Override allows the etiensio-

user to intrude on a busy line. and then a 3-&zfty

conversation is established. This feature is

accessed by dialing “1” while hearing busy tone.

Operation

To utilize this feature, assign ‘System-Class 3f

Service”, Executive Busy Override to ‘Yes,” =t

overriding extension.

In entering into a three-party conversation, aJ the

three parties

hear confirmation tone.

It is programmable to send this tone

or

not &

‘System-Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Srg-

in.

Programming

System

Programming

Reference

VT t DC&I

-- .~‘“‘”

“System-Class of Service (l/2)‘,

9-D-4.01 10-G: 90

Conditions

Busy status means that all PDN buttons on he

called extension are in use.

In this status, busy tone sounds.

Executive Busy Override does not function when

- 1

1 the other patty is any one of the following status;

l

Three-party conversation __

l

OHCA conversation -:

l

ICM conversation

l

Private CO conversation

Executive Busy Override does not function ?

either of two parties in conversation has set

the

followings.

1.

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the

PDN

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

I AL I

l

You hear busy tone 1 or 2.

•l

3. Dial ‘1.”

1

l

After you hear confirmation

tone 3, start a three-patty

conversation.

l

Executive Busy Override Deny

(Refer to Section 4-D-5.00.)

l

Data tine Security

(Refer to Section 4-I-6.00.)

4-C-25

8.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Overt ide

Description

Do Not Disturb Override allows an extension to

call another extension which has set Do Not

Disturb.

Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides

calling the extension.

Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 ‘Do Not Disturb

(DND)” for further information about DND feature.

To activate this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, Do Not Disturb Override to “Yes.”

Programming

System !hgramming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

‘System-Class

of

Service

(l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01 1067.00

Do Not Distuti Override I I I

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

if the other extension sets DND

(Do Not Disturb), you hear

DND tone.

m

3. Dial ‘1 .II

l

You hear ringback tone.

l

Calling the other party starts.

Conditions

When dialing ‘1; if the other extension is busy,

the caller hears busy tone. In this case, it is

possible to assign Automatic Callback-Station,

etc.,.

For Automatic Callback-Station, refer to Section

4-C-6.02 UAutomatic Callback-Station.”

::a..

‘

If “System-Class of Service,” Do Not Disturb

Override is set to ‘No,” the caller hears reorder

tone after dialing ‘1” and cannot call the other

party.

4-C-26

9.00 Walking COS (Class Of

Service)

Description

Allows an ex:er,slo:: user 10

call

an outside party

from another extension preset to a lower COS

(Class of Servvlce) by using a higher COS of his

or her own extension temporarily.

This

is generally

used for making .toll calls from a

toll

restricted extension.

After conclusion of one call to an outside party,

Class of Setvce of the employed station returns

to the original class automatically.

Each tenant has a four digit Walking COS

Password programmed in system program.

The password allows a user to set Walking COS.

‘System-Operation (3/3)“,

Walking COS Password

“System-Tenant”,

Walking COS Password

(Tenant 2)

“System-Numbering Plan (719)‘)

Walking COS Set

Walking COS Cancel

Programming

I

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

Conditions

g-D-1.03

w-2.00

~ 9-D-6.07

1 O-C-S.00

10-GS.W

1fl-G10.00

Use the PDN button to set and cancel Walking

cos. x?z -**.?I

Operation

Setting Walking COS

From a lower COS telephone,

1.

Lift the handset or press the SP-

l

COS returns to the original

PHONE button. grade.

3. Dial the four-digit Walking COS

Password.

123

q

4. Dial the extension number of

42s

12, your own station.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

l

If your PITS has a displtiy, it

shows:

t Set COS of Exxxx 1

3L

Directory number

I

5. Call an outside party by using a

higher COS of your own station.

Canceling Walking COS

It is possible to cancel Walking COS without

making any call to an outside party as follows:

1. Lift the handset ot,press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

Waking COS Cancel.”

l

You he.& confirmation tone 2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

I Restored COS I

2. Dial the feature

number for

‘Walking COS Set.”

4-C-27

10.00 Operator Call

Description

Allow extension users to call the operator by

dialing the feature number for “Operator Call

cGen&al)” or “Operator

Call (Specific).”

Operation

1.

Up to two operators are assignable for the whole

system. If Tenant Service is available, two

operators are assignable for each tenant, that

makes four operators available for the whole

system.

If two operators are assigned in the system, or in

the

tenant (if tenant Service is employed),

extension users can specify the operator (in the

same tenant) by dialing the feature number for

“Operator Call (Specific).”

Programming

System Programming Reference

r VT 1 Dumb

I

‘System-Numbering Plan (2/g)‘, 94-6.02

1O-G10.00

Operator Call (Specific)

Operator Call (General)

Conditions

When calling an operator by dialing the feature

number for “Operator Call (General),” the

operator is selected according to the type of the

operators’ stations as shown below:

Type of Station

Operator

1 Operator 2

-TzF-

ATT

EXT

Al-T -

EXT -

- bperator

8elected

s: T”

-1 onfy

operalorf only

operator1 on&

Operator 1 only

2.

I22

4‘.

L!fl

7.2

*

(Supplement)

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE

button.

Calling an operator without

specifying

1)

Dial

the feature number for

“Operator Call (General).”

Calling an operator by specifying

1) Dial the feature number for

Qperator

Call (Specific).”

2) Dial ‘1 I to specify operator 1.

Dial ‘2’ to specify operator 2.

.

If your PITS has a display, the following

message appears on the display: :::-

When the called operator is at an Attendant

Console:

1 AlTConsole 1

.,I

When the called operator is at an extension:

&ample>

1 1000:Mary J

T-z extension name

directory number

When no operators are assigned, a user hears

reorder tone during executing Operator Call.

For the assignment of operators, refer to Section

3-B-5.00 “Operator.”

4-C-28

D.

Receiving Features

1 .OO Line Selection-Answering

Description Description

Line Selection-Answering feature

allows a

PITS

telephone user to answer an incoming call on it

by simply lifting the handset or pressing the SP-

PHONE button.

Air:~maxally connects a

PITS telephone user to

an incoming call ringing at PITS telephone by

simply

lifting

the handset.

Line access buttons that can be selected by this

feature include PDN, SDN, ICM, PCO, SC0 and

GCO buttons.

One of the following three Line Selection-

Answering features can be assigned to a PITS

telephone individually.

l

Ringing Line Preference - Answering

l

Prime tine Preference - Answering

l

No Line Preference - Answering

Ringing Line Preference-Answering is assigned

to all PITS telephones by default.

This assignment can be changed on a PITS

telephone basis in PITS station programming

mode.

To prevent a PITS telephone from automatically *

answering an incoming call by simply going off-

hook, assign No Line Preference-Answering

feature to the PITS telephone.

If No Line Preference-Answering is assigned,

press the appropriate button on a PITS telephone

to answer a call.

tine Selection-Answering feature newly assigned

on a PITS overrides the pre-assigned tine

Selection-Answering feature.

1 .Ol Ringing Line

Preference-Answering

Programming

I

PITS Station Programming I Reference

I

Automatic Answering

Selection 1 12-c-5.00 1

Conditions

It two or more line on a PITS are ringing

simultaneously, a PITS telephone user is

connectedto

the first line to start ringing.

If a PITS telephone user wishes to answer a line

other than the first rfnging line, the desired line

access button must be pressed prior to going off-

hook (Refer to Section 4-D-l .04 “Direct

Answering (Pm-selection).?

This feature functions only for incoming calls

ringing at a PITS telephone. ..

Consequently, if an incoming call arrives at a line

access button on which delayed ringing is

assigned, that is, no rlnging occurs while the

indicator flashes in 240 wink, in this case

extension user must press the appropriate line

access button to answer the incoming call.

Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing

Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further

information about delayed ringing.

Operation

An incoming call is ringing at your telephone.

Also the indicator light on the call-receiving button

flashes in 240 wink, showing the arrfval of the call.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You can automatically answer

the incoming call ringing, and

the indicator on the button

lights in green.

l

Talk to the caller.

4-D-l

1.02 Prime Line Preference-Answering

Description Operation

Automatically connects a

PITS

Wmhore :s

answer an incoming call assigned as “P%e Line

(Answering)” on a

PITS

telephone.

Line access buttons that

can be selected by this

feature include

PDN, SDN, ICM, PCO, SC0

and

GCO buttons.

A call arrives at the assigned prime line and your

telephone is ringing. The indicator on the line

access button assigned as Prime line flashes in

240 wink.

Even if two or more lines on

a PITS

are ringing

simultaneously, PITS telephone is automatically

connected to an incoming call on a line assigned

as Prime Line-Answering by simply lifting the

handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

Programming

I

PITS

Station Programming I

Reference I

I

Automatic Answering Selection I

12-GWO I

Conditions

. When a call or calls are coming on a line or lines

other than the prime line, lifting the handset or

pressing the SP-PHONE button is considered as

a calling operation. If you wish to answer the call

at the time, press the desired line access button.

Refer to Section 4-C-i .Ol ‘Prime tine

Preference-calling” for related information.

It is possible to answer desired incoming call by

pressing the appropriate DN or CO button

directly

without lifting the handset or pressing the

SP-PHONE button (Direct Answering).

Refer to Sectft~&D-1.04 “Direct Ar%wexing

(Pre-selection)” for further information.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

I

l

The indicator on the call-

receiving button lights in green.

l

Talk to the caller.

k

4-D-2

1.03 No Line Preference-Answering 1.04 Direct Answering (Pre-selection)

Description Description

if this feature is assigned to a PITS telephone,

the extension user cannot answer an incoming

call by simply lifting the handset or pressing the

SP-PHONE button.

To answer an incoming call, the user must pr&s

the appropriate line access button.

Allows the user to answer an ircoming cz: zJ

simply pressing the appropriate DN butte- .PDp;

SDN), CO button (PCO, SCO, GCO) or rCM

button on which a call is coming without ilfting :ne

handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

Direct Answering provides hands-free

conversation mode automatically.

Programming

I

PITS Station Programming I Reference

I

Automatic Answering Selection I 12-Gs.00 I

Conditions

In case your PITS teiephone is KX-T30820

(only

three DN buttons are provided) and all DN

buttons are assigned as PDN

buttons:

If all three PDN buttons are occupied by

incoming calls, no tone is heard when you lift

the handset or press the SP-PHONE buttons.

If two PDN buttons are occupied by the

incoming calls and the other one is idle, PITS

telephone is connected to the idle PDN

automatically and dial tone is heard, when

you lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

button since going off-hook is regarded as

calling operation.

Operation

3

A call arrives and your telephone is ringing. The

indicator:on the button which the call is reaching

flashes in 240 wink.

1. Lift the handset

or

press the SP-

PHONE button, then press the

button on which the call is

coming.

Programming

None

Conditions

None

Operation

A call arrives and the indicator on the DN, the CO

or the ICM

button flashes in 240 wink.

1. Press the button that is flashing

in 240 wink.

l

The pressed button lights

in

green and hands-free

conversation is established

automatically. ,.

l

The indicator on the call-

receiving button lights in green.

l

Talk to the caller.

4-D-3

2.00 Intercom Answer

2.01 Intercom Hands-Free

Answerback

Description

Hands-Free Answerback enables the extension

user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset

when he receives an intercom call.

When Intercom Hands-Free Answerback mode is

established, a calling extension user hears

confirmation tone and a called extension hears a

beep tone.

This feature applies to Intercom calling only.

Programming

None

Conditions

Type 50 and KX-l7050 PITS telephones cannot

use this function.

Operation

Setting Hands-Free Answerback

Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SP-

PHONE is off.

*vTO*w

cl

1. Press the AUTO ANS button.

[I

l

The indicator on the AUTO

ANS button lights.

Canceling Hands-Free Answerback

Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SP-

PHONE is off.

1. Press the AUTO ANS button.

l

The indicator liiht on the

AUTO ANS button goes out.

4-D-4

2.02 Intercom Answer Voice Calling

Deny

Description

Allows extension Users to deny the intercom

Voice Calling from other extension users.

When an extension sets this function, another

extension’s attempt to execute Voice Calling is

ignored and turned into normal ringing alert

automatically.

For further information about Voice Calling, refer

to Section 4-C-5.03 ‘Intercom-Voice Calling.”

To deny Intercom Voice Calling, dial the feature

number for “Voice Calling Deny Set.”

To allow Intercom Voice Calling, dial the feature

number for “Voice Calling Deny Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

-System-Numbering Plan (s/s)“, 9-D-6.06 IO-C-10.00

Voice Calling Deny Set

Voice Calling Deny Cancel

Conditions

This setting must be executed on the PDN

button.

Operation

To deny Intercom Answer Voice Calling

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

El

s,

3.

Dial the feature number for

“Voice Calling Deny Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

pKi%ipq

Replace the handset or press the

SPYPHONE button.

To allow Intercom Answer Voice Calling

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button. ”

2. Dial the feature’number for

Voice Calling Deny Cancel.”

.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-5

2.03 Intercom Answer

BSS/OHCA

Deny

Description Operation

To deny Intercom Answer BSS/OHCA Allows an extension user to deny “Intercom-Busy

Station Signaling (BSS)” and “Intercom Off-Hook

Call Announcement (OHCA)” from other

extension users. If an user sets this function,

another’s attempt to execute BSSIOHCA is

rejected with busy tone.

For further information about BSS/OHCA

function, refer to Section 4-C-5.04 “Intercom-

Busy Station Signaling (BSS)” and Section 4-C-

5.05 “Intercom-Off-Hook Call Announcement

(OHCA).”

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “BSS/

OHCA Deny Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Assigning and canceling this function are

executed by dialing the feature number for

‘BSSIOHCA Deny Set” and ‘BSS/OHCA Deny

Cancel.”

To perform this function with the feature number

for “BSS/OHCA Deny Set,” assjgn “System-Class

of Service”, BSS/OHCA Deny to yes” on an

extension user basis.

Programming

System Prqamming Reference

VT Dumb

j “System-Class of Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01

10-C-7.00

BSSIOHCA Deny

i “System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, &O-6.05 10-C-10.00

BSS/OHCA Deny Set

BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button. I.‘..

To allow Intercom Answer BSSlOHCA

Conditions .: . I

Use the PDN button to assign and cancel this

function.

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button. ,

Dial the feature number for

“BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If

your

PITS

has

a display, it’

shows:

Replace the handset or press the ._

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-6

3.00 Call Pickup

3.01 Dial Call Pickup

Description

Dial Call Pickup allows an extension user 13

answer !he call that is ringing at another

telephone in the same call pickup group.

To answer a call at nearby extension, simpy lift

the handset and dial the feature number fcl- “Dial

Call Pickup.”

An extension user can be assigned to only one

call pickup group.

Up to 32 call pickup groups are assignable in the

-I whole system.

For further information about call pickup gnup,

refer to Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup Grola.’

Programming

System Programming Referen=

VT 1 Zumb

I

. “System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-D-6.-33

l@--1-iO.00

Dial Call Pickup I I

Conditions

It is possible to execute this function after Tolding

the current call.

An extension user who has Do Not Distuti

assigned can answer a call that is ringing zt other

extensions.

This feature is not available to &ver t&

following calls:

cl > A call ringing at an extension outside :f the

same call pickup group

c2>

A call ringing at an extension on whit- Dial

Call Pickup Deny is set

(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 “Call Piti

Deny” for further information.)

c3>

A call ringing on PC0 button

c4>

A call ringing on ICM button

~5

A call arriving at an extension but nor inging

(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Enging

Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for furer

information.)

If extension users attempt to pick up the above

mentioned calls, reorder tone sounds after dialing

the feature number for “Dial Call Pickup” and the

following message appears on the display, if

provided:

No Incoming Call

Operation

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial

Call Pickup.”

l

After you hear confirmation

tone 3, you can answer the call

arriving at another telephone in

the same call pickup group.

l

Start conversation.

. .

4-D-7

3.02 Directed Call Pickup

Description Operation

Directed Call Pickup allows any extension user to

answer the call ringing at an extension in any call

pickup

group by dialing the feature number for

“Directed Call Pickup,’ and then the directory

number of the ringing extension.

Picking up a call ringing at an extension in the

different call pickup group

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

Programming

System

Programming

Reference

VT

I

Dumb

‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)”

Directed Call Pickup

Conditions

It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup

after holding the current call.

An extension user who has Do Not Disturb

assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other

extensions.

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls:

cl> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial

Call Pickup Deny is set

(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 %afl Pickup

Deny” for further information.)

& A call ringing on PC0 button

<3> A call ringing on ICM button

<4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing

+ L (Refer to Section 3-D-3.O~Flexipie Ringing

Assignment-Delayed Ringing’ for further

information.)

For the above calls, reorder tone sounds after

dialing the feature number for “Directed Call

Pickup” and the following message appears on

the display, if provided:

2. Dial the feature number for

“Directed Call Pickup.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

ringing extension.

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

l

Talk to the caller.

No Incoming Call

4-D-8

3.03 Call Pickup Deny

Description

Call Pickup Deny allows an extension user to

prohibit the other extension users from picking up

calls ringing at his or her extension by the call

pickup feature (whether Dial Call Pickup or

Directed Call Pickup).

Operation

To assign or cancel this function; dial the feature

number for “Dial Call Pickup Deny Set” or “Dial

Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”

Programming

Conditions

Use the PDN button to assign and cancel Call

Pickup Deny.

Even if an extension user has Call Pickup Deny

assignment, he or she can execute Dial Call

Pickup or Directed

Call

Pickup for calls ringing at

other extensions.

z-*

Assigning Call Pickup Deny

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial

Call Pickup Deny Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3. Replace the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Call Pickup Deny

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial

Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

=%f your PITS has a dispfay, it

shows:

1 C. Pikuo Allow 1

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-9

4.00 Trunk Answer From Any

Station (TAFAS)-Day

Service

Description

Incoming CO calls programmed for TAFAS will

ring the external pager and any extension user in

the system can answer the calls by dialing the

feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call

is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2

(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).

To activate this feature. assign “Group-Trunk

Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or

TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO tine” Trunk Group to ‘1

to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming

Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).

To utiiize the external pager, assign ‘System-

Operation”, External Paging

1, 2”

to ‘Yes.’

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external

pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external

pager 2.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The

difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode

and UNA is available in night mode.

For further information about UNA, refer to

Section 4-l-l .Ol ‘Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

System Programming Reference - .

VT Dumb

‘System-Operation

(l/3)‘. .9-D-1.01 lO-c-4xM

External

Paging

1,2

‘System-Numbeting Plan (3/g)“, W-8.03 10-C-10.00

Night Answer 1

Night Answer 2

%roup-Trunk-Group (l/2)“, 9-E-1.01 10-G14.00

Incoming Mode (Day)

Trunk-CO tine”, SF-l.00

10678.00

Trunk Group

Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 1 O-C-1 9.00

External Pager-Tenan?

Conditions

If tenant service is employed :

The affiliation of each external pager is

determined by the system programming in

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-

Tenant.

Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call

ringing at an external pager in the different

tenant.

Operation

Answering incoming CO calls programmed for

TAFAS

An incoming CO call is ringing at an

external pager.

.l . Lift the handset or press the SP- I

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. If a call is ringing at external

pager 1: Dial the feature number

for “Night Answer 1 .*

If a call is ringing at external

pager 2: Dial the feature number

for “Night Answer 2.”

“Y 7 I

3. Talk to the caller.

4-D-l 0

5.00 Executive Busy Override

Deny

Description

Assigning and canceling Busy Override Deny are

a,dallable to each extension.

If an extension sets this function, another

extension’s attempt to perform Executive Busy

Override on the extension is rejected with busy

tone.

Refer to Section 4-C-7.00 “Executive Busy

Override” for further information.

To set or cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Busy Override Deny Set” or “Busy

Override Deny Cancel.”

System programming is required to assign this

feature.

Assign “System-Class of Service”, Executive

Busy Override Deny to ‘Yes.”

Programming

System Programming Refemlce

vi

Dumb

“System-Class of

Senrice

(la)“, W-4.01 10-C-7.00

Executive Busy Override

Deny

“System-Numbering Plan (5B)“. W-6.05 10440.00

Busy Override Deny Set

Busy Override Deny Cancel

conditions

To assign and cancel Executive Busy Override

Deny, use the PDN button.

-

Operation

Assigning

Executive Busy Override Deny

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Busy

Override Deny Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Busy Ovrde Deny 1

rl

x

- .

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Ekutive Busy Override Deny

. .

1. Lii the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

(21

q

2. Dial the feature number for ‘Busy

.,‘

1.. Ch@cte Deny Cancel.” _,

.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2andthendialtonel or3or4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

t Busv Ovrde Albw 1

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-1 I

6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Description

Do Not Disturb allows an extension user to

appear busy to all incoming calls (intercom,

extension and

outside calls).

To utilize this

feature,

assign “System-Class of

Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes”

beforehand by system programming.

This feature can be assigned and canceled either

by dialing the feature number or using the

FWDIDND button.

Programming

Fkterence

System Programming v-r Dumb

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“.

SW.01 lW-7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (S/9)‘. 9-D-6.05

10-C-10.00

Do Not Disturb Set . .

Call

Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

Conditions

(1)

(2)

(3)

IRNA

- Automatically

If a catl via DWUDID is directed

to an

extension in the DND mode, it will be

automatically redirected to another extension

(including VPS extension) or an Attendant

Console assigned as the IRNA destination.

Refer to Section 3-F-5.00 “fntercept Routrng

- No Answer (IRNA) for further information.

Making Calls

.-t&2

An extension in the DND mode can still be

used to make calls

and access

any other

features available to

that

extension.

Answering Calts

An extension in the DND mode is available:

l

To answer a call if its indiiion of arrival is

showi, on his or her extension.

Refer to (Supplement 2) on page 4-D-14 for

further information.

l

To answer a call ringing at another

extension by “Call Pickup” feature.

Refer to Section 4-D-3.00 “Call Pickup” for

further information.

(4)

FWD/DND

Setting DND feature cancels any Call

Fowarding feature pre-assigned on the

extension and vice versa.

Refer to Section 4-F-2.00 “Call Forwarding

(FWD)” for further information.

(5)

BSS/OHCA

DND is effective for BSSIOHCA.

Refer to Section 4-C-5.04 and 4-C-5.05 for

further information.

(6)

DND Override

“Do Not Disturb Overrfde” allows extension

users to override ‘Do Not Disturb” feature

assigned on the called extension user.

Refer to Section 4-C-8.00 ‘Do Not Disturb

Override” for further information.

Operation

Assigning Do Not Disturb (1) I

1. Lift

the handset or press

the

SP-PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for Do

Not Disturb Set yy*l” (default).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

~--+*e-# your PITS

has a

display, it -

shows:

1 Do Not Disturb 1

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

I J

l

The FWD/DND indicator lights.

4-D-12

(30393)

Assigning Do Not Disturb (2)

1. Lift the handse: or press ‘79 SP-

PHONE button

FWWDND

rl

2.

Press the

FWD/DND button.’

[1 -

1-1 3. Dial “1.” - ‘.

l

You

hear

confirmation tone

1 or

2 and then dial tone

1

or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The FWD/DND-indicator lights.

Canceling Do Not Disturb (1)

I. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

The FWDIDND indicator goes

Out.

2. Dial the feature number for Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel Y#O” (default).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone

1

or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The FWD/DND indicator

Canceling Do Not Disturb (2)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

The indicator light on the

FWDIDND button goes out.

2. Press the FWDaND button.

OW

•l

3. Dial “0.”

0

9 You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 FWD/DND Cancel f

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

I I l

The FWD/DND indicator

remains off.

(Supplement)

Type 50 and the KX-T7050 PITS telephones are

not provided with the FWD/DND button.

To do

step 2 using them, assign a PF button to be

FWDIDND button in “Extension-Station”, PF Key

Type or PITS station program mode.

For further information atkut Pll% station

program mode. refer to Section 12-C-2.00 “PF

Button Assignment.” - .? ;.

remains off.

4-D-13

(30393)

(Su;olement 2:

The :a3le bebw sncws w?o!her an extension which has DND assigned

rirgs or not and how its P3N indicator Ights, when it receives a call.

Alsc shows whethe: the o:her extensions which has

the

extension’s

PDt4 assigned rings cr not and how their SON

indicators light, when

the

extension having DND receives a call

Type

of call arriving at 1 Other extensions Extension which Extension

which has

setting extension

has SDN assigned has DND assigned SDN assigned (SDN)

or not PW

Extension call No

indicator off

Noring *1

Attendant Console call

Yes

No

Green 240 wink

No ring

Indicator off

No ring *l

Red 240 wink

Ring

DIL

(1 :N) call to

PDN

Yes

No

Green 240 wink

No ring

Green 240 wink

Red 240 wink

Ring

Yes No ring Lights on in red

No ring

DIL (1:l) call to

PDN No

Yes

Green 240 wink

Ring

Green 240 wink

Norillg

. .

Red 240 wink

DID call

DISA call

No

Yes

No

Yes

1 lndiiator off

Noring

--+rr.-

lndiior off

No ring

lndlcator off

Noring

Indicator off

No ring

DIL (1

:N) call to Group

CO/Single CO

DIL

(1 :l) Call to Single

co

Other calls

Red

240

wink

No ring

Green 240 wink

Ring

Indicator off

No ring -1

-1

DND tone is sent to the caller.

4-D-l

4

7.00 Call Waiting

Description

Call waiting tone to a busy extension indicates

that another call (extension or CO line) is waiting.

To assign or cancel this function, dial

the feature

number for “Call Waiting Set” or “Call Waiting

Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming

Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I I

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“,

Call Waiting Set

Call Waiting Cancel

j 9-D-6.05 ~CGlO.00~

Conditions

Use the PDN

button to assign and cancel

Call

Waiting.

. While Call Waiting is active, the waiting

tone and

the

display, if provided, are executed

by the

following timing :

Call waiting tone:

l-l

<

15.0 sets )

Call waiting tone can k ass;g;es :c ?:/c :joes bb

specifying the timing according ;c :r.? vw of

arriving

Call.% Calls

from outside parr:es cr cdl&

from extensions, as illustrated oeiow :

Tone 1 - l-l ,,

CL YLiLii

+- 15.0 sets >

Tone 2

for

calls from outside parties:

L

for calls from extensions:

For selecting tone 1 or tone 2, refer to Section

12-C-6.00 “Call Waiting Tone Selection.”

4-D-l 5

Operation

Setting Call Waiting

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial

the

feature ‘number for “Call

Waiting Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3.

3. Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Waiting

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “call

waiting Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3.

Replace the handset.

A.7.srver-c Call LVairing

A cdl f-z- an extension or an outside party arrives

while l2.q a zxversation.

l

The mdiitor

on

the DN or the CO button

f!asnes irr 240 wink.

. You Qear call waiting tone.

Talking

to the

new

caller by concluding the current

call

D

1.

Press the flashing DN or CO

button.

l

The current call is diinnected.

l

Talk to the new caller on the

pressed DN or CO button.

Talking to the new

caller

by holding the

current call

HOLO

0

cl

q

1. Press the HOLD button to hold

the current party.

_.

l

You hear no tbne.

2.

Press the DN or CO button flashing

in 240 wink

l

Talk to the new ‘caller.

l

To condude the new call and talk

to the held party again, press the

DN or CO button flashing in 60

wink.

EJ. L. .:-

4-D-l 6

8.00 Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD)-Log Out

Description

UCD group members may leave the group

temporarily by dialing the feature number for

“UCD Log Out” or using the programmable UCD

Log In button to prevent UCD calls being sent to

their extensions.

Refer to Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call

Distribution (UCD)-without OGM” and Section

3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with

OGM.”

Programming

System Ptcgrammirg

“System-Numbering Plan p/9)“,

UCD Leg In

UCD Log Cut

“Extension-Station (2/3)“,

DN Key Type,

“Extension-Station (3n)“,

DSS Key Type

Conditicm

To set or cancel UCD Log Out, use the PDN

button.

RE

VT

9-o-6.09

9-G-l .oz

9-G-l .03

When an extension of the UCD group set for Log

Out goes off-hook, dial tone 4 below can be

J heard.

(sewnd) 0 1 - 2 3 4 p-;‘

Operation

Setting UCD Log Out

(1)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone

1

or 3 or

4.

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD

Log Out.”

l

You hear confmation tone 1 or

2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

t UCD Losoa 1

3.

%place the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Setting UCD Log Out (2)

u

iii

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2.

Press the UCD Log In button.

l

You hear conknation tone 1 or

2.

The indicator

on the UCD Log

In button lights in red.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3.

Rep&e the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

.:.

4-D-l 7

Canceling UCD Log Out (1)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You

hear

dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD

Log In.”

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling UCD Log Out (2)

I_ Ly f+ “are- ;r ;iess ::e SP-

P%NE b&

l You hear

dk x-32 * of 3 or 4.

-1 2. Press the UCD Lq In button.

111 .

.

You hear wcfirmation tone 1 or

2.

The indicator iight on the UCD

Loglnbuttongoesout.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows: ,

1 UCD Login /

3.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-18

E. Holding Features

1.00 Hold

Description

Allows an extension user to hold the current call

and either call or answer another extension or

outside party.

To place

a

call on hold, press the

HOLD

button.

To retrieve a held call, simply press the flashing

line

access button on which a call is held.

A call placed on hold can be retrieved at the

extension that put

the

call on hold or at

an

extension that shares the held line.

A PITS telephone user can place as many calls

on hold as it has line access button (PCO, GCO,

SCO, PDN,

SDN).

Programming

None

Conditions

. The extension users can not hold the following

calls.

l

A call on ICM button

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

l

Paging Announcement through built-in

speaker of PITS

A call held on PC0 button can not be retrieved

from the other extensions.

If a held calf has not been an-d more than a

preassigned time, a warning tone may sound at

extension which placed a call on hold.

Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”

for further information.

If a held call is not answered more than 30

minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO ‘Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation

Placing a Call on Hold

In conversation on the DN, SCO, GCO or PC0

button

1. Press

the

HOLD

button.

.

If

the

call is on the DN or SC0

or

GCO button, the indicator on

the button flashes in green 60

wink. If the call is on the PC0

button, the indicator on the

button flashes in green 120

wink. You hear confirmation

tone 2 and then no tone.

The other party is placed on

Hold.

You can hang up without

loosing a held call.

Retrieving a Held Call

From the holding extension

1. Press the green button that is

flashing in 60 wink or 120 wink.

. .

l

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

l

Talk to the other party again.

From another extension that shares the held line

I 1. Press the red button that is

+a2

t t

slowly flashirS$ in 6o‘wink

I \ .

.

The indicator on the pressed

button lights in green.

Start conversation with the

retrieved party.

(Supplement)

Any extension user can retrieve the call held at

another extension by dialing the feature number

for “Hold Extension Retrieve.”

For further information, refer to Section 4-E-4.00

“Call Hold Retrieve-Station.”

4-E-l

2.00 Exclusive Hold

Description

Allows an extension user to place a call on hold

exclusively and either make or answer another

extension or outside @I.

A call held by “Exclusive Hold” can not be

retrieved from any other extension.

To place a call on exclusive hold, press the

HOLD button twice.

To retrieve a call placed on exclusive hold, simply

press the flashing line access button (PCO,

GCO, SCO, PDN, SDN) on which a call is held.

A call on exclusive hold can be retrieved only at

the extension that put a call on exclusive hold.

A PITS telephone user can place as many calls

on exclusive hold as it has line access buttons.

Programming

None

Conditions

The extension users can not place the following

calls on exclusive hold.

l

A call on ICM button

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

l

Paging Announcement through built-in

speaker of PITS

A call held on PC0

button

is always treated as

exclusive hold and therefore it can not be

retrieved from any other exter&&-

If a held call has not been answered within the

pre-assigned time, a warning tone may sound at

extension which placed a call on hold.

Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 ‘Held Call Reminder”

for further information.

If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes, it

will be disconnected automatically.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held patty if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation

Placing a Call on Exclusive Hold

During a conversation with the other party

1. Press the HOLD button.

l

The indicator on the button in

use flashes in green 60 wink.

. You hear confirmation tone 2

and then no tone.

I

2. Press the HOLD button again.

l

The flashing indicator changes

to green 120 wink.

l

The other party is held

exclusively.

Retrieving a Call on Exclusive Hold

1. Press the green button that is

flashing in 120 wink.

l

The indiitor on the pressed

button lights in green.

l

The held party is retrieved.

l

Talk to the other party again.

(Supplement)

To change ‘Exclusive Hold’ to ‘Hold, press the

HOLD button again.

Exclusive

Hold and Hold

alternate with each pressing of the HOLD button.

:: ?

4-E-2

3.00 Consultation Hold

Description

Allows extension users to place a call on hold

temporarily on purpose to transfer a call or make

a conference call.

Other

extension

users

cannot retrieve the calls

‘on Consultation

Hold.

‘t

Consultation Hold is performed by pressing the

TRANSFER

button or the CONF button. If the

TRANSFER button is pressed, a call is held until

the user dials the telephone number to transfer

the call. If the CONF button is pressed, a call is

held until the user dials the telephone number of

the conference member and presses the CONF

button again.

Programming

None

Conditions

The extension users can not place the following

. calls on consultation hold.

l

A call on ICM button

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

l

Paging Announcement through built-in

speaker of PITS

Consultation Hold Recall tone sound immediately

if the extension user replaces the handset while

having a call on consultation hold.

If an extension user mzl@& a call b,’ pressing the

FLASH button while having a call on consultation

hold, Consultation Hold Recall tone does not

sound.

Consultation Hoki Recall tone sounds in the

same way as Held Call Reminder.

If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes, it

will be disconnected automatically.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation

Placing a call on Consultation Hold on one DN

button

TRANSFER

D

1.

Press the TRANSFER or CONF

button.

l

The DN button in use is still lit

or

CONF

q

in

green, you hear confirmation

tone 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or

= 4.

l

The call is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

You can make another call on

the same DN button.

(Supplement)

In step 1, if the CO button is used instead of the

DN button, the CO button starts flashing in 120

wink, and an idle DN button is automatically

selected.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (1)

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

Consultation Hold Recall starts.

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

A call on Consultation Hold is

retrieved.

l

Talk to the other party.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (2)

You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and

are in conversation with another party on the DN

button.

1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF

button.

or

. A call on Consultation Hold is

retrieved and you can talk to

the retrieved party.

l

Another party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

The DN button is still lit in

green.

4-E-3

Placing a call on Consuitation Hold on twc DN

buttons

1.

Press the TRANSFER or CONF

button.

I

or

l

The DN button in use is still lit

CCNF

El

in green, you hear confirmation

tone 2 then dial

tone 1 or 3 or

n 4.

l

The call is placed on

Consultation Hold.

El

2. Press another DN or CO button.

l

The pressed button lights in

green, you hear dial tone 1 or 3

or 4.

You can call another party from

the seleoted DN or CO button.

l

The DN button where a call

has been held changes from

being lit in green to flashing in

green 120 wink.

Retrieving a call on Consuttation Hold (1)

You placed a call on Consultation hold and press

another DN or CO button.

1. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator light on the

pressed DN or?0 button goes

Out.

l

Consul&&en Hold Recall starts.

2.

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (2)

You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and

are talking on another

DN or

CO button.

-mAreFER

q

1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF

button.

or

l

A call on Consultation Hold is

0

63

retrieved and you can talk to

the retrieved pa;ty.

l

The DN or CO button changes

from flashing in green 120 wink

to being lit in green.

l

Another party in conversation

is placed on Consultation Hold

and the DN button changes

from being lit in green to

flashing in green 120 wink.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (3)

You have placed a call on Consukation Hold and

are talking on another DN or CO button.

1. Press the DN or CO button

where the call has been held and

flashing in green 120 wink.

A call on Consultation Hold is

retrieved and you can talk to

the retrieved party.

The DN or CO button changes

from flashing in green 120 wink

to being lit in green.

Another call is disconnected

and the,green indicator light on

the button goes out.

I- I

l A

call on Consultation Hold is

retrieved You can talk to the

Party

l

The DN button changes from

flashing in 120 wink to being lit

in green.

4-E-4

4.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station

Description

kilows an extension user to talk to the other

par;y

oy remeving a call held by another extension.

This function is performed by dialing the feature

number for “Hold Extension Retrieve” and

extension number on which a call is placed on

hold (directory number: three or four digits).

Programming

Conditions

Even if the other extension has held multiple

calls, there is no preferential order for retrieving

calls.

In case of a failure to retrieve a call (the other

extension holds no call), reorder tone is returned

and the following message appears on the

display, if provided:

1 No Hold Call 1

The following calls cannot be retrieved from other

extensions.

l

A call held on PC0 button

l

A call placed on Exclusive Hold

l

A call place on Consultation Hold

Operation

1. Lift the handset or

press

the

SP-PHONE button.

Dial the feature number for

“Hold Extension Retrieve.”

Dial the directory number of the

holding extension : three or four

digits.

. After hearing confirmation tone

3, start conversation with the

retrieved party.

.:.

4-E-5

5.00 Call Park

5.01 Call Park-System

Description

Allows an extension user to hold a call on the DN

or CO button (both extension and outside) into a

parking area common to the system.

The parked call can be retrieved from any

extension in the system.

Call Park can be used whenever an extension

user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere,

and wishes to complete the call from another

extension.

Two methods are available for Call Park-System.

cl

> By dialing the feature number for “Call Park-

System.”

<2> By pressing the Call Park System button

(Assignable Feature button).

To retrieve a larked call, dial the feature number .-

for %all Park Retrieve-System.”

20 parking areas are available common to the

system.

Programming

System Programming Rel

VT

‘System-Ten&,

Call Park 6olJndary

‘System-Numbering Plan (4&)

Call Park-System

Call Perk Retrieve6ystem

‘+ension-Station (2M)“.

DN Key Type

‘Extension-Station (3/3)l,

PF Key Type

DSS Key Type

9-o-2.00

9-o-6.04

9-Gl.02

9-G-1.03

I

PITS Statkm Pmgramming

DN (Directory Number) Button

Assignment

PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

Parking a call in the system parking area by

pressing the Call Park System button is ignored

by the system if the extension user has already

consultation hold call.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO ‘Music on Hold.’ .%

lO-G24.00

7. -

10625.00

1 o-c-26.00

Reference

12-c-1.00

12-c-2.00

12c-3.00

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, 20 parking areas

can be split between two tenants in ‘System-

Tenant”, Call Park Boundary.

A parked call will be disconnected automatically

by the system, if it is not answered within 30

minutes.

When a call on PC0 or SC0 button is parked in

the system parking area, the green indicator light

on PC0 or SC0 button turns to red.

When a call on DN or GCO button is parked in

the system parking area, the green indicator light

on DN or GCO button

turns off.

.

4-E-6

Operation

Parking 2 2: .d,-:ns 2

:o7\~-sa;ion on the DN or

CO buttor

TRANSFER

El

1. Press :ne TRANSFER button,

then alal the feature number for

“Cal! Park-System.” or press only

the “Call Park System” button.

l

The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold. You hear

confirmation tone 2 then dial

tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3 P,

2l

2. Dial the parking area number in

two digits : 01 to 20.

*

l

When you succeed in Call

Park-System, you hear

confirmation tone 2 then dial

tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

[ Call Parked at xx 1

+

parking area

number (01 to 20)

l

If a call cannot be parked on

the selected parking area,

(another call is already parked

in the parking area), you hear

busy tone 1 or 2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Parked at xx N/AI

+ v :’

parking area

number (01 to 20)

l

In this case, dialing another

parking area number (01 to 20)

allows you to try a new call

park destination.

l

To talk to the party placed on

Consultation Hold again while

hearing busy tone 1 or 2, follow

the same procedure as

retrieving Consultation Hold.

Refer to Section 4-E-3.00

“Consultation Hold.”

3. Replace the handset or press

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

In step 1, when you are talking on the CO button,

pressing the Call Park System button is ignored if

there is no idle DN button.

Retrieving a call parked in the system parking

. . area

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Park Retrieve-System.”

3. Dial the parking area number :

01 to 20.

l

When you succeed in retrieving

the parked call, you hear

confirmation tone 2. Then talk

to the other party,

l

If no call is parked on the

selected parking area, you

hear reorder tone.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 No Hold Call 1

4-E-7

5.02

Call

Park-Station

Description

P o*.us ar: extension user to hold a call on the DN

c- SO button (both extension and outside) into

-.!s own parking

area, then retrieve the parked

call from any extension in the system.

Call Park also allows extension users to answer

a call from any extension or outside party when

paged.

Each extension has its own parking area.

Two ways are available for Call Park-Station.

<la

By dialing the feature number for “Call Park-

Station”

~2, By pressing the Call Park Station button

(Assignable Feature button).

To retrive a parked call, dial the feature number

for “Call Park Retrieve-Station.”

Programming

-r

I,

System Programming

“System-Numbering Plan (4/9)

Call Park-Station

Call Park Retrieve-Station

“Extension-Station (2/3)‘,

DN Key Type

“Extension-Station (3/3)‘,

PF Key Type

DSS Key Type

T

Reference

1

v-r

9-D-6.04

9-G-1.02

9-G-l .03

PITS

Station

Programming “5;

DN (Directory Number) Button

Assignment

PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

Dumb

10-C-10.00

1 O-C-24.00

1 O-c-25.00

1 O-C-26.00

Reference

12-c-1.00

12-c-2.00

12-C-3.00

-I

Conditions

A parked call will be disconnected automatically

by the system, if

it is not answered within 30

minutes.

During a conversation on the PC0 or SC0

button, executing Call Park-Station makes the

indicator on the button light in red.

During a conversation on the DN or GCO button,

executing Call Park-Station makes the indicator

light on the button go out.

Call Park-Station by pressing the Call Park

Station button is ignored if Consultation Hold is

executed at the extension beforehand.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary.

Refer to

Section

3-E-l .OO ‘Music on Hold.”

4-E-8

Operation

Executing Call Park-Station

During

a conversation on

the DN

or CO button

1.

Press the TRANSFER

button,

then dial the feature number for

“Call Park-Station,” or press only

the “Call Park Station” button.

if you use the TRANSFER

button and the feature number:

l

When you succeed in Call

Park-Station, you hear

confirmation tone 2, then dial

tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

When you fail, you hear busy

tone 1 or 2.

If you use the Call Park Station

button :

1) During a conversation on the CO

button,

l

When you succeed in Call

Park-Station, you hear

confirmation tone 2, then no

tone.

l

When you fail, you remain in

conversation status (pressing

the Call Park Station button is

ignored).

2) During a conversation on the DN

button,

l

When you succeed, you hear

confirmation tone 2, then dial

tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

When you fail, you remainlin

conversation (pressing the Call

Park Station button is ignored).

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

( Call Parked at ST 1

l

If you fail in Call Park-Station

(another call is already

parked), you hear busy tone 1

or 2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Park at ST N/A

- -c :a -. :3 !he ether party placed

;r- CI-r;l;::a:,cn HaId while

Year -9 busy me 1 or 2, follow

‘ne p’-scedure identical to

re!re~.‘rg Consultation Hold.

RefeV :o Section 4-E-3.00

‘Consultation Hold.”

2. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Retrieving a call parked in the station parking

area

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Park Retrieve-Station.”

3. Dial the extension number of the

parking extension : three or four

digits. . .

I AL I

,.

l

When you succeed in retrieving

the parked call, you hear

confirmation tone 2. Then talk

to the other party.

l

If no call is parked at the

extension, you hear reorder

tone. I..

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 No Hold Call I

4-E-9

6.00 Call Splitting

Description Programming

When a new call at-r-*% at the DN

GT

CO DJ~:’

during a conversatio- with another party.

pressing the SPLIT z&ton

(Assignable FeaWe

button) allows the caled party to hold the current

party exclusively ant at the same

time answer

the new caller automatically.

System Programming

‘Extension-Station (2/3)‘.

DN

Key Type

‘Extension-Station (3/3)‘,

PF

Key Type

DSS

Key Type

If another new call ayves, another pressing of

the SPLIT button co-nects the new caller,

holding the previous zaller exclusively.

As the above proceo;re, every time a new call

arrives, it is possible :o answer the call by

executing Exclusive iold for the current other

party.

Calls placed on hoic by pressing the SPLIT

button are joined one

by

one to the call splitting

chain.

Pressing the SPLIT Ntton again while no call is

arriving connects the current call to the call

splitting chain and cranges the chain into a

circle.

At this moment, the ?;st held party is retrieved

from the chain and conversation with the

retrieved party is possible.

After the circular

call

splitting chain is

constructed, every pmssing of the SPLIT button

provides Exclusive l-old on the current party

again and establishes a conversation with the

next oldest party. I

-. .

.,

Reference

VT 1 Dumb

9-G-l .02 1 O-C-24.00

I

9-G-l .03 1 o-c-25.00

1 O-C-26.00

PITS Station Program-ning Reference

Conditions

Pressing the S.PLIT button during a doorphone

conversation, paging conversation etc., is

ignored: it is impossible to hold those

conversations.

Each extension is able to make one call splitting

chain. I

After the call splitting chain changes to a circle,

pressing the SPLIT button during a conversation

if a new call arrives is ignored.

Any other operation than pressing the SPLIT

button cancels the call spliing chain, and

changes Exclusive Hold to common Hold. :- . .

4-E-l 0

Operation

Call Splitting operaticn

During a conversation, another call arrives at the

DN or CO button.

El

1. Press

the

SPLIT button.

l

The current

call is placed on

Exclusive

Hold ‘and connected

to

rhe

call splitting chain.

l

Start

conversation with the new

caller.

Another call arrives again.

2. Press the SPLIT button.

l

The current call is placed on

Exclusive Hold and chained to

the call splitting chain.

l

Start conversation with the new

caller.

3. During a conversation, press the

SPLIT button every time a new

call arrives. Then press the

SPLIT button again while no call

is arriving.

l

The current party is joined to

the call splitting chain, that

completes a circular chain.

l

Start

conversation with the first

held party.

4; .-Fress the SPLIT button.

l

Every pressing of the SPLIT

button connects the current call

to the call spliing chain again.

l

Start conversation with a held

call in the chained order.

_c

4-E-l 1

F. Transferring Features

1 .OO Call Transfer

1 .Ol Unscreened Call Transfer to

Station

Description

Transfer is convenient to redirect a call to another

extension user.

Attendant assistance is not required and the caller

does not have to redial.

Unscreened Call Transfer allows an extension user

to transfer calls placed on the DN or CO button to

another extension without announcement.

Programming

None

Conditions

If transferred call is not answered by the

destination party, it will receive one of the following

treatments.

Status of Destination opefatjon Resulted

Able to receive the Performs the call to the destination for

call aspecifwzperiod. Inoaseofno

(sending rtngbaok answer, interrupts ringing and Stark

tone) ringing to the originator of transfer. -1

For detail. refer to Section 3-E-3.00

Transfer Recall.”

Busy Assoonasthedestinationgoeson-

(sending busy tone) hook, starts calling the destination

(Camp-on Transfer).

If the destination party remains busy 01

doesnotanswertheoallwithina

specitied period, starts calling back the

originator of transfer. *l

For detail, refer to Seotion 3-E-3.00

?ansfer Recall.’

Setting Do Not ’ Unscreened Call Transfer to extension

Disturb is ineffective.

(sending DND tone) Transferred party is treated simply as a

partyp&edonConsultationHold.

Harglng up causes the Consultation

HoIdRecaHtotheo@natoroftransfer

4 When the originator of transfer answers the call,

conversation between the originator and the

transferred party starts.

The extension users can not transfer the following

calls.

l

A call on ICM button

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

l

Paging Announcement through built-in

speaker of PITS

If

Music or

%!d ‘s a.;ailable from the start of the

transferring operation until the destination party

answers,

the

system sends Music on Hold to

the

transferred party.

For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-l .OO

“Music on Hold.”

Operation

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party on the DN or CO button

1. Press the TRANSFER butt&.

l

The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Transfer to ]

2. Dial the directory number of the

destination extension: three or

four digits. I

.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

1 J

l

Calling the desired extension

starts and if the extension

ms, ccinvers@ion

between the held party a’nd’&e

extension is established.

(Supplement)

After step 2, if you want to restore the

conversation with the transferred party, (1) if the

destination has already answered, press the

FLASH button and then TRANSFER button. (2)

if the destination has not answered yet, press the

TRANSFER button only.

To change the destination of transfer after

executing step 2, press the FLASH button while

hearing ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone.

Then after hearing dial tone, dial the extension

number of the new destination.

4-F-l

1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station

Description

Allows an extension user to transfer a call placed

on the DN or CO button to another extension with

announcement.

Programming

None

Conditions

The

extension users can not transfer the

following calls.

l

A call on ICM button

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

l

Paging Announcement through built-in

speaker of PITS

If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the

transferring operation until the destination party

answers, the system sends Music on Hold to the

transferred party.

For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-l .OO

‘Music on Hold.”

Operation

During a conversation with an exiension or ar

outside party on the DN or CO button

TRANSFER

Ll

1.

Press the TRANSFER button.

l

The other party

is

placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display,

it

shows:

q

z 4*

(Supplement)

1 Transfer to 1

Dial the directory number of the

destination: three or four digits.

l

You hear ringback tone.

After the destination answers,

make the announcement.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The transferred Garty and the

destination party

start

conversation.

After step 2, you can interrupt the transfer and

talk to the held party, (1) if the destination has

+- already answered, wressing the FLASH

button, and then the TRANSFER button. (2) if

the destination has not answered yet, by

pressing the TRANSFER button only.

-

After step 2, you can change the destination by

pressing the FLASH button while hearing

ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone. Then

after hearing dial tone, dial the directory number

of

the

new destination.

4-F-2

1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk

Description Operation

During

a conversation

with an ot,tside oarty or an

extension on the ON or CO boon

Allows an extension user to transfer a call placed

on the DN or CO button to outside party with

announcement.

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, CO Transfer mode to “Yes.”

If outside call is transferred to another outside

party, CO-CO conversation mode is established

and the duration of the conversation is restricted

by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

Conditions

If a call from outside party is transferred to

another outside party, CO-CO conversation

mode is established. In this case, the system

uses the preset time limit for the trunk group that

the transferred party is placed on, not using the

time limit for the trunk group used to call the

destination and alarm tone is sent to parties 15

seconds before the assigned time limit, and when

time is out, both CO lines are disconnected.

If an outside call routed via.DID trunk is

. . _. transferred to another out&e partji, no limit

applies to duration of CO-CO

conversation.

The extension users can not transfer the

following calls.

l

A call on ICM button

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

l

Paging Announcement through built-in

speaker of PITS

If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the

transferring operation until the destination party

answers, the system sends Music on Hold to the

transferred party.

For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-l .OO

“Music on Hold.”

1.

Press the TRANSFER button

l

The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or

4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

(23

•I

2. Call another outside party.

416

73.

*

l

You hear ringback tone from

the CO line.

3. When the destination answers,

make the annoucement.

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

I I

l

The held party tid the

destination party start

conversation.

(Supplement)

If an extension that cannot execute this function

&ty the restriction of COS attempts to do this

“jsrocedure, the syst&&nds consultation hold

recall to the extension after step 4 and the

transfer is rejected.

After step 2, you can interrupt the transfer and

talk to the held party again, (1) if the destination

has already answered, by pressing the FLASH

button and the TRANSFER button in succession.

(2) If the destination has not answered yet, by

pressing the TRANSFER button only.

After step 2, you can change the destination by

pressing the FLASH button, and calling a new

outside party.

4-F-3

1.04 Ringing Transfer

Description Operation

Allows an extension user to transfer a call on the

SDN button to the owner extension

of the

SDN

button by simply pressing the Ringing Transfer

button (Assignable Feature Button). Ringing,

Transfer can be done either with or without

announcement.

Executing screened Ringing Transfer

During a conversation with an outside party or an

extension on the SDN button.

The indicator on the SDN button is lit in green.

El 1.

To execute Ringing Transfer, assign the Ringing

Transfer button to the user’s PITS by the system

programming or PITS station programming.

Either PITS or SLT or OPX can be assigned as

the destination of the transfer.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/a)“,

DN Key Type

“Extension-Station

p/3)“,

PF Key Type

DSS Key Type

9-G-1.02

g-G-1.03

1 O-C-24.00

1 O-C-25.00

1 O-C-26.00

System Programming I

Reference I

DN (Directory Number) Button

Assignment

PF (Programmable Feature)

Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

1 I I

Conditions -z%L

12c1.00

1262.00

12-c-3.00

If the owner extension is in the PITS programming

mode, Ringing Transfer is ineffective.

If the owner extension is SLT, Ringing Transfer is

effective when the owner extension is on-hook

and also able to ring.

:.

13[1

2.

I

3.

Press the Ringing Transfer

button.

.

You hear ringback tone.

When the owner extension is

PITS, the indicator on the

owners PDN button changes

from red light to green 240

wink.

When the owner extension

answers, start conversation.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

The transferred party and the

owner extension start

conversation.

The indicator on the SDN

button changes from green

light to red light.

Executing unscreened Ringing Transfer

During a conversation with an outside party or an

extension on the SDN button.

? Xhe indicator on the SDN button is lit in green.

1. Press the Ringing Transfer

button.

l

You hear nngback tone.

l

When the owner extension

is PITS, the indicator of the

owner’s PDN button changes

from red light to green 240

wink.

2. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

When the owner extension

answers, the transferred party

and the owner extension start

conversation.

4-F-4

1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to

Remote

Description

Allows operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

to transfer a call placed on the DN or CO button to

Remote Maintenance Resource. Modem answer

tone is returned instantly, if it is not in use.

This operation allows System Administrator to

perform System Administration from Remote

Location.

Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System Administration

from a Remote Location” for further information.

To transfer a call to Remote Maintenance

Resource, “FDN for Remote” is used, which is

assigned in “Systembperation”, Remote Directory

Number.

See Section 3-B-3.00 ‘Floating Directory Number

(FDN)” for details about FDN.

Programming

Conditions

If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends

Music on Hold to the transferred party during the

transferring operation.

For further detail, refer to

Section

3-E-l .OO ‘Music

on Hold.”

If Remote Maintenance Resouq&isin use, busy

tone is returned to the held party. Automatic

Callback does not function in this case, so the

party should call Remote again when it becomes

idle.

If extensions other than operators dial the Remote

Directory Number, reorder tone is returned.

Operation

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party on the DN or CO button

-1 1. Press the TRANSFER button.

The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

You hear confirmation tone 2,

then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

2. Dial the “Remote Directory

Number”: three or four digits.

.

l

You hear confirmation tone 3,

then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

. If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 1234: RMT Access 1

.

t

Remote Directory Number:

three or four digits

If Remote Maintenance

Resource is not in use, the

held party hears modem

answer tone and

start

communication with Remote

instantly.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-F-5

1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer

-to Attendant Console

Description

Allows an extenson user to transfer a call (both

extenson and outsde) to an Attendant Console

without announcement.

Programming _

None

Conditions

1) Transfer Recall

2)

i

3)

4)

5)

A call transferred by this feature will not ring

back at the extension who transferred the call

even

if the Attendant Console does not

answer the call after the transfer recall timer

has been elapsed.

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)

A call transferred to an Attendant Console will

not be transferred to another extension by

IRNA feature even if the Attendant Console

does not answer the call after the IRNA timer

has been elapsed.

What if ail six Loop keys on the Attendant

Console are not

idle?

A call is put in the call waiting queue of the

Attendant Console.

What if the Attendant Console is in ATT-FWD

mode?

This feature does not function.

A call is simpiy put on Consultation Hoid, that

is, a call will ring back at the extension who

tries to transfer the call as soon as he or she

goes on-hook.

Music on Hold

tf Music on Hoid is avaiiabie. the system

sends Music on Hoid to the transferred party,

from the start of the transferring operation till

the destination party answers.

Operation

During

a conversation with an extension or an

outside party.

1 Press the TRANSFER button.

l

The

other

party is put on

Consuttation Hoid.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display. it

shows:

1 Transfer to 1

1

Jl

2 Make

a call

to an

Attendant

,

1 Console.

l

You hear ringback tone.

l

Calling an Attendant Console

starts.

3 Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

At an Attendant Console:

The call is displayed as a

transfer recall.

(Supplement)

The feature numbers and DN’s for making a call

to an Attendant Console are:

l

Operator Call (General)

l

Operator Call (Specifii)

l

FDN for General Operator Call

l

DN for ATT1 and ATT2

4-F-5-1

(21292)

1.07

Unscreened Call Transfer

-to a UCD Group (with OGM)

Description

Allows any extension user to transfer an outside

call to a UCD Group from

01

to

04

(with OGM

type).

Feature References

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with /without

O-GM (Section 3-D-2.06)

From version 8.xX, not only the operators but

any extension user can transfer an outside call to

a UCD group (with OGM).

Programming

conattons

lf all group members are not available to answer

the call, il will be redirected to the Overflow

destination. In thii case, the call will be

. disconnected if not answered by the Overflow

destination withii 60 seconds.

See page 3-D-l 3 for further information.

Operation

During a conversation with an outside party.

r===l

1 Press the TRANSFER button.

I

0 ’

.

Theotherpaftyisputon

Consultation Hold.

You hear confiib~ tone 2

andthendialtona 1 or3or4.

If your PlTS has

a display, it

2

OhI the FDN for UCD group (01

tOO4).

l

You hear confirmation tone 3 *

and then diil tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3 Rep&e the handset or press the

SP-PHON E button.

4-F-5-2

(40993)

2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD)

2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls

Description

Call Forwarding-All Calls allows extension users

who are away from their phones to receive

incoming calls (both extension and CO) at

another extension.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators (Attendant

Console or Extension).

‘FDN for General Operator Call” can be used to

assign operators as the destination of Call

Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call appearing on ICM button

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call appearing on PC0 button

7

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

&4

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To execute Call Fonvarding-All Calls, assign

‘System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb to “Yes.”

To set or cancel this function, the following two

methods are available:

cl> By pressing the FWD/DND button.

c2>

By dialing the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-All Calls Ser and

“Call Forwarding-Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming

“System-Class of Service (l/2)=,

Call Forwarding& Not

Disturb

‘System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“,

Call Forwarding-All Call Set

‘System-Numbering Plan (5/9)“,

Call ForwardinglDo Not

Disturb Cancel

Rei

VT

9-O-4.01

9-0-6.04

9-O-6.05

13c7.00

10-6-10.00

10-c-10.00

Conditions

To set or cancel this function, use the PDN

button.

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

Call Forwarding-All Calls feature functions even if

the extension is in the PITS programming mode.

If the extension to which calls are to be

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the ‘Intercept Routing-No

Answer” feature.

If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to ‘Yes” by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

another tenant if the destination of Call

Forwarding-All Calls is set to an Attendant

Console.

Calls from any VM extension will not be

forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

VM extension.

An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if

he or she attempts:

l

To set the destination to an extension in the

other tenant when Tenant Service is employed.

l

To set the destination to another extension that

presets its own destination to the users

extension.

l

To call another extension that presets its

destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 4-1~11 .OO Remote Station Feature

Control.”

4-F-6

(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Condition of Destination Forwarding

at Setting Extension Execution Result

Extension call Idle status

0

Call is forwarded

to

destination.

Busy status

0

Busy tone is sent from destination.

Assigned to DND

0

DND tone is sent from destination.

PITS programming mode

0

Busy tone is sent from destination.

Conditions except In Service * )( Call is placed on setting extension.

DIL (1:l) or DISA call Idle status

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

0

Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

Assigned to DND

0

Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb

(DND).”

PITS programming mode

0

Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

DID call

-‘z

4 ^

Conditions except In Service *

Idle status

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service *

X Call is placed on setting extension.

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

0

Busy tone is sent from destination

0

Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Distu$

(DND).”

0

Busy tone is sent from desti‘nation

X

Call is placed on destination.

0:

Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

t Conditions are Qut of Service,”

‘Fault” and ‘Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 ‘Port” for details.

‘Ii

4-F-7

-)

i .

/

.)

. .-

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-All Calls

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE

button.

2.

Press the FWD/DND

button, then

dial “2.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-All Call Set.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port,

or “FDN for General Operator

Call” to be set as the destination.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting an extension as

the destination:

MD (All) Ext xxxx 1

-

t

Directory number:

three or four digits

When setting operators as the

destination:

If an operator is Attendant

Console

1 FWD (All) AT-T I

If an operator is extension

IFWD (All) Ext xxxx 1

-?-

Directory number:

three or four digits

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the FWDIDND

button starts flashing.

Canceling Call Forwarding-All Calls

1.

0

FrEl

2.

OW

/o/

0

cl

,z,

3.

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator light flashing on

the FWD/DND button goes out.

Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “0.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

e if your PITS has a display, it

shows:

[ FWD/DND Cancel 1

L 1

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

Type 50 and KX-l7050 PITS telephones are not

provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3

button on them can be programmed to be the

FWDIDND button.

Refer

to

Section 9-G-l -03 “Station (3/3)” and

Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for

further information.

_- -

*. .*

4-F-8

(21292)

2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook

Description Conditions

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook provides

automatic call transfer to a preset destination

when the user’s extension is busy.

Busy status means all PDNs are used, or off-hook

status (including hands-free status) or in the PITS

programming mode.

To set or cancel this function, use the PDN

button.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call’ is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)’ for

further information.

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call appearing on ICM button

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call appearing on PC0 button

l

A call routed via DK 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

If the extension to which calls are to be - ..

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No

Answer feature.

To set this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to ‘Yes.”

If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to Yes’ by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

.another tenant if the destination of C&II

Forwarding-Busy/Off-t-look is set to an Attendant

Console.

Calls from any VM extension will’not be

forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

VM extension.

For setting and canceling this function, two

methods are available:

cl

> By pressing the FWD/DND button.

<2> By dialing the feature number for

“Call Fonnrarding-Busy Ser and

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

Q-m prosrammins Reterence

VT Dumb

%ystem-Class of Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01 lOG7.00

Call ForwardingKb Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Pian (WY, 9-D-6.04 10420.00

Call Forwarding-Busy Set

‘System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 104-10.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if

he or she attempts:

l

To set the destination to an extension in the

other tenant when Tenant Setice is employed.

l

To set the destination to another extension that

presets its own

destination to the user’s

extension.

l

To

call

another extension that presets its

destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section

4-l-11

90 “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

4-F-9

(21292)

The followmg table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving

at Setting Extension

j I Extension call

DIL

(1 :I) or

DISA cal

DID call

I

Condition of Destination forwardins

Execution

Idle status

j 0

Busy

status I

Assigned to DND I

PITS programming mode j x

/

Conditions except In Service * /

Idle status 1 0

Busy

status

I

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode j x

t

Conditions except In Sewice * i

Idle status i

0

/

Busy status L

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode i x

r

Conditions except In Service * :

0

Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

-.

J

Call is placed on setting extension.

m- Conditions are Wut of

Service,”

“Fault” and ‘Pre-Installed.” See

Section

14-C-2.02

“Port”

for details.

4-F-l 0

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

2.

rl

s,

4.

Press the FWD!DND button, then

dial “3.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-Busy Set.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail ports,

or “FDN for General Operator

Call” to be set as the destination.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting an extension as

the destination:

IFWD(BSY) Ext= 1

T-

Directory number:

three or four digits

When setting operators as the

destination:

If an operator is Attendant

Console 2

IFWD (BSY) A-IT 1

lf an operator is extension

pwD(BsY)Extxxxx 1

- $

Directory number:

three or four digits

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

Canceling Call

I.

0

iii2

3.

(Supplement)

Forwarding-Busy/Off -Hook

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator light flashing on

the FWD/DND button goes out.

Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “0.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

FWD/DND Cancel

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not

provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3

button on them can be programmed to be the

FWD/DND button.

Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 ‘Station (3/3)” and

Section 12-C-2.00 ‘PF Button Assignment” for

further information.

4-F-l 1

(21292)

2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer

Description

Call Forwarding-No ?~srer orc~~~!es automatic

call transfer to a prese: desiina:ion if the

extension user cannof answer

the

call in a

determined period (tha! IS, if the caller is not

answered while hearing ringback tone in a

specified period).

If the extension setting this function is in the PITS

programming mode. Call Forwarding-No Answer

is disabled and the calier hears busy tone.

, .:.

I Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to

the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)

by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No

Answer lime-Out.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

.Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call appearing on ICM button

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call appearing on PC0 button

. A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-No Answer, assign

“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb to “Yes.”

For setting or canceling this function, two

methods are available:

cl > By pressing the FWD/DND button.

c2> By dialing the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-No Answer Set” and

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

*_-

Programming

System Frogramming Reference

VT Dumb

“System-Sys:em Timer”, 9-D-3.00 1 O-C-6.00

Call Forwarding-No Answer

Time-Out

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 1 O-C-7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, 9-D-6.04 1 O-C-1 0.00

Call Forwarding-No Answer

Set

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any

time. If a second type is assigned, the previously

assigned type is canceled.

If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded

itself is in a call forward mode, a call is not

forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the first

forwarded extension. In case of an outside call, if

not answered in a specified time period, the call will

be routed to another destination, if available, based

on the “Intercept Flouting-No Answer” feature.

When Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming, a call

from another tenant will not be forwarded if

forwarding destinatJon is an Attendant Console.

Calls from any VM extension will not be forwarded, if

forwarding destination is another VM extension.

An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if he

or she attempts:

l

To set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant when Tenant Service is employed.

l

To set the destination to another extension that

presets its own destination to the user’s extension.

l

To call another extension that presets its

destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 4-l-11 .OO “Remote Station Feature Control.”

4-F-l 2

(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

;-is function depencing on the conditions of the preset destination.

T@+z of Call Arriving

3r Setting Extension Condition of Destination Forwardin!

Execution

Extension call Idle status

4

0

Busy status

Assigned

to DND

X

PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service *

DIL (1

:l)

or DISA call Idle status

0

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

Conditions except In Service *

DID call Idle status

Busy status

0

Assigned to DND

X

PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service *

-

3

c

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

0:

Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

u Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-l

3

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-No Answer

1.

Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

WOiDNO

n

2.

GHI

•l

4

3.

Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “4.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-No Answer Set.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port,

or “FDN for General Operator

Call” to be set as the destination.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting an extension as

the destination:

FWD (NA) Ext xxxx

-T

Directory number:

three or four digits

When setting operators as the

destination:

If an operator is Attendant -.>+

Console

1 FWD (NA) ATT I

If an operator is extension

FWD (NA) Ext xxxx 1

3-

Directory number:

three or four digits

rl

,x,

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

FWODNO

El

2.

QW

/o/

0

l-l

qq

3.

I‘* :he handset or press

-. .

::e SP-PHONE button.

- The indicator light flashing on

!he

FWD/DND button goes out.

Press the FWDIDND button, then

dial “0.”

Or, dial the feature number for

‘Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

. You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

FWD/DND Cancel

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

I I

(Supplement)

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not

provided with the FWD/DND button.. Only the PF3

button on them can be programmed to be the

FWD/DND button.

Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)” and

Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for

further information.

1 I

4-F-l 4

(21292)

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy. Off-Hook/No

Answer

Description

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer

provides automatic call transfer to a preset

destination if the user’s extension is busy or the

user cannot answer the call in a determined period

(that is, if the caller is not answered while hearing

ringback tone in a specified period).

Busy status means .all PDNs are used, or off-hook

status (including hands-free status) or in

the PITS

programming mode.

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to

the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)

by ‘System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No

Answer Time-Out.

If the extension setting this function is in the PITS

programming mode, Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-

HooWNo Answer is disabled and the caller hears

busy tone.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

0 A call appearing on ICM button

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call appearing on PC0 button

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To set this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes.”

For setting or canceling this function, two methods

are available:

cl

> By pressing the FWD/DND button.

c2>

By dialing the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer and

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

I-

System

Programming v-r

“System-System Timer, 9-D-3.00

Call Forwarding-No Answer

lime-Out

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, 9-D-6.04

Call Forwarding-Busy/No

Answer

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

ence

Dumb

1 O-C-6.00

1 o-c-7.00

1 O-c-1 0.00

1 O-C-1 0.00

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any

If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded

time. If a second type is assigned, the previously

itself is in a call forward mode, a call is not

forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the first

assigned type is canceled.

forwarded extension. In case of an outside call, if

not answered in a specified time’period, the call will

be routed to another destination, if available, based

on the “Intercept Routing-No Answer” feature.

When Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming, a call

from another tenant will not be forwarded if

forwarding destination is an Attendant Console.

1’ h

Calls from any VM extension will not be forwarded, if

forwarding destination is another VM extension.

An extension user will be rejected with reorder tone

if he or she attempts:

l

To set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant when Tenant Service is employed.

l

To set the destination to another extension that

presets its own destination to the user’s extension.

l

To call another extension that presets its

destination to the user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 4-l-11 .OO “Remote Station Feature Control.”

4-F-l 5

(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Condition of Destination Forwarding

at Setting Extension Execution Result /

1

Extension call Idle status

Busy status

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service *

DIL (1 :I) or DISA call Idle status

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

DID call

Conditions except In Service *

Idle status

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service *

C,’

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

. .

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

0 -:- .Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

f Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-l 6

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo Answer

I. Lift the handset or press

the

SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the FWDIDND button,

then

dial “6.”

Or, dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding-Busy/No Answer.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port, or

“FDN for General Operator Call” to

be set as the destination.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting an extension as

the destination:

kWD (B/N) Ext xxxx 1

T

Directory number:

three or four digits

When setting operators as the

destination:

_ If an operator is Atten-

Console

1 FWD (B/N) A-f-l- I

If an operator is extension

FWD (B/N) Ext xxxx

f

Directory number:

three or four digits

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Call Fcrwardirg-Btisy. E-Hook No

Answer

1. Lft the handset cr Dress

the SP-WCNE burron.

l

The indicator :ght flashing

on

the FWD/DND button goes out.

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “0.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.’

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 FWD/DND Cancel 1

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not

provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3

button on them can be programmed to be the

FWD/DND button.

Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)” and

Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignmenr for

further information.

. ‘iE -*

I 1 l

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

4-F-l 7

(21292)

2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk

Description Programming

Call Forwarding to Trunk

allows extension users

who

are away from their phones to receive

incoming

calls (both

CO and extension) at outside

place.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call appearing on ICM button

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call appearing on PC0 button

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A tail directed to a UCD group

_

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

CO Forward Mode

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, SD-6.04 10-C-10.00

Call Forwarding-to Trunk

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

‘Group-Trunk Group

(l/2)“, 9-E-l .Ol 1 O-C-1 4.00

CO-CO Duration Limit

When an incoming CO call is forwarded to the

pre-assigned outside party by this feature, CO to

CO call via this system is established. Duration

time of CO to CO call is restricted by ‘Group-

Trunk Group,” CO-CO Duration Limit of receiving

CO line. The system sends alarm tone to both

Conditions

To set or cancel this function, use the PDN button.

. parties 15 seconds before the Duration Limit time

is expired, and when expired the system

disconnects both parties compulsively.

An extension user may have only one type of Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any

time. If a second type is assigned, the previously

assigned type is canceled.

To set Call Forwarding to Trunk, assign both

“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb and CO forward Mode to “Yes.”

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension’tisers. Refer to

Section 4-l-l 1 .OO “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

For setting and canceling this function, two

methods are available:

cl> By pressing the FWD/DND button.

~2s.

By dialing the feature number for

“Call Forwarding-to Trunk” and 1s.T.

*Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Up to 32 digits composed of “0 through 9” and ‘* ”

can be entered as the telephone number of the

destination. CO line access code must be

entered as the leading digit of each entry.

4-F-18

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving

at Setting Extension Condition of Destination

I I

I

Extension

call I idle

status

I I

I

1 Busy status

I Conditions except in Service *

1 DIL (1 :l) or DISA calll Idle status

I I

I

Busy status

I I

Conditions except In Service *

DID call

*

I I

I

Conditions except In Service o

Forwarding

Execution

Result

0

Call is forwarded to external

destination.

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

0

Call is forwarded to external

destination.

X I

Call is placed on setting extension.

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

0

: Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

c

Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-lns’t’alled.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-l 9

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding to Trunk Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “5.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding to Trunk.”

3. Dial the feature number for

selecting the CO line and the

telephone number of the

destination and “#” in succession.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

I I

l

If your PITS has a display, it

\ . shows:

IFWD (CO) 92011234 1

If the assigned number exceeds

the display capacity:

IFWD (CO) 9201123 &I

1

:: 4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

-.. -

l

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

(Supplement)

The system does not check the dialed number,

toll restriction level, and the feature number for

selecting a CO line when the extension user is

setting this function.

1. Lift the handset or press

the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “0.”

Or, dial the feature number for

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 FWD/DND Cancel ]

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not

provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3

button on them can be programmed to be the

FWD/DND button.

Refer to Section Q-G-1.03 ‘Station (3/3)” and

Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for

further information.

4-F-20

G. Conversation Features

1 .OO Programmable Privacy

Description

2. In non-privacy system:

The extension user can intrude on a busy line by

pressing the red lit PDN, SDN or SC0 button, if

the system is set to non-privacy.

In default mode, the system is set to privacy.

This means that a third party cannot intrude on a

busy line.

It is administrable to make system privacy or non-

privacy by “System-Operation”, Privacy on DN

Key.

Pressing PDN Pressing SC0 Pressing GCO

or SDN or PC0

Allows a three Allows a three. Cause Automatic

party conver- patty conversation Callback-Trunk *

sation (reorder tone

(ignored if sounds if confer-

conference ence trunk is

trunk is unavailable

unavailable)

Programming

hi

Conditions

e Refer to Section 4-C-5.01 ‘Automatic Callback-

Trunk.”

Operation

Intruding on a busy line in non-privacy system

The table shows the other party to be barged in

by pressing the red lit PDN, SDN and Single CO

. buttons in the non-privacy system.

Button Pressed

A call

to be barged in

PDN A call on the SDN button owned

by

this PDN.

The following example shows the procedure to be

used by extension B whose SDN is owned by the

PDN of extension

A,

who is talking with party C

on the PDN button.

Extension

A

Extension C

SDN A

call on PDN button which is

owner (including SLT) of this

SDN.

Extension B

I-J

SDNCJ

.

0 Extension B has the

SDN button owned by

extension A’s PDN.

SC0 A call on the pressed Single CO

button. The indicator on the SDN button of extension B is

lit in red.

2.z ; >..

Privacy and non-privacy can be temporarily

changed.

For further details, refer to Section 4-G-2.00

“Privacy Release” and Section 4-G-3.00 “Privacy

Attach.”

1”. Prezi the SDN button (on

extension B) lit in red.

Extension A Extension C

In privacy and non-privacy system, pressing a

button which is lit in red results in the following:

1. In privacy system:

Pressing PDN or SDN Pressing SCO, GCO, or PC0

4-G-l

2.00 Privacy Release

Description

Conditions

In the privacy system, Privacy Release feature

temwrarily releases the privacy by pressing the

Privacy Change button (Assignable Feature

button), and allows the extension user to let

another extension user intrude on a busy line on

PDN, SDN or SC0 button then a 3-party

conference will be established.

Privacy Release feature overrides Data Line

Security feature assigned to the extension.

Operation

The following example shows the procedure for

the extensions A and B.

Extension A is talking on the PDN button.

Extension B has the SDN button owned by the

PDN button of extension A.

es..

Privacy change button must be assigned on a

PITS telephone beforehand.

For the assignment of Privacy Change button,

refer to Section 9-G-l .OO “Station” and Section

12 “Station Programming (PITS).*

The table shows the relationship between the

employed button and the extension to be

released:

Button Employed

by the Talking

Extension

The Other Extension

to

be

Allowed to Override

SDN The PITS having the PDN that

is the owner of the SDN

PDN All PITS’s having the SDN’s

owned by the PDN

Single CO All PITS’s having the same

Single CO

Programming

System Programming

“System-Operation (l/3)“;

Privacy on DN Key

“Extension-Station (2/3)“,

DN Key Type

“Extension-Station (3/3)“,

DSS Key Type

Reference

VT

Dumb

9-D-l .Ol 1 C-C-4.00

9-G-l 62 1 O-C-24.00

9-G-l 93 1 O-C-26.00

I

PITS Station Programming I

Reference

I

DN (Directory Number) Button

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

12-c-l .oo

12-C-3.00

Canceling the privacy system by extension A

El

1. Press the Privacy Change button.

l

The indicator on the Privacy

Change button lights in red.

l

The indicator on the SDN

button of extension B changes

from being lit in red to flashing

in red 120 wink.

l

Privacy system is canceled

temporarily.

Overriding by extension B

El

1. Press the red SDN button that is

flashing in 120 wink.

l

Start a three party conversation.

(Supplement)

Pressing the Privacy Change button on extension

A again while the indicator is lit in red turns out

the light and returns privacy system.

At the same time the indicator on the SDN button

of extension B stops flashing and lights in red.

4-G-2

3.00 Privacy Attach

Description Operation

,,Vhen the system is in non-privacy, pressing the

?rivacy Change button (Assignable Feature

out-ton) when the extension user is talking on the

?DN, SDN, or Single CO button enables system

10 be in privacy mode temporarily and prohibits

another extension from intruding on a busy line

oy pressing the PDN, SDN, or Single CO button.

Setti rg Privacy Attach

1. Press the Privacy Change button.

Canceling Privacy Attach

1. Press the Privacy Change button

lit in red.

l

The indicator on the Privacy

Change button lights in red.

While this function is enabled, the indicator on

the Privacy Change button is lit in red.

Programming

Sys?em

Programming

Reference

VT 1 Dumb

‘System-Operation

(l/3)“,

Privacy on DN Key

‘Extension-Station (2/3)“,

DN Key Type

‘Extension-Station (3/3)“,

DSS Key Type

PITS Station Programming

DN

(Directory Number) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

Reference

12c1.00

12-G3.00

Conditions

An extension user can assign Privacy Attach by

pressing the Privacy Change button in any status

such as on-hook, conversation and so an.

It is possible to cancel Privacy Attach by pressing

the Privacy Change button lit in red again,

regardless of the status of extensions such as

on-hook.

if either or both of the two extensions in

conversation in a non-privacy system sets

Privacy Attach, no other extension is able to

override the conversation by pressing the PDN,

SDN, or Single CO button.

l

The indicator light on the

Privacy Change button goes

out.

. . _ .

4-G-3

4.00 Hands-Free Conversation

Description

Turning

the BP-PHC’JE buttcc :P wj:-:;t lirting

the handset offers hands-free ooeWcn a’ld

conversation status.

Programming

None

Conditions

One minute of hands-free status without any

operation after turning the SP-PHDNE button on

cancels the status automatically, that is, turns the

SP-PHONE button off.

Operation

Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SP-

PHONE button is off.

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

l

The microphone and the

speaker for the speakerphone

are activated and hands-free

operation and conversation is

available

:

Changing the handset conversation mode to the

hands-free conversation mode

-1

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

l

The microphone and the

speaker for the speakerphone

are activated, and the handset

sends no tone.

2. Replace the handset.

l

Continue the conversation

using the speakerphone.

(Supplement) . .

Lifting the handset in the hands-free mode turns

the speakerphone off and changes to the handset

mode.

4-G-4

5.00 Conference

5.01

Conference-One Appearance

Description

During a conversation with an extension or an ’

outside party, the extension user can add another

party (extensicn or outside party) on the current

conversation and hold a three party conference

on one DN button : this is called Conference-One

Appearance.

On the TSW card, there are eight standard

conference trunks provided for this purpose.- ’

By equipping the optional conference expansion

card (KX-T336104), the number of conference

trunks increases to 64.

To utilize optional conference expansion card,

assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW

Additional CONF to “Yes.”

When two members in the conference are

outside parties, two conference trunks are

necessary. In all other cases, one conference

trunk is enough.

If a member in the conference is using the PITS

provided with a display, the following message

appears on the display of the PITS during the

conference, showing the other two members.

. When both of the other members are

extensions:

1 El234 & E5678 1

-1

u Directory numbers of the

extensions

l

When one is an extension and the other is an

outside party:

El 234 & Panas

I

- Leading five digits of the

CO line’s name

l

When both of the other members are outside

parties:

Programming

Conditions

Pressing the HOLD button during a conference is

ignored.

Pressing the CONF button after calling the

second party offers conference status. If no

conference trunks are available, pressing the

CONF button is ignored and conference is. not

established.

Pressing the TRANSFER button by the

conference originator during a conference

restores the conversation with the previous party,

placing the later party on Consultation Hold.

Pressing the TRANSFER button again

establishes the conversation with the later party,

placing the previous party on Consultation Hold.

Pressing the CONF button restores the

conference.

Pressing the TRANSFER button by a conference

member other than the conference originator

during the conference is ignored.

Matsu & Panas

4-G-5

Operation

Establishing a

Conference-One Appeamce

Extension A is having a conversation

with party E

(another extension or an outside party on the DN

button).

The following is the operation from the standpoint

of extension A.

II 1. Press the CONF button.

I-J

= .

.

The indicator on the CONF

button starts flashing in red 60

wink

The other patty B is placed on

Consultation Hold. Extension A

hears dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Call another party C (an extension

or an outside party).

l

Talk to station C on the DN

button.

3. Press the CONF button.

l

The indicator on the CONF

button lights in red, conference

among the parties A, B and C

on the DN button is established.

(Supplement)

Pressing the TRANSFER button is available

instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1.

1 In this case, the indicator on the CONF button is

off in step 1, then in step 3 it lights in red by

pressing the CONF button.

>;~“ciilc -3 _

2 Cz=r:farence-One Appearance

Fieplace the handset or

press the

SP-PHONE button.

- If

both B

and C are outside

parties, both parties are

disconnected.

l

If both B and C are extension

users, or either of them is an

extension user, a conversation

between B and C is

established.

(Supplement)

If the conference originator presses another DN,

ICM, or CO button during a conference, the

originator seizes the line on the pressed button

and leaves the conference. The remaining two

parties are treated in the same way as if the

originator concluded the conference by replacing

the handset or by pressing the SP-PHONE

button.

To change the conference member after step 2,

press the FLASH button and execute slep 2

again.

4-G-6

5.02 Conference-Two Appearances

Description Programming

During a conversation with ar exrensic- CT zn

outside party on the DN or the CO bu;rzr

employing another DN or CO button .-s:eac z!

currently using button allows another party :a:

extension or an outside party) to join the

conversation and

offers Conference-Two

Appearances.

Conditions

On the

TSW

card, there

are eight standard

conference trunks provided for this purpose.

By equipping the optional conference expanson

card (KX-T336104), the number of conference

trunks increases to 64.

To utilize optional conference expansion card,

assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW

Additional CONF to “Yes.”

If two members of the conference are outside

parties, two conference trunks are necessary.

In other cases, one conference trunk is enough.

If a member of the conference is using the PITS

. provided with a display, the following message

appears on the display, showing the other two

members:

l

When both of the other members are

extensions:

1 El234 & E5678 1

-l--l-

- Directory numbers of the

extensions

l

When one is an extension and the other is an

outside party:

1 El234 & Panas 1

I

I Leading five digits of the

CO line’s name

l

When both of the other members are outside

parties:

Pressing the CONF button after calling the

second party establishes conference. If no

conference trunks are available, pressing the

CONF button is ignored and conference is not

established.

Pressing the TRANSFER button by the

conference

originator during a conference

restores conversation with the previous party,

placing the latter party on Consultation Hold.

Pressing the TRANSFER button again offers

conversation with the latter party, placing the

previous party on Consultation Hold. Pressing

the CONF button in this status restores the

conference.

Pressing the TRANSFER buttons by a conference

member other than the conference originator

during the conference is ignored.

1 Matsu & Panas 1

4-G-7

Operation

Establishing a Conference-Two Appearances Concluding a Confererce -T&c Pooearances

Extension A is having a conversation with party B

(an extension or an outside party) on the DN or

CO button.

The following is the operation from the standpoint

of extension A.

1. Rcc 3;e 5-e

-~-zsE: 0’ press the

SF-PHONE

D-Ton.

If both

B XC C z-a cutside

parties: bcth

oar,:es are

disconnected.

If both B and C are extension

users, or either of them is an

extension users: a conference

between B and C is

established.

CONF

El

-_

j D

.:

1. Press the CONF button.

l

The indicator on the CONF

button starts flashing in red 60

wink.

l

The other party B is placed on

Consultation Hold. Extension A

hears dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Press another idle DN or CO

button.

l

The pressed DN or CO button

lights in green.

3. Call another party C through

extension call if the pressed

button is DN or through CO call if

the pressed button is CO.

l

Start conversation with the party

C on the pressed DN or CO

button.

4. Press the CONF button.

l

The indicator on the CONF

button lights in red. Conference

conversation among the parties

A, B and C is established.

(Supplement)

Pressing the TRANSFER button is available

instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1.

In this case, the indicator on the CONF button is

off in step 1, then it lights in red in step 4 by

pressing the CONF button.

(Supplement)

If the conference originator presses another DN,

ICM, or CO button during a conference, the

originator seizes the line on the pressed button

and leaves the conference. The remaining two

parties are treated in the same way as if the

originator concluded the conference by replacing

the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

Placing the two other parties on hold during a

conference

1. Press the HOLD button.

l

The two parties,are held.

l

The indicator on the DN or CO

button flashes in green 60 wink.

l

You hear no tone.

Having a conversation with one party, by

dropping the other party

L--l

1. Press the DN or CO button of the

desired party.

L-l .

Conversation with the party of

the pressed button is

established.

The other party is disconnected

and the indicator light on the

button goes out.

To change the conference member after step 3,

press the FLASH button and execute step 3

again.

4-G-8

6.00 Unattended Conference

6.01 Unattended Conference-One

Appearance

Description

When an extension is in a conference with two

outside parties on one DN button, the extension

can leave the conference and establishes the

CO-to-CO call between other two parties by

pressing the CONF button: this is called

Unattended Conference-One Appearance.

During an unattended conference between the

two outside parties, the indicator on the DN

button flashes in 120 wink.

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, CO Transfer Mode to “Yes.”

The duration of the Unattended Conference is

limited by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration

Limit.

Programming

System Programming

“System-Class

of Service (l/2)“,

CO Transfer Mode

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

CO-CO Duration Limit

Conditions

If

rhe

extension is not allowed to execute this

function in Class of Service, or either or both of

the other parties are not outside ones, pressing

the CONF button during the conference is

ignored.

When the two occupied CO lines belong to

different trunk groups, the following time limits

apply to each case:

In the case one parry is an outgoing CO

call, the other is an incoming CO call; The

duration limit follows to the trunk group of

the incoming CO call.

If both are outgoing CO calls or both are

incoming CO calls; The longest duration

limit assigned to one of the two trunk

groups is used.

In the above cases, if an incoming call via DID

line is included in a conference, no limit applies to

the duration of the conference. .*

Unattended Conference Recall starts 50 seconds

before the time limit.

30 seconds of no answer after the start of the

Unattended Conference Recall causes Intercept

Routing-No Answer.

For further details, refer to Section%F-5.00

“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”

Warning tone is sent to both outside parties 15

seconds before the time limit. When CO-CO

Duration Limit applied is expired, both outside

parties are disconnected.

4-G-9

Operation

Establishing an Unattended Conference-One

Appearance

During a conference with two outside parties on

one

DN

button

1. Press the CONF button.

l

The indicator on the DN button

flashes in green 120 wink.

l

You leave the conference.

CO-to-CO call between the

other two parties is

established.

l

The indicator light on the

CONF button goes out.

Returning to a conference

1. Press the green DN button that is

flashing in 120 wink.

l

You join the conference again.

l

The indicator on the DN button

lights in green.

l

The indicator on the CONF

button lights in red.

,-

Answering Unattended Conference Retail

If on-hook, Unattended Conference Rem.. S:ZX:

If off-hook, call waiting tone sounds.

1. Press the green DN button that 1s

flashing in 120 wink.

l

You return to the conference.

l

The indicator on the

DN

button

lights in green.

(Supplement)

If no conference trunks are available at the time,

returning to the conference and answering

Unattended Conference Recall results in

conversation with the first party, placing the other

party on Consultation Hold.

Pressing the TRANSFER button offers alternate

conversation with the two parties.

Pressing the CONF button again restores the

Unattended Conference.

4-G-l 0

6.02 Unattended Conference-Two

Appearances

Description

When an extension is in a Conference-Two

Appearances with two outside parties, the

extension can leave the conference and

establishes the CO-to-CO call between other two

parties by pressing the CONF button: this is

called Unattended Conference Two

Appearances.

During an unattended conference between the

two outside parties, the indicators on both ^

buttons (both are DNs, or one is DN and the

other is CO, or both are COs) flash in 120 wink.

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, CO Transfer Mode to “Yes.”

The duration of the Unattended Conference is

restricted by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO

Duration Limit.

. Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

‘System-Class

of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

CO Transfer Mode

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“, 9-E-l .Ol 1 O-C-1 4.00

CO-CO Duration Limit

1;

parties are disconnected.

Alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15

seconds before the time limit. When CO-CO

Duration Limit applied is expired, both outside

Conditions

If the extension is not arioweo tc execute rnis

function in Class of Service, Oi anther or

Dorh 0:

the other parties are not otitside ones. Dressing

the CONF button is ignored.

When the two occupied CO lines belong to

different trunk groups, the following time limits

apply to each case:

If one party is an outgoing CO call and the

other is an incoming CO call; The duration

limit follows the trunk group of the incoming

CO call.

If both are outgoing CO calls or both are

incoming CO calls; The longest duration

limit assigned to one of the two trunks is

used.

In the above cases, if an incoming call via DID

line is included in a conference, no limit applies to

the duration of the conference.

Unattended Conference Recall starts 50 seconds

before the time limit.

30 seconds of no answer after the start of the

Unattended Conference Recall causes Intercept

Routing-No Answer.

For the further detail, refer to Section 3-F-5.00

“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”

4-G-l 1

Operation

Establishing an Unattended Conference-Two

Appearances

During a Conference on Two Appearances with

two outside parties

CONF

El

1. Press the

CONF button.

l

The indicators on the two

buttons (both DN buttons or

one DN and one CO or both

CO buttons) flash in 120 wink.

l

You leave the conference. -

CO-to-CO call between the

other two parties is

established.

l

The indicator light on the

CONF button goes out.

Returning to a conference

1. Press either of the two buttons

flashing in green 120 wink.

l

You join the conference again.

l

Both the indicators on the two

buttons light in

green.

l

The indicator on the CONF

button

lights in red.

Answering

If on-hook,

If off-hook,

Unattended Conference Recall

Unattended Conference Recall stat%.

call waiting tone sounds.

1. Press either of the two buttons

flashing in green 120 wink.

l

You join the conference again.

l

Both the indicators on the

buttons light in green.

l

The indicator on the CONF

button lights in red.

(Supplement)

If no conference trunks are available at the time,

returning to the conference and answering

Unattended Conference Recall results in

conversation with the party on the pressed

button, placing the other party on Consultation

Hold.

Pressing the TRANSFER button offers alternate x%-i

conversation with the two p+?ies,:, ________ _ ,_-._.

Pressing the CONF button again restores the

Unattended Conference.

4-G-l 2

7.00 Doorphone

Description

Up to

four

doorphones can be connected to the

system. This provides conversations between

extensions and doorphones.

Conditions

Only conversations are available for the door-

phone call. The other functions such as Hold,

Transfer are all ineffective.

Any extension user can call the doorphones

within the same tenant on the DN button by

dialing the feature number for “Doorphone Call

(l-4).” It is possible to direct calls from

doorphones to specified extensions, intercom

groups, pickup groups or Attendant Consoles in

“Extension-Doorphone”, Doorphone Call

Assignment.

If

Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of

each doorphone can be determined by the

system programming in “Extension- Doorphone”,

Tenant.

Set the duration of the door opener in “Extension-

Door-phone”, Open Duration. When Open

Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is

unavailable.

Opening the door is available to Attendant

Consoles and the extensions which are able to

receive calls from doorphones: the extensions

belonging to intercom groups and pickup groups

that are able to receive calls from doorphones.

They can open the door by dialing “5” during

conversation with the doorphone.

Programming

i

I

System Programming Reference

v-r Dumb

i “System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-D-6.03 1 O-C-1 0.00

Dootphone Call (l-4)

\ “Extension-Doorphone” 9-G-3.00 1 O-C-27.00

When a visitor presses the button on the door-

phone, ping-pong tone sounds twice, then

doorphone call ringing starts.

No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the

doorphone call.

Dialing “5” again while the door is open enables

the user to prolong the opening duration to the

specified duration assigned in ‘Extension-

Doorphone”, Open Duration.

When a call from a doorphone reaches the preset

extensions, the indicators on the SDN buttons

whose owners are the receiving extensions light

in red.

Operation

Calling from a doorphone

1. Press the button on the

doorphone.

l

You hear ping-pang tone.

l

When the other party answers,

start talking to the other party.

Answering a doorphone call

When your telephone set receivesadoorphone

call and rings,

1. Lift the hand set or press the SP-

PHONE button.

. Start conversation with the

calter

from the doorphone.

:::::s:

4-G-l 3

Calling a doorphone

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

.i 0

z 3.

After dialing the

feature number

for “Doorphone

Call (l-4),” dial

the doorphone number: 1 to 4.

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3,

start

conversation over the

specified doorphone.

After concluding conversation,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Opening the door

During a conversation over the doorphone

•l

1. Dial “5.”

JKL

5

l

The door opens for the

specified duration.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

8.00 Flash

Description

Flash aliows the extension user to get a line for

making a call on the selected line access button

again without hanging up. The FLASH button

can be used for this procedure. While still on the

CO,

DN,

or ICM line, press the FLASH button and

dial tone will be returned.

While or

after

talking on a CO line, the system

releases the CO DC loop after the FLASH button

is pressed for the specified period assigned in

“Group-Trunk Group”, Disconnect Time.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group

(l/2)“,

Disconnect Time

ISE-1.011 l&C-14.001

Conditions

While or after talking on a CO line, pressing the

FLASH button renews conversation duration,

inserts the automatic pause, and checks toll

restriction level again.

Flash stored in “System-Speed Dial-System”,

Speed Dialing-Station or One Touch dialing etc.,

functions as External Feature Access, not as this

feature.

Operation

Using Flash .” -

While hearing any tone, while dialing, or during a

conversation

1. Press the FLASH button.

l

After hearing dial tone 1 or 3 or

4, dial the telephone number.

4-G-l 4

9.00 External Feature Access

Description Operation

Gaining access to a feature (in

this

case, Call

Waiting) (1)

Sending a flash signal through the CO line allows

the extension to gain access to the features

offered by the host PBX, or to receive centrex

service provided by the central office, such as

Call Waiting and so on.

External Feature Access is effective only during a

1 :l conversation with an outside party.

A call arrives from another outside party during a

conversation with an outside party.

l

You hear call waiting tone.

1. Press the TRANSFER button.

Programming

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

System Programming Reference

v-f Dumb

“System-Numbering

Plan (3/g)‘, 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

External Feature Access

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

9-E-1 .Ol 1 O-C-l 4.00

Hook Switch Flash Time

“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)“, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00

Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal

“Extension-Station (2/3)“,

g-G-1.02 10-C-24.00

DN Key Type

tat

E!a

2. Dial the feature number for

4tie

780 “External Feature Access.”

*

l

The first party is held. Start

conversation with the second

party.

'Extension=statioTI (3/3)".

PF Key Type

DSS Key Type

9-G-l .03 1 o-c-25.00

1 O-C-26.00

Finishing conversation with the second party and

starting conversation with the first party again

1. Press the TRANSFER button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button

Assignment 12-c-l 90 2. Dial the feature number for

“External Feature. Access.”

PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

12-c-2.00

12-G3.00

0 Start conversation with the first

party.

Conditions Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call

Waiting) (2)

External Feature Access is ineffective when

“Group-Trunk Group”, Hook Switch Flash lime is

assigned to “None.”

The maximum dialing digits to be sent to the CO

line after sending the flash signal are restricted

by “Group-Trunk Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA

Signal.

The longest time limit among the following

assignments determines the time limit between

dialing digits.

A call arrives from another outside party during a

conversation with an outside party.

. You hear call waiting tone.

1. Press the External Feature

Access button.

l

The first party is held. Start

conversation with the second

PW.

l

“System-System 3mer”, External Firstdigit

Time-Out.

l

“System-System Timer, External Interdigit

Time-Out.

Finishing conversation with the second party and

starting conversation with the first party again

I. Press the External Feature

Access button again.

l

“System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction

Guard Time-Out.

l

Start conversation with the first

PaW.

-

4-G-l 5

10.00 Microphone

Mute

Description Operation

Microphcrs b.!,~~ 5.. ~‘6 ar ex:;ens;on user to

disable the

mcrcf’

o-e of !“e speakerphone.

This is useful w/x? the user needs to speak

privately with

soF+cne in :he

office while on an

inside, an outside. or a door-phone call.

If the user presses the AUTO ANSIMUTE button

during a hands-free conversation with

speakerphone on. the other party cannot hear the

user until he or sie presses the button again.

Setting Microphone Mute

During a hands-free conversation

1. Press the AUTO ANSMUTE

button.

Programming

None

Conditions

Microphone Mute does not disable the

microphones in

t3e

handsets.

Setting and canceling this function is available

only when the SP-PHONE is on. Pressing the

AUTO ANSMUTE button when the SP-PHONE

. is off sets Hands-Free Answer-back.

Refer to Section 1-D-2.01 “Intercom Hands-Free

Answerback.”

While Microphone Mute is set, the indicator on

the AUTO ANSMUTE button flashes in 60 wink.

l

The indicator on the AUTO

ANS/ MUTE button flashes in

60 wink.

l

The microphone of the SP-

PHONE becomes mute status.

Canceling Microphone Mute

1. Press the flashing AUTO

ANS/MUTE button again.

l

The indicator light on the AUTO

ANS/MUTE button goes out.

l

Microphone Mute is canceled.

t

4-G-l 6

11 .OO intercom Off-Hook Call

Announcement (OHCA)

Description

During a conversation using the handset by PITS

:eiephone KX-T7130, KX-Ti 23235 or KX-

T123230D, the extension user can receive

another call from intercom

Calling or

from

Attendant Console, unless the current call is

made by Intercom Calling.

To execute this function, optional T-SW OHCA

Expansion card (KX-T336105) and OHCA card

;KX-T96136) are

necessary.

Programming

Conditions

OHCA can be received only with the PITS KX-

T7130, KX-T123235, and KX-T123230D

telephones.

OHCA does not work if the receiving extension is

in the following situations:

Operation

Answering OHCA

You are having a conversation using the handset.

1. When the indicator on the ICM

button lights in green, you hear

two beeps. At the same time the

microphone and the speaker for

hands-free turn on automatically.

Talk to the caller over the

speaker.

Finishing the original call during a conversation by

OHCA

You are having conversations with the original

caller and the OHCA caller.

1. Replace the handset.

l

The original call is finished. The

OHCA call changes to hands-

free mode.

SP+l#?lE

rl

2. After finishing conversation, press

In the SP-PHONE button.

l

Talking in speaker phone mode.

l

Do Not Disturb is set.

l

ICM button is not idle.

l

“System-Class of Service”,

BSSIOHCA Deny is set to yes.”

4-G-l 7

12.00 Tone Through (End to End

DTMF Signaling)

Description

During a call (extension, outside or doorphcne,,

this function allows the PITS telephone use- :c

send DTMF (touch tone) signals to the voice path

when a dial pad button is pressed.

Tone Through mode is established automatically

after the dialing sequence.

End-To-End DTMF Signaling permits the

extension user to access network services suet,

as OCC access which requires touch-tone

signals.

Only during a conversation with an outside party,

Tone Through mode can be canceled by pressing

the Tone Through Break button (Assignable

Feature Button).

Programming

System Programming

“Extension-Station (2/a)“,

DN Key Type

“Extension-Station (3/3)“,

PF

Key Type

DSS Key Type

Reference

VT Dumb

9-G-l .02 10-c-24.00

9-G-l 43 1 o-c-25.00

1 O-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming

DN (Directory Number) Button

Assignment a

PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

Rekfence

12-C-l .oo

12-Z-2.00

12-Z-3.00

Conditions

The maximum dialing digits after canceling Tone

Through mode is restricted by ‘Group-Trur7i

Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal.

The longest time limit among the following

assignments determines the time limit between

dialing digits:

l

“System-System TimeT, External First Digit

Time Out

l

“System-System Timef, External Inter Digit

lime Out

l

“System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction

Guard Time Out

Operation

During a call (extension, outside or doorphone)

1. Dial the telephone number.

I dh I

l

DTMF signal is sent to the other

party while dialing.

Canceling Tone Through

During an outside call

1. Press the Tone Through Break

button.

l

Tone Through is canceled.

1 3

2. Dial the telephone number.

15s

EKI

789

*

l

The dialed number is sent in

accordance with the CO line

dial mode.

l

When the dialing sequence is

finished, Tone Through mode is

established again.

4-G-i 8

H. Paging Features

1.00 Paging

1.01 Paging All Extensions

Description Conditions

Paging

Ai!

Ex:ezs,c,zs allows any extension -ser

to perform paging on !he DN button to the a!

PITS telephone users at the same time through

the built-in speakers of PITS telephones.

Single Line Telephones (SLT’s) cannot be paged.

If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are

being paged by another page, busy tone is

returned to the new paging performer.

If any of the extensions is not being paged,

paging is executed.

The Class of Service of the user’s extensior

determines the extensions that can receive

paging. They are assigned to be paged by

“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

Access and also if they belong to the same

tenant as the performer.

See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group’ for de-u’ls

of paging groups.

To perform Paging All Extensions, dial the feature

number for “Station Paging” and “0.” To answer

paging, dial the feature number for “Station

Paging Answer.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

If you hear busy tone when attempting to page,

you cannot set Automatic Callback function.

Refer to Section 4-C-6.02 “Automatic Callback-

Station” for further information.

When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”

in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

Access within the same tenant, the performer

hears reorder tone.

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in

SP-

PHONES of on-hook PITS telephones.

4-H-l

Operation

Performing Paging All Extensions

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

123

q

2. Dial the feature number for

456

789 “Station Paging,” then dial “0.”

*

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, start paging.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Group Page All 1

3. After making the announcement,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Answering Paging All Extensions while being

. paged

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer.”

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

Transipr -; a -3 ~sir; Dag!?g All Extensions

Durlrc 2 XXJE-S;:~ 0~ ,k,:n an 2xrension or

outside SZT~

1 Pw; t?e TRANSFER button.

l

T/X

c:ner party is placed on

hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3

or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” and dial “0.”

l

You near confirmation tone 3.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Group Page All 1

\

I3

3. Start paging.

h ha

--- _----“1. __. --, -..-

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

4-H-2

1.02 Group Paging

Description

Group Paging provides paging on the DN Su?tor

to a group of extensions specified from eight

paging groups through the built-in speakers of

their PITSs.

The Class of Service of the user’s extension

determines the paging groups that can receive

paging. They are assigned to be paged by

“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

Access and also if they belong to the same

tenant as the user’s extension.

See Section 3-B-7.04 ‘Paging Group” for details

of paging groups.

To execute Group Paging, dial the feature

number for “Station Paging” and paging group

specifying number. To answer paging, dial the

feature number for “Station Paging Answer.”

Programming

System Programming

“System-Class

of Service (2/2)“,

Station Paging Access

‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)‘,

Station Paging

Station Paging Answer

Re

VT

9-o-4.02

9-D-6.03

Conditions

Srngle tine Telephones (SLT’s) cannot be paged.

If the designated paging group is being paged by

another page, busy tone is returned to the new

paging performer.

However, he can do paging within the range not

overlapping the previous paging range.

For instance, when paging is being done to group

1,

paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new

paging.

If you hear busy tone when attempting to page,

you cannot set Automatic Callback function.

Refer to Section 4-C-6.02 “Automatic Callback-

Station” for further information.

When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”

in ‘System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

Access within the same tenant, the performer

hears reorder tone.

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-

PHONES of on-hook PITS sets. .\

4-H-3

Operation

Performing Grcup Paging

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging.”

3. Dial the paging group number: 1

to 8.

.

After hearing confirmation tone

3, start paging.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Group Page x 1

-

$

paging group

number: 1 to 8

Transferring a call using Group Pag.ng

During a conversation with an extension or ar

outside party

1. Press the TRANSFER button

4. After paging, replace the handset

or press the SP-PHONE button.

Answering Group Paging while being paged

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

jl

l

The other party is placed on

hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3

or 4.

Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” and paging

group number: 1 to 8.

.

You hear confirmation tone 3.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

lGroupPagexj

T

paging group

number: 1 to 8

Start paging.

When an extension answers,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer.”

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

:.:<- -.

. . _

4-H-4

1.03 Paging External Pagers

Description Conditions

Allows

extension users to perform paging through

the external pager belonging to the same tenant

by employing the DN button.

If two external pagers are available in the same

tenant, two methods are available: one is to page

by designating one external pager, and the other

is to page using two pagers simultaneously.

If the designalec page- :s beirc tised, busy

tone

is returned

tc ?ne pagq ~effc~~!er.

If either or

both of the pagers in a tenant are

being used, it is not possibie !o page using two

pagers. Busy tone is rettirned to the user.

To execute this function, dial the feature number

for “External Pager” and to answer the paging,

dial the feature number for “External Paging

Answer”

If external pagers are not assigned in system

programming, reorder tone sounds.

The followings show the paging priorities:

Even if an external pager is connected to this

system, this function does not operate unless

“System-Operation”, External Paging 1, 2 is

assigned to “Yes.”

(1) Paging External Pager from an Attendant

Console

If Tenant Service is employed, assigning each

external pager to belong to a tenant is possible

-~lq+fnmk~ fvlusic Source”, External

Pager-Tenant.

(2) TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)

(Refer to Section 4-D-4.00 Yrunk Answer

From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.“)

(3) Paging External Pager from an extension

(this function)

(4) BGM through External Pager

If a lower priority page is active, and a higher

priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower

one: for instance, if Paging External Pager is

overridden by another higher priority, reorder

tone is returned to the performer of Paging

External Pager. If TAFAS signal or BGM is

overridden by another higher priority, it is

interrupted and starts again when the higher

priority is finished.

Confirmation tone from external pagers is

selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,

External Pager-Tone.

Programming

System Programming Rei

v-r

“System-Operation (l/3)“, 9-D-l .Ol

External Paging I,2

“System-Class of Serice (2/2)“, 9-D-4.02

External Paging p

“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-D-6.03

External Paging

External Paging Answer

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00

External Pager-Tenant

External Pager-Tone

rence

Dumb

1 O-c-4.00

1 O-C-8.00

lo-c-10.00

10-C-l 9.00

4-H-5

Operation

;ag;;g External Pagers

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging.”

3. Dial the number for specifying an

external pager or pagers: 0, 1 or

2.

0: specifies external pagers 1

and 2.

1: specifies external pager 1.

2: specifies external pager 2.

l

After you hear confirmation

tone 3, start paging through

the external pager(s).

l

If your PITS has a dispiay, it

shows:

External page xxx

-T

The number which

specifies an

external pager or

pagers:

All: specifies the external pagers

1 and 2.

1: specifies external pager 1.

2: specifies external pager 2.

j *T

1

4. After paging, replace the handset

j +

{+gs{ or press the SP-PHONE button.

‘I

:.nswering the external paging announcement

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

3. Dial the number of the external

pager:

1

or 2.

l

After you hear confirmation tone

3, talk to the caller who made

the page.

Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party

1

i 3.

a

L h!

q

,q 4.

Press the TRANSFER button.

l

The other party is placed on

hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3

or 4.

Dial the feature number for

“External Paging” and external

pager specifying number; 0, 1 or

2.

0: specifies external pagers 1

and2 _. .-._... -.

1: specifies external pager 1

2: specifies external pager 2

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

External page xxx

-T

Pager specifying

number

“a..

Start paging.

When an extension answers,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The held party and the paged

extension s:art conversation.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging Answer.”

4-H-6

1.04

Paging All Extensions and

External Pagers

Description

Paging All Extensions and External Pagers offers

both Paging All Extensions and Paging Externai

Pagers at the same time. It provides paging

through the preprogrammed external pagers and

the built-in speakers in PlTSs of the extensions

within the range of the tenant that the user

belongs to.

The user’s “System-Class of Service”, Station

Paging Access determines the paging groups of

the

extensions that can receive paging and also

External Paging determines the external pagers

that can receive paging.

Programming

Reference

System Programming v-r Dumb

‘System-Class of Service (2/Z)“. 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00

Station Paging Access

External Paging

1,2

‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

External Paging

Station Paging

External Paging Answer

Station Paging Answer

Conditions

Refer to Section 4-H-l .Ol “Paging All Extensions”

and Section 4-H-l .03 “Paging External Pagers.”

Operation

Performing Paging All Extensions and External

Pagers

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” or the feature

number for “External Paging,”

then dial =*.”

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, start paging.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 All Call Page 1

3. After paging, replace the handset

or press the SP-PHONE button.

.- -

‘5,:

4-H-7

Answering paging while being

paged Transferring a call using Paging Ail Extensions

Lift the handset or

press the SP-

PHONE button.

Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer,” or

the

feature number for “External

Paging Answer” and the number

of the external pager: 1 or 2.

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

and External Pagers

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party

1. Press the TRANSFER button.

l

The other party is placed on

hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3

or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” or the feature

number for “External Paging,”

then dial ‘*.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

All Call Page 1

\

i

3. Start paging.

I h6

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

. .

l

The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

.

4-H-8

2.00 Background Music (BGM)

through External Pager

Description

The system can provide up to two external music

sources. The music source can be broadcast as

background music (BGM) through external

pagers.

Starting or stopping BGM can be executed by the

operator 1 (Attendant Console or extension user)

in the same tenant that the external pagers and

external music equipment belong to. For

executing this function by PITS, use the DN

button.

To start and stop this function, use the same

feature number for “BGM Through External

Pager.”

Dialing the feature number while BGM is on stops

BGM, and reversely starts BGM while BGM is off.

To utilize this feature, first connect external music

equipments and external pagers to the system,

’ then assign “System-Operation”, External Music

Source 1,2 and External Paging 1,2 to “Yes.”

If Tenant Service is employed, assigning each

external music equipment and external pager to a

tenant is possible by using Trunk-Pager & Music

Source”, External Pager-Tenant and Music

Source-Tenant.

Assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External

Pager-BGM to “Yes” to use this function. This

assignmeptcan be done to eacb.external pager.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

“System-Operation (l/3)“, 9-D-l .Ol 10-C-4.00

External Paging 1,2

External Music Source 1,2

“System-Numbering Plan (8/g)“, 9-D-6.08 1 C-C-l 0.00

BGM Through External Paging

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00

External Pager-Tenant 1 O-c-l 9.00

External Pager-BGM

Music Source-Tenant 10-c-20.00

Music Source-For Use

Conditions

This function is effective when an external pager

and an external music equipment are connected

and programming has been completed.

Otherwise, the user hears reorder tone after

executing the operation to activate this function.

Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,

Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold &

BGM.” This assignment can be done to each

external music equipment individually.

4-H-9

Operation

Turning BGM on when BGM is off

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM

Through External Pager.”

After you hear confirmation tone

2, BGM sounds from the

external pager(s).

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 External BGM On 1 ’ ‘- External BGM Off

Turning BGM off when BGM is on

I.

Lif-t the handset or press the

SP-

PHONE

button.

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM

Through External Pager.”

After you hear confirmation tone

2, BGM from the external pager

(s) stops.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

7.

4-H-l 0

I. Other Features

1 .OO Night Service

1

.Ol Universal Night Answer (UNA)

Description Conditions

Allows any extension user in the system

tc

answer the incoming CO calls ringing at ar.

external pager, by dialing the feature number for

“Night Answer 1 or 2.”

To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE

and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA

1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External

Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External

Pager 2. All CO lines that belong to this trtink

group are covered by this assignment.

External pager must be connected to the system

beforehand.

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

the system.

To answer a call ringing at external pager 1, dial

the feature number for “Night Answer I ,” and to

answer a call ringing at external pager 2, dial the

feature number for “Night Answer 2.”

For further information about external pager

assignment, refer to Section 4-H-l .03 “Paging

External Pagers.”

To execute the system administration from a

remote location at night, select “RMT” for “Trunk-

CO tine” Night Answer Point assignment.

For further information about remote

administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00

“System Administration from a Remote Location.”

If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and

2) can have unique Night Service arrangement

individually.

The affiliation of each external pager is

determined by the system programming in

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-

Tenant.

The extension user cannot answer the UNA call

ringing at an external pager in the different

tenant.

Operation

Answering incoming CO calls ringing at an

external pager

Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. The

difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode

and UNA is available in night mode.

For further information about TAFAS, refer to

section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any

Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”

Prsgramming ;% t k .

Referents

System Programming VT %mb

‘Group-Trunk Group (l/Z)“, 9-E-l .Ol 1 K-1 4.00

Incoming Mode (Night)

j ‘Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-l .OO 1 C-3-: 8.00

I Night Answer Point

1 ‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)‘, 9-O-6.03 lC-Z-10.00

Night Answer 1

/ Night Answer 2

An incoming CO call is ringing at an

external pager.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. ..lf a call is ringing at exterr+a&+

pager 1: Dial the feature number

for “Night Answer 1.”

If a call is ringing at external

pager 2: Dial the feature number

for “Night Answer 2.”

I

c

3. Talk to the caller.

I hl

4-l-l

1.02 Flexible Night Service

Description

Flexibie Night Service allows the Operator

1

‘A!tenc~nt Console or extension user) to change

the assgned night answer destination on a CO

lme basis by dialing the feature number for

“Flexible Night Set-vice.”

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

lncomng Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. Ail CO

lines that belong to this trunk group are covered

by this assignment.

If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the

assigned night answer destination can not be

changed by the Operator 1.

Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service

is almost the same.

The difference is:

-. .

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

or Extension) can change the night

answer destination.

Fixed A group of extensions (Night

Answer Group) can be assigned as

the destination of one or more CO

lines in night mode

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

Plan (8/g)“. 9-D-8.08 10-C-10.00

Flexible NQht Smite

“Group-Trunk Group

(1 Q)",

9-E-1 .Ol lo-G14.00

incoming Mode (Night)

“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-l .OO lO-Gl8.00

Ni9ht Answer Point

Conditions

If tenant service is employed, the night answer

destination can only be changed for a CO line in

the same tenant by the Operator 1.

Operation

Changing a night answer destination to an

\ extension

2. Dial the feature number for

Flexible Night Service “72”

(default) and CO physical

number and destination

extension number.

. You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

NAP: Txxxx => Exxxx

T- T

Physical Extension

number number

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Changing a night answer destination to the

remote maintenance port

1. Lift the handSet or press the SP-

PHONE button.

.I

92s

q

2. Dial the feature number for

.s.

7.. Flexible Night Service 72”

. (default) and CO physical

number and FDN for remote.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2-u

7&;.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

NAP: Txxxx => RMT

T

Physical

number

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

4-l-2

(30393)

Changing a night answer destination to a UNA

(Universal

Night Answer)

1. Lift the handset or press the

SP-

PHONE button.

2. -Dial the feature number for

Flexible Night Service “72

(default) and CO physical number,

* and 1 for external pager 1 or *

and 2 for external pager 2.

Dl

*

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

L!J

1

or

NAP: Txxxx => UNAx

-?-- +

Physical 1 or 2

number

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode

Description

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either

automatically at pre-assigned time or manually

by the Operator

1

(Attendant Console or

Extension) at any time desired.

If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the

Operator 1 must dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode

Cancel’ for day service.

If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system

will switch the day and night modes at the

programmed time each day.

To utiliie Auto Switching mode, set “System-

Operation (s/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and

assign desired mode switching time to “Auto

Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.

To utiliie Manual Switching mode, set “System-

Operation (s/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”

The Operator 1, however, can overrfde the Auto

Mode setting, that is Manual Mode is

established. by dialing the feature number

for

“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the

Auto mode. the Operator 1 must dial the feature

number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

If tenant service is employed, night service

assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and

Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.

In this case, the assignment in “Sysfem-

Operation (363)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the

assignment in “System-Tenant” is applied to

Tenant 2. * -&x&. I- .

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT

Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)“.

9-0-1.03 10-C-4.00

Night Service

Auto Start Tme

“System-Tenant”,

Q-D-2.00 10-G5.00

Night Service

(Tenant 2)

Auto Start Time

“System-Numbering Plan (8/g)“, SD6.08

lWlO.OC

Night Mode Set

Night Mode Cancel

Night Service

Manual

Mode

Set

Night Service

Manual Mode

Cancel

4-l-3

(30393)

Conditions

If Auto Start Time on a cerar:: da. s -c:

assigned, the current moae IS COT: xsc ~1. 2

new start time is encountered.

If the Start Time for Day mode and Night -ccc

on the

same

day are set identically, the current

mode is continued.

If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed

at all, the current mode is continued. In other

words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode

is continued, and if the current mode is Night

then Night Mode is continued.

‘3

Operation

Switching Day mode to Night mode

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

0

z

3.

1 Night Mode 1

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Switching Night mode to Day mode

y 1. Wft the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Cancel.”

.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

.

If

your

PITS has a display, it

shows:

[Day

Swlrching Auto mode to Manuzl mode

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

Dial

the feature number for “Night

Service Manual Mode Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone I or

2.

l

If your PITS

has a display, it

shows:

1 Day/Night : Man 1

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Switching Manual mode to Auto mode

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Night

Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

Day/Night : Auto

3. Replace the handset or press the

Sf?GWONE

button. :. -

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-l-4

2.00 Account Code Entry

Description Operation

Entering an account code

when calling an

outside party

in the Forced mode

Account Code f?ri ‘5 cwc: !o icewfy incoming

and outgoing CO calls ‘3: account:ng and billing

purposes.

Entry of the code is appended to :he SMDR call

record and can be used later.

The account code can include up to 10 digits.

The validity of the entered account code is not

checked by the system.

Entry of account codes can be forced or optional.

In the forced mode, the account code must be

entered before making an outgoing CO call.

In the option mode, enter the account code, if

necessary.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

selecting a CO line.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

l

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button flashes.

Programming I[ 3. Press the FWD/DND button.

l-l

= .

.

You hear dial tone 2.

Conditions

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button lights in red.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Enter ACCNT Code

Only numerical characters “0 to 9” can be

entered as account codes. 4. Dial the account code.

Entering an account code over 10 digits sounds

the alarm tone.

l

Up to 10 digits can be entered

as an account code.

Be sure to enter ‘W after dialing a code, since “#”

delimits the code.

•l

5. Dial “#.”

#

l

The indicator light on the

FWDIDND button goes out.

l

Youh&rdial tone 1.

6. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

4-l-5

Entering an account

code when receiving a call

from an outside

party in the

Forced

mode

1. Press the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

l

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button flashes.

l

Talk to the other party

Press the FWD/DND button.

The indicator on the FWD/DND

button lights.

If your PITS has a display,-it

shows:

1 Enter ACCNT Code 1

3. Dial the account code.

l

Maximum digits for an account

code is 10.

•l

4. Dial “#I.”

#

l

The indicator light on the

FWD/DND button goes out.

Entering an account code after calling an outside

party or after receiving a call from an outside

party in the Option mode

1.

Press the

FWD/DND button

during a conversation with the

outside party.

.

The indicator on the FWD/DND

.-__*

button lights. C.-w:

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Enter ACCNT Code

2. Dial the account code.

l

Maximum digits for an account

code is 10.

Correctrng an error after dialing a wrong account

code

1 Press the FWD/DND button.

2. Dial the conect account code.

3. Dial “#.”

(Supplement)

Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not

provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the

PF3 button on them can be programmed to be

the FWDIDND button.

Refer to Section 9-G-l .03 “Station (3/3)” and

Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for

further information.

. .

.I

3. Dial 3.”

l

The indicator light on

the

FWD/

DND button goes out.

4-l-6

3.00 Timed Reminder (Alarm Clock)

Description

The extension user can use his or her PITS

telephone as an alarm clock.

When this feature is set, alarm tone will ring for 2

minutes at the programmed time from the built-m

speaker of your PITS telephone.

By going off-hook, the extension user can hear

the wake-up message, if it has been recorded

beforehand.

The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent

tone (dial tone 2) instead of the wake-up

message.

(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Trmed Reminder with

OGM (wake-up call).7

This feature can be set to operate only once or

everyday at a specitied time.

Programming

I

System Pmgfamming Reference

VT I Dumb

conclltlons

(1) What if the extension is busy or off-hook at the

programmed time?

Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes

on-hook.

(2) What if a call comes in when alarm tone is

ringing?

The call comes in on an extension (call

irukation is shown)’ but does not ring.

lt will ring after alarm tone stops to ring.

l

The caller hears busy tone if the call is

coming to a PDN button and the extension

has only one PDN.

(3) Remote limed Reminder

This feature can also be set by the Operator 1

or 2 to any extension.

(See Section 4-I-14.00 and Section

6-J-13.00.)

(4)

Newly programmed time overrides the old one.

Only the latest setting is valid at a single

extension whether it was set by the extension

itsetf or by the operator.

(5) Tone

Pattern

Alarm tone sounds in the following manner:

Operation

Setting the alarm time

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Dial the feature number for Timed

Reminder set r* 51” (default).

Dial %our” with two digits: 01 to

12.

Dial 9ninute” with two digits: 00 to

59.

Dial ‘0” for a.m. or dial ‘1” for p.m..

Dial “0” for limed Reminderone

time, or diil ‘1” Trmed Reminder-

every day.

l You

hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

lf your PlTS has a display, it

shows:

4-l-7

(40993)

Executing once at lo:15 a.m.:

Alarm lo:15 AM

Executing every day at lo:15 a.m.:

r-l 7.

p&

[ Alarm 10:X AM* 1

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling the alarm time programmed

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

rl

s

3.

Dial the feature number for Timed

Reminder Cancel ‘#5” (default).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Alarm Cancelled

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Confirming the alarm time programmed (PITS with

display or&)

.-

=*

Lii the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

1.

Dial the feature number for Timed

Reminder Confirm “*50” (defauft).

l

The display on your PITS

shows:

When no time is set:

[ Alarm Not Stored 1

It executing every day at 9:00 a.m.

is preset:

Alarm 9:00 AM *

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set

without display, reorder tone is heard.

To stop the ringing of alarm tone

When the preset time comes, alarm tone sounds.

If your PITS has a display, it shows:

<Example> piii%sq

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

_ . :

. Alarm tone stops and you hear a

wake-up message or BGM, or

“intermittent tone” (dial tone 2):

2. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

.

This @determined by the system programming.

Refer to Section 3-F-13-00 “Timed Reminder

with OGM (Wake-up Call).’

(Supplement)

In step 1, if you press any button (including dial

keypad) except SP-PHONE without going off-

hook, alarm tone stops and then no tone sounds.

Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following timing:

-nnn-

+l.osec~

4-l-8

(40993)

4.00 Background Music (BGM)

Description

Background Music can be supplied to any PITS

teiephone user in the system through the built-in

speaker of the PITS, when the PITS is on-hook.

An external music source (customer-supplied)

should be connected to the system beforehand.

Liiing the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE

button stops BGM temporarily.

Going back on-hook restarts BGM.

Operation

Hearing BGM

Dl

1. Dial

‘1”

in on-hook status.

1

l

BGM sounds from the built-in

speaker of PITS.

l

lf your PITS has a display, it

shows:

To set and cancel this function, use the same

feature number ‘1.”

While BGM is set, dialing “1” cancels BGM.

reversely it sets BGM when BGM is not set.

To execute this function, connect an external

music source, then set “System-Operation”,

External Music Source 1,2 to “Yes” and set

Vunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-For

Use to either ‘BGM” or “Hold & BGM.”

This setting (BGM or Hold 8 BGM) is assignable

to each external pager.

Programming

System Programming Fkference

v-r Dumb

‘System-Operation (1/3y,

901.01 1o-c-4.00

External Music Source 1,2

“Trunk-Pager 8 Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 lO-C-20oO

Music Source-Tenant

Music Source-For Use

* -,i --

conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of the

external pager is determined by the following

system programming.

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-

Tenant.

t BGMOn 1

Canceling BGM

While hearing BGM

Dl

1. Dial “1” in on-hook status.

1

l

BGM from the built-in speaker of

PlTS stops.

l

lf your PlTS has a display, it

shows:

4-l-9

5.00 Secret Dialing

Description Conditions

When using the PITS with a display, Secret

Dialing provides concealing all or part of the

registered telephone numbers that appear on the

display.

The telephone numbers are registered by

“System-Speed Dial-System” or stored into

Programmable Feature buttons on PITS and

DSS consoles. When storing a number, bracket

the secret part that you want to hide with [ j.

Then the part does not appear on the display

when the number is sent.

The feature numbers for selecting a CO line can

not be concealed by this feature.

If the telephone number “9-l -[201]-431-2111” is

stored in speed dialing code 01 by “System-Speed

Dial-System”, the following message appears on

the display when call is made:

9-l

-***-431-2111

When storing a speed dialing code, entering y [ ”

only without entering “I n causes ail the digits

entered after” [“to be hidden.

It is assignable to print out the secret part onto

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) or not

by “System-Operation”, Print Secret Dial.

Programming

System Programming I Reference

I v-r DuFIp

“System-Operation (2/3)“, 9-D-l .02 1 O-W.31

Print Secret Dial

“System-Speed Dialing-System”, 9-D-8.00 10-C-l MO

Dial

r--

PITS Station Programming Refer- I

DN (Directory Number) Button

Assignment

PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

12-c-i .4

12-G2.N

12-c-3.3

Operation

None

--

4-l-l 0

6.00 Data Line Security

Description

Used to

maintain the communication properly by

prohibiting various tones such as call waiting

tone

or

Held Call Reminder from sounding at the

extension in data communication mode. It also

prohibits other extensions from executing

overriding functions such as Busy Override.

To assign Data Line Security, assign “Extension-

Station”, Data tine Security to “Yes.”

Setting or canceling this function is executed

using the feature number for “Data tine Security

Set” or “Data tine Security Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

Conditions

Use the PDN button to set and cancel Data Line

Security mode.

Assigning Data Line Security always offers the

user conversation privacy unless Privacy

Release is executed.

. . If there is a conversation between the extension

setting Data tine Security and the extension not

setting it, Data Line Security applies to the both

extensions.

Operation

Assigning Data Line Security

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “Data

tine Security Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

if your PITS has a display, it

shows:

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling Data Line Security

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button. . .

2. Dial the feature number for “Data

tine Security Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2

thendial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If yo%r”PITS has a display, it ’

shows:

p2iiGzq

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-l-l

1

7.00 Absent Message Capability

Descrrption Conditions

J-ovides an absent message on the display of a

cailinq extension if the called extension has

assigned an absent message.

An absent message appears only on the PITS

telephones provided with the display.

If Tenant Service is employed, 10 programmable

messages can be split between two tenants by

assigning the boundary number in “System-

Tenant”, Absent Message Boundary.

Six fixed absent messages are shared with two

tenants.

There are six fixed and 10 programmable absent

messages that are common to the system and

can be assigned by system programming.

The

following are the six fixed messages (the “x”

means a parameter to be entered when

3

assigning a message at individual stations):

1) Will Return Soon

2)

Gone Home

3) In a Meeting

4, BackAt “i:‘“- m/;.

_ 5) Out Until x x/x x

= fzlltlth

6) At Ext xxxx

1 directory number

(three or four digits)

An extension user can select oniy one message

from six fixed and 10 programmable messages to

assign at a time. Setting multiple messages is

impossible.

When setting fixed messages 4), 5), 6) at a

station, the system checks the parameters entered

: for example, the parameters of “hour,” “minute,”

“a.m./p.m.” are checked in fixed message 4). In

case of a wrong entry, the user hears reorder tone.

When setting a flexible message by the system

programming, up to six parameters: “%” can be

entered. These are used to allow an extension

user

to enter

the desired parameters later at his

PITS set.

To set and cancel this function at individual PITS

sets, use the feature numbers for “Absent

Message Set” and “Absent Message Cancel.”

If a

flexible

message contains any parameter to be

entered, use “0 to 9”, cI *” and “#.”

If the user enters fewer or more parameters than

the assigned parameters, or enters characters

except “0 to 9

” =*’ and “#,” reorder tone is heard.

When an extension has set both an absent

message and Call Forwarding-No Answer feature,

Call Forwarding-No Answer is activated when the

extension’& called.

Programming

System Programming Refl

VT

“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00

Absent Message Boundary

“System-Numbering Plan (6/g)“, 9-D-6.06

Absent Message Set

Absent Message Cancel

“System-Absent Message”, 9-D-9.00

Fixed Message

Flexible Message

ence _i . .

Dumb

1 o-c-5.00

10-c-10.00

10-c-13.00

Refer to Section 4-F-2.03 “Call Forwarding-No

Answer” for further information.

4-l-l 2

Operation

Setting fixed message l), Z), or 3)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number

for

“Absent Message Set.”

3. Dial “01” for fixed message l), or

dial “02” for fixed message 2), or

dial ‘03” for fixed message 3).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2, then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting fixed message 1):

I Will Return Soon i

When setting fixed message 2):

Gone Home I

When setting fixed message 3):

In a Meeting 1

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Setting fixed messages 4), 5) or 6)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Absent Message Set.”

3. Dial “04” for fixed message 4), or

dial “05” for fixed message 5), or

dial “06” for fixed message 6).

4. Dial “TIME” for fixed message 4),

or dial “DATE” for the fixed

message 5), or dial “directory

number” for fixed message 6) as

follows:

Input format .&

for “TIME” : HH MM AM/PM

0 for a.m., 1 for p.m.

Input format for “DATE” : MM DD

--

01 to 12 (month) -

01 to 31 (day)

Input format for “directory number”:

three or four digits.

l

You hear confirmation tone, then

di&one.

l

If your PlTS has a display, it

shows:

When setting fixed message 4):

1 Backatxx:xxxx 1

When setting fixed message 5):

Out Until x x /x x

When setting fixed message 6):

At Ext. x x x x I

5. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-l-l 3

Setting a flexible nwssage Canceling the assigned message

7. L$ ?he handset or press the SF-

P+ONE button.

I. Lift the handset or

press

the

SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dral

the feature

number for

‘Absent Message Set.”

2. Dial the feature number for

“Absent Message Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3.

Dial the two digit message

number 07 to 16.

If the message requires any

parameters, enter all the

parameters.

.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2, then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display. it

shows the entered message.

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

--a;>

_. --

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

1’. *

4-l-14

8.00 Message Waiting

Description

Allows an extension user to indicate to another

exiensmn that a message is waiting for him or her,

by

turning on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on

the

called extension.

The extension user who received the message

waiting indication can call back the message

sender by simply going off-hook and pressing the

red lit MESSAGE indicator (button).

This feature is useful when the calied extension is

busy or does not answer the call.

Up to 500 message waiting indications can be set

for the whole system.

Programming

System Programming

“System-Tenant’,

Message Waiting Boundary

“System-Numbering

Plan (7/9)“.

Message Cancel

“Extension-Station (Z/3)“.

DN Key Type

“Extension-Station (3/3)-,

DSS Key

Type

Conditions

1. Suitable Telephones:

(1) Message Sender _

(1) Receiver’s extension is:

l

A

PITS telephone without a MESSAGE

button.

l

A Single Line Telephone without

MESSAGE lamp.

(2) The maximum number of message wafting

indications available for the system or

tenant l/2 has been assigned.

If your PITS has a display, it shows:

MW Not Accepted

3. Tenant Service

The maximum number of message waiting

indications available for Tenant

1

and 2 is

determined by “System-Tenant” Message

Waiting Boundary.

4. Setting of the multiple message waiting

indications

(1) More than one message sender can leave

message waiting indications to the same

extension at the same time.

(2) Even if the same message sender sets

message waiting indications to the same

extension more than once, this leaves only

one message on the called extension.

.-

5. The MESSAGE indicator on the message

receiver’s extension will be turned off when:

- .Anendant Conso@% ‘” .‘i ‘a;

l

A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE (1) The message receiver c% back the

button.’ message sender by pressing the red lit

l

Any Single Line Telephone MESSAGE button, and it was answered by

(2)

Message Receiver

l

A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE

the message sender (or by another

extension using Call Pickup or an SDN

button).

l

1

button:

l

A Single Line Telephone with

MESSAGE lamp.

* Refer to <Supplement> on page

4-l-17 for

further information.

(2) Message waiting indication is canceled by

the message sender.

l

’

(3) Message waiting indications are canceled

by the message receiver.’ *

2. Reorder Tone

A caller who attempts to leave message waiting

l

’ The indicator may not be turned off, if there are

other message waiting indications sent by other

extensions.

indication may hear the reorder tone in the

following cases:

l

7 All message waiting indications are canceled at

once.

4-l-l

5

(30393)

Operation by Caller

(At message sender’s extension)

Setting the Message Waiting Indication

1. Lift the handset or press the

SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the extension number of the

other party.

l

You hear ringback tone, or

busy tone 1 or 2, or DND tone.

-1 3. Press the MESSAGE button.

I

= .

.

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

The MESSAGE indicator of the

other extension lights.

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Canceling the Message Wafting Indication on

receiver’s extension set by a caller

1. Lii the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

%&sage Cancel Y#9” j&fault)

and the extension number of the

message receiver successively.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone

1

or 3 or 4.

l

If the other extension received

only one message, the

MESSAGE indicator of the

other

extension goes out.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Operation by Receiver

(A’ message recetvsrs extension;

Cahng back

the message sender

1. Lift the handset or press the

SP-

PHONE button.

2. Press the MESSAGE button that

is lit.

l

You hear ringback tone. When

the message sender answers,

start conversation.

l

If you received multiple

messages, catfing back the first

message sender is performed.

At the conclusion of the

conversation, the first message

is canceled.

l

At the conclusion of the

conversations with all the

message senders, the

MESSAGE indicator goes out.

Canceling all Message Waiting tndications on

your extension

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the ieature number for

f@essa$+e.Cancel?V9” (default)

and your own extension number

in succession.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

The MESSAGE indicator on

receiver’s extension goes out.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE buttoh.

4-l-l 6

(30393)

Confirming the message sender by the rxssage

receiver (for PITS with the disolaf oniy) arc

changing the calling o:der ,! munxxe messages

are left (for all PITSs).

In on-hook condition or SP-PH3NE on

MEGGAGE

1. Press the MESSAGE br;tton that

El -

is lit.

l

If your PITS has a dispfay. it

shows:

When the message sender is

an extension user:

[WI

When the message sender is

an Attendant Console:

2. Press the MESSAGE button that

is lit again.

- If multiple messages are left,

the second message

Sender

iS

displayed. The calling order of

the first message sender

becomes the last, and the

second message sender

becomes

the first.

(Note)

Repeating step 2 displays the message sender

on the display of PITS type 30 one by one in

receiving order.

The calling order also changes at the same time.

The illustration below shows the change at every

pressing of the MESSAGE button:

“e * in the illustration means pressing of the

MESSAGE button.

The order of

calling back 2

C------------------J

Displaying Time and Date Displaying the first caller Displaying the second caller

A MESSAGE button is not provided on the PITS’s listed below, but can be

assigned to the assignable buttons respectively, as follows:

PITS not provided with MESSAGE button Assignable

ButtOns

KX-T30830 ! DSS 8

I

KX-T30820, KX-T30850 I DN3 I

I

KX-T61620, KX-T61630. KX-T61650 I

DN 6 I

4-l-17

(30393)

-I

9.00 Electronic Station Lock Out

Description

Electronic Station Lock Out

allows an extension,

user to

prohibit other extension users from

making

outgoing CO calls from his or her extension.

Any three-digit number (000 to 999) can be used

as a lock code.

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, Station Lock to “Yes.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT f Dun-b

‘System-Class of Service (i/2)“,

9-O-4.01 IO-C-T.X

Station Lock

‘System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“, 9-D-6.07

lO-G;O.oC

Station Lock Set

Station Lock Cancel

Conditions

Both Operator 1 and 2 (extension user or

Attendant Console) can also set and cancel this

function.

Once the operator locks an extension, the

extension user cannot unlock it.

See Section 4-i-l 1 .OO “Remote Station Feature

Control” for the details.

Set and cancel Electronic Station Lock Out on the

I) PDN button.

Operation

Setting Electronic S:axn Lx3 CA

1. Lift the hanase: 3’ yess tt?e SP-

PHONE button.

rl

z 5.

Dial the feature number for

“Station Lock Set.”

Dial the lock code: 000 to 999.

Dial the same lock code again.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

Locked No. : xxx

T

lock code

Replace the handset.

.I

Canceling Electronic Station Lock Out

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

‘Station Lock Cancel.”

3. Dial the lock code.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

l

If your PITS

has

a display, it

shows:

1 Unlocked 1

4. Replace the handset.

4-l-l 8

10.00 Assigned Feature Clear

Description

Allows an extension user to clear the following

features assigned on it by dialing the feature

number for “Station Program Clear” :

(a) Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

(b) Absent Message

(c) Timed Reminder

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

Operation

- Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

The indicator on the PDN

button lights in green.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Program Clear.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 Ext Data Clear 1

I I

-

3. Replace the handset.

I

“System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“,

Station Program Clear

1 9-D-6.071 lOC10.00 1

Conditions

Execute Assigned Feature Clear on the PDN

button.

4-l-l 9

11 .OO Remote Station Feature

Control

Description

Allows

the

Operator

1

and 2 (extension user or

Attendant Console) to cancel or set the following

features assigned to each extension:

Features to be canceled:

l

DND (Do Not Disturb)

l

Electronic Station Lock Out

l

FWD (Call Forwarding)

(It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily.)

Features to be set:

l

DND (Do Not Disturb)

l

Electronic Station Lock Out

Programming

I

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

I

“System-Numbering Plan (8/g)“, 9-D-6,

Remote Station Lock Set

Remote Station Lock Card

Remote DND Set

Remote DND Cancel

Remote FWD Cancel

Remote FWD Cancel-OneTime

1 O-c-l 0.00

Conditions

When an extension is locked by the operator,

unlocking by the locked extension itself is

$ impossible.

_.

. 1 I- i.

Operation

Setting/canceling Do

Not Disturb to/from an

extension

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Setting : Dial the feature number

for ‘Remote DND Set.”

Canceling : Dial the feature

number for “Remote

DND Cancel.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

Confirmation tone

1

or 2 sounds.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting:

DND Set: E xxxx

.I 3-

Extension Number

When canceling:

DND Cancel: E xxxx

T-

Extension Number

/

x-u+:-

.-

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-I-20

Setting/canceling Electronic Station Lock Out

to/from an extension

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

I I

2.

2. Setting : Dial the feature number

for “Remote Station Lock

Set.”

Canceling : Dial the feature

number for “Remote

Station Lock Cancel.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

.

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

When setting:

/-Tzzzq

T

Extension number

When canceling:

Unlocked: E xxxx

-T

Extension number

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

‘+. c-

123

EFI

3.

456

709

*

rl

S\

4.

Canceling Call

temporarily

1.

(23

Etl

2.

4se

700

*

Dial the teaWe w=%’ ‘or

“Remote FWC “,ar.c;.

Dial the directory number of the

extension.

. You hear confirmation

tone 1 Or

2.

. If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

FWD cancel: E xxxx

3-

Extension number

Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Forwarding from an extension

Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

.:;.,.

-a.-

Dial the feature number for

“Remote FWD Canc&-Qne Time.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

Call

Forwarding is canceled

temporarily.

. Calling the extension starts.

4-l-21

12.00 DSS Console

Description

The DSS Console is used to monitor the

busy/idle status of the extension users in the

system, and make a call to an extension user by

simply pressing the associated DSS (Direct

Station Selection) button.

The DSS Console provides a convenient way to

transfer an incoming CO call to an extension user

by simply pressing the associated DN*DSS

button instead of pressing the TRANSFER button

and dialing the extension number.

(See 4-l-l 2.01 “Automatic Transfer.” )

The DSS Console can also be used to make an

outgoing CO call and to access certain

programmable feature (e.g. Call Park-System).

Up to 16 DSS Consoles (one per extension port)

can be connected to the system in conjunction

with a PITS telephone.

Place the DSS Console.and the paired PITS

telephone side by side on your desk.

We provide three types of DSS Console as

illustrated below:

DSS buttons (16) PF buttons (16)

KX-I61640

DSS buttons (32) PF buttons (16)

I I I 1

KX-T123240

DSS buttons (32) PF buttons (16)

KX-T7040

The DSS Console has an array of 32 DSS

buttons” plus 16 PF (Programmable Feature)

buttons.

‘* The KX-T61640 has only 16 DSS buttons.

4-l-22

Any extension directory number can be

programmed to each DSS button, and the

associated LED indicator for each button

provides a busy,‘idle indication of the

programmed extension. Various features can be

programmed to the DSS and PF buttons.

The assignment for the DSS buttons and PF

buttons are programmed and changed either by

the system programming or PITS station

programming.

Programming

ti

PITS Station Programming

PF (Programmable Feature) Button

Assignment

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button

Assignment

Reference

12-c-2.00

12-C-3.00

Conditions

None . .

i ,L

-

4-l-23

12.01 Automatic Transfer

Description

Allows

the

DSS console

operator to

transfer the

CO call to an extension

user by simply pressing

the associated DN*DSS button on the DSS

console.

This performance is, as a result, equivalent to the

operation of Call Transfer of a CO call to an

extension on a DN button.

To execute Automatic Transfer, assign ‘System-

Operation”, DSS Operation Mode to ‘With

Transfer.”

Defauft is set to With Transfer.”

If DSS Operation Mode is set to “Without

Transfer,” pressing the DN-DSS button

disconnects the other party and only calls the

extension user.

Programming

I

System Programming Reference

VT I

Dumb

“System-Operation (l/3)“,

DSS Operation Mode / 40-1.01 j

i(FG& /

Conditions

Automatic Transfer is effective only durfng a

conversation with an outside party when the

DSS

console does not have

a call on Consultation

Hold.

If the

DSS

console has a call on Consultation -

Hold, the system ignores the pressing of the DN*

DSS button.

Pressing the DN*DSS button in the following

modes causes the corresponding operations.

Modes

of call Operations caused by

pressing the DN*DSS button.

Talking to an Calls the extension by

outside party placing the current call on

on the DN Consultation Hold.

button

Talking to an Calls the extension by

extension on disconnecting the current

the DN button call.

Talking on the By placing the current call on

CO button Consuftation Hold, selects

the DN button automatically,

and calls the extension.

Talking on the By disconnecting the current

ICM button call. selects the

DN

button

automatically, and calls the

extension.

*l

-1

*2

*3

rl

: If it is impossible to place the arrrent call on

Consultation Hold, the system ignores the

pressing of the DN=DSS button.

r2

: If there is no idle PDN button, the current

call is placed on Consultation Hold

and no

tone sounds.

-3 : lf there is no idle PDN button, the current

call is disconnected and no tone sounds.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For s.e%ffhg Music on Hold, prior a

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation

During a conversation with an outside party

1. Press the DN=DSS button on the

DSS Console.

l

As soon as

the

other party is

placed on Consultation Hold,

extension calling starts and

ringback tone sounds.

4-l-24

13.00 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Recording and Playing Back

Deacrfptlon

Up to four OGM’s can be recorded by the Operator

1 (Attendant Console or PlTS user) so that

different messages can be used for different

situations. _

The following four types of OGM can be recorded

respedively:

DISA, UCDl , UCD2 and W-UP (Wake-up)

OGM for outside parties

OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who

called the system via DISA feature.

(See Section 3-D-2.02 ‘Direct Inward System

Access (DISA) .3

OGM for UCD 1 and UCD 2 are played to the

outside party in conjunction with UCD feature.

(See Section 3-D-2.06 ‘Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD)-with CGM.“)

OGM for extension users

CGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wake-

up message for the extension user.

(See Section 3-F-13.00 Timed Reminder

with

OGM (Wake-up Call).“)

Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.

A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to

four DISA cards can be- installed to the system. .;r

Usage of each DISA card is determined by the

system programming.

(See Section 9-K-l .OO “Special Attended-DISA.“)

Programming

I

System Programming Reference

VT Icvnb

Conditions

(1) Tenant Service

lf tenant service is employed, the affiliation of

each DISA card is determined by the system

programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.

The Cperator 1 of each tenant can record and

play back the CGM within the same tenant.

(2) Recording of CGM

l

OGM recording is executed by selecting an

CXN type (usage of DISA card) from the

following four types:

1. ffiM1 for UCD with CGM

2. CGM2 for UCD with CGM

3. CGM for DISA

4. CGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

l

If the type of multiple DISA cards are the

same in a tenant, the same message is

recorded for them at a time.

(3) Playing back of CGM

l

The following two ways are available:

A. By selecting an OGM m

B. By designating the logical number of

each DISA card directly.

l

If there are multiple DISA cards of the same

type in the system or a tenant and the OGM

type is selected to play back, playback starts

from the lowest DISA card physical number,-

(4)

Others

Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited

during OGM recording and playing.

‘System-Numbering Plan (g/9)‘. 9-D-6.09 lO&lO.OO

OGM Record

OGM Playback

“Special Attended-DISA”. For Use 9-K-1.00 lOGiO.00

4-l-25

(40993)

Operation

Recording OGM from PITS (For Operation from

Attendant Console. refer to Section 6-J-8.00

Wgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing

Back.-)

1.

3.

rl

4.

lrl

YYQII

Lff the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

5 You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for OGM

Record 791” (default) and the

resource number (1 to 4) in

succession.

(Resource number)

1 : OGMl for UCD

2 : OGM2 for UCD

3 : OGM for DISA

4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

l

The MEMORY indicator flashes

in red 60 wink, confirmation tone

3 is heard.

l

ff your PITS has a display, it

shows:

xxxxxxxx Rec. : 00

I 7

t

Indicates recording

time, counts up by

second.

UCD-OGMl or

^ UCD-OGM2 or .z’-

DISA-OGM or WkupOGM

Begin your message.

As soon as you finish, press the

MEMORY button.

l

The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.

l

After confirmation tone 3

sounds, the recorded message

is played back automatically.

r-l

+z,

If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

xxxxxxxx Play : 00 I

T +

Indicates playback

time, counts up by

second.

UCD-OGMl or

UCD-OGMP or

DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM

When playback is finished, the

MEMORY indicator goes out.

You hear confirmation tone 3,

then no tone.

5. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

L I

(Supplement) -

In step 3 ff 30 seconds is over, recording is

terminated and piayback starts automatically.

Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4

aftenrvard. . .

In step 3 if you wish to change the message

during recording, you can start recording again

by dialing * .”

In sfep 4 if you wish to interrupt and finish

playback, press the MEMORY button.

4-l-26

(40993)

Playing back OGM

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

183

48.

EFI

2. Diil the feature number for OGM

?8*

I -playback 792” (default) and a

number below in succession.

(Supplement)

In

step 2

if you wish to interrupt and finish

playback, press the MEMORY button.

During playback you can start playback again

from the beginning by dialing v* .”

(Resource number)

1: OGMl for UCD

2: OGM2forUCD

3 : OGM for DISA

4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

(*” and DISA No.)

l

l: sebectscard 1

l

2: selects card 2

* 3: selects card 3

l

4: selects card 4

l

The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.

You hear confirmation tone 3,

then the message.

. If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

1 DISA-OGM

Play:

00 i

. When playback is finished, you

hear confirmation tone 3, then

no tone.

l

The MEMORY indicator goes

Out.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-l-27

(40993)

14.00 Remote Timed Reminder

-One Time

Description Operation

Allows the Operator 1 or 2 (Attendant Console or

PITS with display) to set “Timed Reminder’

feature to any extension.

(Refer to Section 4-1-3.00,5-G-3.00 “Ttmed

Reminder.“)

Setting Xmed Renrnder SC another extension

If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed

beforehand, the extension user (on which

Remote Timed Reminder is set) hears a wake-up

message.

(Refer to Section 3-F-l 3.00 “Timed Reminder

with OGM (Wake-up Call).“)

Programming

System Programming

1

Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

“System-Numbering Plan (9/9)^,

Remote limed Reminder

Confirm

Remote Timed Reminder

Set

Remote Timed Reminder

Cancel

9-D-6.09

104-10.00

Conditions

(1) The difference between “limed Reminder”

and “Remote Timed Reminder” is:

Remote by extenison

limed itself

Reminder

;Valiiity of the

setting -

Once or

everyday at the

programmed

time

Once

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dii the feature number for

Remote Tmed Reminder Set

7*1’ (default) and the extension

number to be set Timed Reminder

in succession.

3. Dial “hour with two digits: 01 to 12.

4. Dial ‘minute” with two digits: 00 to

59.

5. Dial “0” for a.m. or diil r” for p.m..

. You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2

and then diil tone l or 3 or 4.

l

If your PlTS has a display, it

shows:

1 El00 11:ll AM 1

-i

L

Extension number

1

6. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(2) At a single extension, only the latest setting is

valid whether it was set by the extension itself

1

(Timed Reminder) or by the Operator 1 or 2

(Remote Timed Reminder).

4-l-28

(40993)

Canceling Xmed Reminder set to another

extension

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

(Supplement)

2. Diil the feature number for

Remote Timed Reminder Cancel

7r (default) and the extension

number to be canceled Remote

Tii Reminder in succession.

When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set

without display, reorder tone is heard.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If your PITS has a display, it

ShOWC

1 El00 Cancelled 1

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Confirming the alarm time programmed to another

extension (PITS with display only)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

Remote Timed Reminder Confirm

“7+ 0” (default) and the extension

number to be confirmed the

setting in succession.

l

The display on your PITS

shows:

When no time is set:

Alarm Not Stored

If executing at 9:00 a.m. is preset at

Extension 100:

1 El00 9:00 AM 1

4-l-29

(40993)

Section 5

Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)

(Section 5)

Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)

Contents

Page

A Outgoing Ca!l Features . . . . . . . . . .._......................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-A-1

1 .oo

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

Making Outside Calls.. ........................................................................... 5-A- 1

1 .Ol Local Trunk Dial Access .............................................................. 5-A-l

1 .02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access ............................................ 5-A-2

1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access ................................. 5-A-3

Automatic Dialing ................................................................................... 5-A-4

2.01 Speed Dialing-Station .................................................................. 5-A-4

2.02 Speed Dialing-System ................................................................. 5-A-6

2.03 Last Number Redial (LNR) .......................................................... 5-A-9

2.04 Pickup Dialing.. ............................................................................ 5-A-9

Making Internal Calls.. ........................................................................... 5-A-11

3.01 Inter Office Calling ....................................................................... 5-A- 11

Automatic Callback ................................................................................ 5-A-1 2

4.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk ........................................................... 5-A-l 2

4.02 Automatic Callback-Station ......................................................... 5-A-13

Executive Busy Override ....................................................................... 5-A- 14

Do Not Disturb (DtiD) Override ............................................................. 5-A-l 5

Walking COS (Class of Service) ............................................................ 5-A- 16

Operator Call ......................................................................................... 5,A-17

B Receiving Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-B-l

1 .OO Call Pickup.. ...........................................................................................

1 .Ol Dial Call Pickup ...........................................................................

1.02 Directed Call Pickup ....................................................................

1.03 Call Pickup Deny .........................................................................

2.00 Truiik Answer From Any %tion (TAFAS)-Day Service.. ......

“:.

.......

z..

....

3.00 Executive Busy Override Deny ..............................................................

4.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) ...........................................................................

5.00 Call Waiting ............................................................................................

6.00 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-Log Out.. .............................................

C Holding Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._........._.................................................. 5-c-1

1 .OO Hold ...................................................................................................... 5-c-1

2.00 Consultation Hold ..................................................................................

5-c-2

3.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station .....................................................................

5-c-3

4.00 Call Park ...............................................................................................

5-c-4

4.01 Call Park-System ......................................................................... 5-c-4

4.02 Call Park-Station ......................................................................... 5-c-5

5-B-l

5-B-2

5-B-3

5-B-4

5-B-5

5-B-6

5-B-8

5-B-l 0

5-l

Page

D Transferring Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.........................................................- 5-D-l

1 .OO Call Transfer .......................................................................................... 5-D-l

1 .Ol Unscreened Call Transfer to Station.. .......................................... 5-D-l

1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station.. .............................................. 5-D-2

1.03 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote .......................................... 5-D-3

1.04 Unscreened Call Transfer to Attendant Console ......................... 5-D-3-l

1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) ............. 5-D-3-2

2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD) ......................................................................... 5-D-4

2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls ............................................................. 5-D-4

2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off -Hook ................................................... 5-D-7

2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer ......................................................... 5-D-l 0

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer.. .............................. 5-D-l 3

2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk ............................................................. 5-D-l 6

4

E Conversation Features . . . . . . .._......._._...._....._....._..........____.._....___.........................

5-E-l

1.00 Conference ............................................................................................ 5-E-l

2.00 Doorphone.. ........................................................................................... STE-2

3.00 External Feature Access.. ................................ .: .................................... 5-E-3

F Paging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._....................... 5-F-l

1.00 Paging.. .................................................................................................. 5-F-l

1.01 Paging All Extensions.. ................................................................ 5-F-l

1.02 Group Paging .............................................................................. 5-F-3

1.03 i%ging External Pagers.. ........... y.. ....... [. ...................................... 5-F-5

1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers ............................... 5-F-7

2.00 Background Music (BGM) through External Pager.. .............................. 5-F-8

G Other Features . . . . . . . . ..__...._ _ ______....._........._ _ ._.._._..__.____.._..._..._........_..__....._.._.__.._

5-G-l

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

Night Service .........................................................................................

1 .Ol Universal Night Answer (UNA) ....................................................

1.02 Flexible Night Service.. ................................................................

1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode ......................................................

Account Code Entry. ..............................................................................

Timed Reminder ....................................................................................

Data Line Security .................................................................................

Absent Message Capability ..................................................................

Message Waiting ...................................................................................

Electronic Station Lock Out ...................................................................

Assigned Feature Clear .........................................................................

Remote Station Feature Control.. ..........................................................

5-G-l

5-G-2

5-G-3

5-G-5

5-G-7

5-G-9

5-G-l 0

5-G-l 2

5-G-14

5-G-15

5-G-l 6

5-2

(30393)

A. Outogoing Call Features

1.00 Making Outside Calls

1 .Ol Local Trunk Dial Access

Description

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO calls

by automatic selection of an idle CO line.

Dialing the feature number for ARS/Local CO Line

Access” enables you to execute this function.

Operation

1. Lift the handset .

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

To activate this feature, set “System-Operation”,

Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If set to “Yes,

” ARS feature is activated instead of this feature.

Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route

Selection (ARS)” for further information.

Programmfng

Reference

System Pfogrammng VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1 n)“.

9-D-l .Ol 10-c-4.00

Automatic Route Selection

2. Dial the feature number for

“ARSRocal CO Line Access.”

l

You hear dial tone 1.”

3. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

“System-Local Access Group”. SD5.00

10-C-9.00

Hunt Sequence

“System-Numbering

Pfan (2/g)“, SD6.02 lCG10.00

ARSlLocal CO Line Access

Conditions

An idle CO line available and hunting sequence is

determined by the system programming “System-

Local Access Group’, Hunt Sequence.

If an extension user hears busy tone, there is no

idle CO line available.

If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user

is restricted from accessing this feature.

Refer to Section 3-C-l .Ol “Toll Restriction for

Local Trunk Dial Access,” for further infomration.

If tenant service is activated, accessible trunk

group is limited to the trunk groups within the

same tenant.

,’

The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk group

in hunt sequence 01 in “System-Local Access

Group.”

5-A-l

1.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial

Access

Description Operation

Allows extension use-s to make outgoing CO

calls via an idle CO ii-? in the specified trunk

group by dialing the %ature number for “Trunk

Group 01-08 Access’ 3r “Trunk Group 09-l 6

Access.”

Programming

System Programmrg Reference

VT I Dumb

“System-Class of Serve (2/2)“,

Trunk Group Access

“System-Numbering F%n (2/g)‘,

Trunk Group Ol-OE Access

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

Conditions

Trunk groups to be specified are limited to the

ones assigned in “System-Class of Service”,

Trunk Group Access.

If an extension user ‘ears busy tone, all CO lines

in the specified trunk group are not available.

If an extension user bears reorder tone, the user

is restricted from accessing the specified trunk

group.

Refer to Section 3-C-t .03 ‘7011 Restriction for

Individual Trunk Grocp Dial Access/Direct Trunk

j Access,” for further irformation.

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2-l Specifying any one of trunk

groups 01 to 08

1) Dial the feature number for

“Trunk Group 01-08 Access.”

2) Dial the trunk group

specifying number : 1 to 8.

l

Trunk group specifying number

matches trunk group number,

as follows:

Trunk Group Trunk Group

Specifying Number Number

1 01

2 02

3 03

4 04

5 05

6 06

7 07

a 08

2-2 Specifying any’dne of trunk

groups 09 to 16

1) Dial the feature number for

“Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access.”

2) Dial the trunk group

specifying number : 1 to 8.

l

Trunk group specifying number

matches trunk group number,

as follows:

Specifying Number

i

Trunk Group

Number

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

3. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

5-A-2

1.03 individual Virtual Trunk

Group

Dial Access

Description Operation

Allows extension users to make outgoing CO

calls using Special Carrier Facilities by

simply

.dialing the feature number for “Trunk

Group 17-

24 Access.”

Detailed data, such as access codes and

authorization codes, required to Special Carrier

Access must be programmed beforehand in

“Special Carrier Access” screen.

Trunk groups available for Special Carrier

Access is also defined in the same screen.

Special carriers available for each extension user

is defined in “System-Class of Service (2/2)”

Special Carrier Access.

It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier

Access on system-wide basis.

Refer to Section 1 O-C-52.00 “World Select 2-

EQU/OCC Access Assignmenr for further

information.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT DlJmb

“System-Class of Service (2/2)“, 9-O-4.02 10-C-8.02

Special

Carrier Access

“System-Numbering Plan (2/g)“, 9-O-6.02 10-6-10.00

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

‘Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-l .oO 1 O-C-30.00

AccessIOCC Access’, 9-H-2.00 1 O-C-31 .OO

“World Select 2” - 1 O-c-52.00

Conditions

None

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

‘Trunk Group 17-24 Access.”

3. Dial the virtual trunk group

specifying number : 1 to 8.

l

Virtual trunk group number

matches virtual trunk group

specifying number and digit

modification table number

(Equal access table number 1

to 4, OCC access table number

1 to 4 which should be

assigned beforehand), as

follows:

Virtual Trunk Virtual Trunk Digit Modification

Group Number iruouEeTpecifyin9 Table Number

17 1 Equal access I

18 2 table number 2

19 3 3

20 4 1 21 5 OCCaccess y

22 6 table number

+

2

23 7 3

24 8 4

4. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

5-A-3

2.00 Automatic Dialing

2.01 Speed Dialing-Station

Description

Allows SLT teiepnone ;se:s to program frequently

dialed telephor?e numbers (both extension and

outside numbers) In the Speed Dialing code (0 to

9 : dedicated to each SLT telephone user) by

dialing the feature number for “Speed Dialing-

Station Programming.’

To make a call using pre-assigned Speed Dialing

code, dial the feature number for “Speed Dialing-

Station” and appropriate Speed Dialing code (0 to

9).

\ .

\

a

Up to 10 codes can be registered for each SLT

telephone.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT

Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (2/9)n, 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00

Speed Dialing-Station

“System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“, 9-O-6.07 10-C-10.00

Speed Dialing-Station

Programming

Conditions

To register the outside number in a speed dialing

code, the feature number for selecting a CO line

must be registered as leading digits.

When calling an outside party automatically:

9 - 411 - 3209 .-- T.-

L

Feature number for “ARS/Locai CO Line

Access”

When calling an outside party by specifying the

trunk group:

811 -411 - 3209

--L Feature number for “Trunk Group 01-08

Access” or

Feature number for “Trunk Group 09-l 6

Access” or

Feature number for “Trunk Group 17-24

Access”

Each stored number can have up to 16 digits

including

CO

line access code.

Numbers from “0 to 9” and &*” can be registered.

To store “PAUSE,” dial y* *.”

When SLT is connected with HLC card, the SLT

can use One Touch Dialing and the special dials

such as secret dialing etc. which are stored for

PITS.

It is performed by connecting PITS with HLC card

temporarily and registering One Touch Dialing by

using the PITS.

In this case, One Touch Dialing codes stored o?i

PFl to PFlO on a PITS match speed dialing

codes by SLT (Single Line Telephone), as

follows:

PITS SLT

One Touch Dialing Speed Dialing-Station

PFl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

PF2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

PF3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

PF4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

PF5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

PF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

PF7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,6

PF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

PF9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-...............

8

PFlO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

5-A-4

Operation

Stcri:g the telephone number

Executing Speed Dialing-Station

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Speed Dialing-Station

Programming.”

1.

Lift the handset.

2.

3. Dial the speed dialing code : 0 to

9.

4. Dial the telephone number that

you want to store.

5. Dial “#.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

6. Replace the handset.

(Supplement)

When using a rotary telephone (pulse type), wait

until you hear confirmation tone in s&p 5 withoyt

dialing “#.”

Dial the feature number for

“Speed Dialing-Station.”

l

No tone is heard.

Dial the speed dialing code: 0 to

9.

l

Registered telephone number

is sent.

S-A-S

2.02 Speed Dialing-System

Description

System Speed Dialing allows

any e&-s x user

to call outside parties by dialing me

fe&re

number for “Speed Dialing-System”

and a pre-

assigned 3-digit code (001 to 200) common to

any extension user in the system.

Up to 200 Speed Dialing Codes can be registered

to the system.

The speed dialing codes are registered in

“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and

specific toll restriction level for each speed diahng

code can be assigned in the same screen.

Refer to “Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed

Dialing” on next page for further information.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“System-Tenant”, Speed Dialing-

9-D-2.00 1 O-C-5.00

System Boundary

“System-Numbering Plan (2/g)“,

9-D-6.02

10-6-10.00

II Speed Dialing-System

“System-Speed Dialing-System” 9-D-8.00

10-C-12.00

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, Speed Dialing

Codes can be split by two tenants. In this case,

one tenant cannot use the Speed Dialing Codes

which belong to another tenant.

Each stored number can have up to 32 digits

including CO line access code.

“O-9 ” YJC,” “#,” “PAUSE,” “FLASH,” “-” &d

“SECRET” can be registered.

Speed Dialing and manual dialing can be used in

combination. In this case, execute Speed Dialing

before manual dialing.

When you register a telephone number to a

System Speed Dialing Code, a feature number for

selecting a CO line must be stored as leading

digits.

The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:

l

ARS/Local CO Line Access

l

Trunk Group 01-08 Access

l

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

l

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

When the mark “*” or “#” is stored in the feature

number for “Speed Dialing-System,” the rotary

telephone users

can

not use this feature.

Operation

Calling an outside party using System Speed

Dialing Code

1. Lift the handset.

2.

3.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4

Dial the feature number for

“Speed Dialing-System.”

l

You hear no tone.

Dial the appropriate speed

dialing code : 001 to 200.

l

The registered number is sent

to CO line automatically.

5-A-6

‘be ;‘,s:?r” a.:- y.s+Lrz:“’ car; assign Toll

Ees:-: -f:-” i-e. 2

-..- of S:isrem S.oeed Dialing

t,re!e--26

tc 25 -'=iiSf-

:n the tollowing) to each

code as :olio*s

System - Speed Dlalrng - System

_--_-----------------------------------

System Speed Dial No. =OOl

f.-------------------------‘---‘-”’--”

Toll Restriction Level of System

Speed Dialing (TRLSD)

TRLSD consists of 17 levels (YOO” and “01 to 16”)

TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from

TRLSDs “01 to 16.”

. In TRLSD “01 to 16,” “01” is the highest level and

“16” is the lowest.

1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=OO)

When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing

a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=OO),

extension users receive standard toll

restriction treatment.

If selected speed dialing code includes Local

Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a

call is checked against “Toll Restriction for

Local Trunk Dial Access.”

If selected speed dialing code includes

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as

leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll

Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial

Access.”

For further information about System Toll

Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-l .OO

“Toll Restriction.”

2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16)

Code (TRLSD=Ol to 16j. the system

compares Toll Restriction Level of Extension

(TRLE) with TRLSD.

If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLSD

(TRLEzTRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLE is

lower than TRLSD (TRLEcTRLSD), a call is

checked against System Toll Restriction

feature.

For further information about TRLE, refer to

Section 3-C-l .OO “Toll Restriction.”

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an

outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed

Dialing Code (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLE of 6

is higher than TRLSD of 7 (TRLEsTRLSD), so a

call is made.

If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an

outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed

Dialing Code (TRLSD=4), in this case, TRLE of 6

is lower than TRLSD of 4 (TRLEcTRLSD), so a

call is checked against the System Toll ’

Restriction feature.

When an extension user makes an outgoing

CO call by dialing a System Speed Dialing

5-A-7

The following flowchart shows the simplified procedure of toll resIr!cticr, 5z-1 for

System Speed Dialing.

When an outgoing CO call is made by When an outgoing CO call is made by

dialing a System Speed Dialing Code dialing a System Speed Dialing Code

(TRLSD=Ol

to 16)

(TRLSD=OO)

1 1

c Compares TRLSD with TRLE e Checks a call against System Toll

Restriction feature

TRLE<TRLSD

TRLEZTRLSD’

1

The call is made

(Transmit the registered

number to CO line)

not restricted restricted

l

In this case, “Local Trunk Dial Access restriction” and “Individual Trunk Group Dial

Access restriction” assigned in Class of Service are disregarded.

5-A-8

2.03 Last Number Redial (LNR) 2.04 Pickup Dialing

Description

Automatically saves the last number

d,ar& ‘rc-

an

extension and allows the user to

make FE

outgoing CO call again by simply dialing rhe

feature number for “Redial.”

Programming

Conditions

Up to 32 digits except the feature number for

selecting a CO line can be memorized as the last

dialed number.

u*,n “#,” “PAUSE.” or “SECRET” are counted as

one digit respectively.

The memorized telephone number is replaced

automatically by a new one every time you make

a new outgoing CO call and even one digit is

sent to a CO line. That is, dialing a feature

number for selecting a CO line only does not

renew the memorized number.

Operation

Executing LNR

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. -- - .-

2. Dial the feature number for

“Redial.”

Description

Pickuc Dialing

allows SLT telephone users to

Take calls automatically by simply lifting

the

‘iandset.

To program the desired number for this feature,

dial the feature number for “Pickup Dialing

Programming.”

To activate this feature, dial the feature number

for “Pickup Dialing Set.”

To cancel this feature, dial the feature number for

“Pickup Dialing Cancel.”

This feature works only when an extension user

goes off-hook from on-hook status. Petiod from

off-hook to Pickup Dialing is assigned in

‘System-System Timer”, Pickup Dial Waiting.

Programming

Reference

System

Programming VT

Dumb

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 t O-C-6.00

Pickup Dial Waiting _

‘Syste-m:Numbering Plan (6/g)“, 9-D-6.06 1 O-C-10.00

Pickup Dialing Programming

Pickup Dialing Set

Pickup Dialing Cancel . .

Conditions

It is available to override this feature temporarily

by dialing another telephone number before

“System-System Timer”, Pickup Dial Waiting

timer expires.

This feature does not function when a call is

arriving or the user has a call on Consultation

Hold.

UP to 32 digits can be stored as a telephone

number including “0 through 9,” and “*.-

To

store

“PAUSE,” use “* *.”

5-A-9

Operation

Storing the telephone number for Pickup Dialing

1.

2.

3.

i

4.

Lift the handset.

Dial the feature number for “Pickup

Dialing Programming.”

Dial the telephone number that

you want to store.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

Setting or canceling Pickup Dialing

1. Lift the handset.

2-l Setting : Dial the feature number

for ‘Pickup Dialing Set.”

2-2 Canceling : Dial the feature

number for “Pickup

Dialing Cancel.”

- You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Executing Pickup Dialing

1. Lift the hands?:

l

You hear dial tone 1 cr 3 or d

2. Wait until the

time preprogrammed

in “System-System Timer’, Pickup

Dial Waiting is over.

l

The system sends the stored

telephone number automatically.

Canceling Pickup Dialing temporarily

1.

2.

Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial a telephone number before

the time preprogrammed in

“System-System Timer”, Pickup

Dial Waking is over.

l

The system sends the dialed

telephone number.

3. Replace the handset.

S-A- 10

3.00 Making Internal Calls

3.01 Inter Office Calling

Description

inter Office Calling allows the extension user to

call another extension user within the system by

dialing the directory number of extensions (three

or four digits).

Programming

None

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, Inter Office Calling

to the extension users in the other tenant (inter-

tenant calling) can be enabled by programming.

Refer to Section 3-B-4.00 7enant Service” for

further information.

Operation

! : ,* ?qe haRdset.

. -.....

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

You hear tingback tone.

l

A directory number consists of

three or four digits from 0 to 9.

\

idl

3. When the other extension

L

answers, start conversation.

4. After concluding conversation,

replace the handset.

5-A- 11

4.00 Automatic Callback

4.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk

Description

When no idle CO line is available after dialing a

feature number for selecting a CO line and the

telephone number of an outside party, the caller

hears special busy tone, if this feature is

assigned.

On-hook while hearing the special busy tone

calls back the caller as soon as a CO line

becomes idle: call-back ringing. Off-hook

catches the CO line automatically, and sends the

.3 last dialed telephone number to the CO line.

Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing

cancels this feature.

Also no answer in four ringing tones (within 10

seconds) after the start of callback ringing

cancels this feature.

To execute this feature, assign “Extension-

Station”, Automatic Callback-Trunk to “Yes” on an

. extension user basis.

Programming

~1

Conditions

Multipfe extensions are able to set this function to

. . . _.

one or more CO lines at the same time.

A maximum of 64 Automatic Callback-Trunk can

be active in the system.

If 64 extensions already set this function to one

or more CO lines another caller’s attempt to

execute this setting is rejected by normal busy

tone, not by special busy tone.

Even if Call Forwarding-No Answer or Do Not

Disturb is assigned on the extension, the

extension user can set Automatic Callback-

Trunk: callback ringing starts on the extension.

\ Automatic Callback-Trunk cannot be set by the

extension which has a call on Consultation Hold.

Operation

Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk

1.

2.

3.

4. Replace the handset

Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for

selecting a CO line.

l

You hear dial tone 1.

Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

l

You hear busy tone 3.

(Supplement)

The following four feature numbers are available

for selecting a CO line:

l

ARS/Local CO tine Access

l

Trunk Group 01-08 Access

l

Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access

l

Trunk Group 17-24 Access

Answering callback ringing

As soon as a CO line in the specified trunk group

becomes idle, callback ringing starts.

1. Lift the handset.

l

The last dialed number is sent

to the line automatically and

calling the other party starts.

-..

-.

5-A-l 2

4.02 Automatic Callback-Station

Description

If busy tone is heard when calling an extension,

dialing “6” and hanging up causes Automatic

Callback to the caller as soon as the called party

concludes conversation.

When callback ringing for the caller starts,

answering by off-hook offers calling the other

party automatically.

Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing

cancels this function.

Also no answer during four ring tones after the

start of callback ringing cancels this function.

Programming

None

Conditions

Up to four extensions are able to assign this

function to one extension at the same time.

The fifth extension attempting to set this function

. is rejected by reorder tone.

If you do not dial “6” within 10 seconds after

hearing busy tone, you hear reorder tone and

cannot execute this feature.

Even if Call Forwarding-No Answer or Do Not

Disturb is assigned to the extension, the

extension user can set Automatic Callback-

Station: callback starts on the extension.

Operation

Setting Automatic Callback-Sxior

IF--l 1. Lift the hardset.

l

You hear dial

tone 1

or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

You hear busy tone 1 or 2.

3. Dial “6.”

. You hear confirmation tone 2,

I J

then reorder tone.

4. Replace the handset.

Answering callback ringing

As soon as the other party concludes the

conversation, callback ringing starts.

.I

F-l

1. Lift the handset.

. You hear ringback tone.

Calling the other extension

starts.

Automatic Callback-Station cannot be set by the

extension which has a call on consultation hold.

5-A-l 3

5.00 Executive Busy Override

Operation

‘3

Description

Executive Busy Override allows an extension

user to intrude on a busy line, and then a 3-party

conversation is established. This feature is

accessed by dialing “1” while hearing busy tone.

To utilize this feature, assign ‘Sy.&m-Class of

Service”, Executive Busy Override to “Yes,” at

overriding extension.

Setting can be made by system. programming

“System-Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-

in to determine whether the overriding tone is be

sent or not when entering into a three-person

conversation.

Programming

System Programming

‘System-Operation (l/3)“, 9-D-l .Ol 1 O-C4.00

Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Executive Busy Override

Conditions

Executive Busy Override does not function when

the other party is in the following status.

l

Three-party conversation status

l

OHCA conversation status

l

ICM conversation status

l

Priv@e CO conversation status

Executive Busy Override does not function if any

of two parties in conversation has set the

followings.

l

Executive Busy Override Deny

(Refer to Section 4-D-5.00.)

l

Data tine Security

(Refer to Section 4-I-6.00.)

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

You hear busy tone 1 or 2.

•l

3. Dial “1 .n

1

l

After you hear confirmation

tone 3, start a three party

conversation.

If you do not dial “I” within 10 seconds after

hearing busy tone, you cannot execute this

function.

5-A-l 4

6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Override

Description

Do Not Disturb Override allows an extension to

call another extension which has set Do Not

Disturb.

Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides

calling the extension.

Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb

(DND)” for further information about DND feature.

To activate this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, Do Not Disturb Override to “Yes” at

overriding extension.

Programming

$1

‘System-Class of Service (l/2) , 9-O-4.01 1 O-C-7.00

Conditions

Make sure to dial “1 n within 10 seconds after

hearing DND tone to execute Do Not Disturb

Override.

When dialing “1,” if the other extension is busy,

the caller hears busy tone. In this case, it is

possible to assign Automatic Callback-Station.

For Automatic Callback-Station, refer to Section

5-A-4.02 “Automatic Callback-Station.”

If “System-Class of Service,” Do Not Disturb

Override is set to “No,” the caller heafs reorder

tone after dialing “1” and cannot call the other

PaW

Operation

1.

2,

III

3.

1

Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

l

If the other extension sets DND

(Do Not Disturb), you hear

DND tone.

Dial “1.”

l

You hear ringback tone.

l

Calling the other party starts.

5-A- 15

7.00 Walking COS (Class of

Service)

Description

Allows an extension user to call an outside party

from another extension preset to a lower CO5

(Class of Service) by using higher COS of his or

her own extension temporarily.

When an outgoing CO call is finished, COS

grade of the employed extension returns to the

original grade automatically.

:-.-

1

Dialing a Walking COS Password (four digits) is

required to execute this feature.

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT DlJl?b

“System-Operation

(3/3)“, 9-D-l .03 1 O-C-5.30

Walking COS Password

‘System-Tenant”,

9-D-2.00 1 O-C-j:XI

Walking COS Password

(Tenant 2)

“System-Numbering Plan (7/g)“, 9-D-6.07 10-G:X00

Walking COS Set

Walking COS Cancel

Conditions

If tenant service is employed, each tenant can

have its own walking COS Password.

1

--

Operation

Setting Walking COS

From another teleph;ne,

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Walking COS Set.”

4. Dial the extension number of

your own station.

I

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

5. Call an outside party by using

COS of your own station.

Canceling Walking COS

One call to an outside party after setting Walking- ‘-

COS cancels this function automatically.

It is also possible to cancel Walking COS without

making outgoing CO calls as follows:

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Walking COS Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

l

COS returns to the original

grade.

-

3. Dial the four-digit Walking COS

Password.

5-A-l 6

8.00 Operator Call

Description

Allows the extension users to call the

operaior by

dialing the feature number for ‘Operator Call

(General)” or “Operator Call (Specific).”

Operation

Calling an operator

Up to two operators are assignable for the whole

system. If Tenant Service is available, two

operators are assignable for each tenant, that

makes four operators available for the whole

system.

If two operators are assigned in the system, or in

a tenant (if tenant Service is employed),

extension users can specify the operator (in the

same tenant) by dialing the feature number for

“Operator Call (Specific).”

Programming

Operator Call iSpecific) I I I

Conditions

When calling an operator by dialing the feature

number for “Operator Call (General),” the

operator is selected according to the type of the

operator’s stations as shown below:

EXT

ATT

Ex-r

-

Operator 1 on?

Operator 1 or,?j

I I

EXT - Operator 1 on,y

1. Lift the handset.

2. Calling an operator without

specifying

1) Dial the feature number for

“Operator Call (General).”

Calling an operator by specifying

1) Dial the feature number for

“Operator Call (Specific).”

2) Dial “1” to specify operator 1.

Dial “2” to specify operator 2.

When no operators are assigned, a user hears

reorder tone during executing Operator Call.

For the assignment of operators, refer to Section

3-B-5.00 “Operator.”

5-A-l 7

B. Receiving Features

1.00

Call Pickup

1.01 Dial Call Pickup

Description

Dial Call Pickup

allows an exlension user to

answer the call that is ringing at another

telephone in the same call pickup group by

dialing the feature number for ‘Dial Call Pickup.”

An extension user can be assigned to only one

call pickup group.

Up to 32 call pickup groups are assignable in the

whole system.

For further information about call pickup group,

refer to Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup Group.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)‘. 9-D-6.03

lO-G~O.00

Dial Call Pickup I I

Conditions

It is possible to execute this function after holding

the current call.

An extension user who has Do Not Disturb

assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other

extension.

)

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls:

cl> A call ;inging at an extension outside of the

same call pickup group

<2> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial

Call Pickup Deny is set

(Refer to Section 5-B-l .03 “Call Pickup

Deny” for further information.)

c3> A call ringing on PC0 button of PITS

telephone

c4> A call ringing on ICM button.of PITS

telephone

c5> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing

(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing

Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further

information.)

If ex%nsion users attempt to pick up the those

calls. reorder tone sounds after dialing the

feature

number for ‘Dial Call Pickup.”

Operation

Answering a call using Dial Call Pickup

1.

2.

Lift the handset.

Dial the feature number for “Dial

Call Pickup.”

After

you hear confirmation

tone

3, you can answer the call

arriving at another telephone in

the same call pickup group.

Start conversation.

5-B-l

1.02

Directed Call Pickup

Description

Directed Call Pickup allows any extension user to

answer the call ringing at extension in any call

pickup group by dialing the feature number for

‘Directed Call Pickup,” and the directory number

of ringing extension.

Programming

111

“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-O-6.03 104-10.00

Conditions

It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup

after holding the current call.

An extension user who has Do Not Disturb

assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other

extensions.

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls:

cl > A call ringing at an extension on which Dial

Call Pickup Deny is set

(Refer to Section 5-B-l .03 “Call Pickup

Deny” for

further information.)

<2> A call ringing on PC0 button of PITS

telephone

<3> A call ringing on ICM button of PITS

telephone

c4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing

(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing

Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further

information.)

If the extension users attempt to pick up the

above mentioned call, reorder tone sounds after

dialing the feature number for “Directed

Call

Pickup.”

Operation

Answering a call ringing at extension in the

different call pickup group.

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Directed Call Pickup.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

ringing extension.

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

l

Talk to the caller.

5-B-2

1.03

Call Pickup Deny

Description

Call Pickup Deny &lows a? SXT~WC~ user :3

prohibit

the other extension i;strs tram pccicq up

calls ringing

at his or her exte-sior! by a caii

pickup feature (Both Dial Call Pickup

and

Directed Call Pickup).

To assign or cancel this function, dial the feature

number for ‘Dial Call Pickup Deny Set” or ‘Dial

Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“.

Dial Call

Pickup Deny Set

Dial Call

Pickup Dew Cancel

Conditions

Even if an extension user has Call Pickup Deny

assignment, he or she can execute Dial Call

Pickup or Directed Call Pickup feature for calls

ringing at other extensions.

Operation

Setting Call Pickup Deny

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial

Call Pickup Deny Set.”

I

9 You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Pickup Deny

1. Lift the handset

2. Dial the feature number for “Dial

Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”

. .

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-3

2.00 Trunk Answer From Any

Station (TAFAS)-Day

Service

Description

Incorn?; CO ra!‘s programmed for TAFAS will

ring the external oager and any extension user in

the system can answer the calls by dialing the

feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call

is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2”

(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).

To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk

Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or

TAFAS 2, and ‘Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1

to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming

Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).

To utilize the external pager, assign “System-

Operation”, External Paging 1, 2” to “Yes.”

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

this system. TAFAS

1

is associated with external

pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external

pager 2.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The

difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode

and UNA is available in night mode.

For further information about UNA, refer to

section 5-G-l .Ol “Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

Programming

System Programming Reference

v-r Dumb

“System-Operation

(l/3)“, 9-D-l .Ol 10-C-4.00

External Paging 1, 2

“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

Night Answer 1

Night Answer 2

“Group-Trunk-Group (l/2)“, 9-E-1 .ol 1 O-C-1 4.00

Incoming Mode (Day)

“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1 .OO 1 O-C-l 8.00

Trunk Group

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00

External Pager-Tenant

Conditions

If tenant service is employed :

The affiliation of each external pager is

determined by the system programming in

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-

Tenant.

Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call

ringing at an external pager in the different

tenant.

Operation

Answering incoming CO calls programmed for

TAFAS

An incoming CO call is ringing at an

external pager.

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2-1 If a call is ringirig at external

pager 1: Dial the feature

number for ‘Night Answer 1.”

2-2 If a call is ringing at external

pager 2: Dial the feature

number for ‘Night Answer 2.”

q

3. Talk to the caller.

h

5-B-4

4.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Description

(5) DND Override

Do Not Disturb allows an extension user to

appear busy to all incoming calls (intercom.

extension and outside calls).

To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class ot

Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to yes”

beforehand by system programming.

This feature can be assigned and canceled by

dialing the feature number “Do Not Disturb Set”

and ‘Call Forwarding/Do Not D&turb Cancet.’

‘Do Not

Disturb Override” allows extension

users to override “Do Not Disturb” feature

assigned on the called extension user.

Refer to Section 5-A-6.00 “Do Not Disturb

Override” for further information.

Operation

Setting Do Not Disturb

1. Lii the handset.

Programmlng

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2r,

9-D-4.01 lOG7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Pfan (519): 9-D-6.05

1OklO.W

Do Not Disturb Set

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for Do

Not Disturb Set **l” (default).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

_.

COllditiOIlS

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

IRNA - Automatically

If a call via DISAIDID is directed to an

extension in the DND mode, it will be

automatically redirected to another extension

(including VPS extension) or an Attendant

Console assigned as the IRNA destination.

Refer to Section 3-F-5.00 Wntercept Routing

- No Answer (IRNA) for further information.

Making Calls

An extension in the DND mode can still be

used to make calls and access any other

features available to that extension.

Answering Calls

An extension in the DND mode is available:

l

To answer a call ringing at another

extension by “Call Pickup” feature.

Refer to Section 5-B-l .OO “Call Pickup” for

further information.

FWD/DND

Setting DND feature cancels any Call

Forwarding feature pre-assigned on the

extension and vice versa.

Refer to Section 5-D-2.00 “Call Forwarding

(FWD)” for further information.

Canceling Do Not Disturb

1.

2.

3.

Lii the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for Call

F&Warding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel “MO” (default).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset

5-B-6

(30393)

(Supplement)

The table below shows whether an extension which has DND assigned rings

or not and the other extensions which has the extension’s directory number

assigned (PITS) rings or not and how their SDN indicators light, when the

extension setting DND receives a call.

Type of call arriving at

setting extension

Extension call

Attendant Console call

DIL (1 :N) call

DIL (13) call

DID call

DISA call

Other calls

Other extensions Extension which

has SDN assigned has DND assigner

or not PDN)

I

No ring -1

No ring *l

Yes

No ring

No Ring

No

Yes 1 No ring

Extension which has

SDN assigned (SDN) !

Red 240 wink

Ring

Red 240 wink

Ring

Lights on in red

No ring

” Red 240 wink

indicator off

Indicator off

No ring

i

‘1 DND tone is sent to the caller.

5-B-7

(30393)

5.00 Call Waiting

Description

Call waiting tone to a busy extension indicates

that another call (extension or outside) is waiting.

To set or cancel Call Waiting feature, dial the

feature number for “Call Waiting Set” or “Call

Waiting Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT I Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, SD-6.05 10-C-10.00

Call Waiting Set

Call Waitina Cancel I I I

Conditions

Call waiting tone is sent in the foliowing mode:

Operanon

Setting Call Wanq

1

Litt the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Waiting Set.”

- You near confirmation tone 1 or

2,

and

then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3.

Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Waiting

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Waiting Cancel.:

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2, and then

dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-8

Operation

Answering Call Waiting

A call from another extension or outside party

arrives during a conversation.

l

You hear call waiting tone.

Talking to the new party by disconnecting the

current call

1. Replace the handset to

disconnect the current call.

l

Your telephone set rings.

2. Lift the handset.

. Talk to the new party.

Talking to tie new party by holding the current

paW

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “Hold”

to hold the current party.

I

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

l

Your telephone set rings.

4. Lift the handset.

l

Talk to the new caller.

l

To conclude the new

conversation and return to the

held party again, replace the

handset and lift the handset

again, then dial the feature

number for “Hold Retrieve.”

(Supplement)

See Section 5-C-l .OO “Hold” for further information

about Hold.

5-B-9

6.00 Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD j-Log Out

Description

UCD group members may leave the group

temporarily by dialing the feature number for

“UCD Log Out” to avoid UCD calls being sent to

their extensions.

Refer to Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call

Distribution (UCD)-without OGM” and Section

3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with

OGM” for further information about UCD call.,

Programming

~1

Conditions

. When an extension of the UCD group set for

Log Out goes off-hook, dial tone 4 below can be

heard.

(second) 0 1 2 3 4 5

Operation

Setting UCD Log Out (Leaving a UCD group)

1.

2.

3.

Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 4.

Dial the feature number for “UCD

Log Out.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

Replace the handset.

Canceling UCD Log Out (Returning to a UCD

group)

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD

Log In.”

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-l 0

C. Holding Features

1.00 Hold

Description

Allows an extension user to hold the current call

and either make or answer another call

(extension or outside).

Operation

‘f

To hold a call, dial the feature number for “Hold.”

To retrieve a held call, dial the feature number for

“Hold Retrieve.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT I Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00

Hold

Retrieve

Conditions

SLT telephone user cannot hold the multiple calls

at a time. So if the SLT telephone users attempt

to hold another call while holding a current call,

reorder tone is heard. If SDN button for SLT

telephone user is busy, the SLT telephone users

cannot hold a call even though no call is held by

SLT.

The extension users can not hold the following

calls.

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

If a held call has not been answq$d more than a

pre-assig$&ime, a warning ton<rriay sound at

extension which placed a call on hold.

Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”

for further information.

If a held call is not answered more than 30

minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

Placing a call on hold.

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is held

temporarily.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Hold.”

l

The other party is placed on

hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Retrieving a held call

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “Hold

Retrieve.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 3

and Hold is retrieved.

l

Stat-f conversation again.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold” for further information.

5-c-1

2.00 Consultation Hold

Description

Allows the extension user to hold the current call

temporarily on purpose to transfer it or establish

a conference. Other extensions cannot retrieve

‘the call during Consultation Hold.

Programming

None

Conditions

The extension users can not place the following

calls on consuftation hold.

l

A call with Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

Consultation Hold Recall tone sound immediately

if the extension user replaces the handset while

having a call on consultation hold.

Consultation Hold Recatl tone sounds in the

same way as Held Call Reminder. _ i

If a held call is not answered more than 30

minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

When you have a call on Consultation Hold and

are talking to another party, pressing the

switchhook for approximately one half second

and releasing it enables you to have conference

if a conference trunk is available. If there is no

conference trunk available, the party in

conversation is placed on Consultation Hold and

you can talk to the retrieved party.

For further information about conference, refer to

Section 5-E-l .OO “Conference.”

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l -00 ‘Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation

Placing a call on Consultation Hold

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The call is placed on

Consultation Hold, and you

hear confirmation tone 2 then

dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

You can call another party.

Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold

You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and

are not in conversation.

ITF’l 1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The call is retrieved and you

can talk to the party.

5-C-2

3.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station

Description

k:lows an extension user to talk to the other party

oy retrievmg a call held by another extension.

This function is performed by dialing the feature

number for “Hold Extension Retrieve” and

extension number on which a call is placed on

hold (directory number: three or four digits).

Programming

I

Reference

I System Programming VT 1 Dumb

System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“, 906.03 10C10.00

Hold Extension Retrieve I I

Conditions

Even if the other extension has held multiple

calls, there is no preferential order for retrieving

calls.

Operation

1. Lift

the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Hold

Extension Retrieve.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

holding extension: three or four

digits.

. After hearing confirmation tone

3, start conversation with the

other party.

..,

In case of a failure to retrieve a call (the other _ extension holds no call), reorder tone is returned.

The following calls cannot be retrieved from other

extensions.

l

A call held on PC0 button

l

A call placed on Exclusive Hold

l

A call place on Consultation Hold

5-c-3

4.00 Call Park

4.01 Call Park-System

Description

Allows an extension user to hold a call (both

extension and outside) into a parking area

common to the system.

The parked call can be retrieved from any

extension in the system.

Call Park can be used whenever an extension

user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere,

and wishes to complete the call from another

extension.

Call Park feature is also convenient to be used in

combination with paging feature since any

extension user can retrieve a parked call after

being paged.

20 parking areas are available common to the

system.

To execute Call Park-System, dial the feature

. number for “Call Park-System.”

To retrieve a call parked in the system parking

area, dial the feature number for “Call Park

Retrieve-System.”

Programming

System Programming Refc

VT

“System-Tenant”,

9-D-2.00

Call Park Boundary

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, SD-6.04

Call Park-System

Call Park R&eveSystem

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, 20 parking areas

can be split between two tenants in “System-

Tenant”, Call Park Boundary.

A parked call will be disconnected automatically

by the system, if it is not answered within 30

minutes.

Operation

Parking a call to the system parking area

ri7’l 1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other patty is placed on

Consultation Hold. You hear

confirmation tone 2 and then

dial tone

1

or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “Cal

Park-System.”

3. Dial the parking area number in

two digits: 01 to 20.

l

When you succeed in Call Park-

System, you hear confirmation

tone 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3

or 4.

l

If you fail in Call Park-System

(another call is already parked

in the specified parking area),

you hear busy tone 1 or 2.

l

In this case, dialing another

parking area number (01 to 20)

allows you to try a new call park

destination.

l

To talk to the party placed on

Consultation Hotd again while

hearing busy tone, follow the

same procedures as retrieving

Consultation Hold. Refer to

Section 5-C-2.00 “Consultation

Hold.”

4. Replace the handset.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold.”

5-c-4

4.02 Call Park-Station

Description

Allc~vs an extension user to hold a call (both

extension and outside) into the parking area

ded:cated to each

extension.

The parked call can be retrieved from any

extension in the system.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Park Retrieve-System.”

3. Dial the parking area number: 01

to 20.

.

When you succeed in retrieving

the parked call, you hear

confirmation tone 2. Start

conversation with the retrieved

party.

If you fail, you hear reorder

tone.

Call Park feature can be used whenever an

extension user engaged on a call needs to go

elsewhere, and wishes to complete the call from

another extension.

Call

Park feature is also convenient to be used in

combination with

paging feature since any

extension user can retrieve a parked call after

being paged.

Any extension user can park only one call to the

parking area dedicated to each. extension.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)”

Call

Park-Station

L

Call

Park Retrieve-Station 1

Conditions

A parked call will be disconnectedautomatically

by the system, if it is not answered within 30

minutes.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior

assignment is necessary. Refer to Section

3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold.”

..-..;

. .._..

Operations

Ex==, tin3 Za!l Pa-r%-Station

u-v..

1.

Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

.

The

current call is p!aced on

Consultation Hold. You

hear

confirmation tone 2 and then

dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Park-Station.”

l

When you succeed in Call

Park-Station, you hear

confirmation tone 2 and then

dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

When you cannot park a call

(another call is already

parked), you hear busy tone 1

or 2.

l

To talk to the party placed on

Consultation Hold again while

hearing busy tone 1 or 2, follow

the same procedures as

retrieving Consultation Hokf.

Refer to Section 5-C-2.00

‘Consultation Hold.”

Retrieving Call Park-Station

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Park Retrieve-Station.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

parking extension : three or four

digits.

l

When you succeed in retrieving

Call Park-Station, you hear

confirmation tone 2. Then start

conversation with the retrieved

Party.

l

If no call is parked at the

extension, you hear reorder

tone.

3. Replace the handset.

5-C-6

D. Transferring Features

1 .OO Call Transfer

1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to

Station

Description

Transfer is convenient to redirect a call to another

extension user.

If Music on Hold is ;. z:ztL ‘-17 tt.e start of the

transferring operatic?. L;ntil ?e zestina:ion party

answers, the system sends f,!,sic on Hold to the

transferred party.

Attendant assistance is not required and the caller

does not have to redial. For further detail, refer to Sec::on 3-E-l .OO

“Music on Hold.”

Unscreened Call Transfer allows an extension user

to transfer calls (both extension and CO) to

another extension without announcement. Operation

During a conversation with ar extension or an

outside party

Programming

) None

Conditions

If transferred call is not answered by the

destination party, it will receive one of the following

treatments.

Status of Destination Operation Resulted

Able to receive the

call

(sending ringback

tone)

Busv

Performs the call to the destination for

a specific period. In case of no

answer, interrupts ringing and starts

ringing to the originator of transfer. *l

For detail, refer to Section 3-E-3.00

I

“Transfer Recall.”

1 As soon as the destination goes on-

(sending busy tone) hook, starts caking the destination

(Camp-on Transfer).

If the destination party remains busy 01

does not answer the call within a

specified period, starts calling back the

originator of transfer. -1

For detail. refer to Section 3-E-3.00

“Transfer Recall.”

_

Setting Do Not Unscreened Call Transfer to extension

Disturb is ineffective.

(sending DND tone) Transferred party is treated simply as i

party placed on Consuttation Hold.

Hanging up causes the Consultation

Hold Recall to the originator of transfer

*l When the originator

of transfer answers the call,

conversation between the originator

and the

transferred party starts.

The extension users can not transfer the following

calls.

l

A call with Attendant Console

- A call with Doorphone

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the

destination: three or four digits.

m

3. Replace the handset.

l

Calling the destination starts

and when the destination

answers, conversation

between the held party and the

destination is established.

(Supplement)

After step 2, you can interrupt the transfer and

talk to the held party by pressing the switchhook

for approximately one half second and releasing.

5-D-l

1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station

Description

Allows an extension user to transfer the calls

(both extension and CO) to another extension

with announcement.

Programming

None

Conditions

The extension

user cannot transfer the following

calls.

l

A call with

Attendant Console

l

A call with Doorphone

If

Music

on Hold is assigned, Music on Hold is

sent to the transferred party since the party starts

being transferred until he starts conversation with

the destination party.

For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-l .OO

“Music on Hold.”

. The user can execute this function even after

holding another party.

Operation

&ring a conversation with the other party (an

3uts:Se pany or an extension)

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the directory number of the

destination: three or four digits.

l

You hear ringback tone.

3. When the destination answers,

talk to the destination.

4. Replace the handset.

l

Connects the held party and

the destination.

(Supplement) . .

After step 2, you can interrupt the transfer and

talk to the held party by pressing the switchhook

for awroximatelv one half second and releasing.

5-D-2

1.03 Unscreened Call Transfer to

Remote

Description Operation

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party

Allows the extension assigned as operator to

transfer a caii to the remote maintenance

resource. Modem answer tone is returned

‘instantly, if it is not in use.

This operation allows System Administrator to

perform System Administration from Remote

Location.

Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System

Administration from a Remote Location” for

further information.

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other

party is placed on

Consultation Hold.

. You hear confirmation tone 2,

then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

‘3

To transfer a call to remote maintenance

resource, “FDN for Remote” is used, which is

assigned in “System-Operation”, Remote

Directory Number.

See Section 3-B-3.00 “Floating Directory Number

(FDN)” for details of FDN.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT I Dumb

“System-Operation (2/3)“,

Remote Directory Number 9-D-l 42 10-C-4.00

Conditions

If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends

Music on Hold to the transferred party during the

transferring operation. For details, refer to

Section 3-E-l .OO “Music on Hold.”

If the reinote maintenance port is in use,-busy -

tone is returned to the held party. Automatic

Callback does not function in this case, so the

caller should

call again when it becomes idle.

If an extension other than the operator dials the

FDN for Remote, reorder tone is returned.

2. Dial the “FDN for Remote”: three

or four digits.

l

You hear confirmation- tone 3,

then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If the remote maintenance port

is not in use, the held party

hears answer tone and can

start communication instantly.

3. Replace the handset.

. .

--.

Operators can execute this function even after

holding another call.

5-D-3

1.04 Unscreened Call Transfer

- to Attendant Console

Description

Allows an extension user to transfer a call (both

extension and outside) to an Attendant Console

without announcement,

Programming

None

Conditions

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Transfer Recall

A call transferred by this feature will not ring

back at the extension who transferred the call

even if the Attendant Console does not

answer the call after the transfer recall timer

has been elapsed.

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)

A call transferred to an Attendant Console will

not be transferred to another extension by

IRNA feature even if the Attendant Console

does not answer the call after the IRNA timer

has been elapsed.

What if all six Loop keys on the Attendant

Console are not idle?

A call is put in the call waiting queue of the

Attendant Console.

What if the Attendant Console is in ATT-FWD

mode?

This feature does not function.

A call is simply put on Consultation Hold, that

is, a call will ring back at the extension who

tries to transfer the call as soon as he or she

goes on-hook.

Music on Hold

If Music on Hold is available, the system

sends Music on Hold to the transferred party,

from the start of the transferring operation till

the destination party answers-

Operation

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party.

1 Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is put on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2 Make a call to an Attendant

Console.

l

You hear ringback tone.

l

Calling an Attendant Console

starts.

1 3 Replace the handset.

l

At an Attendant Console:

The call is displayed as a

transfer recall.

(Supplement)

The feature numbers and DN’s for making a call

to an Attendant Console are:

l

Operator Call (General)

l

Operator Call (Specific)

l

FDN for General Operator Call

l

DN for ATT1 and ATT2

5-D-3-l

(21292)

1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer

-to a UCD Group (with OGM)

Description

Allows any extension user to transfer an outside

call to a UCD Group from

01

to 04 (with OGM

type).

From version 8.xX. not only the operators but

any ‘extension user can transfer an outside call to

a UCD group (with CGM).

Programming

I .

System Programming Reference

VT

I

Dumb

1 “Special Attended-UCD

(l/2)” 1 g-K-3.01 110-C-44.00 I

Conditions

If all group members are not available to answer

the call, it will be redirected to the Overflow

. destination. In this case, the call wilt be

! disconnected if not answered by the Overflow

destination within 60 seconds.

See page 3-D-13 for further information.

Operation

During a conversation with an outside party.

Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

. The other party is put on

Consultation Hold.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the FDN for UCD group (01

to 04).

. You hear confirmation tone 3

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

)

Feature References

Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with/without

OGM (Section 3-D-2.06)

5-D-3-2

2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD)

2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls

Description

Call Forwarding-All Calls allows extension users

who are away from their phones to receive

incoming calls (both extension and CO) to them

at another extension.

Incoming calls can be forwarded either to

extension users, Voice Mail port, or operators

(Attendant Console or Extension).

“FDN for General Operator Call” can be used to

assign operators as the destination of Call

Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To execute Call Forwarding-All Calls, assign

“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb” to “Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Call Forwarding-All Calls Set” and

“Call Forwarding-Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

System Proga&ming Reference

VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service

(l/Z)“, 9-D-4.01 10-C7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (419)“. 4D-6.04 lC-C-10.00

Call Forwarding-All Call Set

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9D-6.05 10-C-10.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

If the extension to which calls are to be

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthemx>re. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No

Answer” feature.

If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

another tenant if the destination of Call

Forwarding-All Calls is set to an Attendant

Console.

Calls from any VM extension will not be

forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

VM extension. .*

The following attempt will be rejected with

reorder tone.

l

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot

set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant.

l

The extension user cannot set the destination

to another extension that presets its own

destination to the user’s extension.

l

The extension user cannot call another

extension that presets its destination to the

users extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

S-D-4

(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

.>

.I

.

Type of Call Arriving Condition of Destination Forwarding

8 Setting Extension

Execution Result

Extension call

idle status

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

0

Busy tone is sent from destination.

Assigned to DND

0

DND tone is sent from destination.

PITS programming mode

0

Busy tone is sent from destination.

Conditions except In Service * X Call is placed on setting extension.

IL (1 :l) or DISA call Idle status

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

0

Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

Assigned to DND

0

Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb

(DND).”

PITS programming mode

0

Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

IID call

Conditions except In Service *

Idle status

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

Conditions except ln Service *

X Call is placed on setting extension.

0

Call is forwarded to d&nation.

0

Busy tone is sent from destination

0

Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb

(DND).” .,

0

Busy tone is sent from destination

X

Call is placed on destination.

0:

Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

ic Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details

5-D-5

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-All Calls

1.

2.

3.

4.

Lift the handset.

Dia’ the feature number for “Call

Forwarding-All Call Set.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port,

or the “FDN for General Operator

Call’ to be set as the destination:

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Forwarding-All Calls

1.

2.

3.

Lift the handset.

Dial the feature number for

“Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

5-D-6

(21292)

2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook

Description

Cal; Forwardlrg-Busy.Off-Hook

provides

atiiomatic c&t

irW&er

to a preset destination

when the “ser’s eztension is busy or off-hook.

Incoming caiis can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice tv?ail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook, assign

“System-Class of Service”, “Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb” to “Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature Calls from any VM extension will not be

number for “Call Forwarding-Busy Set,” and forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.” VM extension.

Programming

System Programming Reference

t VT 1 Dumb

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“,

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

! “System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“,

Call Forwarding-Busy Set

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)‘,

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

~ 9-D-4.01

9-o-6.04

9-O-6.05

1 o-c-7.00

104-10.00

10-c-10.00

Conditions

An extension user

may have only one type of

Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

If the extension to which calls are to be

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No

Answer” feature.

If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to ‘Yes” by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

another tenant if the destination of Call

Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook is set to an Attendant

Console.

The following attempt will be rejected with

reorder tone. .

l

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot

set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant.

l

The extension user cannot set the destination

to another extension that presets&own

destination to the user’s extension.

l

The extension user cannot call another

extension that presets its destination to the

user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

5-D-7

(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

!3is function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving

at Setting Extension

Ex:ension call

DIL (1 A) or DISA cal

DID call

-

I

Condition of Destination Forwarding

Execution

Idle status

Busy status I

Assigned to DND

X

PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service *

Idle

status

Busy status

0

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

Conditions except In Service *

Idle status

Busy status

0

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

Conditions except In Service * 1

Result

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

. .

Call is placed on setting extension.

0:

Forwarding possible =-

X : Forwarding impossible

;c Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-8

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-Busy..Off-Hcc%

1.

2.

3.

)

4.

Lift the handset.

Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook

Lift the handset.

Dial the feature number for “Calf

Forwarding-Busy Set.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail ports,

or the ‘FDN for General Operator

Call” to be set as the destination.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone

1

or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

3

5-D-9

(21292)

2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer

Description

Call Forwating-No Answer wovides automatic

call transfer to a preset desbnation if the

extension user cannot answer :he call in a

determined period (that is, ti the caller is not

answered while heanng ringback tone in a

specified perfod).

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to

the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)

by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No

Answer Time-Out.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-O-1.01 “Operation (113)‘for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-No Answer, assign

“System-Class

of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb” to ‘Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Call Forwarding-No Answer Ser and

‘Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

‘System-System Timer”,

9-O-3.00 104-6.00

Call Forwarding-No

Answer

Time-Out

“System-Class of Service (l/2)‘, 9-D-4.01 I O-C-7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)‘. 9-O-6.04 lO-GlO.00

Call Forwarding-No Answer

Set

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)‘, 9-D-6.06 lO-GiO.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

If the extension to which calls are to be

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the ‘Intercept Routing-No

Answer” feature.

If Tenant Service is employed and ‘Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to Yes” by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

another tenant if the destination of Call

Forwarding-No Answer is set to an Attendant

Console.

Calls from any VM extension will not be

forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

VM extension.

The following attempt will be rejected with

reorder tone. . .

l

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot

set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant.

l

The extension user cannot set the destination

to another extens@ that presets its own

destination to the users extension. -- -

l

The extension user cannot call another

extension that presets its destination to the

user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

5-D-l 0

(21292)

The following table shows the results

of

the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving

at Setting Extension

Extension call

DIL

(1 :l)

or l&A call

DID call

Condition of Destination

Rescrr;

Idle status I 0 I Call is forwarded

iO

desmation.

Busy status I I

I I

31 x

Call is placed on setting extension.

Idle status

Busy status

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service *

Idle status

Busy status

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service *

0

Call is forwarded to destination.

. .

X

Call is placed on setting extension.

0 : f&warding possible ’ r

X : Forwarding impossible

t Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-l 1

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding-No Answer

1. Lift the handset. .

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding-No Answer Set.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port,

or the “FDN for General Operator

I’-‘!

Call” of the destination.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

3. Replace the handset.

Fomxding-No Answer

Liti me handset.

Dia! the feature number for “Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

5-D-l 2

(21292)

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No

Answer

Description

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer

provides automatic call transfer to a preset

destination if the user’s extension is busy off-hook

or the user cannot answer the call in a determined

period (that is, if the caller is not answered while

hearing ringback tone in a specified period).

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to

the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)

by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No

Answer Time-Out.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to-extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call from door-phone

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HookMo Answer,

assign “System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding

/Do Not Disturb” to ‘Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer” and

“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

Reference

System Programming VT Dumb

‘System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 1 o-c-6.00

Call Forwarding-No Answer

Time-Out

“System-Class of Service (l/2)“, 9-D-4.01 lo-C-7.K

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (4/g)“, 9-D-6.04 10-G10.C~:

Call Forwarding-Busy/No

Answer

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05 10-C-l O.Ir

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

If the extension to which calls are to be

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No

Answe? feature.

If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to ‘Yes” by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

another tenant if the destination of Call

Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo Answer is set to

an Attendant Console.

Calls from any VM extension will not be

forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

VM extension.

The following attempt will be rejected with

reorder tone.

l

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot

set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant.

l

The extension user cannot set the destination

to another extension that presets its own

destination to the user’s extension.

l

The extension user cannot call another

extension that presets its destination to the

user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature

Control.’

5-D-l 3

(21292)

2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No

Answer

Description

Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo Answer

provides automatic call transfer to a preset

destination if the user’s extension is busy off-hook

or the user cannot answer the call in a determined

period (that is, if the caller is not answered while

hearing ringback tone in a specified period).

Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to

the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)

by ‘System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No

Answer Time-Out.

Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension

users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.

“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign

operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.

Refer to Section 9-D-l .Ol “Operation (l/3)” for

further information.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer,

assign “System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding

/Do Not Disturb” to “Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer” and

1 “Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

Refi

System Programming VT

‘System-System Timer, 9-D-3.00

Call Forwarding-No Answer

Time-Out

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)“,

9-D-4.01

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

“System-Numbering Plan (4/S)“, 9-D-6.04

Call Forwarding-Busy/No

Answer

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“, 9-D-6.05

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

ence

Dumb

1 O-c-6.00

1 o-c-7.00

1 o-c-1 0.00

10-C-l 0.00

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

If the extension to which calls are to be

forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is

not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the

first forwarded extension. In case of an outside

call, if not answered in a specified time period,

the call will be routed to another destination, if

available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No

Answer” feature.

If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant

Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,

this function is ineffective for the calls from

another tenant if the destination of Call

Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer is set to

an Attendant Console.

Calls from any VM extension will not be

forwarded, if forwarding destination is another

VM extension.

The following attempt will be rejected with

reorder tone.

l

If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot

set the destination to an extension in the other

tenant.

l

The extension user cannot set the destination

to another extension that presets its own

destination to the user’s extension.

l

The extension user cannot call another

extension that presets its destination to the

user’s extension.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

5-D-l 3

(21292)

The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting

this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Extension call Idle status

Busy

status

0

Assigned to DND

PITS programming mode

X

I

Conditions except In Service * I

DIL (1 :l) or DISA

calll Idle status I 0

1 Busy status I

Type of Call Arriving

at Setting Extension

Condition of Destination

Result

Assigned to DND

X

1 PITS programming mode I

I Conditions except tn Service * I

DID call I Idle status I 0

I

Busy status I

Assigned to DND

X

PITS programming mode

_ .

I Conditions except In Service *

Call is fowarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

Call is forwarded to destination.

Call is placed on setting extension.

0:

Forwarding possible

X : Forwarding impossible

t Conditions are “Out of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section

14-C-2.02

“Port” for details.

5-D-l 4

Operation

I .

2.

3.

t

4.

Dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding-Busy/No Answer.”

Dial

the directory number of the

extension or the Voice Mail port, or

the ‘FDN for General Operator

Call” to be set as the destination.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-HooWNo

Answer

1.

Lift

the

handset.

2.

3.

Dial the feature number for ‘Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

5-D-l 5

(21292)

2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk

Description

-2.. ^ - Forwarding to Trunk allows extension users

n-c are away from their phones to receive

-coming calls (both CO and extension) at outside

;: ace.

When an incoming CO call is forwarded to the

pre-assigned outside party by this feature, CO to

CO call via this system is established. Duration

time of CO to CO call is restricted by ‘Group-

Trunk Group,” CO-CO Duration Limit of receiving

CO line. The system sends alarm tone to both

parties 15 seconds before the Duration Limit time

is expired, and when expired the system

disconnects both parties compulsively.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call

Forwarding treatment.

l

A call from doorphone

l

A call routed via DIL 1: N feature

l

A call directed to a UCD group

. To set Call Forwarding to Trunk, assign both

System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do

Not Disturb and CO Forward Mode to Yes.”

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Call Forwarding-To Trunk” and I%all

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming

‘System-Class of Service (l/2)“.

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb

CO Forward

Mode

-System-Numbering Plan (4/9)“,

Call Forwarding-to Trunk

‘System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“,

Call Forwarding/Do Not

Disturb Cancel

-Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

CO-CO Duration Limit

Ref

v-r

9-D-4.01

9-D-6.04

9-D-6.05

9-E-l .Ol

9nce

Dumb

10-c-7.00

lo-c-10.00

1 o-c-10.00

10-c-14.00

Conditions

An extension user may have only one type of

Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect

at any time. If a second type is assigned, the

previously assigned type is canceled.

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)

can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to

Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature

Control.”

Up to 32 digits composed of “0 through 9” and

;sCn can be entered as the telephone number of

the destination. CO line access code must be

entered as the leading digit of each entry.

5-D-l 6

-3

The following

table

shows

the results

of the calls arriving zt a- ?x:ension setting

this

function depending on the conditions of the ore%:

zestirz:z.

Type of Call Arriving

at Setting Extension

I

Condition of Destination Eor*~-J,Gg’

; Exec-TO” /

Result

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to external

w destination.

Busy status x Calf is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service *

DIL (1 :l) or DISA call Idle status 1 ’ 1 destination.

Call is forwarded to external

II x -”

Call is placed on setting extension.

DID call Idle status I I

I

Busy status I x I Call is placed on setting extension. I

I I I

1 Conditions except In Service * 1 I I

0:

Forwarding possible . .

X : Forwarding impossible

t

Conditions are “Out .of Service,”

“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See

Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

3

.*...

.L. ‘5

5-D-l 7

Operation

Setting Call Forwarding to Tnxic

1. Lift the handse:.

2.

3.

4. Replace the handset.

Dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding to Trunk.”

Dial the feature number for

selecting the CO line and the

telephone number of the

destination and “#” in succession.

l

You hear confirmation tone

1

or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(Supplement)

The system does not check the dialed number,

toll restriction level, and the feature number for

selecting a CO line at the time of setting this

function.

Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk

1.

2.

3.

Lift the handset.

Dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Replace the handset.

5-D-l

a

E. Conversation Features

1 .OO Conference

Description

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party, the extension user can add another

party (extension or outside party) on the current

conversation and hold a three party conference.

This is called Conference Conversation.

On the TSW card, there are eight standard

conference trunks provided for this purpose.

By equipping the optional conference expansion

card (KX-T336104), the number of conference

trunks increases to 64.

To utilize optional conference expansion card,

f assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW

Additional CONF to “Yes.”

When two members in the conference are both

outside parties, two conference trunks are

necessary. In all other cases, one conference

trunk is enough.

Programming

kl

j’Configuratron-System Assignment”, 9-C-l .@I

10-C-l .OO

Conditions

Pressing the switchhook by the conference

originator during the conference restores a

1 conversation with the first party.

This places the second party on Consultation

. Hold.‘- -.

Pressing the switchhook again establishes the

conference again if the conference trunk is

available. If the conference trunk is not available,

conversation with the held (second) party starts,

placing the first party on Consultation Hold.

Operation

Establishing a conference

Extension A is in conversation with party B

(another extension or an outside party).

The following is the operation from the stand-

point of extension A.

1.

2.

3.

Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party B is placed on

Consultation Hold.

l

Extension A hears dial tone 1

or3or4.

Call another party C (an

extension or an outside party).

l

Talk to party C.

Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

Conference among the parties

A, B and C is established.

(Supplement)

If the conference trunk is not available in step 3,

you cannot establish conference by pressing the

switchhook, which puts the current party C on

Consu%tion Hold, and convar@on with the

held party B starts.

Concluding a conference

1. Replace the handset.

l

If both stations B and C are

outside parties, both B and C

are disconnected.

.:a:.:.

l

If both B and C are extension

users, or either of them is an

extension user, a conversation

between B and C is

established.

5-E-l

2.00 Doorphone

Description

Up to four doorphones can be connected to the

system. This provides conversations between

extensions and door-phones.

Any extension user can call the do&phones

within the same tenant by dialing the feature

number for “Doorphone Call (1 to 4).’ It is

possible to direct calls from doorphones to

specified extensions, intercom groups, pickup

groups or Attendant Consoles in “Extension-

Doorphone”, Doorphone Call Assignment.

If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of

each doorphone can be determined by the

system programming in “Extension- DoorphoneS

Tenant.

Set the duration of the door opener in “Extension-

Doorphone”, Open Duration. When Open

Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is

. unavailable.

Programming

Operation

Calling from a doorphone

1. Press the bunon or :he

doorphone.

l

You hear ping-pong tone.

. When the other party answers.

start conversation.

Answering a door-phone call

When your telephone set receives a doorphone

call and rings,

1. Lift the handset.

l

Start conversation with the

caller from the doorphone.

Calling a dootphone

1. Lift the handset.

. .

2. After dialing the feature number

for “Doorphone Call (1 to 4),” dial

the doorphone number : 1 to 4.

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, start conversation over the

specified doorphone.

Conditions

Only conversations are available for the

doorphone. The other functions such as Hold,

Transfer are all ineffective.

3. After concluding conversation,

’ replace the handset. ’

_

When a visitor presses the button on the

doorphone, he hears ping-pong tone twice, then

doorphone call ringing starts at the designated

extension.

No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the

doorphone call.

Opening the door

During a conversation over the doorphone

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

1

2. Dial “5.”

l

The door opens for the

specified duration.

5-E-2

3.00 External Feature Access

.-

-?I

Sending a flash signal through the CO line allows

the extension user to gain access to the features

offered by the host PBX, or to receive CENTREX

service provided by the central office, such as

Call Waiting and so on.

Description Operation

Gaining access to a feature

(in this case, Call

Waiting)

When a call arrives from another outside party

while in conversation with an outside party,

External Feature Access such as Call Waiting is

effective only in 1 :l conversation with an outside

pafly.

l

You hear call waiting tone.

Programming

1. Press the hookswitch for

approximately one half second

and release.

System Programming

“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“,

External Feature Access

“Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

Hook Switch flash Time

“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)‘,

Max. Dial

No. after EFA Signa

g-D-6.03 1 O-c-: 0.00

9-E-1 .Ol 10-C-t 4.00

g-E-1.02 1 O-C-? 5.00

. Conditions

External Feature Access is ineffective when

“Group-Trunk Group”, Hook Switch Flash hme is

assigned to “None.”

The maximum dialing digits to be sent to the CO

line after sending the flash signal are restricted

by “Group-Trunk Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA

Signal.

The longest time limit among the following

assignments determines the time limit between

dialing digits. .i_

l

“System-System Timer”, External First Digit

Time-Out.

l

“System-System Timer”, External Interdigit

Time-Out.

l

“System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction

Guard Tme-Out.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Feature Access.”

l

The first party is held. Start

conversation with the second

party.

Finishing the conversation with the second party

and starting the conversation with the first party

again

1. Press the hookswitch for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Feature Access.”

I

l

Start conversation with the first

party.

5-E-3

F. Paging Features

1 .OO Paging

1.01 Paging All Extensions

Description

Paging All Extensions allows any extension user

to perform paging through the built-in speakers of

all PITS telephones that can receive paging.

The Class of Service of the user’s extension

determines the extensions that can receive

paging. They are assigned to be paged by

“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

Access and also if they belong to the same

tenant as the user’s extension.

See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for further

information about paging groups.

To page all extensions, dial the feature number When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”

for “Station Paging” and “0.” in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

To answer paging, dial the feature number for Access within the same tenant, the performer

“Station Paging Answer.” hears reorder tone.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (2/2)“, 9-D-4.02 lOhI

Station Paging Access

“System-Numbering Plan (319)“. 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

Station Paging

Station Paging Answer

Conditions

Single Line telephone (SLT’s) cannot be paged.

If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are

being paged by another page, busy tone is

returned to the new paging performer. If any of

the extensions is not being paged, paging is

executed.

Automatic Callback feature does not function

during paging operation.

Refer to Section 5-A-4.01 “Automatic Callback-

Trunk” for further information.

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-

PHONES of on-hook PITS sets.

The PlTSs actuated by paging send confirmation

tone and are ready to be paged.

5-F-l

Operation

Performing Paging All Extensions

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” and dial “0.”

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, start paging.

3. After paging, replace the handset.

Answering Paging All Extensions when PlTSs are

paged

1.

Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature,number for

“Station Paging Answer.”

k!u -.’

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party

I

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is placed on

hold.

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

‘Station Paging” and dial “0.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

1

idi

3. Start paging.

I

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset.

l

The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

. .

.._

5-F-2

1.02 Group Paging

Description

Group Paging provides paging to a group of

extensions specified from eight paging groups

through the built-in speakers of their PITSs.

The Class of Service of the user’s extension

determines the paging groups that can receive

paging. They are assigned to be paged by

“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging

Access and also if they belong to the same

tenant as the user’s extension.

To execute Group Paging, dial the feature

number for “Station Paging” and paging group

specifying number.

To answer paging, dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer.”

Programming

System Programming Re

v-r

“System-Class of Service (2/2)“,

9-D-4.02

Station Paging Access

“System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“,

9-O-6.03

Station Paging

Station Paging Answer

Conditions

Single Line Telephones (SLT’s) cannot be paged.

If the designated paging group is being paged by

another page, busy tone is returned to the new

paging performer.

However, he can page within the range not

overlapping the preset paging range.

For instance, when paging is being done to group

1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new

paging.

Automatic Callback feature does not function

during paging operation.

When there is no paging group allowed to

receive paging in “System-Class of Service”,

Station Paging Access, the performer hears

reorder tone.

Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-

PHONES of on-hook PITS sets.

The PlTSs actuated by paging send confirmation

tone and then are ready to be paged. . .

. .

5-F-3

Operation

pf--:;~l:;

,srcsJ::

Paging

F-l ‘. L,t; the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging.”

3. Dial the paging group number : 1

to 8.

. After hearing confirmation tone

3, start paging.

4. After paging, replace the handset.

Answering Group Paging when PIT% are paged

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer.”

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

T:s-sierrir_= 2 call using Group Paging

DL;ng a conversation with an extension or an

oL:side pay

m 1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is placed on

hold.

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” and paging

group number : 1 to 8.

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

Start paging.

When an extension answers,

replace the handset.

. The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

. .

3

5-F-4

1.03 Paging External Pagers

Description

Allows

the extension users to perform paging

through

the external pager(s)

belonging to the

same tenant.

If two external pagers are available in the same

tenant, two methods are available: one is to page

by designating one external pager, and the other

is to page using two pagers.

To execute this function, dial the feature number

for “External Pager” and to answer the paging,

dial the feature number for ‘External Paging

Answer.”

Even if an external pager is connected to the

system, Paging External Pagers does not

operate unless ‘System-Operation”, External

Paging 1, 2 is assigned to “Yes”.

If Tenant Service is available, it is possible to

attach each external pager to a tenant in “lrunk-

Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-Tenant.

Confirmation tone from external pagers is

selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,

External Pager-Tone.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

*System-Operation (l/S)“, 9-D-l .Ol 1 O-C-4.00

External Paging 1.2

‘System-Class of -rice (2/2)“,

9-D-4.02 104-8.00

External Paging

‘System-Numbering Plan (SB)“, ~&343+X 10-G10.00

External Paging

External Paging Answer

‘Trunk-Pager

& Music Source”,

9-F-2.00 1 O-C-1 9.00

External Pager-Tenant

External Pager-Tone

Conditions

If the designated pager is being used, busy tone

is returned to the paging performer.

If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are

being used, it is not possible to page using two

pagers. Busy tone is returned to the user.

If external pagers are not assigned by system

programming, reorder tone sounds when paging.

The followings show the paging priorities:

(1) Paging External Pager from an Attendant

Console

(2) TAFAS (Trunk Answer from Any Station )

(Refer to Section 5-B-2.00 “Trunk Answer

From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.” )

(3) Paging External Pagers from an extension

(this function)

(4) BGM through External Pager

If a lower priority page is active, and a higher

priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower

one: for instance, if Paging External Pager is

overridden by another higher priority, reorder

tone is returned to the performer of Paging

External Pager. If TAFAS signal or BGM is

overridden by another higher priority, it is

interrupted and starts again when the higher

priority is finished.

5-F-5

Operation

Performing Paging External

Pagers

1.

Lift the handset

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging.”

3. Dial the number for specifying an

external pager or pagers: 0, 1 or

2.

0: specifies external pagers 1

and 2

1: specifies external pager 1

2: specifies external pager 2

l

After you hear confirmation tone

3, start paging through the

external pager(s).

4. After paging, replace the

handset.

Answering during external paging

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging Answer.”

3. Dial the number of the external

pager: 1 or 2.

. After you hear confirmation tone

3, talk to the caller who made

._

the page.

-‘a”s’f’; ng a call using Paging External Pagers

3urinc 3 conversation with an extension or an

o;ltsi& party

1.

2.

Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

The other party is placed on

hold.

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Dial the feature number for

“External Paging” and external

pager specifying number : 0, 1

or 2.

0: specifies external pagers 1

and 2

1: specifies external pager 1

2: specifies external pager 2

. You hear confirmation tone 3.

Start paging.

When an extension answers,

replace the handset.

l

The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

5-F-6

1.04 Paging All Extensions

and

External Pagers

Description

Paging All Extensior: 2-c Ev?nal Pagers offers

both Paging All Extensions and Paging External

Pagers at the same tire It provides paging

through the preprogrammed external pagers and

the built-in speakers in PlTSs of the extensions

within the range of the tenant that the user

belongs to.

The user’s “System-Class of Service”, Station

Paging Access” determines the paging groups of

the extensions that can receive paging and also

External Paging determines the external pagers

that can receive paging.

Programming

System Programming

“System-Class of Service (2/2)“,

Station Paging ACXXSS

External Paging 1,2

‘System-Numbering Plan (3/g)“,

External Paging

Station Paging

External Paging Answer

Station Paging Answer

v-r

9-D-4.02

9-D-6.03

Conditions

Refer to Section 5-F-l .Ol “Paging All Extensions”

and Section 5-F-l .03 “Paging External Pagers.”

l

The other party is placed

on

hold.

Operation You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Performing Paging All Extensi@@and External

Pagers 2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” or the feature

number for “External Paging,”

then dial U*.”

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” or the feature

number for “External Paging,”

then dial “*.”

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3. start paging.

3. After paging, replace the handset.

Answering Paging All Extensions and External

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer,” or the ‘.

: -

I feature number for “External

Paging Answer” and the number

of the external pager : 1 or 2.

l

After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer. :i,

Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions

and External Pagers

During a conversation with an extension or an

outside party

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

a

3. Start paging.

L

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset. .

l

The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.

:::

5-F-7

2.00 Background Music (BGM)

through External Pager

Description

The system can provide up to two external music

sources. The music source can be broadcast as

background music (BGM) through external

pagers.

Starting or stopping BGM can be executed by the

Operator 1 (Attendant Console or extension user)

in the same tenant that the external pagers and

external music equipment belong to.

To start and stop this function, use the same

feature number for “BGM Through External

Paging.”

Dialing the feature number while BGM is on

stops BGM, and reversely starts BGM while BGM

is off.

To activate this feature, external music

equipment and an external pager should be

. connected to the system, and

assign

“System-

Operation”, External Music Source 1, 2 and

External Paging 1, 2 to “Yes” by the system

programming.

“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-

BGM should be assigned to “Yes” to use this

function. This assignment can be done to each

external pager.

Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,

Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold

& BGM.” This assignment can be done to each

external musicequipment.

Programming

System Programs:-c --,,“““‘z,/

“System-Operation (1!3’ -

External Paging

1.2

9-D-l .Ol [ 1 O-C-4.00

External

Music Source : ,2 I

“System-Numbering Plar ‘8/g)“. : 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00

BGM

Through Exten?a

Pag,T,

“Trunk-Pager 8 Music ScLrce”, 9-F-2.00

External Pager-Tenart ’ 10-c-19.00

External Pager-BGM

Music Source-Tenant 1 1 O-c-20.00

Music Source-For Use I

Conditions

If Tenant Service is employed, it is possible to

attach each external music equipment and

external pager to a tenant by using “Trunk-Pager

& Music Source”, External Pager-Tenant and

Music Source-Tenant.

This function is effective only when an external

pager and an external music equipment are

connected and programming has been

completed. Otherwise, the user hears reorder

tone after executing the operation to activate this

function.

5-F-8

Operation

Turning BGM on when BGM is off

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for ‘BGM

Through External Paging.”

l

After you hear confirmation

tone 2, BGM sounds from the

external pager(s).

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM

Through External Paging.”

l

After you hear confirmation

tone 2, BGM from the external

pager(s) stops.

3. Replace the handset. 3. Replace the handset.

5-F-9

G. Other Features

1 .OO Night Service

1.01 Universal Night Answer (UNA)

Description Conditions

Allows any extension user in the system to

answer the incoming CO calls ringing at an

external pager, by dialing the feature number for

“Night Answer l-or 2.”

To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE

and Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA

1

or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External

Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External

Pager 2. AtI CO lines belong to this trunk group

are covered by this assignment.

To execute the system administration from a

remote location at night, select ‘MT’ for Yrunk-

CO Line” Night Answer Point assignment.

For further information about remote

administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00

System Administration from a Remote Location.”

External pager must be connected to the system

beforehand.

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

the system.

To answer a call ringing at external pager 1, dial

the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to

answer a call ringing at external pager 2, dial the

. feature number for.“Night Answer 2.”

For further information about external pager

assignment, refer to Section 5-F-l .03 “Paging

External Pagers.”

if tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and

2) can have unique Night Service arrangement

individually.

The affiliation of each external pager is

determined by the system programming in

Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-

Tenant.

The extension user cannot answer the UNA call

ringing at an external pager in the diierent

tenant.

Operation

Answering incoming CO calls ringing at an

external pager.

Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. The

difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode

and UNA is available in night mode.

For further information about TAFAS, refer to

Section 5-B-2.00 “Trunk Answer From Any

Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”

u

m

An incoming CO call is ringing at an

I 8

& external pager. ,

Ilr

1. Lift the handset.

Programming ‘-: ~.

System Programming

“Group-Trunk Group

(l/2)“,

Incoming Mode (Night)

‘Trunk-CO Line”,

Night Answer Point

“System-Numbering Plan (3/9)

Night Answer 1

Night Answer 2

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4

L

2. If a call is ringing at external

pager 1: Dial the feature number

for “Night Answer 1.”

if a call is ringing at external

pager 2: Dial the feature number

for “Night Answer 2.”

3. Talk to the caller.

5-G-1

1.02 Flexible Night Service

Description

Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1

(Attendant Console or extension user) to change

the assigned night answer destination on a CO

4ine basis by dialing the feature number for

“Flexible Night Service.”

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO

lines belong to this trunk group are covered by

this assignment.

If FIXED is selected for above setting, the

assigned night answer destination can not be

changed by the Operator 1.

Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service

is almost the same.

The difference is:

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

or Extension) can change the night

answer destination.

FiXed

A group of extensions (Night

Answer Group) can be assigned as

the destination of one or more CO

lines in night mode

Programmlng

System Prosramming

i..,:. “Group-Trunk Group (l/2)“,

Incoming MC& (Night)

“Trunk-CO tine”,

Night Answer Point

Reference

VT Dumb

SE-l.01 10-C-14.00

9-F-1.00

lOG18.00

‘System-Numbering Plan (8/9)‘, 9-D-6.08

10-C-10.00

Flexible Night Service

Conditions

If tenant service is employed, the night answer

destination can only be changed for a CO line in

the same tenant by the Operator 1.

Operation

Changing a night answer desznation to an

extension

1. Lift the handset.

2.

3. Replace the handset.

Dial the feature number for

Flexible Night Service 72”

(default) and CO physical number

and destination extension number.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

Changing a night answer destination to the remote

maintenance port

1. Lift the handset.

. .

2. Dial the feature number for

Flexible Night Service 72”

(default) and CO physical number

and FDN for remote.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2. :.

3. Replace the handset.

5-G-2

(30393)

Changing a night answer

destination to tn UNA

(Universal Night Answer)

1. Lift the handset.

2. -Dial the feature number for

Flexible Night Service 72”

(default) and CO physical number,

* and 1 for external pager 1 or *

and 2 for external pager 2.

1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode

Description

It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either

automatically at pre-assigned time or manually

by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or

Extension) at any time desired.

If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the

Operator 1 must dial the feature

number for

“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode

Cancel” for day service.

If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system

will switch the day and night modes at the

programmed time each day.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

3. Replace the handset.

To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “System-

Operation (313)” Night Service to ‘Auto’ and

assign desired mode switching time to ‘Auto

Start Ttme” on a per day of the week basis.

To utilize Manual Switching mode, set ‘System-

Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”

The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto

Mode setting, that is Manual Mode is

established, by dialing the feature number for

“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the

Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature

number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

If tenant service is employed, night se&e

assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and

Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.

In this case, the assignment in ‘System-

Operation (3/3)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the

assignment in ‘System-Tenant” is applied to

Tenant 2.

Programming

Reference

System Rogramming VT DlJllIb

‘System-Operation (a/3)‘,

9-D-l .03 1 O-G4.00

Night Service

Auto Start Time

‘System-Tenant”.

9-D-2.00 1 W-5.00

Night Service (Tenant 2)

Auto Start Time

‘System-Numbering Plan (&9)“, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00

Night Mode Set

Night Mode Cancel

Night Service Manual Mode

Set

Night Service Manual Mode

ChllCel

5-G-3

(30393)

Conditions

If Auto Stati Time on a certain day is not

assigned, the current mode is continued until a

new start time is encountered.

If the Start lime for Day mode and Night mode

on the same day are set identically, the current

mode is continued.

If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed

at all. the current mode is continued. In other

words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode

is continued, and if the current mode is Night

then Night Mode is continued.

Operation

Changing Day mode to Night mode

1.

2.

3.

Lii the handset.

Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

Replace the handset.

Changing Night mode to Day mode

Lift the handset. .Y-- %..

Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

Replace the handset.

Changing from Auto mode to Manual mode

1. lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Night

Service Manual Mode Set.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

3. Replace the handset.

Changing from Manual mode to Auto mode

1.

2.

3.

Lift the handset.

Dial the feature number for “Night

Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2. .L

Replace the handset.

5-G-4

2.00

Account Code Entry

Description

Operation

Entering an account code when calling an

outside party in the Forced mode

Acsount Code Entry is usec to associate an

account code with incoming and outgoing CO

Saik.

The account code is appended to the SMDR call

record and can be used later for accounting and

billing purposes.

The account code can include up to 10 digits.

The validity of the entered account code is not

checked by the system.

Entry of account code may be optional, or the

extension user may be forced to enter the

account code.

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2.

Dial the feature number for

selecting a CO line.

l

You hear no tone.

-i

In the forced mode, the account code must be

entered before making an outgoing CO call.

In the option mode, enter the account code, if

necessary.

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT 1 Dumb

I

Conditions

.?

In the option mode, it is possible to dial an

account code even after the conversation before

hanging up.

Only numerical characters of “0 to 9” can be

dialed as account codes.

Entering an account code over 10 digits sounds

alarm tone.

Be sure to dial I‘#” after dialing a code, since “#I”

delimits the code.

•l

#

3.

4.

5.

6.

Dial the feature number for

“Account Code.”

l

Youhear dial tone 2.

Dial the account code.

l

Up to 10 digits can be dialed as

an account code.

Dial ,#.”

l

You hear dial tone 1.

.

Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

If you use a rotary telephone, dial “99” instead of

W to delimit the code.

You cannot use “99” and tiat ends with ‘9” as

account codes by the rotary telephone.

5-G-5

Entering an account code when receiving a call

from an outside party in the Forced mode

1. Lift the handset.

l

Talk to the other party.

2. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Dial the feature number for

“Account Code.”

l

You hear dial tone 2.

4. Dial the account code.

l

Maximum digits for an account

code is 10.

5. Dial “#.”

l

Start conversation again.

Entering an account code after calling an outside

party or atier receiving a call from an outside

party in the Option mode

While having a conversation

I

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second

and release.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Account Code.”

l

You hear dial tone 2.

3. Dial the account code.

l

Maximum digits for an account

code is 10.

4. Dial ,#..

l

Start conversation again.

Correcting an error after dialing a wrong account

code (not available with rotary type SLT

telephones)

1. Dial “*.”

l

You hear dial tone 2.

2. Dial the correct account code.

‘*

3. Dial “#.”

5-G-6

3.00 Timed Reminder (Alarm

Clock)

Description

The extension user can use his or her telephone

as an atarm clock.

When this feature is set, alarm tone will ring for 2

minutes at the programmed time.

Wake-up Call

By going off-hook, the extension user can hear

the wake-up message, lf it has been recorded

beforehand.

The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent

tone (dial tone 2) instead of the wake-up

message.

(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with

OGM (wake-up call).“)

This feature can be set to operate only once or

everyday at a specified time.

Programming

’ ~1

System-Numbering Plan (619) , 9-D-6.06

10-G10.00

Conditions

(1) What if the extension is busy or off-hook at

the programmed time?

Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes

on-hook.

(2) What if a call comes in when alarm tone is

ringing?

The caller hears busy tone.

(3) Remote limed Reminder

This feature can also be set by the Operator 1

or 2 to any extension.

(See Section 4-I-14.00 and Section

6-J-13.00.)

(4) Newly programmed time overrides the aid

one.

Only the latest setting is valid at a single

extension whether it was set by the extension

itself or by the operator.

(5) Tone Pattern

Alarm tone sounds in the following manner:

+ 5.0 set W

Operation

Setting limed Reminder

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for limed

Reminder set * 51” (default).

3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to

12.

4. Dial “minute” withtwo digits: 00 to

59.

5. Dial ‘0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m.

.- _

-4 ,... . .

6. Dial “0” for iimes Reminder-one

time, or dial ‘1” for Ttmed

Reminder-every day.

I’ ‘I

9 You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

7. Replace the handset.

5-G-7

(40993)

Canceling the limed Reminder Assignment

Lift the handset.

Answering alarm tone

1.

2.

3.

When the preset time comes, alarm tone sounds.

1.

.

Dial

the

feature number for

Tmed Reminder Cancel Y6’

(default).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then diil tone 1 or 3 or 4.

Lift the handset.

Alarm tone stops and you hear a

wake-up message or BGM, or

intermittent tone (dial tone 2):

Replace the handset.

l

Thii is determined by the system

programming.

Refer to Section 3-F-13.00 “Jimed Reminder

with OGM (Wake-up Call).”

(Supplement)

Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following

timing:

-w-

I+ 1.osec-j

5-G-8

(40993)

4.00 Data Line Security

Description

Used to maintain Ihe co.mm~n~~a:.~r. ore-r:,- by

prohibiting various tones such as ‘3a*!

Ww13

tone or Held Call Reminder from sounding at the

extension in data communication mode. I: aiso

prohibits other extensions

from

executing

overriding functions such as Busy Override.

To assign Data Line Security, assign “Extension-

Station” Data Line Security to “Yes.”

You can set and cancel this function by

dialing

the feature numbers for “Data Line

Security Set”

and “Data Line Security Cancel.”

Programming

System Programming

“System-Numbering Plan (5/g)“,

Data Line Security Set

Data Line Security Cancel

“Extension-Station (l/3)”

Data Line Security

Reference

VT Dumb

9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00

9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00

Conditions

Assigning this function always offers the

extension user Privacy mode unless Privacy

Release is executed.

If there is a conversation between the

extension

setting

Data Line Security and the

extension not

setting

it, Data Line Security is applied to the

both extensions.

Operation

Setting Data Line Security

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Data

Line Security Set.”

I

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

Canceling Data Line Security

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number

for “Data

Line Security Cancel.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-G-9

5.00 Absent Message Capability

Descrt=t:or:

F -c-id--5 ic &.?Z ii I

L- - --’ -*<sage on the disp ?.y of a

Cali ?a E;.q:?TiSiC.Y. i

f t:k zalled party has assigned

an a&en: message.

An absent message acoears only on the display

of PITS (if provded).

There are six fixed ant 10 programmable absent

messages.

The followings are the six fixed messages (“x”

shows

a

parameter to je entered when a user

sets a message).

1) Will Return Soon

2) Gone Home

3) In a Meeting

4) Back At xx :x x xx

T T--%;:“-

5) Out Until xx/xx

=%th

6) At Ext xxxx

s directory nurrber

(three or four digits)

To set and cancel this function, use the feature

numbers for “Absent Message Set” and ‘Absent

Message Cancel.”

Programming

Referee.ze

System Programmin;

.- VT Dumb

“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 ::6-5.00

Absent

Message

Boundary

“System-Numbering Plot (6/g)“, 9-D-6.06 ! Z-G10.00

Absent Message SE:

Absent Message Czcel

“System-Absent Message”, 9-D-9.00 I :-&13.00

Fixed Message

Flexible Message

Conditions

If Tenant Service is eqloyed, 10 programmable

messages can be split between two tenarts.

To split the messages. execute “System-Tenant”,

Absent Message Bourdary.

Six fixed messages are shared with two tenants.

The user cannoi set multiple -.essages at the

same time.

When a user sets fixed message 4), 5), or 6), the

system checks the parameters entered : for

example, when the user sets fixed message 4),

the parameters of “hour,” “minute,” “a.m./p.m.” are

checked. In case of an error entry, the user hears

reorder tone.

When a user sets a flexible message by the

system programming, he can enter up to six

parameters: %.”

If a flexible message contains any parameter, use

“0 to 9,” “*,” and “#” to enter it.

If the user enters fewer or more parameters than

the assigned parameters, or enters characters

except “0 to 9,

” =+” and ,#,” he hears reorder

tone.

When a user calls an extension that sets both

Absent Message and Call Forwarding-No Answer,

Call Forwarding-No Answer is activated.

Refer to Section 5-D-2.03 “Call Forwarding-No

Answer” for further information.

Operation . .

Setting fixed message l), 2) or 3)

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature,number for

-Absent Message Set.”

3. Dial “Oln for fixed message l),or

dial “02” for fixed message 2), or

dial “03” for fixed message 3).

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

.:;..i‘-r

. . --.

..;m- . . .

5-G-l 0

Setting fixed message

4).

5) or 61

i

Lift tc? handset

Dial tne feature number for ‘Absent

Message Set.”

Dial 94” for fixed message 4),or

dial ‘95” for fixed message 5), or

dial “06” for fixed message 6).

Dial &TIME” for fixed message

4),

or

dial ‘DATE” for fixed message 5), or

dial “directory number for fixed

message 6) as follows:

Input format for ‘WVIE” :

HH

MM AM/PM

(hoi:) 1

00 to 59

(minute)

0 for a.m.. 1 for p.m.

input format for ‘DATE’ :

MM DD

T

01 to12

T

(month)

01 to 31 (day)

‘.-c-s-

Input format for “directory number” :

three or four digits

l

You hear confirmation tone

1

or

2

and then dial tone

1

or 3 or

4.

Serr~ng a flsxible message

1. Lifr the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Absent Message Set.”

3. Dial the two digit message

number: 07 to 16.

lf the message requires any

parameters, enter alI the

parameters.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4.

Replace the handset.

Canceling the assigned message

1. Lift the handset. .I

2. Dial the feature number for

“Absent Message Cancel.”

l

You hear confivatiogtone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5.

Replace the handset.

5-G 11

6.00 Message Waiting

Description

Allows an extension user to

rndicate to another

extension that a message ts waiting tar nim or her,

by turning on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on

the called extension.

This feature is useful when the called extension is

busy or does not answer the call.

Any SLT user can set message waiting indiition

to other extensions (PITS with MESSAGE button

or SLT with MESSAGE lamp), but cannot receive it

unless your extension is an SLT with MESSAGE

lamp.

(For SLT with MESSAGE lamp users)

To receive message waiting indication, “Extension

- Station” Message Waiting Indication should be

set to ‘Lamp’ beforehand.

To call back the message sender, dial the feature

number for ‘Message Waiting Reply.”

Up to 500 message waiting indications can be set

. for the whole system.

System Pqramming

‘System-Tenant,,

Message Wafting Boundary

‘System-Numbering

Plan (719)‘.

Message Set

Message Cancel

Message Wafting Reply

‘Extension-Statiin-,

Message Waiting Indication

Refc

VT

SD260

SD6.07

Programming

Conditions

1. Suitable Telephones:

(1) Message Sender

l

Attendant Console

. A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE

button.

l

Any Single Line Telephone.

(2) Message Receiver

l

A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE

button.

l

A Single Line Telephone with

MESSAGE lamp.

2. Reorder Tone

A

caller who attempts to leave a message

waiting indication may hear the reorder tone in

the following cases:

(1) Receiver’s extension is:

l

A PITS telephone without a MESSAGE

button.

l

A Single Line Telephone without

MESSAGE lamp.

(2) The maximum number of message waiting

indications available for the system or

tenant l/2 has been assigned.

3. Tenant Service

The maximum number of message waiting

indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is

determined by “Systen+Tenant” Message

Waiting Boundary.

4. Setting of the multiple message waiting

indications

_ ., (1) More than one message sender can leave

message waiting indications to the same

extension at the same time.

(2) Even if the same message sender sets

message waiting indications to the same

extension more than once, this leaves only

one message on the called extension.

5. The MESSAGE indicator on the message

receiver’s extension will be turned off when:

(1) The message receiver calls back the

message sender by pressing the red tit

MESSAGE button, and it was answered by

the message sender (or by another

extension using Call Pickup or an SDN

button).’ ’

(2) Message waiting indication is canceled by

the message sender.’ ’

(3) Message waiting indications are canceled

by the message receiver.* z

* ’ The indicator may not be turned off, if there are

other message waiting indications sent by other

extensions.

l

* All message waiting indications are canceled at

once.

5-G-l 2

30393)

Operation by Caller

(At message sender’s extension-Any SLT)

Setting the Message Waiting Indication

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

Message Set ‘*9” (default) and

then extension number of the

other party.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

The MESSAGE indicator on the

message receiver’s extension is

turned on.

3. Replace the handset.

Canceling the Message Waiting indication on

receiver’s extension set by a caller

II’

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

Message Cancel V9” (default)

and the extension number of the

message receiver successivelyI

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

If the other extension received

only one message, the

MESSAGE indicator on the

message receiver’s extension

goes out.

Operation by Receiver

(At message receiver’s extensior+SLT with

MESSAGE lamp only)

Calling back the message sender

F----l 1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

Message Waiting Reply “57”

(defautt).

. You hear ringback tone. When

the message sender answers,

start conversation.

l

If you received multiple

messages, calling back the first

message sender is performed.

At the conclusion of the

conversation, the first message

is canceled.

. At the conclusion of the

conversations with all the

message senders, the

MESSAGE lamp on your

extension goes out.

3. Replace the handset.

(Note)

l

Callback order

If more than one message waiting indication is

left on your extension, callback order is always

from the oldest to the newest (First In First Out).

This order cannot be changed.

l

Confirming the message sendets extension is

not available.

3. Replace the handset.

5-G-13

(30393)

Canceling all Message Waiting Indications on

your extension

1.

Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

Message Cancel “#9” (default)

and your own extension number

in succession.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

l

The MESSAGE lamp on your

extension goes out.

3. Replace the handset.

5-G-l 3-1

(30393)

7.00

Electronic Station Lock Out

Description

Allows an extension user to prohibit other

extension users from making outgoing CO calls

from his or her extension.

The user can select any three digit lock code from

000 to 999. -

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of

Service”, Station Lock to “Yes.”

Programming

System Programming

“System-Class of Service (l/2)”

Station Lock

‘System-Numbering Plan (719)

Station Lock Set

Station Lock Cancel

Conditions

Both Operator 1 and 2 (Attendant Console or

extension user) can also set and cancel this

function for each extension.

Once the operator locks an extension, the

extension user cannot unlock it.

Refer to Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station

Feature Control” for further information.

Operation

Setting Electronic Station Lock

Out

1.

Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Lock Set.”

3. Dial the lock code: 000 to 999.

4. Dial the same lock code again.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

5. Replace the handset.

. .

Canceling Electronic Station Lock Out

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Lock Cancel.”

3. Dial the iock code.

l

You hear confirmation tone 2.

m

4. Replace the handset.

5-G-14

8.00 Assigned Feature Clear

Description

Operation

-

’ io?*:s an exiensior -ser to clear the Wowing

‘eaiure

assigned on : by dialing the feature

-Jmber for “Station s-ogram Clear.”

1. Lift the handset.

l

You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(a) Call Forwardirg/Do Not Disturb

(b) Absent Messa.;e

(c) Ttmed Remincer

Programming

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Program Clear.”

l

You hear confirmation tone 3.

3. Replace the handset.

Conditions

None

..-

5-G-l 5

9.00 Remote

Control

Description

Station Feature

Allows the Operator

1

and 2 (extension user or

Attendant Console) to set or cancel the following

features assigned to each extension:

Features that can be canceled :

l

DND (Do Not Disturb)

l

Electronic Station Lock Out

l

FWD (Call Forwarding)

(it is also possible to cancel FWD

temporarily)

Features that can be set :

l

DND (Do Not Disturb)

l

Electronic Station Lock Out

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (8/g)“, g-D-6.08 1 O-C-I 0.00

Remote Station Lock Set

Remote Station Lock

Cancel

Remote DND Set

Remote DND Cancel

Remote FWD Cancel

Remote FWD Cancel-One Time

Conditions

When an extension is locked by the operator,

unlocking by the locked extension itself is

impossible. %..3.

cc --:: ‘s

Operation

Setting/canceling Do Not Disturb to/from an

extension

1. Lift the handset.

2. Setting : Dial the feature number

for “Remote DND Set.”

Canceling : Dial the feature

number for “Remote DND

Cancel.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

4. Replace the handset.

Setting/canceling Electronic Station Lock Out

to/from an extension

1. Lift the handset.

2-l. Setting : Dial the feature number

for “Remote Station Lock Set.”

I

2-2. Canceling : Dial the feature

number for “Remote Station

Lock Cancel.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

4. Replace tie handset.

1

I *

/

-

2.

3.

-$

4.

Dial ;5e feature wrnber for

-Remote

FWD Cancel.”

Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Forwarding temporarily from an

extension

3

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Remote FWD Cancel-One Time.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

l

Cali

Forwarding is canceled

temporarily.

l

Cailing the extension starts.

5-G-l 7

Section 6

Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)

(Section; 6)

Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)

Contenrs

Page

A Preparation .,......_. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__.._.................................... 6-A-l

1 .OO Location of Controls.. ............................................................................. 6-A-l

2.00 Display through LED Indicator.. ............................................................. 6-A-5

B Mode Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-B-l

C Useful Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..............................._...................................... 6-C-l

1 .oo Layout of Screen Display. ...................................................................... 6-C-l

2.00 LOOP Key and Trunk Group Screen ..................................................... 6-C-3

3.00 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen .............................................................. 6-C-7

4.00 Speed Dial Screen ................................................................................. 6-C-l 5

5.00 Extension Directory Screen ................................................................... 6-C-l 7

6.00 Call Park System Screen.. ..................................................................... 6-C-l 9

7.00 Extension Management Screen ............................................................. 6-C-21

8.00 Pickup Group Management Screen.. ..................................................... 6-C-26

9.00 CO Management Screen.. ..................................................................... 6-C-28

10.00 Attendant Management Screen.. ........................................................... 6-C-31

11.00 Help Screen.. ......................................................................................... 6X-35

D Outgoing Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I..... 6-D-l

1 .OO Making Outside Calls.. ...........................................................................

1 .Ol Local Trunk Dial Access ..............................................................

1.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access.. ...........................................

&=- 1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Aece~a;~. ..............................

2.00 Automatic Dialing ..................................................................................

2.01 Speed Dialing-System .................................................................

2.02 Last Number Redial (LNR) ..........................................................

3.00 Making Internal Calls ............................................................................

3.01 Inter Office Calling-Manual Dialing. .............................................

3.02 Inter Office Calling by Extension Direcory Screen.. ....................

3.03 Inter Office Calling by BLF Screen ..............................................

3.04 Inter Office Calling by Extension Management Screen.. .............

3.05 Inter Office Calling by Name/Department ....................................

3.06 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA\ ........................................

4.00 Executive Busy Override ............. ;..1....

.................................................

5.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override .............................................................

6-D-l

6-D-2

6-D-3

6-D-4

6-D-8

6-D-9

6-D-l 1

6-D-l 2

6-D-13

6-D-l 4

6-D-l 5

6-D-l 6

6-l

E

F

G

Page

Receiving Features.. ........................................................................................ 6-E-l

1.00 Answering by the ANSWER Key.. ......................................................... 6-E-i

2.00

Answering by a LOOP Key.. ........ .; ..:.

.................................................... 6-E-2

3.00 Directed Call Pickup .............................................................................. 6-E-3

Holding Features

.............................................................................................. 6-F-l

1 .OO Hold ....................................................................................................... 6-F-l

2.00

Automatic Hold ...................................................................................... 6-F-2

3.00 Call Park-System.. ................................................................................. 6-F-3

Transferring Features ..................................................................................... 6-G-l

1 .OO Call Transfer.. ................................................. . ..:. .................................. 6-G-l

1 .Ol Unscreened Call Transfer to Station ............................................ 6-G-l

1.02 Call Transfer by Camp-on to Station ........................................... 6-G-2

1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Station ...............................................

6-G-3

1.04 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk..

................................................ 69-4

1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote .......................................... 6-G-5

1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with CGM) ............. 6-G-5-l

2.00 Heavy Traffii Overflow Transfer to Station.. .......................................... 6-G-6

3.00

Serial Call .............................................................................................. 6-G-7

4.00 lnterpositiin Call Transfer.. .................................................................... 6-G-8

5.00 Call Transfer via Attendant Console ...................................................... 6-G-9

6.00 Released Link Operation.. ..................................................................... 6-G-10

7.00 Automatic Redirection ff No Answer.. ......................................... .

.......... e-11

Conversation Features.. ................................................................................... 6-H-l

1 .OO Conference ............................................................................................ 6-H-1

2.00

Unattended Conference..

....................................................................... 6-H-2

3.00

Call Splitting ........................................................................................... 6-H-3

4.00 Doorphone Calling ................................................................................. 6-H-4

5.00 Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling). ........................................ 6-H-5

6.00 Cancel Key Function..

............................................................................ 6-H-6 ...

Paging Features .............................................................................................. 6-l-l

1 .OO Paging.. .................................................................................................. 6-l-l

1.01 Paging All Extensions..

................................................................ 6-l-l

1.02 Group Paging .............................................................................. 6-l-2

1.03 Paging External Pagers.. ............................................................. 6-l-3

(4E3)

Page

1

.W ?aging All Extensions and External Pagers.. .............................. 6-I-5

1 05

Call Park

and Paging.. ................................................................. 6-I-6

2.OC Bacqmund Music (BGM) through External Pager.. .............................. 6-l-7

J Other

FezAres . . . . . . . . . .._............................-.................................-.....-.........-...-.

6-J-l

1.00

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

6.00

7.00

8.00

9.00

10.00

11.00

12.00

13.00

14.00

Nignt Service .........................................................................................

.

1.01

Flexible Night Service.. ................................................................

1.02 Switching of Day/Night Mode ......................................................

Account Code Entry ...............................................................................

Secret Dialing ........................................................................................

Message Waiting. ...................................................................................

Remote Station Feature Control ............................................................

Dial Tone Transfer .................................................................................

Search by Name/Department ................................................................

Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ......................

Trunk Verify ............................................................................................

CO Access Control ................................................................................

Power Failure Operation ........................................................................

intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA) .....................................................

Remote Timed Reminder - One Time .*..- .............................................

Call Display at Attendant Console ........................................................

6-J- 1

6-J-l

6-J-5

6-J-6

6-J-8

6-J-9

6-J-l 0

6-J-l 6

w-17

6-J-l 9

6-J-21

6-J-22

6-J-25

6-J-26

6-J-27

6-J-29

(3E3)

A. Preparation

1.00 Location of Controls

1

r

Volume Control

Power Switch Ringer Volum3 Selector

Switch Function

Local Switch Sets the attendant console to “LOCAL” mode.

Ringer Volume Selector Selects the ringing tone level (Off-Low-High).

Volume Control Adjusts the volume level of the handset or headset.

4 Reset Switch Resets :he attendant console.

6-A-l

Function keyboard

- ATT FWD (Attendant

Fc:vard) Switch

r

Power indicator PGM MODE (Program

Mode) Switch

r Function Keys

( (Fi to F8)

I

r ALARM Key

and Indicator

‘RG MODE

- NIGHT Key

and Indicator

HOLD Key I

MSG (Message Waiting) Key -J

SPLIT Key

PAGE Key I

ANSWER Key

RELEASE

p

I

- RELEASE Key

- CANCEL Key

Dial Pad

- LOOP Keys and

Indicators

Full keyboard (Option)

l-

6-A-2

Functions of various keys on the function keyboard

Function keys :

(Fl to F8)

LOOP keys :

(LOOP1 to

LOOP6)

RELEASE key :

ANSWER key :

HOLD key :

CANCEL key :

SPLIT key :

PAGE key :

ALARM key :

NIGHT key :

MSG key :

DIAL PAD :

(0 to 9, * #)

Programmable There are 12 programmable keys on the keyboard, which can be assigned to be any

keys: of 11 function keys listed below:

Functions of these keys vary according to the displayed screen.

Used to make and answer the calls (both extension and outside) etc..

Releases a call held on the LOOP key.

Used to answer incoming calls in first come first served basis.

Places a call on hold.

Cancels any key operation while holding a call on the LOOP key.

Switches between the SRC (Source) side party and DES (Destination) side party.

Used to execute parking a call and paging functions.

Displays major/minor alarm when the ALARM LED is flashing/lit.

Switches between day and night modes.

Used to leave a message on the LED of an extension which does not answer.

Used to dial the telephone number and the feature number.

AUTO, TRG, CALL-PARK, TOLL-CHG, ACCOUNT, SERIAL,

OHCA, CONF, REDIAL, E-E and One Touch (direct input)

Refer to 6-C-10.00 “Attendant Management Screen,” for further information about

Programmable key.

PRG MODE

switch :

l

The attendant console is operable as call processing terminal and system

administration terminal by setting this switch ON and OFF.

l

When you set this switch to ON, the initial display of VT programming mode appears

on the screen.

Now you can operate the attendant console as the system administration device.

(System administration device name must be set to “ATT 1 or ATT 2” in the system

programming beforehand.)

. You can enter into Dumb programming mode by pressing I=] key +

q

key

simultaneously at main menu screen of VT programming mode.

l

Set this switch to OFF, to return to the call processing mode.

6-A-3

ATT-FWD

switch :

* Turning the ATT-FWD switch ON stops the arrival of all CO e:d exz-sior 3~ 5 ? 1 zt;.:

recall) to the attendant cor;sole temporarily and provides for r-an.+; ci thE L- --..-.- :.

calls to the extension programmed in system programming “Zrters :“-A:::- : -. T :*

sole-Busy-Out Extension” in advance.

It is available to make calls in this mode.

l

CO calls arrived at the attendant console before this switch is set to ON acd ‘fTalT!-z ,n

the queue are transferred to another attendant console, if it belongs to the ~a-2

ter? *

If there is no other attendant console belonging to the same tenant: the calls a-e trans

ferred to the above mentioned extension preset in system programming.

6-A-4

2.00 Display through LED Indicator

l

SRC, DES indicators of LOOP key

Line conditions are displayed by three patterns of flashing LED indicators as follows.

Pattern 1

(240 wink) uoouuullu~nooono I

t ,

-_

Pattern 2

(60 wink) :

Pattern 3

(120 wink)

PU

It-

1 set

I

rlu ml ml

-I

.::+

Pattern 1: Shows call arriving with 240 winks/min and is called “240 wink.”

Pattern 2: Shows holding a call with 60 winks/min and is called “60 wink.”

Pattern 3: Shows Unattended Conference with 120 winks/min and is called “120 wink.” . .

Light on steady shows busy status and light off shows idle status.

l

ALARM indicator

1 ALARM indicator shows the following conditions.

Lit steadily : Indicates minor trouble.

Blinking : Indicates major trouble.

Not lit : Indicates the system is in normal

operation.

Pressing the ALARM key while ALARM indicator

lights or flashes displays the detail of the trouble

on the message line of the CRT screen and the

ALARM indicator light goes out.

Pressing the ALARM key again causes the

trouble message disappear.

l

NIGHT Indicator

Not lit indicates Day mode and lit indicates

Night mode.

l

POWER Indicator .-em

Not lit indicates POWER switch-is turned OFF.

and lit indicates POWER switch is turned ON.

* This POWER switch is used to turn on and off

the CRT display.

The attendant console is operable during power

failure, if it is connected to the main unit.

(For details, refer to Section 6-J-l 1 .OO “Power

Failure Operation.“)

6-A-5

B. Mode Structure

Attendant console is operable in the following

modes:

9 Call processing mode (On-line)

l

System Programming

The attendant operates the console in this mode . Off-line programming

ordinarily. Executes programming in off-line mode.

l

Local operation mode

Set the LOCAL switch to ON.

In this mode, the following five functions are

available:

l

On-line programming

Executes programming in on-line mode.

l

Editing Extension Directory

l

Editing Speed Dial Dictionary

l

Diagnosing the Attendant Console

l

Making back-up data of Attendant Console

database

l

Clearing Attendant Console database

(Refer to Section 13 “Station Programming-

Attendant Console” for further information about

LOCAL mode operation)

. Setting positions of the switches executing the preceding operations are shown below: :

SystemOperation

Operation mode Local switch Program switch Power switch administration

on CRT device

Call processing OFF OFF

mode (On-line)

Local operation

Programming operation

(Off-line)

Programming operation

(On-line)

.

ON ON/OFF

ATT1

OFF ON/OFF ON .4. A0A2

AT-U

OFF ON ON A0A2

l

For the assignment of system administration device, refer to Section 9-D-l .OO

“Operation (2/3).”

l

In the case of a power failure, the attendant console is operable in call process-

ing mode except that the CRT screen is blank.

(Refer to Section 6-J-l 1 .OO “Power Failure Operation.“)

6-B-l

C. Useful Screens

1.00 Layout of Screen Display

Description

Expizs rhe .a+out of the screen display, a-sd the

type ct screens on :ne CRT display in the cz.il

processing mode of the attendant console.

Layout of screen

c

(4) I (5

(6)

The screen is constructed with six fields as .!lus-

trated above, and they are called as follows:

(1) Title field

. (2) Date & time field

(3) Application field

(4) Input/output (I/O) field

(5) Answer field

(6) Function field

1. Title field

f

The display in this area varies with the zode

of the console.

There are 10 different modes.

-

2. Date & time field

Current year, month, date and time are

displayed in this field

3. Application field

In conjunction with the function keys, 1 C

screens are available.

4. Input / output field

This field consists of the following coturns.

1

Input :

SRC:

DES:

Message:

l

Input column

Details of the operations performed through the

function keyboard or the full keyboard appear

here.

l

SRC column

The LOOP key number currently in use, and the

condition of SRC (Source) side party appear

here.

For instance, when extension 100 is making

outgoing call on LOOP1 , the displays is as

follows :

j] =I: Ext. 100 (Jack)Outgoing

l

DES column

Condition of DES side party currently active

appears here.

l

Message column

Information message for the various operations

appears here.

5. Answer field

The party which will be answered by pressing

the ANSWER key appears here.

. .

<Example l> When incoming call is from inside

party:

LOOP-l

i

- -LOOP key number

Ext.100 - -Extension number calling

Betty - -Extension name;

Incoming - -Type of%all

(blinking display)

<Example 2> When incoming call is from outside

party:

- -LOOP key number

- -Trunk group number

- -Trunk group name

- -Type of call

(blinking display)

6. Function field

Displays the functions of the Fl through F8 keys.

6-C-l

Classification of the screens

--e screen will change depending on the function key pressed.

(’ LOOP key and

LTrunk

Group ]T[T[ -

Busy Lamp Field

t-n

F3 -

I

Speed Dial

t=

F4 -

I

Extension Directory

t n

F5 -

Call Park

t-n\

F7 -

Help

n F8 -

Function Select Extension manage

. n F3 +

Pickup G. manage

. n F4 ~->

CO Manage

. n F5 lllj

Attendant Manage

. n I=7 +

Help

Busy Lamp Field

screen

f

Speed Dial

screen

(E$;;ion Directory)

I

Call Park System

screen I

I

Help screen I

[ Help screen )

6-C-2

2.00 LOOP Key and Trunk Group

Screen

r

. .

!

,,,_,_I,_------------- ----A

c

_---_-------- --

C1~~2~03~~c-:3C5~~~07~06@~~10~11~12~13~:~~~jCi16~

------------- -- 7

A

I _.

Description

This screen displays the status of the LOOP keys

and trunk groups.

. Also displays the number of waiting calls and

overflowed calls.

Conditions

The following explains the use of the various

areas of the screen.

(1) Wait call

Number of the calls that cannot arrive at any

LOOP keys. These calls are put in the queue

) when all the six LOOP keys are in use.

(2) Overflow

Number of the calls remaining in the queue

when “System-System Timer” Attendant

Overflow Time has expired.

(3) LOOP key area

Displays the status of calls on individual LOOP

key by displaying SRC (source) and DES

(destination).

The status of the individual LOOP key is

displayed with four items as illustrated in the

following examples.

6-C-3

- -Extension number

- -Extension name

- -Status of the extension

The followings are example displays of the LOOP

key field about extension, trunk and paging.

Ext. 2001

-7

- -Extension number *

Tony - - Extension name

&Of T=02 0 - -Servfcg,cfass (01 to 32), Toll

Calling restrictTon level (01 to 16), Account

-[ code (0: Option, F: Forced)

t-Status of the extension

* In case “Call Forwarding” or “Calf Hunting,”

indicated with “ * .”

<Trunk>

- - -Trunk group number

- - -Trunk name.

- - -Toll restriction level (01 to 16)

- - -Status of the trunk

G. Page 1 - - -Type z: aaging *

Paging - - -Status

* G. page x

-& to8

: Grouo paging

G. page All : Group paging all

E. page x

-II. : External paging

1 or2

E. page All : External paging all

All page : Group paging all

and External paging all

AI-l-1 - -Attendant console number

Talk - -Status of attendant console

- - - Doorphone number

- - - Status of doorphone

l

The LOOP key number currently in use is dis-

played in reverse-video.

(4) Trunk Group area

Trunk group number, trunk group name (Up to

10 a!phanumeric characters) and trunk group

status are displayed in the trunk group area.

Dispiay for trunk group status is as follows.

I:

An idle trunk is available in the

displayed trunk group.

m: All trunks are busy in the displayed

trunk group.

-- : The trunk is not used.

(5) When the ATT-FWD switch is set to

ON,

the

ATT-FWD indicator flashes.

The ATT-FWD indicator is not lit when the

switch is set to OFF.

6-C-4

Function field

l

Types of function fields

Following two types of function fields are available for operation in LOOP key am

Trunk Group screen.

l

Selection of function fields

Function field display changes by every pressing of the F8 key (function select).

- (1)

(2)

LOOP Mode Busy Lamp

Change Field

(3) (4)

Speed Extension

Dial Directory

(5)

Call Park

(6) (7:

Help

@I---

Function

Select

y.-....

- (1) (2)

(3) (4) (5) (6) II\

\. I !8)

LOOP Mode Extension Pickup G. co Attendant Function

Change Manage Manage Manage Manage Help Select

i

/

6-C-5

The following flow charts show the options a\z..,abie i-c.n sazr _. c;)or . cmc.

Advance to your desired screen by pressing a correqzcx’~~ ;_ - c- or, L YY

<Field I> <Fie. 3 __I

n

Fl -> Changing LOOP Mode

(LOOP Mode Change)

(Busy Lamp Field)

n F3 +

(Speed Dial)

(Extension Directory)

n F5 lllj

(Call Park)

n

F7 +

(Help)

(Function Select)

Speed Dial

screen

@zG)

(F)

I

Help screen I

I

Field 2

Changing LOOP Mode

(LOOP Mode Change)

.

n

F2 ---+

(Extension Manage)

n F3 -

(Pickup G. Manage)

n F4 +

(CO manage)

n F5 lllj

(Attendant Manage)

n F7 +

(Help)

n

I=8

+

-a

(Function Select)

(Helpscreen)

6-C-6

3.00 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen

Jan 1. ‘99 FRI 12:00 Ah,

Busy Lamp Field

0: idle

n

: Busy

1000 /--J

1001

n

I

1002 j-J

1010

q

1011

q

i

(lb

1

- (1)

LOOP

& TRG

(2)

(3)

(4) (5) (6) (7)

W-

No./Name PGM Mode Function

Change Entry Select

Description

This screen is available both for monitoringJhe

status (idle or Busy) of extensions and for placing

inter office calling.

The symbols below are used to indicate the

current extension status.

0 : Idle

n

: Busy

Conditions

.%.* For monitoring the extension status, or placing

Inter Office Calling by this screen, the extension

numbers must have been registered in this

screen beforehand. For registration of extension

numbers, refer to Function Field 4 described

succeedingly.

a

t .-

Extension names do not appear when they are

not assigned in LOCAL mode. Refer to Section

13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”

. . .*

il

1)

I

1

l

For an extension to be considered busy, all

PDNs buttons are in use.

l

For making Inter Office Call by this screen, see

Section 6-D-3.03 “Inter Office Calling by BLF

Screen.”

6-C-7

Function fields

l

Types of function fields

Following five types of function fields are avaiiable for operatic? in the Busy Lamp

Field screen.

- (1)

LOOP

& TRG

(2)

(3)

Next Previous

Page Page

(41 (5) (6) (7)

No./Name PGM Mode

Change Entry

!8)

Function

Select

- (1)

LOOP

& TRG

(2)

(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

3)

T f--- -

Function

Call S&Ct

- (1)

LOOP

& TRG

63

(3)

Speed

Dial

(4)

Extension

PDF Panasonic KX T336 System Ref Vol 1

KX-T 336 System Ref Vol 1 6483ya KX-T 336 System Ref Vol 1 6483ya

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation